Om Electrical

.
I PLN (Persero) Pusat

'
INJJ'ifl'ENJINIRING
PLN Doc.No. 1
OPERATION MANUAL
ELECTRICAL
Rev. Dated Description PrejJ'd Chk'd Rev'd A]Jp'd
0 Issue for Review
1 Issue for approval
leg MODERN BOUSTEAD MAXITHERM

CONSORTIUM
Contract No. 454.PJ/041/DIR/2008
\.·
Consultant :
KETIRA ENGINEERING HANDAN SHIDONG /~

CONSULTANT ELECTRIC & CEMENT
TECHNIC CO., LTD HoST
Signature Dated Project: Stage:

Prepared PLTU 2, Papua Preliminary
Checked 2x10MW
Reviewed Jayapura Rev.
Approved Doc.No. MBMC-OM 0
j
PLN (Persero) Pusat
fl[!..[VJ'ENJINIRING
MODERN BOUSTEAD MAXITHERM

CONSORTIUM
Consultant :
KETIRA ENGINEERING HANDAN SIDDONG

CONSULTANT ELECTRIC & CEMENT HOST
TECHNIC CO., LTD
TABLE OF CONTENTS
1. DC S System.
2. Global Satellite Synchroclok.
3. Hollias MACS Software.
4. Hollias MACS.
5. Hollias MACS Crane.
6. Hoist Crane.
7. MACS FM Hardware.
11 PLN (Persero) Pusat
~NJINIRING
fif1'l
PLN Doc.No. J
DCS SYSTEM
OPERATION MANUAL
Rev. Dated Description Prep'd Chk'd Rev'd App'd
0 Issue for Review

··Ill' CONSORTIUM
..... ....
Consultant :

ELECTRIC & CEMENT
/~
CONSULTANT
TECHNIC CO., LTD -:r; ST

Checked 2xlOMW
Approved Doc.No. MBMC-OM-11-01 0
H 0 Lr L Y S Y S Technical Document
Document
Complete Power Distribution Cabinet Diagram
Name:
Document NO: BlO-Pll-004214

Project Name: INDONFSIA~CS Sy~tem
Project Serial
NO: BHE100416
(. Material code:
Edition: A
Document Level
Secret
of Secrecy:
Condition: CFC
Controlled
Controlled
Marking:
Drawing: Lijun Pan 2010-05-18

I
\
Verification: Yunxia, Zhu 2010-05-18
Consultation: Xigong Li
'
Authorization: Liu Zhifeng 2010-05-18
The Document Provides:
HOLLYSYS CO., LTD all rights

reserved \
1st Volume
t
Altogether 1 Volume
~
Altogether 12 pages
B10-P11-004214 Complete Power Distribution Cabinet Diagram A CFC
Revision page
NO. Edition Rev. Information Drawed Date Verification Authorization

Lijun PanI
1 ~ New foundation Yunxia,Zhu Liu Zhifeng
2010-5-18
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
HOLLYSYS CO. , LTD all rights reserved I

-
NO. Chart serial number Name Page Edition Remarks
1 BHE1004164W-KC01-001 Drawing List 1 A
2 BHE1004164W-KC01-002 Design Description 1 A
3 BHE1004164W-KC01-003 Equipment table 1 A
4 BHE1004164W-KC01-004 Layout for Power Distribution Cabinet 2 A
5 BHE1004164W-KC01-005 Layout for the second door 1 A
6 BHE1004164W-KC01-006 Inside Wiring diagram 1 A
7 BHE1004164W-KC01-007 Power distribution drawing 1 A
8 BHE1004164W-KC01-008 Marking table of Circuit Breaker 1 A
9 BHE1004164W-KC01-009 KM1 Schematic Diagram 1 A
TOTAL 10
·•·········· I ...
v-J
r:-,//
.HangZhou HollysysAutomation CO.. LTD INDONESio/f'UPUA)lCS System j Detail Desgi
D~glist
Designer lijun ,Pan 10.05.18
Auditor Yunxia, Zhu 10.05.18
Cauiltersigner Xigong,Li 1nne 1R DWG.NO. I BHE 1DD4164W-KC01-DD1
Approver Zhrreng,Liu 10.05.18 Version 1 A I Sheet 1 Of 1 I B09-Q4-000052
NOTES:
(1 ).This cabinet has no fan in it and a ground connection unit at the bottom of it.
(2).Completes labels under voltmeters,indicator lamp and Circuit Breaker.
(3).Marks the sign on label by using English ..
(4). All the characters shall be in black ink, neat and clear.
They shall be free from any alterations:
(5).Marks the sign on label by using English and Chinese.
.......... . ...
)iHangZhou Hollysys Automation CO .. LTD INDONESIA~P,0A DCS System _j Detail Desgi

Designer Lijun ,Pan 1o o•;, R v
Auditor Yunxia, Zlm 1o 0<<1 R Drawing List
Counte•igner Xigong,Li 1n n< 10 DWG.NO. I BHE1004164W-KC01-002
Approver Zhifeng,Liu ,10 o' 1o Version I A I Sheet 1 Of 1 I B09-Q4-000052
The Main Out-purchased Equipment
NO. MATERIAL CODE Specification And Model Quantity Unit Remarks Complete Time
1 2130304003 FP401-C Power Distribulion Cabinet~ 2175mmx800mmx650mmrHxWxDl 1
2 103001409 AC Contactor,LC1-D40008M5 1
3 308001152 module ,SM934 . 1
4 1050200288 Second Door ' 1
5 1050200236 FC133 1
6
7
8 .
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
'
16
17
.
18
19
The Main Auxiliary Equipment And Materials
NO. NAME S ecification And Model Quantity Unit Remarks 5

1 Circuit Breaker,NB1-63-C50A/2P 2
2 Circuit Breaker,NB1-63-C10A/2P 41
3 Voltmeter,6L2-V/O-AC250V 2
4 Indicator Lamp,AD16-22D/r31 2
5
6
Detail Desgin
HargZhou Hol~sys Automation CO., LTD
Designer lijun ,Pan
Auditor Yunxia. Zhu Equipment table
Countersigner Xigong,Li BHE1 004164W-KC01-003
L.__ Approver Zhifeng,liu Sheet 1 Of 1 B09-Q4-000052
,n,(
I I
I
I
'i.n ~.(
I ~
;,fu I
I '
cJ· I
91
i !
i
I ______,_____
·-·-·--.--~..-311f)._ l
! 76.5X76.5ml
NOTES,
-'-ffi-
t
-~ --T-- ~·
'
·lf1·
I :
88 LABEL, PV1: UPS POWER

9 = PV2: AUXILIARY POWER
PV! I PV2 I
I
' •. ..
'
I KA1-KA9
t •.
'
I
ui ' KB1-KB9 L l
,,'c
c::
D :' -- -···-
KC1-KC14 .,
I
'
I KC15-KC23
'
I . .... .... ....
'
., )
I' Equipments Table
I [: .... .... ....
'
~~o:=c==~
I
==~==
= =
= = ~~
==.::::::=== ~~ 7 module SM934 1

= =,== 6 KM1 AC I r.1. 1
'
I
I 5 KC1-KC23 Circuit I 10A/2P
NB1-63-C10AI2P
23
9 CHNT
4 KB1-KB9 Circuit I
3 KA1-KA9 Circuit I -~~-r.1 OAI2P 9 CHNT
(j___-t-----' KA,KB Circuit I 2 CHNT
PV1 ,PV2 Voltmeter 6L2-V/U-AC:2bUV 2 Delixi
FRONT BEHIND SECOND DOOR Location Name Specification And M
HangZhou Hollysys Automation co., LTD INDONESIA Delail Desgin
liJun ,Pan
Yunxla, Zhu Layout for Power Distribution Cabinet
Xiaonq,Li 1 n nc:: 1n DWG. NO. RI-IF100A.1fi.d.W-Kr.n1-1
Approver I Zhlfeng,Liu___bn_ 0518 I Version I A I Sheet 1 012 I
'
A..,--B
n n ())
~· ((
: ••••••••• 0 •••••••• •••

••• 0 ••
I . §
' ~
I I
I
I
' ••••••••••••••••• 0 ••••••••• 0 ••••
I . -
••. '
Trun~ing(8080) .. _ [ ~: '"=
"""
~
' '
=
~
rruriJ;rliJ(ao6o) =
=
I .... · • >: =
=
=
n
-------
=
=
= ...........
.....................·=
'
.!
S!- --~--- rruri~iiliiiso6oj , :
-·----- --- ··---~----··-·-~'"-~-- _, -
iO
~
=
=
=
=
.a,
~!
'
I '11
!~ =
=
= @
:; ]i!~ ~------ --
Trun1ing(B060)
• .., ________ -·- ••• •• 1_. ••• -------·--.~- .. ·---------
! §i:
'"! ~
~
=
=
=
=
~ (80 )
=
=
•.,1-;i T
runj~g_6~
;1- .•
j f ........... ·= ~
=
• ... 0.
! =
=
i =
=
:i i '• =
=
=
=
l
!
i =
=
!I =
=
=
:; ! :: =
=
=
...J
i I L__j ............. = =
= •••••• 0
~
'
I'
.. ~ ..
.. ...
@
II '
A~
iB I
BACK A-A
J'.IHangZhou Hollysys Automation CO., LTD INDONESIA ~Plh\ DCS System j Detail Desgin
Designer liiun ,Pan <n n«o
Auditor Yunxia. Zhu <n n< <o Layout for Power Distribution Cabinet
Countersigner Xioono.Li <nn<<o DWG.NO. I BHE1 004164W-KC01-004
Approver Zhifeng,liu l1n " " " Version 1 A 1 Sheet 2 012 1 809-04-000052
~---
I i ·------
-------1
d
1
!fi NOTES,
" nj
____ ,..2_Q_5____ !~-------2.1_D_ .... _.. __ ~!
LABEL, HD1 :UPS-POWER
l ---i-------i-0;- l
"l HD2:AUXILIARY POWER
_i J.J5 $1 ~~" d
I
i i ~
-tJ i
I ':j
$
i
CJj!l -~
'
1
I
Label
$0-- ------------
- fllllllllllll!!';lf---1
-~ ------------~
=
~
...J ___,
~
;:d
~
j
I ln•amngplate
The second door
~-~ ~e ' _" lonOge

I I I I I I I I I I I I I I I - ·--·-l' ' t.6;.,_..;.,l2--i
Q
u ;'!'
: . : : ---------------------ii
~
"'
I I I I I II I I I I I I II I
.,
~ ------------~
"' Zil
-~
- __ _j
IIIIIIIIIIIIIII
J
-91 I I I I I I I I I I I I I I J
J--1'._15 ?
f ____3li
:;)
I
j
I
--
__:m
Equipments Table
SECOND DOOR
1 HD1,HD2 Indicator Lamn AD16-22D/r31 2

NO. Location Name Specification And Model Quantity Remarks
I bHangZhouHollysysAulomationCO., LTD INDONESIA~PU1\DCS System JDetail Desgin

'--J
Designer Lijun ,Pan l<o O«O
Auditor Yunxia, Zhu l1n O< <O Layout for the second door
Countersigner Xigong,Li 10 ""'0 DWG.NO. I BHE1 004164W-KC01-005
Approver Zhifeng,Liu 1n n~ 1R Version I A I Sheet 1 Of 1 I B09-Q4-000052
---- --- --- --- - ---------- -
From UPS From AUXILIARY POWER
N2 l2
PV1 PV2
HD1
l1 L2
N1 N2
--- SM934
l
N
'
C6 ---
"l.
l:IHangZhou Hollysys Automation CO., LTD Detail Desgin

Designer Ujun ,Pan
Audior I Yunxia. Zhu l<o n< <0 I mstae VVtrtng a'iagram
Counters~ner I Xiaono,li l1nn~;: 1Q. I DWG.NO. I BHE1004164W-KC01-006
L I Approver I Zhifeng,liu l,o 05 18 I Version I A I Sheet 1 Of 1 I B09-Q4-000052 I
AUXILIARY
UPS-POWER POWER
" L-""'" -~ KB 1 AUXILIARY POWER Cimi< Bco•kec
KA~ , KA~ KA~ KA~ KA~ KA~ KB~ KB~ KB~ KB~ KB~ KB~ KB~
KM1
KC~ KC~ KC~ K, KC~ KC~ KC,
2
J;IHangZhou Hollysys Automation CO.. LTO INDONESIA Detail Desgin
Designer u iun ,Pan
Auditor Power distribution drawing
Countersigner DWG.NO. I BHE1004164W-KC01-D07
Approver Version I A I Sheet 1 Of 1 I B09-Q4-000052
NO. ircui t Breaker Remarks Circuit Breake Remarks ~ircui t Breaker Remarks
1 KA1 10#1/0 CABINET KB1 10#1/0 CABINET KC1 OP50
4 KA4 EXTEND CABINET KB4 : EXTEND CABINET KC4 OP53
5 KA5 SERVER CABINET KB5 SERVER CABINET KC5 OP54
6 KA6 BACKUP KB6 BACKUP KC6 OP55
7 KA7 BACKUP KB7 BACKUP KC7 OP56
8 KA8 BACKUP KB8 BACKUP KC8 BACKUP
9 KA9 BACKUP KB9 BACKUP KC9 BACKUP
10 KA UPS-POWER KB AUXILIARY POWER KC10 BACKUP
11 KC11 BACKUP
12 KC12 BACKUP
13 KC13 BACKUP
14 KC14 BACKUP
15 KC15 BACKUP
16 KC16 BACKUP
17 KC17 BACKUP
18 KC18 BACKUP
19 KC19 BACKUP
20 KC20 BACKUP
21 KC21 BACKUP
22 KC22 BACKUP
23 KC23 BACKUP
24 •
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
I JfHangZhou HollysysAutomation CO., LTD INDONESIA~ DCS System !net

Designer Ujun ,Pan 10.051_8_
Auditor Yunxia, Zhu 1n n" 1A Marking table of Circuit Breaker
Counters~ner Xigong,Li 1nn"'A I
DWG.NO. BHE1004164W-KC01-0DB
Approver Zhifeng,Uu 10.05.18 Version 1 A 1 Sheet 1 Of 1 I B09-Q4-0C
~---~
I®
L1
KAr---,
L1
UPS-POWER
KB
.----, L2
L2
AUXILIARY POWER HD2
N2
L _ _ _ _j
KM1
INDONESIA System
c;;::o "',-_,~ ;~;"

!F~fl!··"'
.~~:J;' qp,jf
..,_ry
'{?:;.
Hollysys Issue Date: 2008-2-21 Type: Engineering and Technology document Version: C No. : B07-P99-000085
Inspection Prqcedure and Report Of DCS Configuration
Project Name !-P~ f',4pc,.{tjj({j I ProjectNo./ it/-Z...fool.f(tyw IProductName+Version .MAC.SV S.2,~fSfl W

Configuration mode: SZ[Local Dremote I Schedule: Site cbmmissioning Date:
~~
Configuration package The final configuration maker: , Date Time: V'/0. ({·30
information File size after compression: Domain No.: 0
Inspection results:
Configuration Inspector
GtUfl\ gPass 0Pass by Recheck
File version fiADB0C0D0E
Items Inspection Criteria (As per corporatiqn regulation) Results Unqualified reason
o The Project Compiles Compiling without error. D?!Oualified 0Unqualified
o The length of tag name no more than 12 char'acters.

rsfaualified DUnqualified
o No blank character (tag name in capital letters in suggested)
o Unused channel for the spare 1/0s (With detailed description)

l)iaualified 0Unqualified
o Spare 1/0 Range: Up and Low, not both 0 for the Analog 1/0s.
o channel with cold compensation:
1. For the 1/0s with RTD compensation :
Set the type of these to RTD(PT100_RTD) ,the range: MU=100,MD=O;
DData Base
2. For the 1/0s with TC compensation :
Configuration
Set the "type" of these into E_TC ,the range: riaualified DUnqualified
FM147: MU=100,MD=O;
FM147A:MU=BOO;MD=O;
For SM Series:
Gain=1, Linear transformations.
o The 1/0s' "SOE" and "Interrupt" set to 1 in the Dl database for the
rn'aualified 0Unqualified
SOE tags in MACSV.
o A tag with name 1system1 and description with XX project as a
project name is required in MACSV system 's database.( No more than ~Qualified 0Unqualified
12 Chinese characters).
m1:m:t~<4:m '(h/
.. " ~- - ~ ---,_, ---- ----------- ...... ------------ -------· - -·-·. --· --- ------
o The domain No. starts at #0, then the next at #1, #2 and so on ... gQualified 0Unqualified
o Each 1/ 0 Station's tag quantity no more than. 5000.

bZf'Qualified 0Unqualified
o Each project' total tag quantity no more than 75000.
o The right bridge resistance's LG of FM143 in MACSV SP2 should be
ISfQualified 0Unqualified
set to 50 and for FM143A to 0. •
o The 1/ 0 Station load trends is available. ! [Q6ualified 0Unqualified
o Module position in system status graphic of H,MI comply with the

btlualified 0Unqualified
cabinet layout drawing
o The quantity of DP nodes in Each 1/0 Station !no more than 72.
The quantity of DP nodes in Each DP Section ~o more than 22 I:Silualified 0Unqualified
including the DPU, If more, DP repeater (FM1291) is required.
o SOE Configuration Rules:
oDevice '
D Each I/OS14 SOE Modules:

Configuration
D The scan time should less than 120ms if there have a small number &Qualified 0Unqualified
of SOE in the 1/0 Station.
Note: please refer to Note 5. •
o MACSV system 1/0 Station No. range 10- 49, maximum config 40
sets o The operator station No. range 50- 79, maximum config 30 sets fdQualified 0Unqualified
I one domain.
•
o The algorithm of 1/0 Server must select the cycle execution page.
o The cycle of load calculation for execution is 2s in MACSVSP1 !Yl'Qualified 0Unqualified
oserver
previous version. :
Configuration
o There should have a tag with Name "FUHEO",' Description "1/0 Server
Load" and Range "0-1 00".
~ualified 0Unqualified
DDPU o The configuration of the physical points in Codesys and HMI

IQ Qualified 0Unqualified
algorithm database is consistent .
configuration o The execution cycle of the standard algorithm s 60ms 'El Qualified 0Unqualified
~ 2 ji'[ *' 4 ji'[ v--_)

L~~,
, ~ . z~~
Hollysys Issue -----
---- Date: -----
2008-2-21
-- Type:
.. Engineering and Technology document Version: C No. : B07-P99-000085
o Network Variable:
D The group Number of the Global network variables is 16 and the
capacity within each group of variables is up to pO analog and 50
binary. 51(Qualified 0Unqualified
®The tags' are only allowed to have "READ" or "WRITE" attribute, not
"READ & WRITE" attribute In a same group and the "time interval"
should set to no more than 1s. '
o MACSV library function blocks should use the applicable part. e.g.
the name of a library with figures is not allowed to use for the Library ISfQualified 0Unqualified
Manager.
o Project design and algorithm checks:
GJ6ualified 0Unqualified
Check the Manual Operators, Sequence Control and PI D.
o The tags in a Graphic of MACSV system no rnore than 1024.
Note: Use the " Statistic Points Name" menu under the "Properties"
@ualified DUnqualified
menu in Graphics Configuration to statistics all the properties of points
'
in current page.
o Graphics for Special Keyboard as P1-P16 should be defined in
oGraphics
MACSV System's Graphics Configuration.
Configuration ~Qualified 0Unqualified
Note: Using "Edit" menu's submenu "shortcut definition" in MACSV
system's Graphics Configuration.
•
o MACSV System must has the main.hsg file. [YfQualified 0Unqualified

oThe buttons that on the HMI Graphics should have the corresponding
~Qualified 0Unqualified
Page link.
o For downloading the 1/0 station the user with Engineer-level should
oEngineer
be available. IVfQualified 0Unqualified
downloading
Note: User Name: aaaa, Password: aaaa.
DOther items ~Qualified 0Unqualified

'
Dex-works
o Average load of each 1/0 station must lower than 30% lifQualified 0Unqualified
test
~ 3 JJl: "' 4 JJl:
vJ
-- - - -- ' '.•.
Unqualified
QC
Jf~~ ~:ro
•
Inspect Conclusion:
Department
Inspector: Date:
'
Inspector
/hlf! Date 2 o ro, 1 (. -:3'0
Approval by QC
Department: ~9-- Date: 2-•f• ./].. I
NOTE: 1, if qualified please mark with"../" before "Qualified" ;if, not mark before "Unqualified".
2, Process the Recheck and Record for the unqualified items
3, Inspectors should carefully verify all the items and fill the detail records.
4, Formula: Data buffer bytes of alii/ 0 Modules *Moaules number.
5, Formula: Scan time of DP bus: TMC=( TSYN + TID1 + TSDR +Header+ I x 11TBit + 0 x 11TBit) x Slaves TMC =Data cycle time account as a
bit of time; TID1 = Master station idle time = Typical 75-bit time; TSDR= delay time of the slave station = Typical 11-bit time; Header= The message header in
the request and response frames = Typical 198-bit time; I =The humber of bytes of Each slave station's input data; 0 = The number of bytes of Each slave
station's output data; Slaves =The slave station numbers; TBit=.2us
6, The test items can be modified for other non-MACSV system I
7, The QC department check the Item D in ex-works test. I
IV~
~
t. cC..e.ck "(,. {{...t..c.L..<Lck fl...e_ "'~ '' Pl,(pu.c." 6--e~ "(1~ "
[),-~ b,c..~ • ~ret~
4
'2-- Gl..ec-k-( r<..e.ci,_e_ck ~ 4 ' • U -~

h.t..c ~ IN'\<
lA A •. • [_..(
J , __ ,
""' ~ Y-f'..e.. II l ~
,,· t
<2--')(-r-.
~-~~
3· t9 1e.-a~ V«-1-- ~ T~a,r-~ ~~~ r~" f'o"
y. P((1...-.J<. p<-<1--- f-ZR-- " ~ ~F ~ .t-.. ¥..e c«..l,. ~-!- .
5'· ~~ ckcM-r ~ ~~ ~ ~~~
t;. ~~ s.~ ~(1<-Qt-~· Pw-~
r- M W'';)r Lv=-- ..rr..._re- ~ ~~

* 4 JJH•' 4 ])'(
.,.
- !fJPS 50}
2010 l2fl1 104254
c 1
---·---:?__ _
'
Combus~icin-'sYsJelit IWate;t-<.tm:_tL Steam J__" uuJ.._J.t;.l.'.-"'u 1 "'-'-"<1.1" -~'='~'"''"J.. -1 ,-- ~"'+-'
'"""'
PLN (Persero) Pusat I!L~\NJINIRJNG
PLNDoc.No.
( GLOBAL SATELLITE
SYNCHROCLOCK
OPERATION MANUAL
Rev. Dated Descri tion Pre 'd Chk'd Rev'd A 'd
0 Issue for Review

CONSORTIUM
I Contract No. 454.PJ/041/DIR/2008
Consultant :
KETIRA ENGINEERING HANDAN SHIDONG

CONSULTANT ELECTRIC & CEMENT HOST
TECHNIC CO., LTD
Si nature Dated Project : Stage:

Checked 2x10MW
Reviewed Ja a ura Rev.
DMP348 Type
Global Satellite Synchroclock
Technical Instruction
Version 1.0
Compiler: Yue Haodong
Check:
Audit:
Approval:
Changsha Huaneng Automatic Control Group

DMP348Type
Global Satellite Synchroclock Technical Instruction
Contents
CHAPTER 1 SUMMARY ••••••••.••••••••••••••••..•....••••.••••••••••••.•••••.•..........••.••••••••••••••••••••••.•.•.••.•................•.••.••.•••••••• l
CHAPTER 2 MAIN FUNCTIONS .....................••.••••••••••.••...........•....••••••••••••••••........................................••.•.•.•••!
CHAPTER 3 MAIN FEATURES ••••••••.•••••...••••••.•••••••••.••.••.•••..•.•......•••••.••••••.•••••••••.••.••••••••.........•...•••.••••.•••••.••••• !
CHAPTER 4 APPLICATION SCOPE •••••••••••••••••.••........•..•••.•••••••••••••••.••.•.•.....•••••.••••••••••••.••.•••.••..••••••••.••••.......2
CHAPTER 5 MAIN TECHNICAL INDEX ..........................................................................................................2
1. WORKING CONDITIONS ...................................................................................................................................2
2. MAIN PERFORMANCE INDEX ......................................................•.••.................................................................2
CHAPTER 6 STRUCTURE OF THE DEVICE..................................................................................................3

1. OVERALL DIMENSION ..............•••••.••••.••.................••.••....•..............•..•.••..••••.............................••..••.••.••.•..........3
2. FRONT PANEL AND FUNCTIONS .................•••••..••................•••..•••••..•...................••..•.••••...•...........•................•.3
3. BACK PANEL AND FUNCTIONS ..........•.•.••..•••...........•...•••••..••••................••••..••••....................................•..••.•.... 3
CHAPTER 7 INSTALLATION DEBUGGING & OPERATING INSTRUCTION ..........................................S

CHAPTER 9 BACKGROUND MONITORING..................................................................................................7
CHAPTER 10 COMMUNICATION PROTOCOL .............................................................................................7
CHAPTER 11 FAILURE RECOVERY ...............................................................................................................8

DMP348Type
Chapter 1 Summary
With its satellite signal receiver of GPS OEM which manufactured by American
professional companies, our 348 series GPS satellite synchroclock is a secondary
developed high-tech product used widely in areas with time transmission and time
correcting like: electric power, civil aviation, railway, traffic dispatching, digital
television and real time communication network system and so on. This product is
referred to the most preferred time setting device with features of high accuracy and
no cumulative error because of the spaceborne atomic clock
The system adopts 12-channel high quality GPS receiver, which equipped with
the ability of tracking 12 satellites in parallel. Once initialization finished, the time
transmission can be realized even if one satellite is locked. Therefore the system has
strong anti-interference ability.
The product design conforms General Technical Conditions of Static Relaying

Protection Device and Security Automatic Equipment and China Electricity Council
Standardization Center Time Synchronism System Technical Code 051222. The
software and hardware of device uses multiple anti-interference measures and
accords with Electromagnetic Compatibility Standard.
Chapter2.Main Functions.
1. Display and output Peking Time, Coordinated Universal Time (UTC) and the
hour, minute, second, calendar year, month, date of any other time zone.
2. Adopt dead contact and TTL level to output pulse per second (1 PPS) pulse
per minute (1 PPM} and pulse per hour (1 PPH) signals realizing high accuracy
synchronous time setting.
3. Receive the longitude and latitude information from satellites and transmit to I
upper computer. 1
' ·~·.·
.
., .
·''
"J
''i
Chapter 3 Main Features
1. All serial ports communication adopt broadcasting mode, which has 232 and
485 communication methods.

t' -(
DMP348Type
2. All interfaces are photoelectrical isolated and equipped with 15KV ESD
protection, at the same time the 600Wanti -ligtning strike and surge resisting
protection are embedded.
3. LED displays the information content and the hour, minute, second. Two red
lamps are used for indicating power supply and synchronization separately. Four
green lamps indicate the operation, pulse per second, pulse per minute, pulse per
hour of satellite sychroclock.
4. Adopt 1U cabinet, which has attractive appearance.
5. Adopt wide range AC or DC power, which suitable for more working fields.
Chapter 4 Application Scope

1. Unify the clock for power network automation equipment, civil aviation, railway,
etc.
2. Time transmission and time correction for broadcasting television system and
real-time communication network system.
Chapter 5 Main Technical Index

1. Working Conditions
.. Power consumption ssw
Ambient temperature: -20°C-+55°C
Relative humidity: 20%-80% (40°C)
Working power: AC185V-260V AC DC220V±15%
2. Main Performance Index

Receiving channel: 12channel in parallel receiving
Clock accuracy S200ns
Satellite capture time: initialization typical value < 50s, recapture time typical
value< 50s.
Antenna radio frequency sensitivity: -166dbw
Accuracy of pulse time correction ,;;1 us, dual-core plain conductor can transmit
30m and the resistance2500, 1.5mm conductor is preferable.
Load of serial port: RS-232 with 2 standard loads, transmission distance < 15m is
preferable.
Changsha Huaneng Automatic Control Group 2

l..=
•HNAi::
= DMP348 Type
Global Satellite Synchroclock Technical ·Instruction
RS-485 with 2 standard loads, the transmission distance can reach 1200m.
Chapter 6 Structure of the Device

1. Overall Dimension
1U19" up-racked cabinet L446mmxH45mmxD240mm
Main circuit board L230mmxW136mm,
COM board L150mmxW50mm,
2. Front Panel and Functions

(
LPPH IPPM IPPS Operate Sync. Power
DMP348
Satellite synchroclock DDDoooooo
·~
.-a
HNAC
Changsha HuaoeogAntornatic Control Group
Figure 1. Schematic diagram of 1U 19 " up-racked cabinet GPS clock front panel
3. Back Panel and Functions
1PPS :l<!i RS232 RS232 RS485 RS485

( oND;,i 1PPM 1PPH 0 oOo oCJo oCJo oQo
AC!Dc 220y 12345678·9101112131415101n8192021222324 TX oom1 com2 com3 com4
GPSMC
Figure 2. Schematic diagram of 1U19" up-racked cabinet GPS clock back panel
COM1/COM2 adopts RS-232 standard output, COM3/COM4 is 485 standard output.

No hot-plug is allowed while in use. .,,

(' •HN:il:
"--==
== DMP348 Type
.,
.,h~.---------~~~
Figure 3. RS-232/ RS-485 Figured diagram of interface pin
a. 1 ~ 8 are PPS (pulse per second) output; 9 ~ 16 are PPM (pulse per
minute) output; 17 ~ 24 are PPH (pulse per hour) output from left to right.
Each two contacts is a pair of output terminals, of which the odd numbers
(' (e.g.: 1, 3, etc.) are E output end, even numbers (e.g.: 2, 4, etc.) are C output
end. Pulse optical isolator output end outputs positive pulse and the rising
edge is synchronized, the pulse width is 100ms. The PPS front edge is
synchronized with zero hour of Peking Time second. External work voltage
between the time setting C , E in the pulse is ranged from 5-24V, the
allowable current ICE <SOMa. The pulse output adopts hardware, which
ensured the time accuracy reaches 500ns. The time setting accuracy of pulse
and serial port assembly can reaches microsecond. The PPM terminal
outputs a pulse per minute. And when pulse comes, the output trioel of
optoelectronic coupler is on state. The PPH terminal outputs a pulse per hour;
the output mode is the same as the PPM. The receiving equipment of time
,,,,,,,,,"SE!tting sho[Jid I:Je E!quiPPE!c:! with PC powerandJhe polarity should,.be,,correcL
GPSIJ1t<f jj!J&ilt4&
----------, r----------
I 1 V+
-t+d:
lc
+wI
- - - - - _ _ _ _ _ _j
IE
I
I
I
ilK_
L __ _::_ ______ _
Figure 4. Pulse dead contact time setting diagram
,j
!
-.:
'
I
1
'~'!

II
iI
I
DMP348Type
Chapter 7 Installation debugging & Operating Instruction

The dimension of GPS cabinet is shown in figure 5.
r-------------~2~------------,
( 1------~------·48~-----------
Figure 5. GPS cabinet diagram
Installation of antenna: GPS receiving antenna is small and easy for installation.
It is a key component which connects with GPSreceiver for satellite synchronization .
The installation of antenna is closely related to GPS clock performance. The antenna
is hardly fixed on top of the building with head upward. The visual sky range is wide to
ensure strong satellite signals received. (See figure 6)
The installation should be far from high power microwave and high-frequency
antenna as possible to decrease the crosstalk of the communication signals. In
thunder district, the eection of antenna should avoid lighting strike prone zone and at
'thesametimethelightnlngprotectiorimeasi.Jres shoukibefaken. The antenna cable
length is designed according to antenna gain. It can not cut or extend, shorten or add
contactor, or it will seriously influence the receiving effect, even can not receive
signals.
I
II
·~.'· j'
I

DMP348 Type
Figure 6. Antenna installation diagram
Installation: The device should be installed in excellent ventilation and dry place,
near to the equipments which clock signals are used. After positioning, the power line,
antenna, communication line and PPS line should be connected according to
requirement. The connections should be fixed and the antenna BNC terminal should
be tightened.
The running debug: After installation, please recheck the connection of cables.
Switch on the power, the LED displays hour, minute, second.
The first starting requires 30-60s initialization to receive satellite signals.VVht;ln
,._ ..
the synchronizing lamp is off and the PPS lamp flickers, it means the initialization is
over and the device is synchronizing with satellite. And now the display and output of
device are in accurate timekeeping state.
Chapter 8 Communication data

The serial port outputs 8 bit data, 1 start bit and 1 stop bit with no check. It is
transmitted in default condition with baud rate of 4800 bps.
The default value of equipment is Peking Time, which is UTC time + 8 hours.

• l.=
HNM
·- DMP348 Type
Chapter 9 Background Monitoring
Figure 7. Background monitoring diagram·

The GPS clock locator can receive the time, longitude and latitude information
transmitted by GPS global satellite synchroclock. (See figure 7)
Chapter 10 Communication Protocol
a. Communication baud rate: 4800

b. PE1t<JJormat 8 .data. bit, J startbit, lstop bit,. no. check,.ASCII.co.de
c. Information format: it is transmitted per second with format of:
EB 90 HD LD HM LM HY LYHH LH HM LM HS LSdd dd mm mm 2Emm
.., .., :r: :r: ;;: ;;: (f) (f) 0 0 ;;: ;;: ~ ~ rw rw r r
w
0 r
w w
OJ OJ 0 c :;· :;· !!l. !!l.
"' "'3'e!. ""
0 CD (!)
0 0
3(!) 3(!) c, , c c
()
0
()
0
"< "< :::1
~
:::1 ,w w
, "'c.c "'c.c
~ ~
~ ~
c
0
c '·-:,.
.·1··.·.·,:'.
a; a; :::1
c. c.
:::1 :::T S' c. c. c.
:::T
(!)
:::T
CD
CD CD (!) (!)
"C
(!) '~
0 !t;
w
c.
w
c. a "
mmmmmmla dd dd dd mmmm 2E mm mm mm mm Lo II DOFF
r r r r r r r r r 0 r r r r r m 0 m
w !!l. !!l. e!. 0 0 0 ::r
0 0 0
"' :::10 0 0 0
~ :::1
"' "" e= e: "e: "' c.
:::1 :::1 :::1 :::1 :::1 0 :::1 :::1 :::1
~
c c co co co co co 3' cg co co co (Q
@. 0
c. c. c. c. ~ "'
"'z ""c.c 2 "" ""c.c
c .e!. c ""c.c ""c.c 2 c. < 0
"'m "'c. "'c.

CD (!) (!)
c. c. c. "C c. c. 0
0
(i; CD (!) CD CD CD 0 CD C1> CD CD 0
a ~ "'
Changsha Huaneng Automatic Control Group 7 . J

,·
I'"I
j;
.
DMP348Type
For example:
It is now 07:53:41 on June 201h, 19996, north latitude 30°37.4459', east longitude
104 °02.3462'. The information format is:
EB 90 30 37 35 33 34 31 32 30 30 36 39 39 33 30 33 37 2E 34 34
35 39 4E 31 30 34 30 32 2E 33 34 36 32 45 56 62 FF
Note:
1. Efficiency denotes whether the output time is the synchronizing time. If it is A, it
means the device is synchronized, the output time is effective. V means the device is
asynchronous, the time output is ineffective.
2. Check code is the XOR checksum of coded after frame head.
Chapter 11 Failure Recovery ··~
1. Switch on the power, the LED has no display. Please check the power, power
line, power socket and the protective tube.
2. When serial port has no information output, please check the communication
line pin, the connection of interface and device, the setting of background
communication format and baud rate setting.
3. If is outer-sync for a long time, please check the antenna installation, the
connection of antenna interface and device, the feed line, etc.
If it still does not work after the above items have been checked, please contact
with the producer.
Due totbe c;()ntinu()ll~ impmvement :;md complement of.product, .the. device
offered maybe a little different with this instruction. Please refer to the attached ..;;.
instruction book.

DMP348Type
;J'.;a
'i
-<lt
~
Tel: +86 731 8686888

Fax: +86 731 8907777
E-mail: cshnaclt@126.com

PLN (Persero) Pusat
~INIRING
IJtL1lj
PLNDoc.No.
I
HOLLIAS MACS SOFTWARE

OPERATION MANUAL
0 Issue for Review
I Issue for approval
lc; MODERN BOUSTEAD MAXITHERM

CONSORTIUM
Contract No. 454.PJ/041/DIR/2008 ••••
"='""
I
Consultant :
KETIRA ENGINEERING HANDAN SHIDONG

ELECTRIC & CEMENT
/~
CONSULTANT
w:.
TECHNIC CO., LTD HOST
Sign_ature Dated Project: Stage:

Checked 2xlOMW
HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
. '
Copyright Statement
All contents of this manual, including text, charts, symbols, markings, trademarks, product models,
software programs, page layout design and etc, are under protection of "Copyright Law of the
People's Republic of China", "Trademark Law of the People's Republic of China", "Patent Law of
the People's Republic of China" and laws of applicable international conventions regarding
copyright, trademark right, patent right or other property ownership, and are owned or possessed
exclusively by Beijing HollySys Co., Ltd. and Hangzhou HollySys Automation Co., Ltd.
This manual is provided only for commercial users to read and query, without special authorization
of HollySys Company, regardless of whatever reasons and purposes, it is not allowed to copy and
transfer .contents of this manual in any forms by any electronic or mechanical methods. Otherwise
our company will investigate legal liability in accordance with law.
Contents and charts of this manual have been checked and are in compliance with hardware
devices mentioned, but it is impossible to avoid errors, and no guarantee is made as to complete
consistency. Meanwhile, contents and charts of this manual are subject to inspection, modification
and maintenance by HollySys Company without further notice.
1993-2008 Copyright HollySys
Type face and logo of HOLUAS MAcsrM. HollySys®, ',fn;fua>J®, rA ·~-~·I ~ HDIIVSVS
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Beijing HollySys Co., Ltd. and Hangzhou HollySys
···Automation-Co,;Ltd,
Microsoft®, Windows® and WindowsNT® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft

Company in United States of America and/or its affiliates in other countries.
Other trademarks or registered trademarks referred to in this manual belong to their respective
owners.
Introduction
Symbol icon:
Use the following identification to indicate corresponding information in the manual:
••
•
Tip:
Help the user in-depth understanding of the technical aspects of the system .
Note:
• Pay attention to the use of system-related behavior or safety problems .
\_.
Prohibitory:
• Restrictions operation of system or pay attention to safety problems .
Version:
Release version: V5.0
Software version: MACS V5.X.X
For staff:
The one who uses the software
The manual provided the following information:
Software installation and instruction manual
Goal of this manual:
Learn how to install and uninstall the software, know the algorithm, graph configuration, server
process and operation maintenance requirements
II
HOLLiAS MAGS Software User Manual
Table of Contents
HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual ....................................................... i"li~! *:.<EX~~o
1 Brief Introduction of System Network Architecture .................................................................. 1
1.1 Standard Network Architecture ................................................................................,....... 1
1.1.1 Server Configuration Requirement in Standard Network Architecture .................. 1
1.1.2 Server Network Setting in Standard Network Architecture .................................... 1
1.2 Simplified Network Architecture ......................................................................................3
1.2.1 Simplified Network Architecture ·····················:······················································3
1.2.2 Server Configuration Requirement in Simplified Network Architecture ............ :... .4
1.2.3 Server Network Setting in Simplified Network Architecture ................................... 4
2 HOLLiAS MAGS Software Installation .....................................................................................6
2.1 Steps of Software Installation .......................................................... ;............................... 6
2.2 Contents of Software Installation .................................................................................. 16
I
3 Cancel Installation ................................................................................................................. 18
4 Software Un-installation ...................................................................................:..................... 19
4.1 Uninstall in Control Panel .............................................................................................. 19
4.2 Uninstall Using Setup.exe ............................................................................................. 19
4.3 Notes When Installation and Un-installation .................................................................. 22
5 Configuration Overview .........................................................................................................23
5.1 Outline introduction .......................................................................................................23
5.2 Application system configuration ...................................................................................24
5.2.1 Initial preparation work ..................., ......................... ,.......................................... 25
5.2.2 Establishment of target project ........................................................................... 25
5.2.3 System setup configuration .................................................................................25
5.2.4 Database configuration .......................................................................................25
5.2.5 Contr(lll.er ?lgoritiJm c:;()nfigur<ltiQn ••..•...•.•.·.········································ .....................26. .
5.2.6 Graph configuration ............................................................................................26
5.2.7 Report configuration ...........................................................................................26
5.2.8 Compilation and generation ................................................................................26
5.2.9 Engineer station download ..................................................................................26
5.3 General steps of configuration ..................................................... ~ ................................ 27
6 General Control Software of Database .....................................................:............................ 28
6.1 Outline introduction .................................................................................................:..... 28
6.2 Access to database general control ..............................................................................28
6.3 ProjecL ..................................................., .................................................................... 29
6.4 Database edit ................................................................................................................32
6.4.1 Outline introduction .............................................................................................32
6.4.2 Access database edit system .............................................................................33
6.4.3 Data operation ....................................................................................................34
7 System Setup ........................................................................................................................55
7.1 Outline introduction ......................................................................................................;55
7.2 Access system setup configuration ...............................................................................56
7.3 System device configuration ............ ,............................................................................58
7.3.1 System device configuration wizard .................................................................... 58
1
• \-. i1 ":.)
I'Jiil """"""' HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
7.3.2 Add node manually .............................................................................................62
7.3.3 Device property ........................................................ ;.......................................... 64
7.3.4 Compilation, saving, close and quit of system device configuration ................... 66
7.4 1/0 device configuration .................................................................,.............................. 66
7.4.1 Add 1/0 device ....................................................................................................67
7.4.2 1/0 device right-click menu ..................................................................................69
7.4.3 Compilation, saving, close and quit of 1/0 device configuration .......................... 71
8 Controller algorithm ...............................................................................................................72
8.1 Outline introduction ......................................................................................................•72
8.2 Access controller algorithm configuration ..................................................................... 72
8.3 Project objects that have been generated automatically ............................................... 75
8.3.1 Hardware configuration .......................................................................................75
8.3.2 Task configuration ...............................................................................................76
8.3.3 1/0 Database definition .......................................................................................77
8.3.4 Get system load of controller and runtime state of the 1/0 modules ................... 78
8.4 Constants and variables ...............................................................................................79
8.4.1 Constants ............................................................................................................79
8.4.2 Variables .............................................................................................................82
8.4.3 Database points ..................................................................................................86
8.5 POU ..............................................................................................................................86
8.5.1 Outline introduction .............................................................................................86
8.5.2 Types of POU .....................................................................................................87
8.5.3 Languages ..........................................................................................................89
8.6 Start the POU .............................................................................................................. 116
8.6.1 Task configuration ............................................................................................. 116
8.6.2 Main program .................................................................................................... 118
8.7 Library manager .......................................................................................................... 118
8. 7.1 Outline introduction ........................................................................................... 118
8. 7.2 Open library manager ....................................................................................... 118
8. 7.3 "Additional Library" and "Remove Library'' ........................................................ 119
8.8 Examples of writing PO Us .......................................................................................... 120
8.8.1 Four arithmetic operation example (CFC) ......................................................... 120
8.8.2 Timer delay operation example (LD) ................................................................. 125
8.9 Build ............................................................................................................................ 130
8.10 Download the controller ............................................................................................130
8.10.1 Outline introduction ......................................................................................... 130
8.10.2 Communication parameters ............................................................................ 130
8.10.3 Login ...........................................................................................:................... 132
8.11 Test .................................................................................................................,......... 133
9 Graph configuration ............................................................................................................. 137
9.1 Outline introduction ..................................................................................................... 137
9.2 Access graph configuration ..............._.......................................................................... 137
9.3 Operation instruction ...................................................................................................140
9.3.1 Page file ............................................................................................................ 140
9.3.2 Edit command ................................................................................................... 147
9.3.3 Draw tools .............•........................................................................................... 149
2
HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
9.3.4 Filling toolbar .................................................................................................... 155
9.3.5 Edit toolbar........................................................................................................ 155
9.3.6 Page property ................................................................................................... 157
9.3.7 User custom symbols ....................................................................................... 159
9.3.8 Dynamic features .............................................................................................. 160
9.3.9 Trigger features .................................................................................................172
9.3.10 "Standard Algorithm Block Symbol" in user graph library ................................ 181
9.3.11
Simulating display ........................................................................................... 182
10 Report Configuration ............................ :.............................................................................. 184
10.1 Outline introduction ................................................................................................... 184
10.2 Access report generation system .............................................................................. 184
10.3 Operation instruction ................................................................................................. 186
10.3.1 "Report" tool .................................................................................................... 186
10.3.2 "Point" tool ...................................................................................................... 186
10.3.3 "Compile" tool ................................................................................................. 189
10.3.4 "Exit" tool ......................................................................................................... 189
11 Download Tool ...........................................................................................................,......... 190
11.1 Outline introduction ...................................................................................................190
11.2 Access engineer download software ......................................................................... 190
11.3 Download server ....................................................................................................... 192
11.4 Download operator station ........................................................................................ 193
12 HOLLiAS MACS Download of Server .................................................................................. 195
12.1 Generate Download Files ......................................................................................... 195
12.2 Download of Server ................................................................................................., 195
13 HOLLiAS MACS Server Software........................................................................................ 199
13.1 Start HOLLiAS MACS Server Software ..................................................................... 199
13.2 HOLLiAS MACS Server Process Management ........................................................ 200
13.2.1 Start Server Process ................................................ :...................................... 200.................. -· . ...... -·i
13.2.2 Server Process Management ........•:....................................................... ,....... 201
13.3 Initialization Process "MACSinit.exe" ........................................................................ 203
13.4 New Task Diagnosis Process "NewTaskDiag.exe" .................................................... 204
13.5 Real Network Management Process "Rea1Net.exe" .................................................. 205
13.6 Post Trip Process "Posttrip.exe"................................................................................ 208
13.7 History Database Process "NewHDBServer.exe" ..................................................... 209
13.8 Network Variable Exchange Process "NetvarExchange.exe" ................................... 211
13.9 System Watch Process "Syswatch.exe" .................................................................... 214
13.10 Network Management Process "SNet_Svr.exe" ...................................................... 214
13.11 System Network Communication Management Process "GatewayWatch.exe" ..... , 215
13.12 Other Processes .....................................................................................................217
13.12.1 New Double Server Diagnose "NewDsvrDiagnose.exe" ............................... 217
13.12.2 Real-time Database Management Process "RTDBManage.exe" .................. 218
13.12.3 Transmit Event Message Process "TransmitEventMsg.exe" ......................... 218
13.12.4 Event Process "EventProcess.exe" .............................................................. 218
13.12.5 Server Standard Calculation Process "ServerStandardCacl.exe" ... :............. 218
13.12.6 Node Diagnose Process "NodeDiagnose.exe" ............................................. 218
13.12.7 Check Time Process "Checkllme.exe" ...............................................:......... 218
3
Wf\.1·1 ~
IJIII """'"" HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
14 Engineering Application about Server Settings ....................................................................219
14.1 Modification and Settings ..........................................................................................219
14.1.1 Modify History Database Path ........................................................................ 219
14.1.2 Modify History Database Protective Capacity ................................................. 220
14.1.3 Modify Server Node No. and Port No .................................;........................... 222
14.1.4 Settings of Network Variables among Domains .............................................. 222
14.2 Server Check Time ...................................................................................................226
14.3 Backup ......................................................................................................................226
14.4 Frequently Asked Questions and Answers about Server .......................................... 227
14.5 Cautions when Using Server .....................................................................................229
4
HOLUAS MAGS Software User Manual
1 Brief Introduction of System Network

Architecture
The system network architecture of HOLLiAS MACS can be classified into standard network
architecture and simplified network architecture. In this chapter the two network architectures and
their different server configuration and network settings will be introduced.
1.1 Standard Network Architecture
Standard network architecture includes monitor network .(MNET), system network (SNET) and
control network (CNET), suitable for mutual surveillance and operation of multi-domains, such as
large-scale and middle-scale systems, or multiple projects, or among units and common system.
Wherein the large-scale system is the one which includes more than 3000 1/0 points and more
than 7 1/0 control stations; Middle-scale system is the one which includes about 2000-2800 1/0
points and 5-7 1/0 control stations.
1.1.1 Server Configuration Requirement in Standard

Network Architecture
4 network switches and 2 servers must be configured in standard network architecture. The server
can be special server or the operator station can be doubled as server, engineer station
simultaneously.
1.1.2 Server Network Setting in Standard Network

Architecture
In standard network architecture 4 Ethernet adapters are configured for the server, wherein 2 are
used to connect monitor network (MNET) and the other 2 are used to connect system network
(SNET). The network setting is shown in table 1.1-1.
lia bl e 1 1-1 Server network settmq .1n 3-avers
I Ia ndard network arch·t1 ect ure
Monitor network (MNET) System network (SNET)
MNETA MNETB SNETA SNETB
Server A "TCP/IP" "TCP/IP" "HSIE Protocol", no "HSIE Protocol", no
/OPS /ENS protocol protocol address I "TCP/IP" address I "TCP/IP"
130.0.0.1 131.0.0.1 protocol 128.0.0.X (X protocol 129.0.0.X(X
stands for actual IP stands for actual IP
address) address)
Server 8 "TCP/IP" "TCP/IP" "HSIE Protocol", no "HSIE Protocol'', no
/OPS protocol protocol address address
130.0.0.2 131.0.0.2
1
1. Monitor network (MNET} adapter setting
For monitor network (MNET) select "TCPIIP"' only, the IP addresses of two servers are configured
as 130.0.0.1, 131.0.0.1 and 130.0.0.2, 131.0.0.2, shown in figure 1.1"1:
Figure 1.1-1 Monitor network (MNET) properties
Q Note:
• All adapters which are integrated on computer's main-board, the IP address should be set to
130 network segment! (unless the specific statement)
• During device configuration, the IP addresses of the two operator stations doubled as servers
simultaneously are set as 130.0.0.1/131.0.0.1, 130.0.0.2/131.0.0.2, not the default setting
130.0.0.50/51 .
.. 2•...$Ysternnetwork{SNET).adapter.setting.
On the operating system desktop of server, select "My Network Places", right click on it,
select "Properties", and then click "General" option. For system network (SNET), if the server is
not doubled as engineer station, select "HSIE Protocol" only without configuring address, shown in
figure1.1-2; If the server is doubled as engineer, select both "HSIE Protocol" and 'TCP/IP" protocol,
shown in figure1.1-3 and set the IP address as 128.0.0.X/129.0.0.X (X stands for the actual IP
address). ·
2
Figure 1.1-3 System network (SNET) properties (doubled as engineer station)
1.2 Simplified Network Architecture
Simplified network architecture includes monitor network (MNET) /system network (SNET) and
control. network (CNET), wherein monitor network (MNET) and system network (SNET) are
combined together. This is suitable for small-size system which doesn't need mutual surveillance
and operation between several projects namely several domains. Small-size system is the one
which includes less than 2000 1/0 points and no more than 5 1/0 control stations.
1.2.1 Simplified Network Architecture
Simplified network architecture is shown in figure1.2-1.
3
SO#Ol'S 51#01'$
SERVER! SERVER2 ENS CMS
1 1 r--------------- -----
I
··-,
~1
•I
1 l I l
MNETI. SNET
MNETB(l31)
Figure 1.2-1 Simplified network architecture
1.2.2 Server Configuration Requirement in Simplified

2 network switches and 2 servers should be configured in simplified network architecture. The 2
servers aren't special servers but the operator station is doubled as server, engineer station
simultaneously.
_ 1,2,3 . Server Network Setting in Simplified Network

Architecture
In simplified network architecture 2 Ethernet adapters are configured for the server with the names
SNETA, SNETB. The network setting is shown in table 1.2-1.
Table 1.2-1Server network settina in simnlified network architecture
Monitor network (MNET) /system network (SNET)
MNET AI SNETA MNET B/ SNETB
Server A /OPS "TCP/IP" protocol130.0.0.1 /"HSIE "TCP/IP" protocol 131.0.0.1/"HSIE
/ENS Protocol, no address /"TCP/IP" Protocol", no address /"TCP/IP"
protocol binding 128.0.0.X (X stands protocol binding 128.0.0.X (X stands
for the actuaiiP address) for the actuaiiP address)
Server B /OPS "TCP/IP" protocoi130.0.0.2/"HSIE "TCP/IP" protocoi131.0.0.2/"HSIE
Protocol", no address Protocol", no address
select "Properties", and then click "General" option. Select both "HSIE Protocol" and "TCP/IP"
simultaneously, shown in figure 1.2-2 and set the IP address of the computers doubled as servers
4
as 130.0.0.1/131.0.0.1, 130.0.0.2/131.0.0.2:
Figure 1.2-2 MNETA properties
0 Note:
• During device configuration, the IP addresses of the two operator stations doubled as servers
simultaneously are set as 130.0.0.1/131.0.0.1, 130.0.0.2/131.0.0.2, not the default setting
130.0.0.50/51.
If the operator station is doubled as both server and engineer station, then the computer doubled
as engineer station should bind IP address. For example if server A is doubled as engineer station,
then bind IP addresses 128.0.0.50/129.0.0.50 on adapter 130.0.0.1/131.0.0.1, shown in figure
1.2-3:
Figure 1.2-3 Internet protocol properties
This specification is taken as guidelines for computer system installation and it's suitable for
5
installing MACSV5.2.3 software on computers used in field.
2 HOLLiAS MACS Software Installation
2.1 Steps of Software Installation
I Insert MACSV 5.2.3 installation disk into CD driver, double click "setup.exe" in "Install"
folder, "Select Setup Language" dialog box pops up and two languages "English (America)"
and "Chinese (Simplified)" are provided. Here "English (America)" is selected.
2 Click "OK" button in "Select Setup Language" dialog box and enter "lnstaiiShield Wizard"
window to preparefor .
I
3 After "Checking Operating System Version", "Configuring Windows Installer", "Preparing
to Install" are finished, HOLLiAS MACS "lnstaiiShield Wiard" window pops up to install
software, shown in figure2-2:
I .
i
i
6
"W~;;;:;;:; ;;n torl'oco
4 Click "Next" in "Welcome" interface and enter "Customer Information" interface, Fill
in"User Name" and "Company Name", shown in figure 2-3:
' .
Figure
Click "Next" in "Customer Information" interface and enter "Choose Destination Location"
interface, shown in figure 2-4:
7
\
~~~~~ Dc>stinat.ior Lo<oatiion""~l~~~~~~~

Click "Browse" button to select another folder for storage and the default installation directory
is <D:\ MACSV\>. It's suggested to use the default directory.
5 Click "Next" in "Choose Destination Location" interface and enter "Setup Type" interface,
2-5:
Three types "Typical", "Compact" and "Custom" are provided and user can choose different setup
type according to different requirements.
+ Typical: Install engineer station program (MACSV_ENG), operator station program
(MACSV_ OPS) and server program (MACSV_SERVER).
+ Compact: Install operator program (MACSV_OPS).
+ Custom: Users select what to install.
8
The optional components are as follows:
l> Engineer station program (MACSV_ENG)
l> Operator station program (MACSV_ OPS)
l> Server program (MACSV_SERVER)
l> Communication program (OPCCiient)
When "Custom" is selected, ensure that the computer playing different roles must be installed with
the corresponding components, or else it can't work normally.
6 Take "Typical" for an example, choose "Typical" in "Setup Type" interface and then
click "Next" to enter "Choose Destination Location" interface, shown in figure 2-6:
i teriace
;n;
Click "Browse" button to choose the storage directory for server software and the default directory
is <D:I MACSVIMACSV_SERVER\>. It's recommended to use the default directory.
7 Click "Next" in "Choose Destination Location" interface and enter "Please Select Node A
orB" interface and select Node A orB according to the projects, shown in figure 2-7:
9
:'i
I
I
1.,
Figure 2-7 "Please Select Node A orB" interface

8 Click "Next" in "Please Select Node A or B" interface and enter "Select Check Time type"
interface and select accordi to the shown in 1 2-8:
type" interface
After selecting "Use GPS" or FM 197" click "Next" and "Select port umber" interface pops
up, shown in figure 2-9 and then make a right choice according to different projects. If "Use
software" is selected, the "Select port umber'' interface doesn't appear.
10
• • Tip:
• Only when "Use GPS" or "Use FM197" is selected does the interface appear. Make a right
choice according to different projects.
Click "Next" in "Select port number"' interface and enter "Review settings before copying
ntc•rt"ro shown in i 2-10:
~~~"!~~'f~~~i:::,~~;!~~~copying files":in~t~erf:a:c:e:::::
10 Click "Next" in "Review settings before copying files" interface and enter "Setup Status"
interface to start to install, shown in figure 2-11:
11
12 Click "OK" in window "RE~gE>vr:l2" and pop-up SOL software installation interface, shown
in figure 2-13:
12
go~
ISYBASE
SOL Anywhere·
©Copyright 1984, 1997 by Sybase, Inc. All rights reseiVed.
Figure 2-13 SQL software installation Interface 1

Click "OK" to continue installation and pop-up the following window, shown in figure 2-14:
Figure 2-14 SQL software installation interface 2
13
User Manual
Figure 2-16 SQL software "iiiSiaiiatioiii,ii;;;f,;i;;;

13 Click "OK" to continue installation and pop-up the following window, shown in figure 2-17:
Copying Files ...

! c:\sqlany50\win32\isql.exe
\.
Figure 2-171nstallation progress Window

14 Continue to install and pop-up the following dialog box, shown in figure 2-18:
14
15
i I II
Click "OK" in "Installation Completed" window and pop up the"RegSvr32" window, shown in
figure 2-20:
15
Figure 2-22 "RegSvr32" window
17 Click "OK" in "RegSvr32" window and "lnstaiiShield Wiard Complete" Window pops up,
2.2 Contents of Software Installation
After software installation is completed ("Typical" installation), generate shortcut menu in [Start]\
[All Programs]\ [MACS] to enter engineer station configuration, operator station operation and
server operation, shown in figure2-24, 2-25, 2-26.
16
HOLLiAS MAGS Software
Figure 2-25 Operator station program menu
Figure 2-26 Server program menu
Wherein, engineer station path is "D: \MACSV\MACSV ENG\", including the following
subdirectories:
~ CodeSys: controller algorithm configuration software, configure controller algorithm and
download it to controller;
~ Ctrledit: control table edit software, control table edit window in projects;
~ Datas: store basic document of controller algorithm;
~ Dbedit: database edit software, database edit window in projects;
~ Dbenv: gE)neralcontrol of database software, new, edit and compile of projects;
~ ... ,[?2§:,!?t()J:ELS.\lM~L'!I9Qfitt1mfilll§; ....•..
~ Dev: device configuration software to complete hardware configuration;
~ Ens: engineer station download software, download of operator station and download of
server;
~ FCSEditor: FCS algorithm configuration software, open controller algorithm in CodeSys;
~ Graph: graph configuration software to edit flow graph;
~ QueryNew: offline query software to query offline log and trends;
~ Report: report configuration software to complete report configuration;
~ TerminaiCAD: store terminal wiring diagram CAD;
~ User: store project files.
Operator station path is "D: \MACSV\MACSV_OPS\", including the following subdirectories:

~ Config: store configuration file of operator station, including parameter group, trends,
report print and so on;
~ · files: store project file of operator station operation;
~ start: store project file of operator station operation.
Server path is "D: \MACSV\MACSV_SERVER\", including the following subdirectories:

~ files: store project file of server operation;
~ HISTDATA: store historical database file;
~ readback: store readback data file;
~ start: store project file of server operation.
17
3 Cancel Installation
During the software installation, if you want to quit the setup program, click "Cancel" button in
each the following "Exit Setup" dialog box up, shown in figure3-1:
and exit the installation.
18
4 Software Un-installation
4.1 Uninstall in Control Panel
Open control panel and click "Uninstaii/Change" button to uninstall a program, shown in figure4-1:
4.2 Uninstall Using Setup.exe
Un-installation steps:
4.2.1 Insert MACSV 5.2.1 installation disk into CD driver, double click "setup.exe" in "install" folder,
same with the first and second steps of software installation. After "Preparing to install" is finished,
the TOII.OV:Jing
Figure i
As in figure 4-2, there are three options "Modify'', "Repair'' "R•emn!J.e" and their meanings are:
19
~\:.~log
,.. ""'"'".. HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
);>Modify: enter "Custom" interface, select new program features to add or select currently
installed features to remove.
l> Repair: reinstall all program features installed by the previous setup.
);> Remove: remove all installed features.
4.2.2 Select "Remove" option and click "Next" button and "Confirm Uninstall' window pops up,
shown in ~~~~~~
Figure 4-4 Uninstall progress

4.2.4 When remove is finished, "Maintenance Complete" dialog box appears, shown in figure 4-5:
20
i I
4.2.5 Click in "Maintenance Complete" dialog box, the following "Uninstall
appe~3rs. Click "Finish" to restart the
• Tip:
• When un-installation is completed, only delete the corresponding registration information and
executive files, however the relevant historical data, download files, logs, graphs and project
21
file of user configuration are still stored in the relevant directory. When re-install the system
software, these data will not be lost.
• To completely delete all the files, it's necessary to delete the relevant files in installation
directorv manuallY.
4.3 Notes When Installation and Un-installation
When installation and un-installation pay attention to:

J;> Uninstall the old version before installing new version;
J;> If some error tips appear during installation, exit the program and reboot the computer
and install again;
J;> If there are the patch programs, please refer to the related installation manual;
J;> Before un-installation ensure to exit the online operation service and programs.
• Tip:
directory manually.
22
5 Configuration Overview
5.1 Outline introduction
ERP
ENS OPS OPS
SERVER
\.
SM Hardware
3rd DP Device
FMFCS SMFCS FCS FCS FCS
DPIPA Convertor
Domain 0 Domain 1
Composition of MACSV system:
~ Network
~ Engineer station (ENS)
~ Operator station (OPS)
~ Server (SERVER)
~ Field control station (FCS)
The network includes three tiers namely monitor network (MNET), system network (SNET) and
control network (CNET), monitor network realizes interconnection between engineer station,
operator station, communication station and system server, system network realizes
interconnection between field control station and system server, control network realizes
communication between main control unit and process 1/0 unit.
A large scale system can consist of multiple groups of servers, therefore system is divided into
multiple domains, and each domain consists of independent server, system network and several
field control stations, which complete relatively independent collection and control function. Data
within domain are configured and managed independently. Monitor network and engineer station
can be shared between domains. Operator station can login different domains. Data between
domains can be referenced mutually (i.e. inter-domain reference) through monitor network.
23
= l/0
=
uo
= =
IO#FCS II#FCS
Figure 5.1-2 MACSV simplified system standard structure drawing
Note: the system adopts multiple redundant structures (network redundancy, controller
redundancy, power supply module redundancy and 1/0 module redundancy) ..
MACSV system functions:
)> Control arithmetic

)> Device and status monitor
)> Alarm monitor
)> Remote communication
)> Real-time data processing and display
)> Historical data management
)> Journallog
)> Sequence of events (SOE)
)> Emergency review
)> Graph display
)> Control modulation
)> Report print
)> Configuration, debugging, print, downloading and diagnose
5.2 Application system configuration
MACSV system provides user with a general purpose system configuration and control platform,
application system is generated through configuration, i.e. modular functional units provided by the
general purpose system are combined together according to certain logic, so as to form an
application system which can complete special requirements, such as generation of database of
24
-~>.;.g
JJIII••uvsvs HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
application system, control arithmetic program, historical database, monitor flow chart and various
kinds of production management reports.
5.2.11nitial preparation work
Initial preparation work refers to that before accessing system configuration, it is necessary to
determine measuring points list, control arithmetic scheme, system hardware setup (including
system scale, setup of 10 unit of each station, distribution of measuring point and etc), and
propose design requirements on flow chart, report, historical database and etc.
5.2.2Establishment of target project
Before formal configuration of application system, it is essential to define a project name regarding
the application system, after establishing the target project, data catalogue of the project is
therefore established.
5.2.3System setup configuration
Hardware setup of application project is defined in new project. Task of system device
configuration is to complete hardware setup of network devices of system network and monitor
network; 1/0 device configuration is to complete 1/0 unit setup of each station in unit of field control
station.
5.2.4Database configuration
Database configuration is to define and edit point information of system stations, and this is the
foundation to form the whole application system.
There are two categories of points in MACSV system, one category is of actual physical
·················· ············ ····· ·measUring pbintS;Wnlcn'exlsflrt'flelo control'statioh'ana commUnicatioWstatibn;'poinfif'inclilolf'' .,, i
!
information such· as measuring poinftype, physical address, signal processing, display· method "!
and etc; the other category is intermediate measuring point, in comparison with actual physical
measuring point, the only difference is that it has no information related to physical position, and
can be used in control algorithm configuration and graph configuration.
Database configuration edit function includes two parts namely class structure edit and data
operation.
Class structure edit
In order to embody flexibility of database configuration, database configuration software allows

configuration of database structure, including adding of custom structure (corresponding to table in
database), adding of data item (corresponding to field in database), deletion of structure and
deletion of item operation. But no matter for whatever type of operations, no data in database
should be damaged, i.e. integrity of data should be maintained. After modifying table structure, it is
allowed to reconstruct user interface dynamically without modification of source program,
commonality of database configuration program has been enhanced.
Note: This item of function is provided for application developers.
Data operation
25
kf{.l·l~
M """"""" HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
A measure for editing data in database is provided to engineering technician. In order to enhance
flexibility, independent configuration by multiple persons is allowed, multiple data files are merged
into one database, and functions such as data modification, search, printing and etc are available.
Note: After implementation of compilation command in general control in database, physical

. points access controller algorithm project automatically from each database, intermediate
measuring points of controller algorithm access relevant database automatically.
5.2.5 Controller algorithm configuration
After completion of database configuration, it is possible to proceed with control algorithm

configuration, controller algorithm configuration tools are used to compile controller algorithm
program and download controller.
Variable definition
~ Function block instance

~ Local variable in scheme page
~ Global variable
Compilation of control arithmetic program
MACSV system provides 6 types of language tools: FBD, LD, ST, SFC, IL and CFC, in which the
firstS types are in compliance with internationaiiEC61131-3 Standard.
See details in Chapter 4 "Controller Algorithm" of this manual.
5.2.6Graph configuration
Graph configuration is used to plot technique flowcharts, including plotting of static background
and adding of dynamic objects, correlation between dynamic object and database tag.
5.2. 7Report configuration
Report configuration is used to formulate report to embody site technique data, including
formulation of table appearance and dynamic point definition.
5.2.8Compilation and generation
After database general control compilation, the system forms download file.
5.2.9Engineer station download
After completion of generation of download file, relevant contents are downloaded to servers and
operator stations.
Note: Controller algorithm configuration is downloaded to field control station, and is conducted in
controller algorithm configuration tools.
26
-~i·!-a.
I!Yi •.,,,.... HOLLiAS MAGS Software User Manual
5.3 General steps of configuration
Pre-construction Work+'
Database Configuration+'
Compile and Generate Controller files+'
Controller Algorithm Configuration•'
Graph Configuration and Report Configuration+'
Download the Server and the OPS+'

'~ ,_. ... ~ .. ·---~-" - - - ~--•"""~---- - - - - " " ' " w - .. ---~----- "
'\ Complete the Configuration of Runtime system+'

-;;:;;;;;==-~==:m:;;-:;c,;s,;s,~~==rn=-~~-~~=
Figure5.3-1 Configuration step drawing
Note: Edit of subsystems can be conducted in parallel at some times, and there is no clear
precedence order.
27
6 General Control Software of Database
Database general control is project management window. Only by establishing application system
project in database general control firstly, can other configuration works be conducted, after
completion of all configuration works, proceed with compilation in database general control and
generation of download file.
By opening database general control, it is possible to access database edit and control table edit.
6.2 Access to database general control
··/,
Figure 6.2-1 Access general control of database

Open general control window of database: ·
28
a) Title bar
b) Menu bar
c) Tools bar
d) Compilation message window
e) Status bar
· · · · · · · · s:3 ProJect
Figure 6.3-1 Database general control "Project" menu
1) New project:
Before proceeding with configuration, firstly establish a project, click "New Project" in "Project" or
icon II in tools bar, a dialog box will pop up:
29
Users need to type in project name, project name should be within 12 characters, only including
letter and number, and name should start with letter. When being confirmed as errorless, press
"OK" button, and if adding is correct, then name of established project can be found in pull-down
list box of project:
2) Deletion of project
When it is necessary to delete a certain project, firstly select the project to be deleted, click "Del
Projecf' in "Project", or icon in tools bar:
If it is necessary to delete, and then click "OK", the project can be deleted, otherwise click
30
"Cancel".
3) Import project:
When it is necessary to import configuration backup of project into database general control,
select option "Import Projecf' under menu "Project":
Figure 6.3-5 Import project dialog box
Select "Yes" to open "Browse for Folder'' window:
I 1:1
3.5 Floppy (A:)
Local Disk(C:)
New Volume (D:)
CD Drive (E :)
Removable Disk(H:)
Select folder of the project to be imported in window, click "OK" and import the selected project.
Note: Do not place the project to be imported under "User'' path of offline configuration software,
the reason is because that the system will establish a new folder of which the name is identical
with the selected project under installation path of offline configuration automatically during import
process, in case there is such a folder existing before import, the system will prompt:
Figure 6.3-7 Prompt for impossibility to import the project
31
4) Domain group number setting:
Click "Domain Setting" in "Edit", then the system will pop up a dialog box:
Select tile [.lroject, click t>~tto~ IJ above, group number (1-32) ca~ be selected; click the b~tto~
'IJ domain number (0-7) can be selected. If it is necessary to configure again, click button
and it is done. Domain number of each group must be arranged by starting with
numberO.
Note: User must assign group number and domain number to projects, otherwise it is impossible
to generate all download files. "Domain" here refers to projects, and all projects can be divided into
32 groups at the maximum, only domains within one group can communicate with each other.
6.4 Database edit !
6.4.1 Outline introduction
Database edit is divided into two parts: class structure edit and data operation. Class structure edit
is used to define structure and property of all data classes in application system, and can modify
defined structure and property too; data operation is to fill original data provided by users· into
relevant class of database. Points in the system is classified according to types (such as analog
input AI, analog output AO, digital variable input Dl, digital variable output DO ... ), one type is one
class, structure of each class is different from each other, but each class must contain PN (i.e.
32
-~fl "!;)
M """""'" HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
point name) property. Configuration adopts the form of table-filling. If original data is stored in
EXCEL file or in text file, this software can import it into database, furthermore can export
database, save in form of text file, so as to facilitate configuration work later.
6.4.2Access database edit system
Database configuration edit system can conduct operation according to two levels: engineer level
and operator level. In which, authorization of engineer level is the highest, itis not only possible to
define and modify structure of class, but also possible to conduct data operation; while operator
level can only conduct data operation, instead of being capable to define and modify structure of
class.
Click "Open Database" in '"Edit" in database general control screen, or click icon in tools bar, then
login window appears:
User ID II
Password: L
Figure 6.4-1 "Open Database" window
Input relevant names at "User 10" and. "Password", access system screen for the first time, the
· · default is to access at engineer .level, the. user name is "hollymacs", password is· "macs", ·after
user's input, the systenl checks User name and password, in case ofthree times of continuous
input error then quit will occur, and only after confirmation of correct user name and password, can
the system be accessed:
33
i,.
Figure 6.4-2 Database edit
1. Title bar
2. Menu bar
3. Tools bar
4. Status bar
Note: The screen is an engineer level screen, and

screen is grey and is not accessible.
Jill class structure icon in operator. level
\ . 6.4.3Data operation
!n..database configuration edit window, click "Data Modify" in "System" (or shortcut Ctrl+l), or click
Iii! in tools bar, a prompt box appears: .
Click "OK", a window pops up:
34
Alg input
Midalg
Alg output
Alg const tag
Bit
Byte
Dig input
Mid Dig
1) Select Category: List of data class, select class name first when configuring, such as: AI.
2) Select Item: After selecting a data class, item name list of this class structure appears on the
right side, select needed item name from it, click "OK", open data input window:
35
>•••>Tol•ll
Date
Note: Items arrangement style of database input window is displayed as per contents and order
selected by operator.
6.4.3.1 Class name and item name
Physical point
/> Analog input (AI)
36
Midalg
Alg output
Alg canst tag Expiate Tag
Bit
Cold Expiate ·
Byte
Chnl No
Dig input
Mid Dig
Figure 6A-6 "AI" class
1) Alarm upper limit (AH): upper limit for alarm

2) Alarm lower limit (AL): lower limit for alarm
3) Alarm monitor (AP): not selected, condition 0 monitor, condition 1 monitor, unconditional
continuous monitor (condition is alarm monitor point status).
4) Compensation point name (CC): point name of cold end compensation point of thermocouple
signal.
5) Whether or not a cold end compensation (CL): compensation, not selected, Le. cold end
compensation and no compensation
6) Channel number (CN): device channel number, positive integer, starting from 0.
7) Sample cycle (CP): 1 by default, it is allowed to fill in integral multiple of 1, while it is not
allowed to input 0 into historical database.
8) YCL (CY): it is normally unnecessary to modify.
9) Alarm dead zone (DI): insensitive zone of alarm, the default value is 0.
10) Device number (DN): positive integer, to be filled according to device configuration,
11) Point description (DS): 32 characters at the maximum.
12) HH limit alarm level (H1): not selected, red, yellow, white and green. Not selected is not to
alarm.
13) Upper limit level (H2): selection is identical with HH limit alarm level.
14) Alarm HH limit (HH): alarm HH limit.
15) Inverse measuring range property (IS): inverse measuring range property, not selected, Le.
take inverse measuring range or do not take inverse measuring range.
16) Exsect output initial value (IV): if LD item selects 1, value less than IV will be exsected.
17) Lower limit alarm level (L 1): selection is identical with HH limit alarm level.
18) LL limit alarm level (L2): selection is identical with HH limit alarm level.
19) Line resistance A (LA): thermal resistance signal line resistance compensation.
20) Line resistance B (LB): thermal resistance signal line resistance compensation.
21) Line resistance C (LC): thermal resistance signal line resistance compensation.
37
... {..f·l."!ii
IJi!C "'"'"'"" HOLLiAS MAGS Software User Manual
22) Small signal exsection (LD): 0 or 1, i.e. not to exsect small signal or exsect small signaL
23) Right bridge-arm resistance (LG): right bridge-arm resistance of thermal resistance module.
24) Alarm LL limit (LL): alarm LL limit
25) Measuring range lower limit (MD): lower limit of project work volume measuring range,
MD<MU, and MD>MU for inverse measuring range.
26) Exsecting output method (MM): maintain/default value, i.e. to maintain value before exsection
or artificially set value.
27) Measuring range upper limit (MU): lower limit of project work volume measuring range,
28) Output format (OF): display method, 12 types of options are XXXXXX, XXXX.X, XXE±XX,
AAAAAA, XXX.XX, XX.XXX, X.XXXX, ±XXXXX, ±XXX.X, ±XX.XX, ±X.XXX and ±XXE±X
respectively. In which X refers to figure and A refers to ASC code character string.
29) Over physical measuring range check (OP): check or not selected. If it is within physical
measuring range, then it is deemed as good data, otherwise, it is invalid data.
30) Operation records (OR): not selected, record, record and alarm sounds.
31) Point name (PN): the item is of red color, and must be filled in when configuring. It consists of
12 characters at the maximum, while combination of letters, numbers and underline "~' is
allowed, starting with number is not allowed, and it is case sensitive.
32) Signal range (SA): ensile signal type and range.
' \. 33) Over range dead zone (SD): over electric range dead zone. If spot signal is 4-20mA and
collected signal is 3.8 mA, if SD=0.2, then it is deemed that the data is suspectable; if SD=0.1,
then the data is invalid.
34) Station number (SN): node number of field control station.
35) Whether or not to extract (SQ): not to ex1ract or ex1ract
36) Dimension (UT): engineering unit
>- Analog output (AO)
Sample Cycle
DevNo
1) Current value (AV): initial value.

3) Sample cycle (CP): 1 by default, integral time of 1 can be filled in, no access to historical
38
.I
I

database for 0.
4) Device number (DN): positive integer, to be filled according to device configuration.
5) Tag description (OS): 32 characters at the maximum.
6) Measuring range lower limit (MD): lower limit of project work volume measuring range.
7) Measuring range upper limit (MU): upper limit of project work volume measuring range.
12 characters at the maximum, while combination of letters, numbers and underline "~' is
12) Dimension (UT): engineering unit.
:;. Digital input (OJ)
Alg input
Mid alg Aim Level
Alg output Chnl No
Alg canst tag On-Off Switch
Bit
DevNo
Tag Descrip
Set 0 Descrip
Figure 6.4-8 "DI" class
1) Alarm attribute (AF): not selected, 0 alarm and 1 alarm.

2) Alarm level (AT): not selected, red, yellow, white and green. Not selected is not to alarm.
4) On-off switch (DD): not selected, on-off switch. I.e. is not on-off switch or is on-off switch.
Successive two-route binary inputs constitute a on-off switch digital input, truth table is
illustrated as following table:
Dln+1 OJ, DV MD
0 0 0 1
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 0
1 1 1 1
39
~.~f·l.<S
A"""""" HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
In the table, DV and MD are current value and intermediate status marks of switch status. When
both Dl, and Dl,. 1 are 0 or 1, MD is set to 1, indicating error status, DV is invalid. When Dl, and
Dl,. 1 are 0 or 1 respectively, MD is set to 0, and current value of DV is identical with Dl,.

6) Tag description (DS): 32 characters at the maximum.
7) Set 0 description (EO): character string, meanings when the point is 0.
8) Set 1 description (E1 ): character string, meanings when the point is 1.
9) Status complementary attribute (NT): not selected, ·complementing, i.e. not to complement or
complement.
11) Point name (PN): the item is of red color, and must be filled out when configuring. It consists
of 12 characters at the maximum, while combination of letters, numbers and underline "~' is
12) Break state (SA): not selected, SOE attribute, SOE point needs to be set up.
13) SOE attribute (SE): not selected or SOE source, SOE point needs to be set up.
14) Station number (SN): node number of field control station .
• :» Digital output (DO)

\·"
DevNo
Tag Descrip
Now Val
Set 0 Descrip
Figure 6.4-9 "DO" class
3) Point description (DS): 32 characters at the maximum.
4) Current value (DV): initial value.
40
~ ~,tJs;! HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
of 12 characters at the maximum, while combination of letters, numbers and underline "~' is
l>- Pulse input (PI)
Aim Monitor
Chnl No
(
'
Figure 6.4-10 "PI" class

3) Alarm condition point name (AN): point name is digital variable point.
4) Alarm monitor condition (AP): not selected, condition 0 monitor, condition 1 monitor,
unconditional continuous monitor (condition is alarm monitor point status).
6) Sample cycle (CP): 1 by default, it is allowed to fill in integral multiple of 1,.while it is not
7) Convert type (CT): accumulating type, count frequency type and pulse width frequency
type.
8) Alarm dead zone (DI): insensitive zone of alarm, the default value is 0.
9) Device number (ON): positive integer, to be filled according to device configuration.
11) Coefficient/pulse (EF): corresponds to frequency type of pulse, here it stands for
frequency coefficient, i.e. physical quantity corresponding to each Hertz; corresponds to
accumulated type of pulse, here it stands for pulse equivalent, i.e. physical quantity
corresponding to each pulse.
alarm.
41
I
~
•:H.. tl-9 :J
Jilll ""'""'•• HOLLiAS MAGS Software User Manual 1
13) Upper limit level (H2): selection is identical with HH limit alarm level. '1
·J
17) Alarm LL limit (LL): alarm LL limit.
I!
18) Lower limit of measuring range (MD): lower limit of project work volume.
22) Point name (PN): the item is of red color, and must be filled out when configuring. It
consists of 12 characters at the maximum, while combination of letters, numbers and
underline"..:_' is allowed, starting with number is not allowed, and it is case sensitive.
23) Signal range (SA): onsite signal type and range
24) Patrol inspection cycle (SI): is integral multiple of module channel data response
synchronizing cycle.
26) Standard current value (SV): transform current value of analog into decimal between 0-1.
28) Variable alarm (VA): variable limit value or not selected, i.e. to proceed with variable limit
alarm or not to proceed with variable limit alarm.
:» Pulse output (PO)
42
Sample Cycle
DevNo
Tag Descrip
Frequency
Occupy Rate
KKSCode
4) Tag description (OS): 32 characters at the maximum.
5) Frequency (FQ)
6) Occupy rate (HL)
of 12 characters at the maximum, while combination of letters, numbers and underline "_:' is
10) Station number(SN): node number of field control station.
Note: After database general control compilation, physical point added or modified in database will
access into relevant system global variable table of controller algorithm project automatically.
Intermediate point (algorithm point)
> Analog point (AM)
43
.,
Dig input
Mid Dig
Figure 6.4-12 'AM' class

3) Alarm monitor (AP): not selected, condition 0 monitor, condition 1 monitor, unconditional
4) Current value (AV): initial value, the default is 0.
6) Alarm dead zone (01): insensitive zone of alarm, the default value is 0.
( alarm.
11) Lower limit alarm level (L1): seleciion is identical with HH limit alarm level.
15) Measuring range upper limit (MU): upper limit of project work volume measuring range,
of 12 characters at the maximum, while combination of letters, numbers and underline '_" is
20) Station number (SN): node number of field control station or server.
44
lll"ii ~ i·t '!i\
1!'4 ""'""''" HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
23) Variable alarm condition 0/A): two options: variable limit value or not selected, i.e. to proceed
with variable limit alarm or not to proceed with variable limit alarm.
24) Variance ratio calculation 0JL): two options: variance ratio point or not selected, i.e. to
participate variance ratio calculation or not to participate.
Note: In global variable of controller algorithm, data type defined by user is REAL point, and will be
added into the type of database automatically through compilation of database general control, but
only point and tag description will be added automatically, for other items such as upper limit of
measuring range, users need to fill in manually by themselves.
>- Digital point (DM)
Midalg
Alg output
Alg canst tag Aim level
Bit Calc Attribute
Byte
Tag Descrip
Now Value
Set 0 Descri p ·
Figure 6.4-13 "OM" class
1) Alarm attribute (AF): not selected, 0 alarm and 1 <tlarm.

5) Current value (DV): initial value.
8) Operation records (OR): three options: not selected, record, record and alarm sounds.
of 12 characters at the maximum, while combination of letters, numbers and underline" "is
allowed, starting with number is not allowed, and it is case sensitive. -
45
kd \.f!.oS
M ••""""" HOLUAS MAGS Software User Manual
10) SOE attribute (SE): not selected or SOE source, SOE point needs to be set up.
Note: In global variable of controller algorithm, data type defined by user is BOOL point, and will
be added into the type of database automatically through compilation of database general control,
but only point and tag description will be added automatically, for other items such as set 0
description, users need to fill in manually by themselves.
Note: After successful compilation of controller algorithm project, proceed with database general
control compilation, intermediate point in global variable table will access relevant database
automatically, with the exception of DM and AM class, and points of some functional block type
can access database through database general control compilation, such as analog manual
controller (HSALGMAN), combination servo amplification (HSCSLAVE5), circuit breaker
(HSDLCTRL5), PID governor (HSPID), sequential controller (HSSCS5), sequential controller
(HSSCS5), binary output control type regulating valve (HSVALVE5).
System point
>- System name (SYSNAME)
Tag Name
Stat No
Figure 6.4-14 "SYSNAME" class
1) Tag description (DS): project name displayed on operator station screen when the system is
running online.
2) Point name (PN): specified as 1 system1.
3) Station number (SN): specified as 0.
46
6.4.3.2Edit command
In data operation window, click "Edit", open pull-down menu:
(
1) Print preview:
Click "Print Preview" (shortcut Ctri+Shift+P) in "Edit", or click Iii in toolbar, it is possible to
preview and check printing results, to cancel print preview, click "Print Preview" again or click fil
in toolbar, so that icon pops up.
2) Query selection:
Click "Select Query" {shortcut Shift+C) in "Edit", or click in in toolbar, query selection window
pops up:
Figure 6.4-16 "Query Select•• window
47
"OK", after selecting defined query item, click "OK" button, conduct query according to query
conditions, only those points meeting query conditions are displayed in window.
""Del", select defined query name, and click "Del", then query name can be deleted.
"Cancel", click "Cancel", then query selection window can be closed.
3) Define query:
Click ""Define Query" (shortcut Shift+Q)" in "Edit", or click B in toolbar, define query window
pops up:
Figure 6.4-17 ""Define Query" window
"Column Name", all columns in database configuration can be selected.
"Symbol": Option: = (equivalent), > (more than), < (less than), >= (more than or equivalent), <=
(less than or equivalent), <> (not equivalent) and LIKE. Query display results are displayed
according to alphabetic sequence or number value; such as query condition: select point name
>BA05PC01, then display result is the point name of which the first alphabetic sequence is larger
than B.
Option "LIKE" is fuzzy query, i.e. in "Value" column, it is only necessary to type in partial key
character string of items to be queried, and substitute parts not written with wildcard character"%",
then it is possible to query all items related to key character string.
'Value": value in optional configuration, fill in according to requirement. It is necessary to use

single quote mark or double quote mark to enclose character string type of data on both sides.
"Condition": it is possible to select "AND" or "OR", i.e. relationship between conditions.
After inputting query name and query condition, click "OK" button, save the generated query
condition as per query name and close the window. ·
4) The maximum value of the system:
48
....., "' {1 .g
I!IIQ """""'" HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
Input the selected text value as the maximum system default value. It generally applies to upper
limit of measuring range and upper limit of alarm.
5) The minimum value of the system:
Input the selected text value as the minimum system default value. It generally applies to lower
limit of measuring range and lower limit of alarm.
6) Adding:
Click "Add" (shortcut Ctri+A) in "Edit", or click Ill in toolbar, and add a record row at the end of
table.
;
7) Deletion:
i
Select the row to be deleted, click "Del" (Shortcut Ctrl+Del) in "Edit", or click in toolbar, then
row selected can be deleted.
(
8) Insertion:
Click "Insert" (Shortcut Ctri+N) in "Edit", or click in toolbar, it is possible to insert one row in
front of current point, but serial number of insertion point is arranged backwards in original order.
9) Restore data:
Click "Restore" (Shortcut Ctri+R) in "Edit", or click in toolbar, then all data can be displayed.
10) Update database:
Click "Update database" (Shortcut Ctri+U) in "Edit", or click

............storedin.datab.as.e..
ill in· tool bar, modified data are
11) Verify:
(
'
Click "Verify" (Shortcut Shifi+V) in "Edit", or click in toolbar, then verify result window will pop
up:
49
User Manual
Figure 6.4-18 "Verify Resulf' window
The operation verifies validity of database data, and verifies whether there are points that are left
in database due to improper operation and are impossible to manage. In order to prevent error of
database compilation, and free user from verification before each time of compilation, the system
illlplelller1t''\/erif}':()perationaut()lllatically upon each time of "update database".
6.4.3.3Database import and export
Sort EXCEL database table
Firstly sort one copy of electronic spreadsheet database by using Microsoft Excel software, name
file with any name, the electronic spreadsheet database may contain several worksheets
according to measurement point of the project (one worksheet corresponds to one category of
database):
50
Figure 6.4-19 "Excel" worksheet
Note: The first row is item description filled in to facilitate input, contents and order are completely
identical with database input window, and fill in one item of database record (point) in each row
starting from the second row.
Filling-in description of AI database item
·--~~ .. ·········~···-~--fi_llill9:ii1.Q.f!3i9119L!>C:QR€lJ~i\L. .. --------- --- --- ------------·-----.-· .. -- ------"-' -------·-·-·----~-
TO 10mA 0
TO 20mA 1
T4 20mA 2
TO 5V 3
T1 5V 4 .
PT10 RTD 11
PT100 RTD 12
PT1000 RTD 13
.
CU50 RTD 14
CU100 RTD 15 .
BA1 RTD 16
BA2 RTD 17
G RTD 18
PT10 NEGATIVE 19
PT100 NEGATIVE 20
PT1000 NEGATIVE 21
CU50 NEGATIVE 22
CU100 NEGATIVE 23
BA1 NEGATIVE 24
BA2 NEGATIVE 25
G NEGATIVE 26
mv 50
51
LL 2 TC 51
B TC 52
ETC 53
J TC 54
K TC 55
R TC 56
S TC 57
T TC 58
CK TC 59
EA 2 TC 60
EU 2 TC 61
LB 3 TC 62
N TC 63
> Fill in whether or not to conduct cold end compensation (CL): fill in "1" if yes, not to fill in if not.
> Filling-in of alarm level (H1, H2, L1 and L2)
Red 1
Yellow 2
White 3
Green 4
Edit contents of each worksheet respectively and save.
Note: Fill in figure corresponding to the category in import table.
Text file
Next save the text file to be used for import, open worksheet, delete the first row of item name or
word description in EXCEL sheet, select menu command "Save As", a dialog box appears:
Figure 6.4-20 Save worksheet text file
> Saving position: at discretion

> File name: at discretion
52
:l> Save type: "Text file" (to be separated by tab character)
After filling in, click save button, a prompt appears:
Figure 6.4-21 Save prompt 1
Click "OK":
Figure 6.4-22 Save prompt 2
Import operation
Select relevant item according to compiled electronic spreadsheet contents and order, open data
operation window:
Figure 6.4-23 "AI" database input window
Click "System", open pull-down menu:

53
Figure 6.4-24 "System" menu
Select "Import Data", or click button in tool bar:
Figure 6.4-25 "Import file name" window
Find out and select the text file saved just now, click "Open":
Figure 6.4-26 "Import'' window
It is unnecessary to modify any setup, click "OK", contents in electronic spreadsheet is imported
into database, update database (i.e. save).
54
lP'il \-. {i .g
M Hauvsvs HOLLiAS MAGS Software User Manual
Import classes AO, Dl and D database respectively through identical method.
Note: Before using import tools, make sure that style of database input window corresponds to
items of electronic spreadsheet strictly, otherwise import will be unsuccessful, such as prompt:
Figure 6.4·27 "lmporf error window
Export operation
Type data into window and save data displayed at present to text file, and save as *.TXT file.
Click "Export Data" (Shortcut Ctri+S) in "System", or click 111 in toolbar, a file name selection
window pops up, input file name at position of file name, select the folder to be saved. Click "Save"
button, and the operation is completed.
Note: In case how to fill in certain database items is unknown, it is allowed to add record directly in
database before exporting text file, and check contents of relevant items after opening text file (it is
allowed to select to open EXCEL).
55
7 System Setup
System setup configuration software is used to define hardware setup of application system on
engineer station. Before configuring system setup, it is essential to·establish relevant project in
database general control configuration software.
System setup configuration includes two parts namely system device configuration and 1/0 device
configuration. Task of system device configuration is to complete hardware setup of network
devices on system network and monitor network; 1/0 device configuration is to complete 1/0 unit
setup of each station in unit of field control station. Software adopts the method to access each
configuration screen from main screen, so as to complete configuration process of each part, and
the operation is simple and easy. After saving edit, relevant source files can be generated, these
files will store configuration information of user, and it is not allowed to modify at discretion.
After completing various setup information edit, it is required to proceed with compilation.
Automatic error correction function is available in compilation process, and prompt will be given
automatically after discovery of error.
System device configuration
System device configuration requires defining all devices mounted on the whole system network.
Basic concepts to be used for system device configuration are introduced as follows:
::.- Node: unit that is connected on system network and can complete independent function,
including server node (SVR node), field control station node (FCS node), operator station
node (OPS node) and etc.
::.- Device: hardware devices mounted on each node on system network..
In MACSV system, 10 device configuration adopts the idea to mount "device" on "communication
link", i.e. multiple devices can be mounted on one communication link, and there are several
points of different types on each device. Basic concepts to be used for field control station are
introduced as follows:
/.
::.- Communication link: refers to physical circuit of identical communication medium,

communication parameter and communication port. Such as CAN, PLC, COM, MULTICOM,
DP, FF, HART, LONWORKS, RS-485 and etc, which are all referred to as communication link.
::.- Communication parameter: refers to parameter and device configuration information required
to complete link communication.
::.- Device: refers to 1/0 devices that are mounted on communication link and are capable of
independent addressing, such as various types. of 1/0 unit Each device has corresponding
device address and device description, and different device attributes.
7.2 Access system setup configuration
Select "Start" - "All Programs" - "MACS" - "MACS_ENG" -"Device", and click, open device
configuration tools:
56
Figure 7.2-1 Access device configuration
Figure 7.2-2 Device configuration window
1. Title bar
2. Menu bar
57
3. Tools bar
4. Status bar '
5. Compilation message window
6. Edit window
7.3 System device configuration
System device configuration completes setup of network nodes on system network and monitor
network and setup of device on node in unit of node.
Node
Nodes that can be mounted to system network include: field control station node, operator station
node and service station node.
Device
.
\.
Different nodes can contain devices such as: main control unit, operator host computer, central
server host computer, Ethernet card and etc.
Field control station node includes following devices:
» Main control unit

» Ethernet card
Note: Field control station node includes 2 main control units and 6 Ethernet cards.
Operator station node include following devices:
» Operator station host computer

» Ethernet card
Server station node includes following devices:
» Central server host computer

» Ethernet card
Note: Server node includes 1 central server host computer and 4 Ethernet cards.
7 .3.1 System device configuration wizard
In device configuration operation screen, click "System device" in "Edit" menu, access system
device configuration, and wizard dialog box pops up, hereunder we would like to introduce how to
fill in wizard dialog box, as illustrated in 7.3-1, 37.3-2, 7.3-3, 7.3-4 and 7.3-5 respectively:
Step 1:
Network/network section setup, adopts default setup value. Then click "Next".
58
Figure 7.3-1 Wizard dialog box 1
Step 2:
Server setup, adopts default setup. Then click "Next".
Step 3:
Input number of control stations, the default number is 1, the maximum is 40, and station number
is from 10 to 49. Then click "Next".
59
Step 4:
Input number of operator stations, the default is 1, the maximum value is 30, and station number is ._,
from 50 to 79. Here it is assumed that 3 operator stations need to be set up, and we fill 3 in number
position. Then click "Nex1".
Step 5:
Check results of setup in wizard steps above. Then click "Start", complete adding of system
device.
60
USer Manual

!'
After completing wizard setup, system device configuration screen is accessed automatically, as
illustrated in Figure 7 .3-6, the left half section of edit window displays node and device setup table
in device configuration, the right half section displays attribute or data of a certain node or device.
'-~ --~
nh«cdcor<l
· (j;) Elhe<neo"'"'d
'11)Eitoemetcord
(g Ope<•l:<,.>tdi>nSO
.[i)Oper-l»<t
;- (1;] .,.,.,..oW
. ~ Bh«ne!CM!
W1cw--~~
: ID <.>o«-"""
: (j;) Elhometcard
. f!lElhcmcla.d
--
Crie<=-ho<l
--·
Eihemetc•d
EltoNnotco.d
Figure 7.3-6 System device configuration screen
Click t·:~~~in tools bar, prompt dialog box will pop up, as illustrated in Figure 7.3-7, click "Yes"
button, the system will pop up wizard dialog box again, and it is· possible to add system device
again.
61
.,.,.
~·
Figure.7.3-7 Prompt dialog box
Automatic generation rule of device point name:
\.. 7 .3.2Add node manually
What we have introduced above is to add node and device automatically by using wizard, in case
certain system devices have been added and additional devices need to be added, and then we
can add node and device manually.
Firstly select "MACS device configuration" on topmost of left half section in screen of selection of
system device configuration, click right mouse button.to select "Add Node", "Add Node" dialog box
will pop up, as illustrated in Figure 7.3-8. ·
62
Software User
Add field control station node
Select "Field control station" in "Add Node" dialog box, and add setup of field control station node
number in "Add Node" dialog box, as illustrated in Figure 7 .3-9. The default is 1, after filling in node
number manually, click "OK" button, field control station node will be added into the left half section
in system device configuration screen.
Figure 7
Note: Number of field control station nodes of "Add Node" dialog box is the total of the number of
field control station nodes already added and number of field control station nodes to be added. If
number filled in is less than original number of this kind of nodes, original configuration will not
change a-ft·er c-I 1Ck.ln-~g"O·K-''-.--· · · · ·· -- ··· · ···-··---·-··---·-·····-·
7
----·-··-·-·--··---~
Add operator station node.
Select "Operator station" in "Add Node" dialog box, add setup of operator station node number in
"Add Node" dialog box, as illustrated in Figure 7.3-10. The default is 1, after filling in node number
manually, click "OK" button, operator station node will be added into the left half section in system
device configuration screen.
Figure 7.3-10 "Add Node" dialog box for adding operator station node
63
li'S \. ~~ .g
M ••"""" HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
Note: Number of operator station nodes of "Add Node" dialog box is the total of the number of
operator station nodes already added and number of operator station nodes to be added. If
change after clicking "OK".
7.3.3Device property
Click mouse right button on device of the left half section of system device configuration screen,
select "Property" in popup menu, and set up device property in popup window.
64
Manual
It is unnecessary to set up IP address for system network card, but it is necessary to set up IP
address for monitor network card, system default has been set up, if it is necessary to change, it is
allowed to modify manually in property window of monitor network card. Default setup rule of
monitor network card IP address is shown in the following table:
65
llff\-.i·l<SI
IIIJII••nvs.s HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
7 .3.4Compilation, saving, cloS'e and quit of system device
configuration
Click ~~~ in tools bar, the system compiles the device configuration edited. The compilation
results will be displayed in Compile Information window. Information of correct compilation:
Figure 7.3-17 Information of correct compilation
Click "Save" in "File" menu, the system conducts compilation automatically and fills in device
description information automatically before saving system device configuration that is being
edited on disk.
Click "Close" in "File" menu, store prompt dialog box pops up, as illustrated in Figure 7.3-18, select
"Yes" to store and close system device configuration, select "No", it will not to be stored and
system device configuration will be closed.
Figure 7.3-18 Prompt dialog box before quit
The system displays device configuration operation screen after closing · system device
configuration. It is possible to open system device configuration again or open 10 device
configuration.
Click "Quif' in "File" menu, the operation is similar to that of "Close", but it is to quit the whole
device configuration tools rather than close system device configuration.
7.41/0 device configuration
l/0 device configuration is aimed at configuration of internal device of field control station. The
configuration completes adding of link in field control station, and adding of 10 board in station.
66
7 .4.1 Add 1/0 device
In device configuration operation screen, click "1/0 device" in "Edit" menu, access 10 device
configuration:
' .
:-
'
screen
- - -----~-The-feffhalf section-cilodevice eonfigllrationscreoo-displa~-field-;;~;;trol ~atio~dd~d i~- system-------------

device configuration, the right half section displays relevant attribute. Click plus sign in front of field
control station node, so as to display control network "DP" in field control station:
67
Figure 7.4-2 Field control station and control network
In the left half section of 10 device configuration screen, click mouse right button on DP link of a
field control station, a menu pops up as illustrated in Figure 7.4-3. Select "Add Module" or click
~!II in tools bar, the "Add 110 Module" window will pop up as illustrated in Figure 7 .4-4. After ,
selecting DP .link device type to be added in window, input number in "Number", click "Add", and I
·---·····--··---~fienlb devlcels"added successfuliY:·aick Jl-onrlghtupper corner Of AddTioModuie;; window~----··-··-!

7
so as to close the window. 10 device configuration screen will display 10 device added and its '
property, as illustrated in Figure 7 .4-5. Number in bracket behind 10 device is device address of 10
device, and it is generated according to adding order by default, and can be modified manually.
Figure 7.4-3 Right-click menu
68
II FM!<l8R II NM470 II NM710
FM141 IIFM151 II NM480 IIPM312
II FM142 IIFM151R II NM510 II SM410
II FM143 IIFM152 II NM520 II SM411
II FM143A IIFM161_DI II NM610 IISM412
II FM143E II FM161_SOE II NM611 IISM430
II FM144 IIFM162 II NM612 1!11 SM432
IFM145 IIFM163 II NM613 II SM460
II FM146 IFM163A II NM620_DI IISM461
II FM146A IFM163D II NM620_SOE Ill]. SM4 70
IFM147 IFM163E II NM62l_DI Ill] SM471
IFM147A I FM171 II NM621_SOE Ill] SM472
I FM147E IFM172 II NM622_DI Ill] SM480 .
IFM148A II FM185 II NM622_SOE IJm SM481
II FM148C II NM410 II NM623_DI Ill] SM482
EJ.··III Field control station 10

sl;rlll
' IIi} FM148C(l)
f IIi} FM151(2)
: IIi} FM161_DI(3)
L IIi} FM171(4)
Figure 7.4-5 Device configuration screen
\ . 7.4.21/0 device right-click menu
Select 10 device added and click mouse right button, right-click menu pops up:
7 .4.2.1 Device property
Select "Property" in right-click menu, property window will pop up:
69
"Address" in property window is device address, FM series module can select address among
1-127, no repetition is allowed between module address. Program will add "Descrip" automatically
by default. "Auto generate parameter'' is selected by default. "Outside power supply" can ·be
selected according to actual situation.
7.4.2.2Automatic arrangement address
After selecting 10 device, click "Auto Address" in right-click menu orMl in tools bar, prompt
dialog box pops up as illustrated in Figure 7.4-8. Click "Yes" button, the system will assign device
address automatically in accordance with current arrangement sequence.
\·
70
7.4.2.31/0 device redundancy
After selecting redundant device, click "+Redundant" in right-click menu, $ ~ in front

of device stands for redundant configuration. After double-clicking the device, redundant
device will be displayed under main device.
7.4.2.41/0 device deletion
After selecting 10 device, click "Delete Device" in right-click menu or II in tools bar, the
selected 10 device will be deleted.
7.4.3Compilation, saving, close and quit of 1/0 device

configuration
\ __ .
Select field control station to be compiled, clickII in tools bar, the system will compile
field control station edited. Compilation results will be displayed in compilation message
window.
Saving, close and quit operations are identical with saving, close and quit operations of
system device configuration, see details of saving, close and quit operations of system
device configuration see section 3.3.4 of this chapter.
71
8 Controller algorithm
It is a complete development environment for your controller. It puts a simple approach to the
powerful IEC language at the disposal of the programmer. Use of the editors and debugging
functions is based upon the proven development program environments of advanced
programming languages (such as Visual C++).
Its main functions are:
)> User control algorithms configuration

)> Simulation test
)> Login and download the controller, test program online.
( After the completion of the database configuration and device configuration, choose and compile
the project in the database configuration software window and until the compilation is successful,
we could carry out the configuration of controller algorithms.
Click on "Start" "All Programs" "MAGS" "MACS_ENG" "Database", enter database configuration
software window, choose the project, click on "Compile" "Compile all" or click the [IJ"'button,
choose "Yes" in the pop up dialog box, it will compile automatically, compilation result will be
displayed in the message window. Controller algorithms project(s) will be created automatically
after successful compilation. Each field control station has a controller algorithms project. Objects
that including target settings, task configuration, hardware configuration, 10 tags declaration and
main program (MACS_PRO) are already configured in the original project, what we will do is to
add the POU (Program Organization Unit) of controller algorithms.
8.2 Access controller algorithm configuration
Click on "Start" "All Programs" "MAGS" "MACS_ENG" "FCS'~:
\ ..
72
Then pop up the window:
Select the project and press the button, pop up the window:
73
\.
Select the station with "OK" and open:
Figure 8.2-4 Open project
Tip: click "OK" in the prompted message window, this error message will no longer display when
you reopen the editor after rebuilding the project. ·
74
''..:...
1. Menu bar and tool bar

2. Object Organizer
3. Work space
4. Message window
-~-- __S.3PJoject __ objects -that have been ---generated

automatically
8.3.1 Hardware configuration
Double click "PLC Configuration" in the "Resources" register card of the object organizer, open the
hardware configuration window:
75
The PLC Configuration editor is divided up in two parts. In the left window the configuration tree is
displayed. The right part of the window is per default visible, but can get faded out via the menu
item "Extras" "Properties". If the 1/0 module is selected in the configuration tree, click the plus sign
before the module or press <enter> to display the lEG-address that system allocate to the input
and output data. If a DP master or a DP slave is selected in the configuration tree, the parameters
dialogs of the module will be available in the right part.
8.3.2Task configuration
Double click "Task configuration" in the "Resources" register card of the object organizer, open the
task configuration window. There has a task named "MACSTask", main program "MACS_PRG"
will be started by the task, select the task, in the right part of the window is the task attributes that
have been set up. The specific contents see "Start the POU"
76
8;3.31/0 Database definition
System has allocated the IEC-address to stored data for each 1/0 module. 1/0 database definition
is to create the correspondence between the symbolic name and address. Because 1/0 database
have been already edited, 1/0 database definition is completed automatically. 1/0 tags are
---·-- -- - ---·-m3Ciared ilitheglooal-variaoleslisfonnrolder:-- ---- · ~ --------- ·- -- ·--- - - ------ ··--- ----
77
As the 16-bit binary data from the address of analog input module channel should be converted to
real data type variables for calculation and display purpose (real type value should be converted to
16-bit binary data for analog output tags), system also created the conversion POUs.
P_E_H (PRG)
P_H_CT (PRG)
P_H_E (PRG)
P_H_PI (PRG)
P_H_RTD (PRG)
P_H_TC (PRG)
Figure 8.3-4 Conversion POUs
8.3.4Get system load of controller and runtime state of the

110 modules
In order to get the system load of controller and get the runtime state of each 1/0 module, system
created these POUs automatically. New variables of these POUs are declared in corresponding
global variables list
78
8.4 Constants and variables
8.4.1 Constants
l> BOOL constants
BOOL constants are the logical values TRUE and FALSE .
....... ······································· ,J;. TIME constants
This is followed by the actual time declaration which can include days (identified by "d"), hours
(identified by "h"), minutes (identified by "m"), seconds (identified by "s") and milliseconds
(identified by "ms"). Please note that the time entries must be given in this order according to
length (d before h before m before s before m before ms) but you are not required to include all
time increments.
Examples of correct TIME constants in a ST assignment:
TIME1 := T#14ms;
TIME1 := T#100S12ms; (*The highest component may be allowed to exceed its limit*)
TIME1 := t#12h34m15s;
The following would be incorrect:

79
~ \.11 -:;1
JIJI »anv:$vs HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
TIME1 :- t#5m68s; (*limit exceeded in a lower component*)
TIME1 := 15ms; (*T# is missing*)
TIME1 := t#4ms13d; (*Incorrect order of entries*)
)> DATE constants
These constants can be used to enter dates. A DATE constant is declared beginning with a "d", "D",
"DATE" or "date" followed by"#". You can then enter any date with format Year-Month-Day.
Examples:
DATE#1996-05-06
d#1 972-03-29
/
:» TIME_OF_DAY constants
Use this type of constant to store times of the day. A TIME_OF_DAY declaration begins with "tod#",
"TOD#", "TIME_OF_DAY#" or "time_of_day#" followed by a time with the format:
Hour:Minute:Second. You can enter seconds as real numbers or you can enter fractions of a
second.
Examples:
TIME_OF_DAY#15:36:30.123
tod#OO:OO:OO
)> DATE_AND_TIME constants
Date constants and the time of day can also be combined to form so-called DATE_AND_TIME j
···~---·-· -··- .. __constants.......DAIEj\ND=TIME..constants ....... begin ....with.... "dt#''.,.. "DT#'~, -~DATE=AND=TIME#~'...oL.. __ - ·---1
"date_and_time#". Place a hyphen after the date followed by the time. I
I
Examples:
DATE_AND_TIME#1 996-05-06-15:36:30
dt#1 972-03-29-00:00:00
)> Number constants
Number values can appear as binary numbers, octal numbers, decimal numbers and hexadecimal
numbers. If an integer value is not a decimal number, you must write its base followed by the
· number sign(#) in front of the integer constant. The values for the numbers 10-15 in hexadecimal
numbers will be represented as always by the letters A-F.
You may include. the underscore character within the number.
Examples:
14 (decimal number)
80
2#1001_0011 (dual number)
8#67 (octal number)
16#A (hexadecimal number)
These number values can be from the variable types BYTE, WORD, DWORD, SINT, US INT, INT,
UINT, DINT, UDINT, REAL or LREAL.
Implicit conversions from "larger'' to "smaller'' variable types are not permitted. This means that a
DINT variable cannot simply be used as an INT variable. You must use the type conversion.
)> REAL/LREAL constants
REAL and LREAL constants can be given as decimal fractions and represented exponentially. Use
the standard American format with the decimal point to do this.
Example:
7.4 instead of 7,4
1.64e+009 instead of 1,64e+009
)> STRING constants
A string is a sequence of characters. STRING constants are preceded and followed by single
quotation marks. You may also enter blank spaces and special characters (umlauts for instance).
They will be treated just like all other characters.
In character sequences, the combination of the dollar sign ($) followed by two hexadecimal
numbers is interpreted as a hexadecimal representation of the eight bit character code. In addition,
the combinations of two characters that begin with the dollar sign are interpreted as shown below
when they appear in a character sequence:
$' Single quotation mark
$L or $1 Line feed
$N or $n New line
$P or $p Page feed
$R or $r Line break
$Tor $t Tab
Examples:
'w1WOI!.?'
'Abby and Craig '
':-)'
81
J;> Typed Literals
Basically, in using IEC constants, the smallest possible data type will be used. If another data type
must be used, this can be achieved with the help of typed literals without the necessity of explicitly
declaring the constants. For this, the constant will be provided with a prefix which determines the
type.
This is writlen as follows: <Type>#<Literal>
<Type> specifies the desired data type; possible entries are: BOOL, SINT, USINT, BYTE, INT,
UINT, WORD, DINT, UDINT, DWORD, REAL, LREAL. The type must be written in uppercase
letters.
i
i<Literal> specifies the constant. The data entered must fit within the data type specified under
'
I<Type>.
Example:
var1 :=DINT#34;
If the constant can not be converted to the target type without data loss, an error message is
issued:
Typed literals can be used wherever normal constants can be used.
8.4.2Variables
The main operating target in control are data, the data value is likely to change at any time. We
.called these data variables. In other words, the variable is the identifier of data storage unit in the
computers.
8.4.2.1 Variable declaration
Names and data types of the variables used in control algorithm configuration must be known at
first, so we should use the variable definition, the definition process is called variables declaration.
Variables declaration should be considered of the following aspects:
J;> Position
J;> Syntax
J;> Name
J;> Data type
A variable declaration has the following syntax:
<Identifier> {AT<Address>}:<Type>{:=<initialization>};
The parts in the braces {} are optional.
Regarding the identifier, that is the name of a variable, it should be noted that it may not contain
spaces or umlaut characters, it may not be declared in duplicate and may not be identical to any
keyword. Underlines in identifiers are meaningful, e.g. A_BCD and AB_CD are interpreted as
different identifiers. Multiple consecutive underlines at the beginning of an identifier or within a
identifier are not allowed.
82
. . \-.~1<9
N ••11""'' HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
All declarations of variables and data type elements can include initialization. They are brought
about by the ":=" operator. For variables of elementary types, these initializations are constants.
The default initialization is 0 for all declarations.
8.4.2.2Data types
You can use standard data types and user-defined data types when programming. Each identifier
is assigned to a data type which dictates how much memory space will be reserved and what type
of values it stores.
Standard data types:
> BOOL:
BOOL type variables may be given the values TRUE and FALSE. 8 bits of memory space will be
reserved.
> Integer Data Types:
BYTE, WORD, DWORD, SINT, USINT, INT, UINT, DINT, and UDJNT are all integer data types
Each of the different number types covers a different range of values. The following range
limitations apply to the integer data types:
~~--------~~-o~wer·~lim~it____~~limit IBit •space
~~=====~~~j"""l~~=====j
D
[ Rl
SINT -"128
US INT c
INT
UINT ( 655:
DINT
UDINT .n.
.
As a result when larger types are converted to smaller types, information may be lost.
> REALILREAL:
REAL and LREAL are so-called floating-point types. They are required to represent rational
numbers. 32 bits of memory space is reserved for REAL and 64 bits for LREAL.
Valid values for REAL: 1.175494351e-38F to 3.402823466e+38F
Valid values for LREAL: 2.2250738585072014e-308 to 1.7976931348623158e+308
> STRING:
A STRING type variable can contain any string of characters. The size entry in the declaration
determines how much memory space should be reserved for the variable. It refers to the number
of characters in the string and can be placed in parentheses or square brackets. If no size
specification is given, the default size of 80 characters will be used.
The string length basically is not limited, but string functions only can process strings of 1 - 255
characters!
83
Example of a String Declaration with 35 characters:
str:STRING(35):='This is a String';
:» Time Data Types:
The data types TIME, TIME_OF_DAY (abb. TOO), DATE and DATE_AND_TIME (abb. DT) are
handled internally like DWORD.
Time is given in milliseconds in TIME and TOD, time in TOD begins at 12:00A.M.
ifime is given in seconds in DATE and DT beginning with January 1, 1970 at 12:00 A.M.
'~
'Reference to 4.4.1 "Constants"
Defined data types:
( :» ARRAR
'
I> Function Checkbounds
:» Pointer
:» Enumeration
:» Structures
:» References
:» Subrange types
8.4.2.3Structure form of variable
:» Simple structure variable:.

A simple structure variable means a single structure form, and can be given a determined
numerical value.
Example: 1·
AM01 :REAL:=50.0; (*analog variable AM01*)
DM01 :BOOL:=TRUE; (*digital variable DM01 *)
....... ··~· ~-»···~· Eunction.Biock.lnstancec·
Each instance possesses its own identifier (the instance name), and a data structure which
contains its inputs, outputs, and internal variables. Instances are declared locally or globally as
variables, whereas the name of the function block is indicated as the type of an identifier.
ft. Function Block Instance declaration has the following syntax:
£V:xample:
~ID01:HSPID:= (PT:=10, Tl:=30, SV:=100, KD:=5,TD:=, DI:=O, OutT:=100, OutB:=O, OutR:=5,
DL:=10, MU:=100, MD:=O, PK:=O, OutM:=O, AD:=1, TM:=EALSE, RM:=1, ME:=TRUE, AE:=TRUE,
QE:=TRUE, MTE:=EALSE, ATE:=EALSE, AV:=50, PVMU:=100, PVMD:=O, MC:=1, cycle:=1);
'
~.4.2.4Local variable and global variable
Variables can be declared either locally in the declaration part of a POU or in a global variable list.
:» Global Variables:
Variables that are known throughout the project can be declared as global variables. In the Object
Organizer, you will find objects in the resources register card in the Global Variables folder. All
variables defined in these objects are recognized throughout the project. These objects are called
Global Variable List. These lists are reserved by the system, to add user defined global variables,
create a new global list. Between the keywords VAR_GLOBAL and END_VAR, declare the
variables. If you have declared a large number of global variables, and you would like to structure
84
D """"'""
~t·l"!il
JJtoli HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
your global variables list better, then you can create further variables lists.
~ Local Variables:
All variables to be used only in this POU are declared in the declaration part of the POU. Between
the keywords VAR and END_VAR, all of the local variables of a POU are declared. These have no
external connection, in other words, they can not be written from the outside.
8.4.2.5Ciass
~ VAR: local variable
It is only used in the POU that declared the variable.
~ VAR_INPUT: input variable
i Between the keywords VAR_INPUT and END_VAR, all variables are.declared that serve as input
variables for a POU. That means that at the call position, the variables can be given along with a
call.
~ VAR_OUTPUT: output variable
Between the keywords VAR_OUTPUT and END_VAR, all variables are declared that serve as
output variables of a POU. That means value is carried back to the POU making the call. There
they can be answered and used further.·
~ VAR_IN_OUT: input/output variable
Between the keywords VAR_IN_OUT and END_VAR, all variables are declared that serve as input
and output variables for a POU.
~ VAR_GLOBAL: global variable
Variables that are known throughout the project
8.4.2.6Retain variables
Retain variables are identified by the keyword RETAIN. These variables maintain their value even
after an uncontrolled shutdown of the controller as well as after a normal switch off and on of the
controller (corresponding to command "Online" "Reset"). When the program is run again, the
stored values will be processed further.
Example:
VAR_GLOBAL RETAIN
AM01 :REAL:=50.0;
END_VAR
Example:
J
-·~
VAR RETAIN
~
-~
85
.
.
.,
DM01:BOOL;
END_VAR
8.4.2.7Using variable
Using variable include reading variable value and variable assignment.
Using a simple structure variable, write the name directly.
Example:
AM01 :=AM02+AM03;
Using the input or output item of a function block instance, has the following syntax: <Instance
name>.<item name>
/
Example:
PID01.SP:=100;
8.4.3Database points
We have defined physical I/O tags in database, and these tags are declared in the global variables
list of field control station project automatically and can be used in programs directly.
During the process of controller algorithms configuration, we would often declare other variables
which are used in the programs. If the variable is only used in a POU and it would not be displayed
on the graph, define it as local variable; if the variable is used in several POUs and it would be
displayed on the graph, then we should define it as global variable.
After the compilation in database configuration . software,REAL orBOOL type global·variables

would be written into AM database or DM database automatically.
8.5 POU
POU, Program Organization Unit, function, function block, and programs are POUs which can be
supplemented by actions. Each POU consists of a declaration part and a body. The body is written
in one of the IEC programming languages which include IL, ST, SFC, FBD, LD or CFC.
The process of controller algorithms configuration is accordance with the control scheme, create a
series of POUs and write the corresponding operations.
Right click "POUs" in the "POUs" register card of the object organizer, select "Add Object" in the
context menu, pop up the dialog box:
86
Figure 8.5-1 "New POU" dialog box
In the dialog box which appears, the first POU has already been given the default name
"PLC_PRG", you can change it to another name. About "Name of the new POU" please reference
to the information of "the name of a variable".
8.5.2Types of POU
~ Function
A function is a POU, which yields exactly one data element (which can consist of several elements,
such as fields or structures) when it is processed, and whose call in textual languages can occur
as an operator in expressions.
When declaring a function, don't forget that the function must receive a type. This means, after the
function name, you must enter a colon followed by a type.
~~~~~ A<::orre~ctfunction declaration can look like this example:
FUNCTION Fct: INT
In addition, a result must be assigned to. the function. That means that function name is used as an
output variable.
A function declaration begins with the keyword FUNCTION.
Example of a function Fct in IL, in which three input variables are declared:
The first both input variables get multiplicated and then divided by the third one. The function
returns the result of this operation:
Declaration part:
FUNCTION Fct: INT
VAR_INPUT
PAR1:1NT;
87
PAR2:1NT;
PAR3:1NT;
END_VAR
Implementation part:
LD PAR1
MULPAR2
DIVPAR3
ST Fct
~ Function Block
A function block is a POU which provides one or more values during procedure.
As opposed to a function, a function block provides no return value.
A function block declaration begins with the keyword FUNCTION_BLOCK.
Reproductions or instances (copies) of a function can be created.
The call of a function block is done via a function block instance.
Example in IL of function block with two input variables and two output variables:
One output (MULERG) is the product of the two inputs, and the other (VERGA) is a comparison for
equality.
FUNCTION_BLOCK FUB
VAR_INPUT
PAR1:1NT;
PAR2:1NT;
END_VAR
VAR_OUTPUT
MULERG:INT;
VERGL:BOOL;
END_VAR
Implementation part in IL:
88
i
LD PAR1
MULPAR2
STMULERG
LD PAR1
EQ PAR2
STVERGL
}> Program
A program is a POU which returns several values during operation. Programs are recognized
·globally through the project. All values are retained from the last time the program was run until the
next.
Example of a program:
Figure..8.5c2::Program~.. example
8.5.3Languages
Program can be written in one of the programming languages which include IL, ST, SFC, FBD, LD
orCFC.
8.5.3.11L
IL is textual language.
An instruction list (IL) consists of a series of instructions. Each instruction begins in a new line and
contains an operator and, depending on the type of operation, one or more operands separated by
commas.
In front of an instruction there can be identification mark (label) followed by a colon (:).
A comment must be the last element in a line. Empty lines can be inserted between instructions.
Example:
89
LD 17
ST lint (*Comment*)
GE5
JMPC next
LD idword
EQ instruct.sdword
STN text
Next:
J;> "hlsert" menu
Click on "Insert" and open pull-down menu:
Figure 8.5-3 "Insert" menu in IL POU
1) "Insert" "Operator":
Witht.hLS9<lX!lmaJJ.<:t.aiLotthe.operators.availablein ..the-currentlanguageare·displayed··inadialog···
·liax.
If one of the operators is selected and the list is closed with OK, then the highlighted operator will
be inserted at the present cursor position. (This is managed here just as it is in the Input
Assistant). ·
90
Figure 8.5-4 Insert operator from Help Manager window
2) "lnserf' "Operand":
With this command all variables in a dialog box are displayed. You can select whether you would
like to display a list of the global, the local, or the system variables.
If one of the operands is chosen, and the dialog box is closed with OK, then the highlighted
operand will be inserted at the present cursor position. (This is managed here just as it is in the
Input Assistant).
91
Figure 8.5~5 Insert operand from Help Manager window
3) "Insert" "Function":
With this command all functions will be displayed in a dialog box. You can choose whether to have
a list displaying user-defined or standard functions.
If one of the functions is selected and the dialog box is closed with OK, then the highlighted
function will be inserted at the current cursor position. (The management will proceed, as in the
input selection.)
Figure 8.5-61nsert function from Help Manager window

92
4) "Insert" "Function Block":
With this command all function blocks are displayed in a dialog box. You can choose whether to
have a list displaying user-defined or standard function blocks.
If one of the function blocks is selected and the dialog box is closed with OK, then the highlighted
function block will be inserted at the current cursor position. (This is managed here just as it is in
the Input Assistant).
In the IL language the following operators and modifiers can be used.
Modifiers:
c with JMP, CAL, RET The instruction is only then executed if the result of the preceding
expression is TRUE.
N with JMPC, CALC, The instruction is only then executed if the result of the preceding
RETC expression is FALSE.
N otherwise Negation of the operand (not of the accumulator)
Below you find a table of all operators in IL with their possible modifiers and the relevant meaning:
Operator Modifiers Meaning

LD N Make current result equal to the operand
ST N Save current result at the position of the operand
s Then put the Boolean operand exactly at TRUE if the current result is TRUE
R Then put the Boolean operand exactly at FALSE if the current result is TRUE
AND N,( Bitwise AND .
OR N,( Bitwise OR
XOR N,( Bitwise exclusive OR
ADD ( Addition
93
SUB Subtraction
MUL Multiplication
DIV Division
GT >
GE >=
EO =
NE <>
LE <-
LT < .
JMP CN Jump to the label .
CAL CN Call proqram or function block or

RET CN Leave POU and return to caller
) Evaluate deferred operation
It is also possible in IL to put parentheses after an operation. The value of the parenthesis is then
considered as an operand.
For example:
l.
LD2
MUL2
ADD3
Erg
Here is the value of Erg 7. However, if one puts parentheses:
LD2
MUL(2
ADD3
STErg
The resulting value for Erg is 10, the operation MUL is only then evaluated if you come to ")"; as
operand for MUL 5 is then calculated.
8.5.3.2LD
The Ladder Diagram is a graphics oriented programming language which approaches the
structure of an electric circuit.
The Ladder Diagram consists of a series of networks. A network is limited on the left and right
sides by a left and right vertical current line. In the middle is a circuit diagram made up of contacts.
coils, and connecting lines.
Example:
94
IN1 IN2 SCHALT1

~ ~------~~~~~~-
~~L~--t-1 sr-~~L£]
__
SCHALT2 SCHALT3 SCHALT4

I I
%1X2.7
%1X2.0
I
Figure 8.5-8 Example of a network in LD
)> LD elements
1) Contact:
Each network in LD consists on the left side of a network of contacts (contacts are represented by
two parallel lines: Ill which from left to right show the condition "On" or "Off'.
These conditions correspond to the Boolean values TRUE and FALSE. A Boolean variable
· belongs to each contact. If this variable is TRUE, then the condition is passed on by the
connecting line from left to right, otherwise the right connection receives the value "Out".
A contact can also be negated, recognizable by the slash in the contact symbol: 111. Then the value
of the line is transmitted if the variable is FALSE.
2) Coil
On the right side of a network in LD there can be any number of so-called coils which are
represented by parentheses: ( ). They can only be in parallel. A coil transmits the value of the
- -----~-- --connections-from-left-torightand copies it-in-an-appropriate-Boolean-variable,-At-the entry-line-the-- - -------·- ____ j
value ON (corresponds to the Boolean variable TRUE) or the value OFF (corresponding to FALSE)
\. can be present.
Contacts and coils can also be negated. If a coil is negated (recognizable by the slash in the coil
symbol: (/)), then it copies the negated value in the appropriate Boolean variable. If a contact is
negated, then it connects through only if the appropriate Boolean value is FALSE.
Coils can also be defined as set or reset coils. One can recognize a set coil by the "S" in the coil
symbol: (S)) It never writes over the value TRUE in the appropriate Boolean variable. That is, if the
variable was once set at TRUE, then it remains so.
One can recognize a reset coil by the "R" in the coil symbol: (R). It never writes over the value
FALSE in the appropriate Boolean variable: If the variable has been once set on FALSE, then it
remains so.
3) Function blocks in the Ladder Diagram
Along with contacts and coils you can also enter function blocks and programs. In the network they
must have an input and an output with Boolean values and can be used at the same places as
contacts, that is on the left side of the LD network.
95
l> Cursor Positions in the LD Editors
The following locations can be cursor positions, in which the function block and program accessing
can be handled as contacts. POUs with EN inputs and other POUs connected to them are treated
the same way as in the Function Block Diagram. Information about editing this network part can be
found in the chapter on the FBD Editor.
1) Every text field (possible cursor positions framed in black)
~~---0--~--{-~
2) Every Contact or Function Block
3) Every Coil
4) The Connecting Line between the Contacts and the Coils.
••---~~~~u-- n••
- - - - - -------------------· --------------·-- '
l> Move elements or names in the LD-Editor
An element or just the name (variable name, address, comment) of an element can be moved to a
different position within a LD POU by "drag&drop".
In order to do this, select the desired element (contact, coil, function block) and drag it - keeping
the mouse key pressed· away from the current position. Thereupon all possible positions within all
networks of the POU, to which the element might be moved, will be indicated by grey-filled
rectangles.
Move the element to one of these positions and let off the mouse key: the element will be
inserted at the new position.
96
inst
bbb [fi3fuPl
t-------11 t------L-J-
If you however move the element to the name (variable name) of another element, the name field
will be shaded green. If you then let off the mouse key, the previous name will be replaced by the
"dragged" one. If additionally address and comment are displayed (options), the copying also will
apply to those.
);> "Insert" menu
Figure 8.5-9 "Insert" menu in LD POU
1) "Insert" "Network (after)" or "Insert" "Network (before)" Shortcut: <Shift>+<T>
In order to insert a new network in the FBD or the LD editor, select the "Insert"' "Network (after)" or
the "Insert" "Network (before)" command, depending on whether you want to insert the new
network before or after the present network. The present network can be changed by clicking the
network number. You will recognize it in the dotted rectangle under the number. With the <Shift
key> and a mouse click you can select from the entire area of networks, from the present one to
the one clicked.
I~
2) "Insert" "Contact" Symbol: ili!!illl Shortcut: <Ctri>+<O>
97
Use this command in the LD editor in order to insert a contact in front of the marked location in the
network. If the marked position is a coil or the connecting line between the contacts and the coils,
then the new contact will be connected serially to the previous contact connection. The contact is
preset with the text "???". You can click on this text and change it to the desired variable or the
desired constant.
3) "Insert" "Parallel Contact" Symbol: Ill Shortcut: <Ctri>+<R>

Use this command in the LD editor to insert a contact parallel to the marked position in the network.
If the marked position is a coil or the connection between the contacts and the coils, then the new
contact will be connected in parallel to the entire previous contact connection. The contact is
desired constant.
4) "Insert" "Function Block" Shortcut: <Ctri>+<R>
Use this command in order to insert an operator, a function block, a function or a program as a
POU. For this, the connection between the contacts and the coils, or a coil, must be marked. The
new POU at first has the designation AND. If you wish, you can change this designation to another
one. For this you can also use the Input Assistant.
5) "Insert" "Coil" Symbol:. Shortcut: <Ctri>+<L>
You can use this command in the LD editor to insert a coil in parallel to the previous coils. If the
marked position is a connection between the contacts and the coils, then the new coil will be
inserted as the last. If the marked position is a coil, then the new coil will be inserted directly above
it. The coil is given the text"???" as a default setting. You can click on this text and change it to the
desired variable. For this you can also use the Input Assistant.
6) "Insert" "Box with EN in LD"
Use this command to insert a function block, an operator, a function or a program with EN input i·
-·~---···-·
into a LD network. If you want to use your LD network as a PLC for calling up other POUs, then
•· -··you···must··merge·aPOUwith an··EN input Tlie. marl<eapositior1must·b-e the connection between-·
the contacts and the coils or a coiL The new POU is inserted in parallel to the coils and underneath
----1
'
them; it contains initially the designation "AND". If you wish, you can change this designation to
i
another one. For this you can also use the Input Assistant.
> "Extras" menu
Click on "Extras" and open pull-down menu:
Figure 8.5-10 "Extras" menu in LD POU
98
1) "Extras" "Negate" Symbol: Shortcut: IIJl <Ctri>+<N>

Use this command to negate a contact, a coil, a jump or return instruction, or an input or output of
EN POUs at the present cursor position. Between the parentheses of the coil or between the
straight lines of the contact, a slash will appear((/) or Ill).
2) "Extras" "Set/Reset"
If you execute this command on a coil, then you will receive a Set Coil. Such a coil never
overwrites the value TRUE in the respective Boolean variable. This means that once you have set
the value of this variable to TRUE, it will always remain at TRUE. A Set Coil is designated with an
"S" in the coil symbol. If you execute this command once again, then you will be given a Reset coil.
Such a coil never overwrites the value FALSE in the respective Boolean variable. This means that
once you have set the value of this variable to FALSE, it will always remain at FALSE. A Reset Coil
is designated with an "R" in the coil symbol. If you execute this command repeatedly, the coil will
alternate between set, reset and normal coil
8.5.3.3FBD
The Function Block Diagram is a graphically oriented programming language. It works with a list of
networks whereby each network contains a structure which represents either a logical or
arithmetic expression, the call of a function block, a jump, or a return instruction.
Example:
A
B
Figure 8.5-11 Example of a network in LD
It work with a list of networks, in which every network contains a structure that displays,
respectively, a logical or an arithmetical expression, the calling up of a function block, a function, a
program, a jump, or a return instruction. The most important commands are found in the context
menu.
~ Cursor Positions in the FBD
Every text is a possible cursor position. The selected text is on a blue background and can now be
changed.
You can also recognize the present cursor position by a dotted rectangle. The following is a list of
all possible cursor positions with an example:
1) Every text field (possible cursor positions framed in black):
2) Every input:
99
Varf-
Var2
3)
u-- Reoull
Every operator, function, or function block:
~::d~.':J!> l Reoull
4) Outputs, if an assignment or a jump comes afterward:
Varl fANDl·::::.:-Reoull
Var2L_f
5) The lined cross above an assignment, a jump, or a return instruction:
6) Behind the outermost object on the right of every network ("last cursor position," the same
cursor position that was used to select a network):
AND AND
Varl - ..
Var2 . LResull Var3
7) The lined cross directly in front of an assignment:
AND AND
Varl
Var2 CSResull Var3-
> "Insert" menu

'
\ Click on "Insert" and open pull-down menu:
Figure 8.5-12
100
-~t.J~
1'1111••'""'"' HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
1) "Insert" "Network (after)" or "Insert" "Network (before)" Shortcut: <Shift>+<T>
In order to insert a new network in the FBD or the LD editor, select the "Insert"' "Network (after)" or
the "Insert" "Network (before)" command, depending on whether you want to insert the new
network before or after the present network.. The present network can be changed by clicking the
key> and a mouse click you can select from the entire area of networks, from the present one to
the one clicked.
2) "Insert" "Box" Symbol: fill Shortcut: <Ctri>+

With this command, operators, functions, function blocks and programs can be inserted. First of all,
it is always inserted an "AND" operator. This can be converted by Selection and Overwrite of the
type text ("AND") into every other operator, into every function, into every function block and every
program. You can select the desired POU by using Input Assistant (<F2> ).
3) "Insert" "lnpuf' Symbol: ill Shortcut: <Ctri>+
This command inserts an operator input. With many operators, the number of inputs may vary.
(For example, ADD can have 2 or more inputs.) In order to extend such an operator by an input,
you need to select the input in front of which you wish to insert an additional input; or you must
select the operator itself, if a lowest input is to be inserted. The inserted input is allocated with the
text"???". This text must be clicked and changed into the desired constant or variable.
4) "Insert" "Assign" Symbol: ll!l Shortcut: <Ctri>+<A>
This command inserts an assignment. For an inserted assignment, a selection can be made
accompanying the entered text "???", and the assignment can be replaced by the variable that is
to be assigned.
In order to insert an additional assignment to an existing assignment, use the "Insert" "Output"
command.
~ "Extras" menu
i
' Click on "Extras" and open pull-down menu:
1) "Extras" "Negate" Symbol: 1111 Shortcut: <Ctri>+<N>
With this command you can negate the inputs, outputs, jumps, or RETURN instructions. The
symbol for the negation is a small circle at a connection.
2) "Extras" "Set/Reset" Symbol: !1111

101
With this command you can define outputs as Set or Reset Outputs. A grid with Set Output is
displayed with [S]. and a grid with Reset Output is displayed with [R].
An Output Set is set to TRUE, if the grid belonging to it returns TRUE. The output now maintains
this value, even if the grid jumps back to FALSE.
An Output Reset is set to FALSE, if the grid belonging to it returns FALSE. The output maintains its
value, even if the grid jumps back to FALSE.
With multiple executions of the command, the output will alternate between set, reset, and normal
output.
3) "Extras" "Zoom" Shortcut: <Ait>+<Enter>
With this command a selected POU is loaded into its editor. The command is available in the
context menu (<F2>} or in the 'Extras' menu, if the cursor is positioned on the name of a POU in a
text editor or if the ~OU box is selected in a graphic editor.
If you are dealing with a POU from a library, then the library manager is called up, and the
corresponding POU is displayed.
8.5.3.4SFC
The Sequential Function Chart (SFC) is a graphically oriented language which makes it possible to
describe the chronological order of different actions within a program. For this the actions are
assigned to step elements and the sequence of processing is controlled by transition elements.
Example:
Init
..•...... -I-TRUE
.
-
( .. permanent Counting nothing

\ ..
sin_test twalk_light
run_sin_te run_ walk_
Nsin_test - Nwal k_ligh
nothing2
- TRUE
1>
I nit
Figure 8.5-14 Example of a network in SFC
J;> SFC elements

102
1) Step:
A POU written in a Sequential Function Chart consists of a series of steps which are connected
with each other through directed connections (transitions).
There are two types of steps.
The simplified type consists of an action and a flag which shows if the step is active. If the action of
a step is implemented, then a small triangle appears in upper right corner of the step.
An IEC step consists of a flag and one or more assigned actions or boolean variables. The
.associated actions appear to the right of the step.
2) Action:
An action can contain a series of instruction in IL or in ST, a lot of networks in FBD or in LD, or
again in SFC.
With the simplified steps an action is always connected to a step. In order to edit an action, click
twice with the mouse on the step to which the action belongs. Or select the step and select the
menu command "Extras" "Zoom Action/Transition". In addition, one input or output action per step
is possible.
Actions of IEC steps hang in the Object Organizer directly under their SFC-POU and are loaded
with a double click or by pressing <Enter> in their editor. New actions can be created with "Project"
"Add Action". You can assign nine actions to one IEC step at max.
3) Transition I Transition condition
Between the steps there are so-called transitions.
A transition condition must have the value TRUE or FALSE. Thus it can consist of either a boolean
variable, a boolean address or a boolean constant. It can also contain a series of instructions
having.a boolean result, either inST syntax(e,g. (i<=1()())t.f\J~I)l>)grif1llnY.11lng!,l1lge.QeJ>ired. (s.ee ............
.. ~·"Extras""ZobrrfJ\clioii/Tfansitioii"j:B.ulatransitfon may not contain programs, function blocks or
assignments!
4) Entry or exit action
Additional to a step action you can add an entry action and an exit action to a step. An entry action
is executed only once, right after the step has become activec An exit action is executed only once
before the step is deactivated.
A step with entry action is indicated by an "E" in the lower left corner, the exit action by an "X" in
the lower right corner.
The entry and exit action can be implemented in any language. In order to edit an entry or exit
I
J
action, double click in the corresponding corner in the step with the mouse.
Example of a step with entry and exit action
103
l" Select element
A marked block is a bunch of SFC elements that are enclosed in a dotted rectangle.
You can select an element (a step, a transition, or a jump) by pointing the mouse on this element
and pressing the left mouse button, or you can use the arrow keys. In order to mark a group of
several elements, press <Shift> for a block already marked, and select the element in the lower
left or right corner of the group. The resulting selection is the smallest cohesive group of elements
that includes both of these elements.
Please regard, that a step can only be deleted together with the preceding or the succeeding
transition!
)-- "Insert" menu
Figure 8.5-15 "Insert'' menu in SFC POU
1) "Insert" "Step Transition (before)" Symbol: Shortcut: Ill <Ctri>+<T>

This command inserts a step in the SFC editor followed by a transition in front of the marked block.
2) "Insert" "Step Transition (after)" Symbol: Ill Shortcut: <Ctri>+<E>

This command inserts a step in the SFC editor followed by a transition after the first transition in
the marked block
3) "Insert" "Alternative Branch (right)" Symbol: II Shortcut: <Ctri>+<A>
This command inserts an alternative branch in the SFC editor as a right branch of the marked
block. For this the marked block must both begin and end with a transition. The new branch is then
made up of one transition.
4) "Insert" "Alternative Branch (left}" Symbol: lfl

This command inserts an alternative branch in the SFC editor as the left branch of the marked
104
5) "Insert" "Parallel Branch (right)" Symbol: Ill Shortcut: <Ctri>+<L>

This command inserts a parallel branch in the SFC editor as the right branch of the marked block.
For this the marked block must both begin and end with a step. The new branch is then made up
of one step. To allow jumps to the parallel branches that have been created, these must be
provided with a jump label.
6) "Insert" "Parallel Branch (left)'' Symbol: IIJ

This command inserts a parallel branch in the SFC editor as the left branch of the marked block.
For this the marked block must both begin and end with a step. The new branch is then made up
of one step. To allow jumps to the parallel branches that have been created, these must be
provided with a jump label.
~~~~
7) "Insert" "Jump" Symbol: 1m!! Shortcut: <Ctri>+
This command inserts a jump in the SFC editor at the end of the branch, to which the marked
block belongs. For this the branch must be an alternative branch.
The inserted text string 'Step' in the inserted jump can then be selected and replaced by the step
name or the jump label of a parallel branch to be jumped to.
8) "Insert" "Transition-Jump" Symbol: II

This command inserts a transition in the SFC editor, followed by a jump at the end of the selected
branch. For this the branch must be a parallel branch.
The inserted text string 'Step' in the inserted jump can then be selected and replaced by the step
name or the jump label of a parallel branch to be jumped to
With this command you can add an entry action to a step. An entrycaction is only executed once,
right after the step has become active. The entry-action can be implemented in a language of your
choice.
A step with an entry-action is designated by an "E" in the bottom left corner.
10) "Insert" "Add Exit-Action"
With this command you can add an exit-action to a step. An exit-action is only executed once,
before the step is deactivated. The exit-action can be implemented in a language of your choice.
A step with an exit-action is designated by an "X" in the lower right corner.
Ji> "Extras" menu
105
Figure 8.5-16 "Extras" menu in SFC POU
1) "Extras" "Paste Parallel Branch (right)"
This command pastes the contents of the clipboard as a right parallel branch of the marked block.
For this the marked block must both begin and end with a step. The contents of the clipboard must,
likewise, be an SFC block that both begins and ends with a step.
2) "Extras" "Add label to parallel branch"
In order to provide a newly inserted parallel branch with a jump label, the transition occurring
before the parallel branching must be marked and the command 'Add label to parallel branch' must
be executed. At that point, the parallel branch will be given a standard name consisting of
,Parallel" and an appended serial number, which can be edited according to the rules for identifier
names. In the following example, "Parallel" was replaced by "Par_1_2" and the jump to the
transition "End" was steered to this jump label.
Init
···--- --------- -- ---- -------- ... ------ -- ----

- Start
Par 1 2
Parallel1 t#2s Parallel2
- 1-Ende
4>
Par_1_2
3) "Extras" "Paste after"
This command pastes the SFC block on the clipboard after the first step or the first transition of the
marked block. (Normal copying pastes it in front of the marked block.) This will now be executed, if
the resulting SFC structure is correct, according to the language norms.
4) "Extras" "Zoom Action/Transition" Shortcut: <Ait>+<Enter>
The action of the first step of the marked block or the transition body of the first transition of the
106
market block is loaded into the editor in the respective language, in which it has been written. If the
action or the transition body is empty, then the language must be selected, in which it has been
written.
Regard that the transition condition which is written within the editor window will take precedence
over a condition which might be written directly at the transition mark. Example: If here i>100, then
the transition condition will be FALSE, although TRUE has been entered at the mark!
5) "Extras" "Clear Actionrrransition"
With this command you can delete the actions of the first step of the marked block or of the
transitions body of the first transition.
If, during a step, you implement either only the action, the entry-action, or the exit-action, then the
same will be deleted by the command. Otherwise a dialog box appears, and you can select which
action or actions are to be deleted.
If the cursor is located in the action of an IEC step, then only this association will be deleted. If an
IEC step with an associated action is selected, then this association will be deleted. During an IEC
step with several actions, a selection dialog box will appear.
8.5.3.5ST
The Structured Text consists of a series of instructions which, as determined in high level
···-·- _......._lan~~CI~es,("IF:.:.:.!fiE:I'-J:::E:L~E:»Jori~lo(lps(IJVHJLE::::[)Q)c<Jn.IJE)E))(_ec_utE)cL
Example:
\ . IF value < 7 THEN
Value:=value + 1;
END_WHILE;
END_IF;
>- Valuation of expressions
The evaluation of expression takes place by means of processing the operators according to
certain binding rules. The operator with the strongest binding is processed first, then the operator
with the next strongest binding, etc., until all operators have been processed.
Operators with equal binding strength are processed from left to right.
107
-~~i~
M """'"'' HOLLiAS MAGS Software User Manual
Below you find a table of the ST operators in the order of their binding strength:
Operation Symbol Binding strength

Put in parentheses (expression l Strongest binding
Function name
Function call
(parameter list)
Exponentiation EXPT
Negate -
Building of complements NOT
Multiply •
Divide I
Modulo MOD
Add +
Subtract -
Compare <,>,<-,>-
Eoual to -
Not eoual to <>
Boolean AND AND
Boolean XOR XOR
Boolean OR OR Weakest binding
There are the following instructions in ST, arranged in a table together with example:
Instruction type Example

Assignment A:-B; CV :- CV + 1; C:-SIN(X);
Calling a function block and CMD_TMR(IN :-' %1X5, PT :- 300);
use of the FB output A:=CMD TMR.Q
RETURN RETURN
D:-B*B;
IF D<O.O THEN
C:=A;
ELSIF D=O.O THEN
IF
C:=B;
ELSE
C:=D;
END IF;
CASE INT1 OF
1: BOOL1 :=TRUE;
2: BOOL2 :=TRUE;
CASE ELSE
BOOL 1 := FALSE;
BOOL2 := FALSE;
END CASE;
J:-101;
FOR 1:=1 TO 100 BY 2 DO
IFARR[I] = 70 THEN
FOR J:=l;
EXIT;
END_IF;
END FOR
J:-1;
WHILE J<= 100 AND ARR[J] <> 70 DO
WHILE
J:=J+2;
END WHILE;
J:--1;
REPEAT
REPEAT J:=J+2;
UNTILJ= 101 OR ARR[J] = 70
END REPEAT;
EXIT EXIT;
108
I Empty instruction
8.5.3.6CFC
The continuous function chart bases on the Function Block Diagram language. However it does
not operate with networks, but rather with freely placeable elements. This allows feedback, for
example.
Example:
TOF ~
iiD'l
TON ........•....•....
-t. Un Down}
L T#2s. f-- I T#h f--
Figure 8.5-17 Example of a network in CFC
No snap grid is used for the continuous function chart editor so the elements can be placed
anywhere. Elements of the sequential processing list include boxes, input, output, jump, label,
return and comments. The inputs and outputs of these elements can be connected by dragging a
connection with the mouse. The connecting line will be drawn automatically. The shortest possible
connection line is drawn taking into account existing connections. The connecting lines ;:lre
automatically adjusted when the elements are moved. If the case arises where a connecting line
cannot be drawn simply because of lack of space, a red line will be shown between the input and
the associated output instead. This line will be converted into a connecting line just as soon as
space is available.
One advantage of the continuous function chart as opposed to the usual function block diagram
editor FBD is the fact that feedback paths can be inserted directly.
~ Cursor positions in the CFC
Each text is a possible cursor The selected text is shaded in blue and can be modified.
In all other cases the current cursor position is shown by a rectangle made up of points. The
following is a list of all possible cursor positions with examples:
1) Trunks of the elements box, input, output, jump, label, return and comments.
lnstance1
Ii Varin f- -j VarOut d
!count ::j ~ !This is a comrnent [l
2) Text fields for the elements box, input, output, jump, label, return and comments as well as
text fields for connection marker
109
(?arln)f- -{S/aro® I
@"aunt): @i is a cornmeOD]
~(M-14-i)}
AND
TRUE OR ICM-14-1A- -
FALSE i F.A.LSE ~ L__...J
3) Inputs for the elements box, input, output, jump and return
lnstance1
HVarOut H>l count I B<l Return I>
4) Outputs for the elements box and input:
lnstance1
•
TON
..
- IN
..
Q Varin H
- PT - ET ..
>- Selecting elements in CFC
One clicks on the trunk of the element to select it.
To mark more elements one presses the <Shift> key and clicks in the elements required, one after
the other, or one drags the mouse with the left hand mouse key depressed over the elements to be
··marked: ······························ · - · · - ··· ·-·--·······-··········· --- -- - --- - ---
The command 'Extras' 'Select all' marks all elements at once.
>- Moving elements in CFC
One or more selected elements can be moved with the arrow keys as one is pressing on the
<Shift> key. Another possibility is to move elements using a depressed left mouse key. These
elements are placed by releasing the left mouse key in as far as they do not cover other elements
or exceed the foreseen size of the editor. The marked element jumps back to its initial position in
such cases and a warning tone sounds.
>- Connections
1) Creating connections
An input of an element can be precisely connected to the output of another element. An output of
an element can be connected to the inputs of a number of other elements.
There are a number of possibilities to connect the input of an element E2 with the output of an
element E1.
110
Place the mouse on the output of element E1, click with the left mouse key, hold the left mouse key
down and drag the mouse cursor onto the input of element E2 and let the left mouse key go. A
connection is made from the output of element E1 to the mouse cursor during this dragging
operation with the mouse.
Place the mouse on the input of element E2, click with the left mouse key, hold the left mouse key
down and drag the mouse cursor onto the output of element E1 and let the left mouse key go.
Move one of the elements E1 or E2 and place it in such a way by letting go of the left mouse key
that the output of element E2 and the input of element E1 touch.
Where element E2 is a block with a free input, a connection can also be made by dragging the
mouse from an output from E1 to the trunk of E2. A connection with the free input at the highest
' .
'. position on E2 will be created when the mouse key is released. In the casewhere block E2 does
. I not have a free input but is an operator which can have an input added to it, a new input will be
automatically generated.
The output and input of a block can be connected together (feedback path) by using this method.
To establish a connection between two pins, click with the left mouse button on one pin, hold the
button down and thus drag the connection to the desired pin, where you then release the button. If
during the dragging of the connection extends outside working area of the editor,· scrolling occurs
automatically. For simple data types, type testing is carried out during the connection. If the types
of the two pins are not compatible, the cursor changes to ,Forbidden". For complex data types, no
testing takes place.
2) Changing connections
A connection between the output of an element E1 and the input of an element E2 can easily be
changed into a connection between the output of element E 1 and the input of element E3. The
------~--~- ~Jno_us.eJs.. clicke.d._on ..the.. input.of.E2,.the . left.mouse. keyis . keptdepressed,and--themouse--cursoris-
moved to the input of E3 and then released.
3) Deleting connections
There are a number of possibilities for removing the connection between the output of an element
E1 and the input of an element E2.
Select the output of element E1 and press the <Delete> key or execute the command 'Edit'
'Delete'. Several connections will be removed at the same if the output of E1 is connected to more
than one of inputs.
Select the input of element E2 and press the <Delete> key or execute the command 'Edit' 'Delete'.
Select the input of E2 with the mouse, hold the left mouse key depressed and drag the connection
from the input to E2 away. The connection is removed when the left mouse key is released in a
free area of the screen.
)> "Insert" menu
111
MAGS user
Figure 8.5-18 "Insert" menu in CFC POU
1) "Insert" "Box" Symbol: /IIJI Shortcut: <Ctri>+

This command can be used to paste in operators, functions, function blocks and programs First of
all, it is always inserted an "AND" operator. This can be converted by Selection and Overwrite of
the text into every other operator, into every function, into every function block and every program.
The input assistance serves to select the desired block from the list of supported blocks. lfthe new
block has another minimum number of inputs, these will be attached. If the new block has a
smaller highest number of inputs, the last inputs will be deleted.
2) "Insert" "Input" Symbol: B Shortcut: <Ctrl> + <E>
This command is used to insert an input. The text offered "???" can be selected and replaced by a
variable or constant. The input assistance can also be used here.
3) "Insert" "Output" Symbol: II Shortcut: <Ctri>+<A>

This command is used to insert an output. The text offered "???" can be selected and replaced by
a variable. The input assistance can also ·be used here. The value which is associated with the
input of the output is allocated to this variable.
4) "Insert" "Jump" Symbol: 111. Shortcut: <Ctri>+<J>

This command is used to insert a jump. The text offered"???" can be selected and replaced by the
jump label to which the program should jump.
The jump label is inserted using the command 'Insert 'Label'.
5) "Insert" "Label" Symbol: JR Shortcut: <Ctri>+<L>

This command is used to insert a label. The text offered "???"can be selected and replaced by the
jump label. In Online mode a RETURN label for marking the end of POU is autoiT)atically inserted.
The jump is inserted using the command 'Insert 'Jump'.
6) "Insert" "Return" Symbol: B Shortcut: <Ctrl> + <R>

112
IP'1f {.. ~I .g
Jl1oll ""'"'"" HOLLiAS MAGS Software User Manual
This command is used to insert a RETURN command. Note that in Online mode a jump label with
the name RETURN is automatically inserted in the first column and after the last element in the
editor; in stepping, it is automatically jumped to before execution leaves the POU.
7) "Insert" "Comment" Symbol: II Shortcut: <Ctrl> + <K>

This command is used to insert a comment.
You obtain a new line within the comment with <Ctrl> + <Enter>.
:> "Extras" menu
Figure 8.5-19 "Extras" "Order"
1) "Extras" "Order'' "Show Order''
This command switches the display of the order of execution on and off. The default setting is to
show it (recognized by a tick ( ) in front of the menu point).
The relevant order of execution number appears in the upper right hand corner for the elements
block, output, jump, return and label.
2) "Extras" "Order'' "Order topologically"
Elements are ordered in a topological sequence when the execution takes place from left to right
and from above to below, that is the number increases from left to right and from above to below
for topologically arranged elements. The connections are not relevant, only the location of the
elements is important.
All selected elements are topologically arranged when the command 'Extras' 'Order' 'Order
topologically' is executed. All elements in the selection are taken out of the sequential processing
list by this process. The elements are then entered into the remaining sequential processing list
individually from bottom right through to upper left. Each marked element is entered into the
sequential processing list before its topological successor, i.e. it is inserted before the element that
in a topological sequencing would be executed after it, when all elements in the editor were
113
IP"id \. 11 ~
. . """'""' HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
sequenced according to a topological sequencing system. This will be clarified by an example.
~
Icount ~!!!]
The elements with numbers 1, 2 and 3 are selected. If the command 'Order topologically' is
selected the elements are first taken out of the sequential processing list. Var3, the jump and the
AND-operator are then inserted again one after the other. Var3 is placed before the label and
receives the number 2. The jump is then ordered and receives the number 4 at first but this then
becomes 5 after the AND is inserted. The new order of execution which arises is:
~
Icount ~!!!]
·---~---~-· ··- · When·· a newly generated block is introduced i!Will be placed bydefalilfin.ffonfoTitsTopological .. ....... ··············· . ... ·i
successor in the sequential processing list.
3) "Extras" "Order" "Order everything according to data flow"
This command affects all elements. The order of execution is determined by the data flow of the
elements and not by their position.
The diagram below shows elements which have been ordered topographically:
Sequence before the ordering according to data flow
114
SUB
ADD
MUL ADD~
The following arrangement exists after selecting the command:
Sequence after the ordering according to data flow
SUB
ADD
MUL ADD ADD
When this command is selected the first thing to happen is that the elements are ordered
topographically. A new sequential processing list is then created. Based on· the known values of
the inputs, the computer calculates which of the as yet not numbered elements can be processed
next. In the above "network" the block AND, for example, could be processed immediately since
115
~{.t·l'li!
IIJ'4 ••""""" HOLUAS MAGS Software User Manual
the values at its inputs (1 and 2) are known. Block SUB can only then be processed since the
result from ADD must be known first, etc.
Feedback paths are inserted last.
The advantage of the data flow sequencing is that an output box which is connected to the output
of a block comes immediately after it in the data flow sequencing system which by topological
ordering would not always be the case. The topological ordering can deliver another result in some
cases than ordering by data flow, a point which one can recognize from the above example.
8.6 Start the POU
Any POU should be started and then begin calculating. There are two ways to start the POU, task
configuration and the main program calls the sub programs.
8.6.1 Task configuration
You can control the processing of your project using the task management.
A Task is a time unit in the processing of an IEC program. It is defined by a name, a priority and by
a type determining which condition will trigger the start of the task. This condition can be defined
by a time (cyclic, freewheeling) or by an internal or external event which will trigger the task, e.g.
the rising edge of a global project variable or an interrupt event of the controller.
Task configuration window. In the left part of the window the tasks are represented in a
configuration tree. There has a task named "MACSTask", main program "MACS_PRG" will be
started by the task. Select the task, in the right part of the window a task attributes dialog will be
displayed which belongs to the currently marked entry in the configuration tree. We may use the
default settings of the system:
116
MACS_PRGQ;
/
\
Figure 8.6-1 Task configuration
----- -rr--Name:aname-fOrffietasi<;-withthis name the task is represented in the configuration tree;

the name can be edited there after a mouse click on the entry or after pressing the <Space>
key when the entry is selected.
2) Priority: a number between 0 and 31; 0 is the highest priority, 31 is the lowers.
3) Type
~ Cycle: the task will be processed cyclic according to the time definition given in the field
"interval" (see below)
~ Freewheeling: the task will be processed as soon as the program is started and at the end of
one run will be automatically restarted in a continuous loop. There is no cycle time defined.
~ Triggered by event: the task will be started as soon as the variable, which is defined in the
event field, occurs. It depends on the target, which events will be supported and offered in the
selection list.
~ Triggered by external event
4) Properties:
~ Interval (for type '"cyclic"): the period of time, after the task should be restarted. If you enter a
number, then you can choose the desired unit in the selection box behind the edit field:
milliseconds (ms) or microseconds (f.!s). Enter the value in TIME format, e.g. T#250ms.
Tip: for a project, we may configure several tasks. However, we recommend only define one task,
117
specify the main program "MACS_PRG" be started by the task, and the other programs be started
by the main program.
8.6.2Main program
The MACS PRG is a special predefined POU. Each project must contain this special program. It
is used to call all the programs to be started. .
PO Us
E;i~ 10
I : . IQJ p_E_H (PRG)
j .. !Qj P_H_CT (PRG)
j ·IQJ P_H_E (PRG)
j..... !Qj P_H_PI (PRG)
j..···IQJ P_H_RTD (PRG)
, L... !Qj P_H_ TC (PRG)
(· $···@!! SysDev
~:~
'
Figure 8.6-2 MACS_PRG
8.7 Library manager _____ __1,
8. 7.1 Outline introduction

! ·, .
\ ..
Which types of calculation to be done or which controls to be realized in the project, we can
achieve them by ways of using the corresponding functions or the function blocks that the software
provided us. The functions and the function blocks had been classified according to its function,
stored in the special libraries. If you add the library in the library manager of the project, all the
functions and function blocks in the library can be used in any program. We also can see the
variable definition of the functions and function blocks in the library manger.
The library manager shows all libraries that are connected with the current project.
8.7.20pen library manager
The library manager is opened with the "Window" "Library Manager" command. You also can
double. click "Library Manager" in the "Resources" register card of the object organizer:
118
String Functions
CONCAT (FUN)
DELETE (FUN) RS
-SET:BOOL """' Q1 :BOOL-

- RESET1: BOOL ".J."
Figure 8.7-1 Library manager
The window of the library manager is divided into three or four areas by screen dividers. The
libraries attached to the project are listed in the upper left area. In the area below that, depending
on which register card has been selected, there is a listing of the POUs,Data types, Visualizations
or Global variables of the library selected in the upper area. Folders are opened and closed by
double clicking the line or pressing <Enter>. There is a plus sign in front of closed folders, and a
minus sign in front of opened folders. If a POU is selected by clicking the mouse or selecting with
'the arrow keys then the declaration of the POU will appear in the upper right area of the library
manager, and in the lower right is thegc<JPilic:diliPiaYJnJheJormof..a.black .. box.with.inputsand- ·
__,,... .. -· ·-oatpUts:·················································· . . .. . . . ---·····-··-·
8.7.3"Additional Library" and "Remove Library"
Click on "Additional Library" in the "Insert" pull-down menu or right click the upper left area of the
library manager and choose "Additional Library" command:
119
HS_PowerCal
HS_Special
HS_TimeField
HSDPdiagEXT
HSdpext
HSpaext
Figure 8.7-2 Additional Library
Select the name and click "Open", the library is now listed in the library manager and you can use
objects in the library. If the library is already in the manager, then it will pop up the dialog box:
With the "Edit" "Delete" command or right click the upper left area of the library and choose
"Delete" command you can remove a library from a project and from the library manager.
. ... 8.8 Examples ofwriting PO Us
\ 8.8.1 Four arithmetic operation example (CFC)
8.8.1.1 Description
The operations are: A01=AM01xAM02, AM03=AM04+A01. AM01, AM02, AM03 and AM04 are
AM tags, declare AM tags in global variables list and declare A01 as local variable.
8.8.1.2Create the POU and append program call
Press right mouse button in the "POUs" register card object organizer, click "Add Object"
command in context menu. POU name field enter "POU01", type field enter "Program", language
field enter "CFC". ·
120
Open work space of MACS_PRG, move the cursor over a new line of the body of POU, press
"F2" key, in Help Manager window select user defined program "POU01", then click "OK'':
--··-~•-•"-''--~•"-•'•-·--••--•-•••""---~·~·-··~-··o.-"''''"'•-~•,•---••-••••-·----·•-•••-••••••••-•·•-••••••-·•••-'"''''_,_,,,,_ •-••-•• "-'""'"'""•""''""''''""'-"-'"-''"'·'--'-•·"-"'-''"-•'•"-'-''''-'"''-'"'---•-•-•-•-"-'--"'-''-
121
"POU01" will be appended.
8.8.1.3Write the body part with CFC language
1) Insert multiplication operator.
Right click on POU01 body part, select "Box" command in context menu, an "AND" operator is
inserted where you click the mouse left button:
I
\
Figure 8.8-4 insert "BOX"
Select "AND", overwrite with text "MUL" or press "F2" key, in Help Manager window select FBD
Operator "MUL", click "OK":
122
;_
\.
2) Insert "lnpuf' and "Output"
Right click on POU01 body part, select "Input" command in context menu, move it on to a
appropriate location, select "Output" command in context menu, move it on to a appropriate
location.
I
i,
The text offered "???" can be selected and replaced by the variable or the constant. Type in the
first input variable "AM01", click outside, a dialog box will appear:
123
II
~i.,
l
~.
.
According to the requirement enter the fields, click "OK" when finished.
Tip: The dialog box for a variable declaration you also get by the command "Edit'" "Declare
variable". If the cursor is resting on a variable name, the auto declare window can be opened with
<Shift> <F2> with the current variable-related setting displayed.
Use the same method to declare AM02 in global variables list.
Select output and enter ""A01", enter the fields as follows:
( .
\·
3) Insert addition operator.
Similar with (1 ), choose "ADD" operator
124
.-\:
4) Insert "Input" and "Output"
Similar with (2), declare AM03, AM04 in global variables list.
Figure 8.8-11 Completion of POU01
8.8.2Timer delay ()p~ration example{(_[))
(- . 8-8.2.1 Description
'·
The operations are: when value of BOOL type variable K01 changes from FALSE to TRUE after 5
seconds, value of K02 will change from FALSE to TRUE and maintain 3 seconds, after that, K02
reset to FALSE.
field enter "CFC". POU02 is created:
125
Figure 8.8-12 POU02
8.8.2.3Write the body with LD Language
1) Insert "Contact"
Right click on POU02 body part, select "Contacf' command in context menu, the contact is preset
with the text "???":
i
\
Click on "???" and change it to the variable K01, enter the fields in auto declaration dialog box:
126
2) Insert "Function Block"
Right click on the network, select "Function Block" command in context menu, help manager will
then be opened, in the left column choose "Standard Function Blocks", select "TON" block of the
"Standard.lib" in the right column, confirm the choice with "OK".
l,
127
Click on "???" on top of the function block and change it to the function block instance name
TON01, enter the fields in auto declaration dialog box:
,,
Click on"???" on lower left input of TON01 and change it to a time constant "T#5S":
Similar with above, choose "TP" block and declare as local variable, enter input with "T#3S":
128
Figure 8.8-21 Completion of adding function block
3) Insert "Coil"
Right click on the output part, select "Coil" command in context menu, the coil is given with the text
"???" as a default setting:
TON01 TP01
IPTN.TON ..
Q
T#58 '-'---""""-"E:..:JT-
.. .
T#3S- PT
IN.TP
Q
ETr
Click on "???" and change it to K02, declare it in global variable list:
129
.1
~-.~ .
·...~.'_ !'
. "'.·.·
.
···:,
TON01
TON
IN~ Q
T#58- PT ~ ET-
8.9 Build
The project is compiled using "Project" "Build". The compilation process is basically incremental,
that is only changed POUs are recompiled. During compilation a message window is opened
which shows the progress of the compilation process, any errors and warnings which may occur
during compilation as well as information on the used POU indices and memory space (number
and percentage). Errors and warnings are marked with numbers. Using F1 you get more
information about the currently selected error.
With "Project" "Rebuild all", unlike the incremental compilation, the project is completely
recompiled. A non-incremental compilation can also be obtained if the command. "Project" "Clear
all" is first executed.
8.1 0 Download the controller
8.1 0.1 Outline introduction
Once the project has been set up and tested, it can be loaded down to the hardware and tested as
well. Download the controller is to load the files from the engineer station into the main controller
unit. According to the modified portions of the project, it is divided into "online change" and "load
all".
All PO Us that will be loaded into the controller on the next download are marked with a blue arrow
in the Object Organizer after compilation.
8.10.2 Communication parameters
Communication parameters for the connection between the engineer station and the main
controller unit should be configured before download the controller.
Click "Online" "Communication Parameters", you are offered a special dialog for setting
communication parameters when the communication between the local PC and the run-time
130
system is running over a gateway server in your system:
Motorola b,Yteorder
Figure 8.10-1 Communication Parameters dialog
Press "New ... " button, the dialog comes up:
Figure 8.10-2 New channel dialog
l> "Name": you can edit the channel name at this point. For example, enter "128.1 0"
l> "Device": the device drivers available on the gateway computer are listed in the table under
Device. Keep default "Tcp/IP".
Close the dialog with OK, select new channels, on initial setup, the standard "localhost" is offered
as the computer name (address) in the right part of the dialog, double click on it, replace
"localhosf' with actuaiiP address. (e.g. 128.0.0.10)
131
Each controller project may set four communication channels. Th~ir addresses are 128.0:0.n,
129.0.0.n, and 128.0.0. (128+n). 129.0.0. (128+n).
8.10.3 Login
Click on "Login" in the "Online" pull-down menu, this command combines the programming system
with the controller (or starts the simulation program) and changes into the online mode.
If the current project has not been compiled since opening or since the last modification, then it is
compiled now. If errors occur during compilation, then it does not change into online mode.
~~-~ -~ ~ · J~l~~;'§k'f!~tY~l~~~~~~i~a~~"c;~i~~~~!!~~~~~i~t:~~bP~~:~~f~~~7:·~~Fc~ni~e~~~~~~P~:~~:-- --- --~-~~~

name> <target identifier> .ri and which is put to the project directory. This file gets reloaded each
time the project is reopened and. at login it is used to check the code of which POUs has been
changed. *.ri file is used during online change to compare the current program with the one most
recently loaded onto the controller, according to the changes. system will open the "load all" dialog
or the "online change" dialog.
l> Load all:
Figure 8.10-4 Load all
Click "Yes" will execute "download all", it will cause the main control unit reset and re-initialization
of the variables. If any one of the following happened, the dialog box will be opened:
1) The project has not ever been downloaded to the controller before
132
-.~f.J"l'ii
I'J4i ""'""'"" HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
2) Execute "Project" "Clean all", all the information from the last download and from the last
compilation is deleted.
3) After modifications in "PLC_Configuration".
4) After modifications in "Task configuration".
5) After modifications in "Target Settings".
6) The program in the main control unit is lost.
l' Online change:
Figure 8.10-5 Online change
By answering "Yes" you confirm that, on log-in, the modification portions of the project are to be
loaded onto the controller, online change does not cause a re-initialization of the variables.
Changes may include:
1) Modifications of PO Us
2) Modifications of variable declarations.
8.11 Test
Once all errors have been removed, activate the simulation, log into the simulation controller. and
"load" your project in the "controller''. Now you are in online mode. The online commands become
available only after logging in. I
t
Click "Online" "Login", this command combines the programming system with the FCS (or starts ..j
······----··-···------Jhe_§imul!'l.tio.o_program).and.changes.intotheonline-mode'"Ciick·''Online'"'Logout";-theconnection· --~--··-·-···-·--·--j
~;~:.controller is broken, or the simulation mode program is ended and is shifted to the offline
Simulation mode ~
If simulation mode is chosen, then a check(") will appear in front of the menu item.
Tip: During the simulation the created program is not processed in the actual controller, but rather
in the calculator on which the software is running. All online functions are available. That allows
you to test the logical correctness of your program without FCS hardware.
In 4.8 "Examples of writing POU" we talk about how to write algorithms in POUs, now we begin to
test these two POUs in simulation mode. After login and running, open the workspaces of the
POUs and the corresponding global variables lists:
133
AM01=10
AMO:F10
TON01 TP01
KO~~ i ~,~l----,..-,,__jsj~ G Ei=,f-------------jr::::=::::::=::--:::··-::J·------1

1
Figure 8.11-1 Online mode window
1) Test "POU01"
Double click on AM01 in program or in global variables list, pop up the dialog for writing of
variables, enter 30 in "New Value" field:
Figure 8.11-2 Write AM01
Change values of AM02, AM04 to 20, 50:
134
AM01=1 0 30
AM02=1 0 20
Click "Online" "Write Values", get the ne.w result.
2) Test "POU02"
Double click on K01 in program or in global variables list:
135
Click "Online" "Write Values", realize the timer function.
Click "Online" "Logout" to exit online.
Tip: open database configuration software and compile. After that, AM01, AM02, AM03 and AM04
are added into AM database, K01, K02 are added into DM database.
Figure 8.11-7 OM database
136
9 Graph configuration
Graph configuration is used to generate graph page of application system. Through graph page,
operator can get clear view of field operation status at a glance, so as to monitor and control field
operation conveniently.
Industrial control system flow procedure graph includes static graph and dynamic graph. Static
graph represents static information of flow procedure screen, and they do not have any
relationship with database. Dynamic graph is graph unit that change in accordance with change of
real time value of database point, change contents can be color, size, shape and etc.
Graph configuration soflware provides user with multiple types of editing tools, including graph
generation, filling, compose, discompose, rotate, stretch, cut, copy, paste and etc, it is possible to
change and process graphs flexibly.
Graph configuration soflware provides multiple types of dynamic features, including color change
features, text, blink, show/hide, move horizontally, filling, scale, rotate, curve, X-Y graph and etc;
the graph configuration soflware also provides multiple types of triggering features, such as push
window, switch base graph, add/decrease value, online change database point value and etc.
Each graph page corresponds to one file.
Note: In this chapter, unless otherwise indicted, graph size is in unit of 0.1 pixels.
9.2 Access graph configuration
· ·· Select "Start" " "All Programs" : "MACs"····: "MAGS.:...ENG" =· "Graph"; ancrclick;·tnen projecr·· ·
information window pops up:
137
Select the project to be opened, click "Select" button, and then graph configuration interface can
be accessed.
138
1. Menu bar: Lists names of pull-down menus, user can select command in menus, when a
command is of grey color, and it indicates that the menu command is invalid currently.
2. System toolbar: icon buttons corresponding to some menu command. It can be dragged.
3. Drawing tool bar: provides basic graph to be used for drawing. It can be dragged.
4. Filling toolbar: provides various types of graph border line and various modes of graph filling.
It can be dragged.
5. Edit tool bar: provides various types of operation for graph edit. It can be dragged.
6. Color box: select foreground color and background color. The display method is"~", in
! which "1" is foreground color (border color) and "2" is background color (filling color). Click a
\
color block by using left mouse button, its color can be set as foreground color "1"; click by
using right button, then it can be set as background color "2". The system lists 36 types of
color blocks. If it is necessary to customize color, double click any color block, a dialog box for
editing color will pop up in the screen. It can be dragged.
7. Graph library: include system graph library and user graph library. The system graph library
stores system graph symbol objects, user graph library stores graph symbol objects defined
by user, graph symbol can be dragged to any position of the page by using mouse.
8. Status information bar: explains and describe each item of orders. When mouse is moved to
pull-down menu, toolbar or an item of system tools, relevant operation information will be
displayed.
9. Working area: graph page required by edit.
10. Cursor position bar: displays cursor position of current cursor in working area.
11. Graph specification bar: displays graph dimension of graph page drawn in current working
area.
139
9.3 Operation instruction
9.3.1 Page file
Select "File", open pull-down menu:
1) New: A new page file can be created by using this command. Click the command, or icon
in system tools, a blank window appears, it is provided to user to edit new graph page.
· · · · ···· ·· - ·2) Open: clickthecommand or icon II in system tools; awihdoWWilrpop op:
3) Close: Page file that is open currently can be closed by using this command, in case the
system prompts user to "Save changes to****?", select "Yes" if it is necessary to save, select
140
~\.1-l<S
IIJYI ""'"'"" HOLLiAS MAGS Software User Manual
"No" if not, and select "Cancel" to cancel the time of operation.
4) Save, Save All and Save As: Graph file can be saved by using these commands. When saving
new page file, save file window can pop up by clicking any command.
Figure 9.3-3 "Save as" window
Type in file name to be saved or saved as in "File Name", click "Save" and it is done.
After completing modification of existing page file, file can be saved on disk directly by clicking
"Save" command or clicking f!:l
button of system toolbar, original file contents will be modified. If
"Save As" command is clicked, system will pop up save file window, after typing in new file name
and clicking "Save", the modified page can be saved as another file, contents of original file remain
unchanged. Multiple pages of already open graph file can be saved by using save all commands,
by clicking "Save All" or clicking button IIIJ in system tool bar, all open page files can be saved on
disk.
- 5)- .. Import (File):

--~---- ~-~-~
select the command:
·--------- ____ _____ ·--------------·--------------------- -------- ------ -------
·--~---·--· "
Figure 9.3-4 "Import (File)" command
Ji> Standard Shapes: Standard graph can be drawn conveniently by using this command.
Click "Standard Shapes", one group of standard shape graphs that are overlaid together appears
on screen, select all objects, drag them to middle position of screen, and then spread graphs
overlaid together, a group of standard graphs can be acquired: triangle, quadrilateral, pentagon,
hexagon, heptagon, octagon, enneagon, decagon and pentacle.
Ji> Device Config: Transform the file generated by device configuration into graph file.
Click "Device Config", the system pops up wizard dialog box of import device configuration:
141
Step 1: select system device status diagram template "devmodel.hsg" as illustrated in Figure9.3-5.
Then click "Next".
Figure 9.3-6 Import device configuration 2
Step 2: select 10 device status diagram template in accordance with field control station. setup
diagram as illustrated in Figure 9.3-6. Then click "Next".
142
Manual
Step 3: device status diagram template list of field control stations, as illustrated in Figure 9.3-7. By
selecting "Choose all", device status diagram of all field control stations will be generated. Double
click at template list position behind each station number, and template of device status diagram of
each station can be selected again in pop-up pull-down bar. Then click "Nexf'.
143
Step 5: display results of each step of selection, as illustrated in Figure 9.3-9. Then click "Start".
The system will automatically generate system device status diagram, 10 device status diagram
and 10 station operation version display diagram. ·
After the system generates graph automatically, click "Open" in "File" menu, graph file generated
automatically can be seen in popup "Open" dialog box, as illustrated in Figure 9.3-10. Select and
open any files, device status diagram can be viewed offline, as illustrated in Figure 9.3-11,9.3-12
and 9.3-13. After completing configuration, download and operation, device status graph can be
displayed and viewed online.
144
I
145
Note:"When generating device status diagram again, it is necessary to close open device status
diagram first, then import modified device configuration content again in graph edit tools.
Otherwise device status diagram can not be updated. "
146
9.3.2Edit command
Edit is conducted regarding object selected in working area, select "Edit", open pull-down menu:
1) Undo: When user is unsatisfied with current operation, it can be cancelled by clicking this
command or icon Ill in system tools. It is possible to cancel several past operations. After
saving on disk, cancellation operation does not function.
2) Redo: Canceled operation can be recovered by clicking this command or icon in system
tools.
3) Cut: Select object, click this command, or icon in system tools, object is stored in
clipboard, original object selected disappears. ·
4) Copy: Select object, click this command, or icon 1!1!1 in system tools·, object is copies into
clipboard, original object selected still exits.
5) Paste: this command is ·only valid after completing "Cut" or "Copy" operation, click this
command or icon Ill in system tools:
147
Manual
,,
6) Accurate Paste: this command is only valid after completing "Cut" or "Copy" operation, click
this command:
Fill in accurate coordinate position, it is identical with "Paste" dialog box after confirmation,
contents in clipboard can be pasted to coordinate position selected in current screen after
selecting "OK".
7) Compose: Compose several separate graph objects as one graph object.

8) Decompose: Decompose a composed object into separate graph objects.
9) Change Order: When two graph objects overlay with each other, front/back order of two
objects can be changed by using this command. Firstly select the graph object intended to be
placed at the back, then select the graph object intended to be placed in the front, click this
command.
10) Reverse Around Line X: Reverse the selected object around line X.
11) Reverse Around Line Y: Reverse the selected object around line Y.
12) Select All: Select all objects on graph page.
13) Function Define: Functional key F1-F16 on special purpose keyboard can be defined by using
this command. Click this command:
148
(
9.3.3Draw tools
Click "Draw", open pull-down menu:
1) Line: Click "Line" command or icon in drawing toolbar, select needed border mode in
filling toolbar, select color in color box, move mouse to working area, the cursor is in the
shape of"+", click left mouse button to identify starting position (in accordance with center of+
mark), press left mouse button and drag to target position before releasing, and it is done.
Horizontal, vertical and 45° skew line can be drawn by pressing Shift Key simultaneously
when drawing.
149
2) Arc: Click "Arc" command, or icon in drawing toolbar, select needed border mode in
mark), press left mouse button and drag to target position before releasing, and it is done. 90°
arc can be drawn by pressing Shift Key simultaneously.
3) Polyline: Click "Polyline" command, or icon a in drawing toolbar, select needed border
mode in filling toolbar, select color in color box, move mouse to working area, the cursor is in
the shape of"+", click left mouse button to identify starting position (in accordance with center
of+ mark), press left mouse button and drag to target position of the first line before releasing,
then drag to target position of the second line before clicking left button, repeat the above
operation until the last border, finally click right button, then it is done.
Note: For closed polygon drawn by using this command, filling mode is invalid.
4) Text: click "Text" command, or icon .II

in drawing toolbar, move mouse to working area, the
cursor is in the shape of"+", drag mouse along diagonal line, create a text box, then type in
text;
Click text area by using mouse, so that eight small black dots appear surrounding text area (the
central round point is revolving center), click right mouse button, a menu pops up:
Figure 9.3-19 "Text" object right-click menu
)> Click "Font" command, font, font style, size, color, effect and etc can be selected:
150
MACS Software User Manual
}> Click "Modify Text" command, text in the working area can be modified.
}> Click "Property'' command, brim properties, closed area properties and background mode can
be defined.
Both "Brim" and "Closed Area" are aimed at background area.
After "back mapping mode" is set up as "Lucid", background color of text box is the color of the
151
lll'4d\.i·l.~
M ""''- HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
whole picture by default, "background color" command is only valid after setting up as "Opaque",
then background color of character can be set up at discretion.
5) Chord: Click "Chord" command, or icon 1111in drawing toolbar, select border mode and filling
mode in filling toolbar, select border color and filling color in color box; move mouse to working
area, the cursor is in the shape of "+", click left mouse button to identify starting position of
chord, release left button and drag mouse until formation of satisfied arc, then click left button
again and it is done.
6) Rectangle: Click "Rectangle" command or icon 8 in drawing toolbar, select border mode
and filling mode in filling toolbar, select border color and filling color in color box; move mouse
to working area, the cursor is in the shape of "+", click left mouse button to identify starting
position of rectangle, press left mouse button and drag to target position before releasing,
then drawing of rectangle can be completed. Square can be drawn by pressing Shift Key
simultaneously. ·
7) Pie: Click "Pie" command, or icon aj in drawing toolbar, select border mode and filling mode
in filling toolbar, select border color and filling color in color box; move mouse to working area,
the cursor is in the shape of"+", click left mouse button to identify starting position of pie graph,
press left button and drag mouse until formation of satisfied pie graph, then click left button
again.
8) Ellipse: Click "Ellipse" command or icon II in drawing toolbar, select border mode and filling
mode in filling tool bar, select border color and filling color in color box; move mouse to working
area, the cursor is in the shape of "+", click left mouse button to identify starting position of
ellipse, press left mouse button and drag mouse until formation of satisfied ellipse, rectangle
can be formed by clicking left mouse button. Regular circle can be drawn by pressing Shift
Key simultaneously.
9) Polygon: Click "Polygon" command, or icon • in drawing toolbar, select border mode and
filling mode in filling toolbar, select border color and filling color in color box; move mouse to
working area, the cursor is in the shape of "+", click left mouse button to identify starting
position of polygon, release left mouse button and drag to target point of the first line before
clicking left button again, then drawing of the first border of polygon is completed. Repeat the
above operation until the last border, click right button, then polygon needed is completed.
10) Round Rectangle: Click "Round Rectangle" command or icon • in drawing toolbar, select
________ !?oict~rmo!:l§-il.Odfi!lingmodein_fillingJoolb.ar.s.electbordeLcol.oLaodfiJiing_colorJo_coiocbox;
move mouse to working area, the cursor is in the shape of "+", click left mouse button to
identify starting position of rectangle, press left mouse button and drag it to target position,
·~ I
then round rectangle can be completed. Regular round rectangle can be drawn by pressing '
1
Shift Key simultaneously. ~
·ll!
-~
-'~
Being different from rectangle, round rectangle has one additional black square in the middle as
EJ.
illustrated in the figure .. in comparison with rectangle, place cursor on the square, radian
of four corners of rectangle can be changed by moving this square.
11) Image: Click "Image" command or icon • in drawing toolbar, move mouse to working area,
the cursor is in the shape of "+", click left mouse button to identify starting position of image,
press left mouse button to identify size of image frame, after releasing left button, the screen
will automatically pop up: ·
'-l
·:1
t1
152
j
I
-4il
i
Figure 9.3-22 Open "Image" window
User can select file name of graph needed in this window, and the graph can be inserted into
current screen by clicking open button.
12) Button: Click "Button" command or icon in drawing toolbar, move mouse to working area,
the cursor is in the shape of"+", click left mouse button to identify starting position of button,
press left mouse button and drag mouse to identify size of button, after releasing left button,
button can be drawn:
Click right mouse button on the button:
\...
Figure 9.3-23 "Button" object right-click menu
Button external shape can be modified by selecting "Button Shape" command:
153
~ Bitmap: when it is not selected, background color is valid, lucid color and bitmap are invalid, a
certain color can be selected as button background, once it is selected, background color is
invalid, lucid color and bitmap are valid, click the bitmap at the time, the following window will
pop up:
\ .
~ Font: Set up font of text displayed on button.

~ Shadow Width: Set up three-dimensional effect of button.
~ Original: Set up initial effect of button.
~ Def Text Region: Set up position of text displayed on button flexibly.
~ Def Dyn Feature: See details in dynamic features "Button".
~ Self Define: Click this command, set up button status to be used in dynamic feature.s:
154
I
I
~
~
ij
I
\ -
Figure 9.3-26 "User Define Button" window
Drawing toolbar:
~
~ Button is used for selecting graph object.
-------- ~-9.3.4~illing-toolbar-
discretion, "null" stands for no border;

can select any style as filling mode of graph at discretion_
9.3.5Edit toolbar
~Jiili
l!i!il~Reverse Around Line X: Reverse the selected object around line X.
155
W\..1·1-il
JIJ'<illlll•••'"""' HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
iilf±
;is.JlReverse Around Line Y: Reverse the selected object around line Y.
!ll!lcw Rotate 90 degrees: Rotate selected object clockwise by 90 degrees around axis passing
its rotation center.
•~~.;:;kompose Objects: Compose several separate graph objects as one graph object
~~~Decompose Objects: Decompose a composed object into separate graph objects.
IIJ]change order of two objects: When two graph objects overlay with each other, fronUback order
of two graphs can be changed by using this command.
(
II!Jchange Order Previous: Change order of previous graph object
'If
ll!,,;;Jchange Order Next: Change order of next graph object
""'"'""'"'
Bselect All Objects: Select all objects on graph page.
)li\Aiign Left: Align multiple objects selected left by making reference to a certain object.
~~~1Aiign Right: Align multiple objects selected right by making reference to a certain object
~
liiAiign Top: Align multiple objects selected top by making reference to a certain object
"'",""''""""·-·-- ·-~~--~---~-----~-~----- .... , ___ ~~--~-----~---·- -·---·~·---·~-----· ····--.. ~----·--~--·~·-·---·-··--~·-·~··---·-·· ..
-···-·~----·--· .. ·-·---~ ·--~~.-- . -- --···-·--·----------·---·. ·~·
!b~i~
[~~;;;;:{Align Bottom: By clicking this icon, multiple objects selected can be aligned bottom by making
( reference to a certain object
Rlvertical Center: Align multiple graph objects selected along central axis of vertical direction of a
certain object
f23t~
lite£s<t~Horizontal Center: Align multiple graph objects selected along central axis of horizontal
direction of a certain object
tllspace Across: Arrange multiple graph objects selected crosswise in equivalent space with two
objects on lefUright as starting/ending points.
lllllspace Down: Arrange multiple graph objects selected lengthwise in equivalent space with two
objects on top/bottom as starting/ending points.
tB1
!i'lfriis!Space Width: Make space width of multiple graph objects selected equivalent
156
~~:~sl HOLLiAS MAGS Software User Manual
!![~Space Height: Make space height of multiple graph objects selected equivalent. . ..,
Size: Make size of multiple graph objects selected equivalent
lEiNo Rotate: Resume graph to original position after rotating to any angle.
~JJ"'-"~,zj •
~Center Rotate: Resume changed rotating center to original position.

9.3.6Page
, property
Click "Property", open pull-down menu:
1) Set Grid Block:
Figure 9.3,28 "Grid" window
Size of effective working area can be set up .by using this command.
2) Set Size:
157
Size of effective working area can be set up by using this command.
3) Set Background:
~ Graph Background: Click the command:
Figure 9.3-31 "Graph Background"'
Select file name of background graph, after clicking "Open", background of working area can be
set as this graph.
~ Pure Color Background: Click this command, screen color board window pops up, as
illustrated in Figure 9.3-32, a type of color can be selected from color board. By pressing
"Define Custom Color (D) >>" button, define custom color window appears, as illustrated in
Figure 9.3-33, firstly select an initial color in light spectrum, then move arrow on the right until
getting satisfied color, click "Add to Custom Colors (A)", the color appears in "Custom Colors
(C)", click "OK" button, background is set up as this color (or input new value in E/S/L and
R/G/U boxes).
158
9.3.7User custom symbols
Graph symbol (usually a group of objects, of which dynamic features and trigger features can be
defined too) can be formulated in accordance with project demand.
:» Define symbol name
Click right button on graph symbol, select "Name":
159
After clicking, there appears:
Fill custom symbol name in graph name window, OK.
l> Add new symbol into user custom symbol library
Click right button in user graph library, select "New Directory'':
(
Figure 9.3-36 New directory
Select default directory name, custom symbol library name can be edited and modified.
Figure 9.3-37 Modify directory name
Select self-made symbol on graph page by using left mouse button, press "Ctrl" key on keyboard
at the same time, move symbol to new symbol library.
9.3.8Dynamic features
Dynamic object corresponds to database point defined. When setting up dynamic features and
trigger features property window of graph object, there are several general purpose items, which
are described as followings:
160
Item name Filling-in contents
Tao Name of database point.
Field name (item name) recorded in database. Usually current value of database point
is filled in, for example, fill in AV for analog point, fill in DV for digital variable point. Fill
in DS for description of database point. Please see details as per category name of
Item data and content of item name.
Domain The domain where the point is.
By using dynamic features, user can monitor point value of database online.
Select objects of which dynamic features should be set up, click right button, select "Dynamic
Features" command, window setup dynamic features can be pushed out:
9.3.8.1 Color change
After color change feature of object is defined, real time value of database point corresponding to
the object will change color when change condition of setup is met. Dialog box of color change
feature:
\.
161
Select "Has Color Change Feature", window contents become valid.
Color 1-color 5: each color option has its definition dialog box, therefore user can define color
change feature of five different colors for object simultaneously. Priority order of color change is
I
from color 1 to color 5.
l'- Tag: Name of database point.

l'- ·item: Field name of database record.
l'- Domain: The domain where the point is.
l'- Mask: It is possible to judge whether several bits of a 4-byte (32bit) value is 0 or 1 through the
mask off code. For example, to be "And" with a mask off code of value 2 (0010), it is possible
to judge whether the last bit but one of a 32bit value is 1.
l'- Color: Pull-down list provides 16 different colors, from which user can select one as specified
color for color change.
l'- Total change condition: After completing color change feature definition of a color, click "Add",
defined color change features appear in the window in form of list.
l'- Add: After setting up a condition, the condition can be added into "Total change condition"
window by pressing "Add" button, and other conditions can be added by the same method.
l'- Modify: Select a certain condition in "Total change condition" window, setup condition can be
modified by pressing "Modify" button.
l'- Del: Select a certain condition in "Total change condition" window, setup condition can be
deleted by pressing "Del" button.
Note: "Total change condition" is a group of logic arithmetic combination. Each. condition
162
IP'Jf \-. ti ~
,..,. """"""" HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
arithmetic result stands for Boolean value of true/false, conditions form a total result through
"AND". "OR" arithmetic.
9.3.8.2Text
Text feature is only valid for text object, and after text feature of object is defined, value of its
corresponding database point can be displayed on screen as per graph configuration, database or
time format. Dialog box of text feature:
Select "Has Text Feature", window contents become valid.
:.. Tag: Name of database point.

:.. Item: Field name of database record
:.. Domain: The domain where the point is.
:.. Show Time: Can show system time, it should be used in collaboration with relative time format
or absolute time format.
:.. Left: Align text object content left.
:.. Right: Align text object content right.
:.. Middle: Text contents are aligned in the middle.
:.. Graph Config: After input format in text box of "Analog Formaf' and "Digital Format", display
contents of text object according to this format when displaying.
:.. Analog Format: Use format of "XXXX.XX" to represent number of bits in front of/behind analog
decimal point.
:.. Digital: When digital variable is "1", display contents defined in space behind "1"; when digital
163
variable is "0", display contents defined in space behind "0".
Database: Display contents of text object according to format for database configuration.
Hex: Display text contents according to format of hexadecimal system.
Relative Time: Value of the database point is a time interval.
Absolute Time: If the object corresponds to time point, then any time format can be selected
from pull-down menu.
9.3.8.3Biink
After flash features of object is defined, when real time value of the database point corresponding
to the object meets flash condition, the graph blinks. Dialog box of flash feature:
Select "Has flash feature", window contents become valid.
l> Tag: Name of database point.

l> Item: Field name of database record.
l> Domain: The domain where the point is.
l> Mask: It is possible to judge whether several bits of a 4-byte (32bit) value is 0 or 1 through the
to judge whether the second bit of a 32bit value is 1.
l> Total condition: After completing definition of a flash feature, click "Add", the defined flashing
condition appears in the window in form of list.
164
9.3.8.4Show/hide
After show/hide features of object are defined, when value of the database point corresponding to
the object meets total show condition, the graph shows up, otherwise the graph does not show up.
Dialog box of show/hide feature:
/
\
Select "Is Show/Hide", window contents become valid.
:.- Tag: Name of database point.

:.- Item: Field name of database record.
:.- Domain: The domain where the point is.
:.- Mask: It is possible to judge whether several bits of a 4-byte (32bit} value is 0 or 1 through the
:.- Conditions Summary: After completing show feature definition, click "Add", defined show
condition appears in the window in form of list.
9.3.8.5Move
After move feature of object is defined, when real time value of database point corresponding to
the object meet value between show lower limit and show upper limit, move according to setup
conditions. Dialog box of move feature:
165
_,
Select "Can Horizontally Move", content of horizontal move becomes valid.
);> Select "Can Vertically Move", content of vertical move becomes valid.
);> Tag: Name of database point.
);> Item: Field name of database record.
);> Domain: The domain where the point is.
> Default Value: Is 0-100 if not selected; is database point configuration range if selected.
);> On: Set up the minimum value of corresponding database point value when move feature
occurs, after selecting Default Value, modification is impossible, it is set to lower limit of range
by default.
);> Up: Set up the maximum value of corresponding database point value when move feature
occurs, after selecting Default Value, modification is impossible, it is set to upper limit of range
by default.
);> Horizontal Move Distance: The horizontal distance from the position where object starts to
move to the position where object stops moving.
);> Vertical Move Distance: The vertical distance from the position where object starts to move to
the position where object stops moving.
After filling feature of object is defined, when real time value of database point corresponding to
the object meets value between display lower limit and display upper limit, filling is conducted
according to setup condition. Dialog box of the feature:
166
9.3.8.6Filling
the object meets value between display lower limit and display upper limit, filling is conducted
Select "Has Filling Feature", window contents become valid.

l> Direction: Set up direction of filling.
l> Color: Set up color of filling
l> Default Value of Range: Is 0-100 if not selected; is database point configuration range if
selected.
l> Display lower limit: set up the minimum value of corresponding database point value when
filling feature occurs, after selecting Default Value, modification is impossible, it is set to lower
limit of range by default.
l> Display upper limit: Set up the maximum value of corresponding database point value when
filling feature occurs, after selecting Default Value, modification is impossible, it is set to upper
limit of range by default.
9.3.8. 7Scale
After scale feature of object is defined, when real time value of database point corresponding to
167
kd\.~-1~
J'JI, _nonw~ys HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
the object meets the value between display lower limit and display upper limit, zoom-in or
zoom-out is conducted according to setup condition. Dialog box of scale feature:
-'
Figure 9.3-45 "Scale"
Select "Has Zoom Feature", window contents become valid.
l- Tag: Name of database point.

l- Item: Field name of database record.
l- Domain: The domain where the point is.
l- Center Spot: The center spot of graph object scale.
l- Min. Zoom Ratio: Zoom ratio corresponding to lower limit of display.
l- Max. Zoom Ratio: Zoom ratio corresponding to upper limit of display.
l- X Scale: Graph changes size in horizontal direction.
l- Y Scale: Graph changes size in vertical direction.
l- Default Scale: Is 0-100 if not selected; is database point configuration range if selected.
l- Dn: set up the minimum value of corresponding database point value when scale feature
occurs, after selecting Default Value, modification is impossible, it is setto lower limit of range
by default.
l- Up: set up the maximum value of corresponding database point value when scale feature
occurs, after selecting Default Value, modification is impossible, it is set to upper limit of range
by default.
168
9.3.8.8Rotate
After rotate feature of object is defined, when value of database point corresponding to the object
meets the value between display lower limit and display upper limit, rotate is conducted according
to setup condition. Dialog box of rotate feature:
)> Tag: Name of database point.

)> Item: Field name of database record.
)> Domain: The domain where the point is.
)> Default Value: Is 0-100 if not selected; is database point configuration range if selected.
)> Dn: set up the minimum value of corresponding database point value when rotate feature
by default.
)> Up: set up the maximum value of corresponding database point value when rotate feature
occurs, after selecting Default Value, modification is impossible, it is set to upper limit ofrange
by default.
)> Center Spot: Center spot of graph object rotate.
)> Rotate Center: Define rotate center of graph object by using mouse.
)> Auto Rotate: After object is set to auto rotate, auto rotate condition and auto rotate speed are
changed to valid.
)> Auto Condition: Condition of occurrence of auto rotate, auto rotate will occur when set up
conditions are met, it does not rotate according to change of database point value.
)> Rotate Speed: Rotate speed when reaching auto rotate.
169
.,...~ti .oJ
M """"'" HOLLiAS MAGS Software User Manual
J;> Smallest Angle: Display angle corresponding to lower limit.
J;> Biggest Angle: Display angle corresponding to upper limit.
9.3.8.9Curve
After curve feature of object is defined, the object traces and displays real time value of database
in form of curve. Dialog box of curve feature:
{
'··
Select "Has Curve Feature", window contents become valid.
J;> Tag: Name of database point.

J;> Item: Field name of database record.
J;> Domain: The domain where the point is.
J;> Y Display Range: Database point value range corresponding to full scale of curve window.
J;> Coordinates: User can select any one type from 8 types of coordinates as curve display
method.
J;> BK Color: Display color of curve window.
J;> Scroll Trace: When final point of time axis is traced and displayed, curve continues tracing
after scrolling time axis for a distance in reverse direction. Scrolling distance can be 1/4, 1/2
and 3/4 of window or the entire window.
J;> BK Grid: Display grid pattern of curve window.
J;> Refresh Interval: Pixel number corresponding to each refresh interval.
J;> Grid Interval (XN): Pixel number between adjacent grids in X line or Y line direction.
170
~ Line Color: Color of grid line.
9.3.8.10 X-Y graph
I
l.·.··:·l·
Figure 9.3-48 "X-Y Graph"
Select "Has X-Y Graph Feature", window contents become valid.
~ Tag: Name of database point of X or Y line.

~ Item: Field name of database record.
~ Domain: The domain where the point is.
~ Value Range: Value range of database point.
~ Tag Display: Two methods of"·" and "x" can be selected
~ Link points or not: Two methods of "Single point" and "Form 1 line" can be selected
~ Newest Tag Color: The newest point color can be selected. ·
~ Other Tag Color: Historical point color can be selected.
~ Time Interval: Display interval of two value point.
~ Note: X-Y curve is only valid for rectangle, and when a rectangle has this feature, other
dynamic features are all invalid.
171
9.3.9Trigger features
By using trigger features, user can modify point value of database online, besides Tip display,
authorization check can selected during online operation for other trigger features, i.e. operation
can be conducted only after valid user name is inputted when being online. ·
Select the object for which trigger features are to be set up, click right button, select "Trigger
Features", window setup trigger characteristics can be pushed:
9.3.9.1 Push window
Window can be pushed online, such as PID adjustment window, push window dialog box:
172
\ . Select "Can Push Window'', window contents become valid.
» Push Wnd While Base Graph Opened: After opening base graph, user can push window
without clicking with mouse.
» XY: The specific position of push window displayed in working area. In which, "pels" is the
basic unit for constituting graph.
» Window Type: Window types include common window, PID window, manual operator (open
loop), manual operator (close loop), sequence control, regulating valve and etc, demanded
type can be selected from pull-down list frame.
» Window Name: The item matches with selected window type, if window type is "PID window'',
the item corresponds to name of HSPID type point in database edit.
» If window type is "common window'', it is necessary to fill in graph name including suffix, such
as: XXX.HSG.
» Domain: If it is database point, input the domain where the point is.
» Conditions: Determine condition before pushing window, push window only when condition is
met
» Check Authority: Select authority check, click "Add", dialog box pops up:
173
After filling-in and determination, user names are listed in authority window. When operating online,
use this user name to log in, relevant operation can be conducted only after conformity of system
check.
Note: Window is different from base graph, base graph can occupy the whole screen when being
online, and can not move; window is normally smaller, and can move freely on base graph.
9.3.9.2Switch picture
( Trigger switch picture dialog box:
174
Manual
\.
Figure 9.3-52 ''Switch Picture"
Select "Has the feature of switching", window contents become valid.
Picture Name: fill in name of trigger switch picture, such as XXX.HSG.
9.3.9.3Add value
The function is used for automatic increment or decrement defined for database value of the point
that has defined the feature when being online. Increase/decrease value dialog box:
\.
Select "Increase/Decrease Value", window contents become valid.

l> Increase: Increment or decrement of each time,
l> For analog, input "2" if it is intended to increase by 2; input "-2" if it is intended to decrease by
2.
l> For digital variable, if only "1" can be inputted, it means that the digital variable is "0" initially,
becomes "1" after implementation of the operation, and becomes "0" after implementation of
the operation again. For example: used to realize button featuring self-locking function.
l> Check Limit: Valid when "Permit" is selected, upper/lower limits can be restricted. For example,
used to realize output amplitude limit of valve opening degree.
l> Re-confirm: Click the object, push confirmation dialog box, and implement Increase/Decrease
Value only after confirmation, input contents of confirmation dialog box here.
Note: For digital variable, "character string 0110 character string" can be added into the second
time confirmation information, then when operator is online, different confirmation information will
pop up according to its point value, when value changes from 0 to 1, character string in front of
176
-~ti~
PJill """'""" HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
0110 pops up, when value changes from 1 to 0, character string behind 0110 pops up.
9.3.9.40nline change DB point value
Click object online, a simple dialog box will pop up, database point value can be modified. Online
change DB tag value dialog box:
II
/
' /
9.3.9.5Refresh one time
The function can refresh parameter value on current screen when being on line, so as to display
one group of new value. Trigger refresh one time dialog box:
177
Figure 9.3-55 ''Trtgger Refresh One Time"
Select "Can Refresh": window contents become valid.
l> Time Tag: Display time point of trigger refresh.
9.3.9.6Tip display
The function is to display description content automatically, when being online, place mouse on
object featuring tip display function, a window describing selected object can pop up automatically.
Descriptive text can be set up separately, and can be displayed according to relevant items of
database configuration. Tip display dialog box: ·
178
I
'
Figure 9.3-56 "Trigger lip Display
Select "Has THE feature of showing", window contents become valid.
> Tag: Name of database point.

> Item: Field name of database record.
~ Domain: The domain where the point is.
~ Show fixed string: type in character string of tip display in window;
~ Show value or name of tags: "Show fixed string" can no longer be set up after selecting this
item.
9.3.9.7Set bit
This function can set digital variable to 0, and set to 1 after one arithmetic cycle. Dialog box of
trigger set bit:
179
Select "Has feature of setting" item, window contents become valid.
l>- Tag: Name of database point.

l>- Item: Field name of database record.
l>- Domain: The domain where the point is.
180
9.3.10 "Standard Algorithm Block Symbol" in user graph

.library
El · :a~ User Graph Lib

B··-.:: Standard Algorithm Block Symbol
. ··Iii Analog Measure Tag
.... Analog Measure Tag +UT
··!iii Digital Measure Tag
··ill HSALGMAN(Ciosed Loop)
···Ill HSALGMAN(Open Loop)
ill HSCSLAVE5
·Ill HSDLCTRL5
. ··Ill HSSCS5
'·····!ill HSVAVLE5
Figure 9.3-58 "Standard Algorithm Block System"
"Standard Algorithm Block Symbol" is symbol provided by the system by default to simplify user
configuration, it already has classic dynamic feature and triggering features. User drags it to flow
chart, selects symbol, clicks right button and selects "Dynamic Shortcut Define":
Define window pops up:
Fill in substitutive point name (should be point name already defined in database) in cell
181
9.3.11 Simulating display
The command can simulate online mode when being offline, display dynamic feature and trigger
feature of graph and text. Click "View", pull-down menu pops up, select "Simulating", or click M.
button in system toolbar:
Figure command
Access simulating online operation screen, click "OK'' in login dialog box and it is done (engineer
level user of the system by default).
Move mouse to lower left direction of screen, offline simulating input window will move rightwards:
182
Fill in an analog tag name in database behind "Analog Tag Name", then move sliding index pointer
below from 0 to 100%, enabling value of the analog to vary from project zero scale to project full
scale, if no specific point name is filled in, then all analog value in database can vary from project
zero scale to project full scale.
Fill in a digital tag name in database behind "Digital Tag", then click "Set 0" and "'Set 1" button
below, the digital variable can be set to 0 or 1, if no specific point is filled in, then all digital
variables in database can be set to 0 or 1. ·
183
10 Report Configuration
Report is classified as fixed time report and real time report:
:» Fixed time report: data record and statistics of production process are printed at.a fixed time,
print is !rigged through online configuration.
:» Real time report: report of a certain time or historical report is printed at random, and is !rigged
manually.
10.2 Access report generation system
Select "Start"- "All Programs"- "MAGS"- "MACS_ENG"- "Report'', click:
~- .
"Select DB" window appears on screen:.
184
Select DB ":f'_q~
NEWPRO
Figure 10.2-2 Select DB window
Double click demanded project name by using left mouse button, access report edit screen, where
there is a control menu bar in right upper section:
Figure 10.2-3 Report edit screen
1. Title bar
2. Menu bar
3. Commonly used tools bar
4. Format tools bar
5. Edit bar
6. Area of active cell
7. Select all button
8. Active cell
9. Cell row number
10. Cell column number
185
11. Worksheet label
12. Worksheet label scroll button
13. Worksheet scroll bar
14. Work table edit area
15. Worksheet control menu bar
16. Status bar
Note: Please complete configuration of database before accessing report edit. Please install
Open0ffice2.2 software on computer before using report configuration software.
Control menu bar:
10.3.1 "Report" tool
Click "Report" button:
1) New Report: A new report file can be created by using this command.
2) Open Report: Open saved report file.
3) Print Test: Print effect can be simulated in advance by using this command.
·······~······· ~ ...:11~~(lye.RePe>rt:.S;:~YereportJile.. Please. save.report. file . inreportfolderofcurrent-projecL ·
10.3.2 "Point" tool
Definition of dynamic point is the key for formulation of report, only after user defines dynamic
point, can report read data from database and display. Before adding dyriamic point, normally
appearance style of report and static form should be formulated first.
Figure 10.3·2 "Point" menu
1) History Point:
Click "History Point":
186
Figure 10.3-3 ''History Point"
Point name: Point name of database.

Time forward: The time interval from the time when report is printed to the first point
demanded to be printed.
Time interval: The time interval between two adjacent history points.
Direction: Arrangement direction of historical data printed out, two types of vertical or
horizontal direction can be selected through pull-down arrow at right side of display box.
Num: Point number required to be printed.
Format: Select relevant data display format according to different history library point, i.e. print
format, five types namely default, integer, switch, floating point and scientific counting can be
selected. When selecting different format types, display format information will change
accordingly, user can further determine display format. ·
Col Row: Determine cell position for inserting dynamic point, it is possible to select through
button at the left side of column/row display box.
Write: .click .this butt()n !() in~E:lrt clYil~micpoinLE:loite.d currentlyinto . selected . .•cell, .. meanwhile
aefinilion.formaf ()f the dynamic point can be displayed in the cell.
Verify: Validity of database of dynamic point name edited currently can be verified by clicking
this button
2) Real-time Point:
Click "Real-time Point":
187
·Jo> Point name: Database point name.
J;> Item: Item name of the data point, it can not be void.
J;> Format: Select relevant data display format according to different data points.
J;> Write: Click this button to insert dynamic point edited currently into selected cell, meanwhile
definition format of the dynamic point can be displayed in the cell.
3) Time Point:
Click "Time Point":
J;> Time For: Identical with history point.

J;> Time Interval: Identical with history point.
J;> Display format: Select print format of time type data point, relevant English or Chinese format
provided in pull-down list box of date and time.
J;> Write: Click the button, insert dynamic point of current edit into selected cell, meanwhile
J;> Display direction: Identical with history point.
J;> Number: Identical with history point.
J;> Col Row: Identical with history point.
188
kf~ti.S
Jlill """""'"' HOLLiAS MAGS Software User Manual
4) Modify Point: If setup dynamic point information needs to be modified, it is necessary to select
the dynamic point cell first, and then click "Modify Point" command, the dynamic point dialog
box will pop up, and then modification can be conducted.
10.3.3 "Compile" tool
The command compiles the current worksheet, and can check correctness of dynamic point
description, and data validity of point name or item name, if compilation is successful, prompt
window pops up as follows:
Figure
Otherwise, error prompt information will pop up, requiring correction of data and compilation again
until success of compilation
10.3.4 "Exit" tool
Click "Exif' button, then close report and exit report configuration.
189
11 Download Tool
Download includes three parts namely download of controller, download of server and download
of operator station. Download of controller is completed in controller algorithm configuration
software (see specific operation in Chapter 4, hereunder unnecessary details will not be given),
download of server and download of operator station are to be completed in engineer online
download software, hereunder we introduce engineer online download software in details.
Note: Before downloading, firstly ensure that project has been compiled in database general
control.
11.2 Access engineer download software
Select "Start"- "All Programs"- "MACS"- "MACS_ENG"- "Download", and click:

-"'
Select project dialog box pops up:
·.•
'
190
Figure 11.2-2 Select project dialog box
After clicking project, click OK, logon window pops up:
Logon with system default engineer user (user name: hollymacs, password: macs), open
---downloadwindow:----- ·····------····-- ····· · · ----·-·---~ ···-···- ·-·-····-·-··-··-··-
191
11.3 Download server
Select one unit of server in "Download" window, such as a master:
i
..1"---.
192
Figure .11.3-1 Download server station
Current IP address of selected server is displayed at right side, check IP address and relevant field
control station list, and all download files are selected by default in window below, click
"Download" button to download the download file to server. ·
Note: In order to enable download to take effect, choose to select "Restart Server after download"
before download.
1 .4 Download operator station
Select "Operator'' in "Download" window, then select operator station (all operator stations in
default field are selected) to be downloaded in the operator station list at the right side:
193
All download files are selected by default in window below, click "Download" button, then graph
and. report contents in download file can be downloaded into start catalogue of operator station.
194
~~~~~ MACS Software Configuration Manual
12 HOLLiAS MACS Download of Server
When HOLLiAS MAGS server software is installed, only after download the configuration finished
on engineer station to server and each station can run each station software and server software.
12.1 Generate Download Files
First generate download files before download. Click "Start"- "All Programs"- "MACS" -
"MACS_ENG" - "Database" to open database general control and click "Compile" - "Compile All" to .
compile the project. After compilation generate download files automatically.
(
12.2 Download of Server
Start to download after the project is compiled completely. Download includes three parts namely
download of controller, download of server and download of operator station. Here we introduce
download of server in details and see specific manuals for the download of other stations.
D Note:
• The sequence of download is: first download of controller, second download of server in order
to ensure the symbol list consistent, at last download of operator station.
Click "Start"- "All Programs"- "MACS"- "MACS_ENG"- "Download" and the "Select Project"
dialog box appears, shown in figure 12.2-1. After clicking project, click "OK", "logon" window pops
up, shown in figure 12.2-2. Fill in the right name and password in the dialog box.
195
Figure 12.2-1"Select Project" dialog box
Eigure.12.2-2.:'Logon':. dialog. box....
Note:
• I he name and passport to logon the engmeer stabon to download needs to be set 1n engineer
offline configuration sofiware in advance.
Click "OK" to logon and "NewENSManage" window pops up, shown in figure12.2-3.
196
. :z009Jo9/2tts:02:10
Figure 12.2-3 "NewENSManage" window
Select "A master" in "Download" catalog in "NewENSManage" window, select "Notice all
Ops", "Restart Server after download" and control station number to be updated in "OPS/Server
List" catalog, select the files to be downloaded in "File List" catalog, shown in figure12.2'4.
(.
Figure 12.2-4 "NewENSManage" window after server selected
0.... Note:
• Download server A, server.B respectively and download each server through one IP address.
197
Generally download the slave server first, log off, restart and switch it to master server and
then download the original master server (as a result of the switch, now it's the slave server) .
• If "Notice all Ops" selected, when downloading at the lower right corner of the operator
station's screen a window pops up which displays the server downloading. Otherwise, without
notice.
• If "Restart Server after download" selected, server will restart after download automatically.
Only after restart the server after download can the downloaded contents take effect.
• For the first download select all the field control stations, and afterwards select the field
control stations to be updated.
• When some variables change in one field control station or "Clean all" is done in controller
algorithm configuration software, it's necessary to download server and select this FCS. And
before restarting the server after· download and switching it to master, remember not to
operate this station equipment.
Click "Download" button to download. Downloading in yellow, download fail in red, and download
OK in green, shown in figure12.2-5.
(.
Figure 12.2-5 "Download Option" dialog box
198
MAGS Software Configuration Manual
13 HOLLiAS MACS Server Software
In this chapter the function of each process during HOLLiAS MACS server software operating is
introduced.
Q Prohibitory:
• The check, modify and exit of each server process must be done under the authorization and
instruction of Hollysys technical staff. It's prohibited to change, exit each server process and
related settings arbitrarily.
13.1 Start HOLLiAS MACS Server Software
After the HOLLiAS MACS server software is installed, it will start automatically when restarting the
computer. If the server is not downloaded from engineer station, the "Process Management"
window pops up, shown in figure13.1-1. Restart after download is needed.
Figure 13.1-1 the server without downloading process management interface

Clicking "Stop and Quit" to quit the server process. By"restarting the computer, log-off or
clicking "Start"- "All Programs"- "MACS"- "MACS_SERVER"- "Start Server", server process
can be started again.
199
13.2 HOLLiAS MACS Server Process Management
13.2.1 Start Server Process
After the server is downloaded from engineer station, and when starting server the "Process
Management" window pops up, shown in figure 13.2-1. All the started server processes are
displayed in "Process Management" interface and taskbar. When all the processes are started up,
the processes in "'Process Management" interface and taskbar will hide.
Figure 13.2-1"Process Management" interface
:.0 Note:
• When all the processes are started up, the processes in "Process Management" interface and
taskbar will hide. To check or change, click the "Process Managemenf' menu on the right side
oftaskbar.
200
MACS Software Configuration Manual
13.2.2 Server Process Management
Click the right mouse key on the .. g, icon on the right side of the taskbar, and in the pop-up
context menu , server settings, show/hide can be done.
i
0 Note:
• Only after logon correctly can the items in the context menu be .lighten
then you can manage the server.
a) Logon
Select "User Logon" in the right menu and "User Logon" dialog box pops up, shown in
figure13.2-2. Fill in "Username" and "Password" and then click "OK" button and logon
successfully.
Figure 13.2-2 "User Logon" dialog box
Q Note:
• I he name and passport to logon needs to be set m engineer offi1ne cont1gurat1on softWare in
advance. They are the same with that in engineer station download.
b) Server Settings
•
201
Select "Server Settings" in the context menu and "Server Settings" dialog box pops up, shown
in figure13.2-3. In the dialog box, "Server A orB", "GPS port", "History database path' and "Post
trip path" can be modified. Click "OK" to save the modification.
Figure 13.2-3 "Server Settings" dialog box

c) Server Show
!:>elect ''ServerS how·: in .the context menu .and. aiLihe started processes will display in the ...
taskbar, shown in figure13.2-4.
Figure 13.2-4 Taskbar
All the processes in "Process Management" interface are as follows:
~ NewTaskDiag.exe: new task diagnosis process, monitor all the HOLUAS MACS processes,
if a certain process exits, log-off and restart server
~ MACSinit.exe: initialization process, displaying the information such as project name, domain
No., server node No. and so on
~ NewDsvrDiagnose.exe: double server diagnose process, manage the master/slave status of -,'l'
the two servers, when the master server fails switch the slave server to master server
~ SNet_Svr.exe: network management process, manage system network data
~ ReaiNet.exe: real network management process, manage data communication among
different parts is management network, such as communication between operator station and
server, communication among servers in different domains.
~ GatewayWatch.exe: system network communication management process, manage
GMonitor program which is used to communicate with DPU, restart GMonitor if abnormal
202
-~~~,;! MACS Software Configuration Manual
» RTDBManage.exe: real-time database management process, update real-time data of each
10 point
» TransmitEventMsg.exe: transmit event message process, responsible for transmitting
message among different functions of server
» EventProcess.exe: event processing process, deal with log
» Posttrip.exe: post trip process, deal with the contents related with post trip
» NewHDBServer.exe: history database process, archive from real-tirne data to historical
record
» ServerStandardCacl.exe: server standard calculation process, operate server algorithm
configuration
» NodeDiagnose.exe: node diagnose process, status diagnose of upper equipment
Jr CheckJime.exe: check time process, system check time, including software check time,
hardware check time, check time among domains and so on
» Syswatch.exe: system watch process, not useful now
» NetvarExchange .exe: network variable exchange process, deal with the communication of
network variables among domains
Q Note:
• The main function of all the server process windows is to check the status for engineering
staff and developers, except for the modification of history database path and protective
Click in the taskbar and in the "Process Management" interface, click "Hide"
to minimize the window while click "Stop and Quit" to quit server process.
d) Server Hide
Select "Server Hide" in the context menu and all the processes in the "Process Management"
interface and taskbar will hide. Click "Server Show" to show all the processes in the taskbar.
Select "User Logout" in the context menu and the menu will be grayed and no operation can be
done. Click "User Logon" in the context menu and fill in the "Name" and "Password" in the "User
Logon" dialog box to re-logon.
13.3 Initialization Process "MACSinit.exe"
When "Process Management" is in "Server Show'' mode, click "Initialization Task" in the taskbar
and "Initialization Task" window pops up, shown in figure13.3-1. From this window the project
information and server node information can be known.
203
'i"
Figure 13.3-1"1nitialization Task" window
0 Note:
• "Initialization Task" window displays the real-time project information and server state and
can't be changed manually.
13.4 New Task Diagnosis Process
"NewTaskDiag.exe"
When "Process Management" is in "Server Show" mode, click "NewTaskDiag" in the taskbar
and "NewTaskDiag" window pops up, shown in figure 13.4-1. The diagnosis information is
displayed in the window. "NewTaskDiag" monitors all the HOLLiAS MACS processes, if a certain
process exits, switch the server, log-off and restart the server.
Figure 13.4-1 "NewTaskDiag" window
204
Iliff\. tJog
M.HOu't;sg:s MAGS Software Configuration Manual
Click "Refresh" in "NewTaskDiag" window, the detailed information of each task will be displayed
and real-time updated, shown in figure13.4-2.
·_0/
Figure 13.4-2 "NewTaskDiag" window after refresh
Click "Refresh" again, system will not refresh task information and the "Refresh" becomes
"Un-refresh". Click "Un-refresh" again and it becomes "Refresh", then system will start to refresh
task information. Click "Clear'' to clear diagnosis information.
13.5 Real Network Management Process
"ReaiNet.exe"
When "Process Management" is in "Server Show" mode, click "Rea1Net3.3" in the.taskbar and the
"Rea1Net3.3" window pops up, shown in figure13.5-1. Network management process is
responsible for monitoring the data communication of different parts of network, such as the data
communication between operator station and server, the data communication between servers in
different domains and so on.
205
Figure 13.5-1"Rea1Net3.3" w"1ndow
Click "MNET (Domain) Transmitting Information" in "Rea1Net3.3" window, and "MNET (Domain)
Transmitting Information" window pops up, shown in figure13.5-2. This window shows the MNET
(domain) network state between servers in different domains.
Figure 13.5~2 "MNET (Domain) Transmitting Information" window
206
tpg~t;"!;1
M. :»on\fSll$ MACS Software Configuration· Manual
Click "MNET Transmitting Information" in "Rea1Net3.3" window, and "MNET Transmitting
Information" window pops up, shown in figure 13.5-3. This window shows the MNET network state
between operator station and server.
Figure 13.5-3 "MNET Transmitting Information" window
Click "Diagnose Network" in "Rea1Net3.3" window and "Information" window pops up, shown in
figure13.5-4. This window shows the network state for each station in the domain and user
information built in operator online running software.
207
Normal
station-50
station-51
station-52
Malfunction
Malfunction
Malfunction
Malfunction
Malfunction
Malfunction
i
~
:~
station-53 Malfunction Malfunction !:
station-54 Malfunction Malfunction
station-58 Malfu.nction Malfunction
station-60 Invalid Invalid
( station-63 Invalid Invalid
Figure 13.5-4 "Information" window
13.6 Post Trip Process "Posttrip.exe"
When "Process Management" is in "Server Show" mode, click "Post Trip" in the taskbar and the
"Post Trip" window pops up, shown in figure13.6-1. Post trip process is used to deal with incidents
related to post trip.
208
Figure 13.6-1"Pos!Trip" window
Click "Clear Info" in "Post Trip" window to clear all the recorded information. Click "Hide" in "Post
Trip" window to minimize the window.
13.7 History Database Process "NewHDBServer.exe"
When "Process Managemenf' is in "SeiVer Show" mode, click "History Database 2.1 V" in the
taskbar and the "History Database 2.1V" window pops up, shown in figure13.7-1. The history
database process is responsible for the archiving from real-time data to historical record.
·.1
,
" j
.
~
~
It~
209
Figure 13.7-1 "History Database 2.1V" window
The default protective purview is 2048M, and one can fill in the blank after "Protective capacity" to
set protective purview. Click "Confirm Modification" to set a new "Current protective purview" value.
If the available physical memory is less than the current protective purview, the system will
........................................ automatically delete the oldest histol)'datl'lt>ase filelo~Jainspac;e,sho\Vninfigure1_3J~?,
i
!
210
FOLDEER D: \MACSV\MACSV_SERVER\}([STDATA. \HDB\ 2008-12-14
ENOUGH DIGITAL SPACE
D: \MACSV\MACSV_SERVER\HISTDATA\HDB \ 2008-12-15
'<it
§ii
Figure 13.7-2"History Database 2.1V" window without enough space
I
'"~
13.8 Network Variable Process '''N~
:~l
~--,,
"NetvarExchange.exe"
When "Process Management" is in "Server Show" mode, click "NetvarExchange" in the taskbar
and the "NetvarExchange" window pops up, shown in figure13.8-1. Network variable exchange
process is used to deal with the communication between network variables among domains. ·
211
>J
Figure 13.8-1 "NetvarExchange" window
1. function of network variables among domains
Transmit all the network variables in one domain or station to another domain or several domains.
2. control station algorithm configuration of network variables among domains
Control station algorithm configuration of network variables among domains is the same with that
in one domain.
3. server configuration file of network variables among domains
In server installation path, click ConfigNetvar.exe, shown in figure13.8-2, and add network variable
·· ·irfthiswindow: · ·········································· ·································································································································································
~- ~.· ·.
..
IJii
i>f
212
0 1 Domain No. that NetVar arrived: 1
(
Figure 13.8-2 "ConfigNetvar'' window
When the network variable is configured, restart the configured server or click "Reread station no.
and domain no." in "NetvarExchange" window in all the configured servers, shown in figure 4.8-3.
j
~1i
. . I
i
I. I
I
-)
·i

t
.
·~
'I
i
213
13.9 System Watch Process "Syswatch.exe"
System watch process "Syswatch.exe" is un-useful now, so disable "Syswatch.exe" when using
HOLLiAS MACS server software. Otherwise, the errors may occur, such as communication error '·'
between HOLLiAS MACS server and operator station, displaying offline state of operator station
and server.
13.1 0 Network Management Process
"SNet Svr.exe"
After server process is started, an icon will appear in the launch bar of taskbar. Click the icon
and "System network drive component" dialog box pops up, shown in figure13.10-1. The process
corresponds to SNet_Svr.exe, and is used for network management. Click "10 station
long-distance supervision and control" to switch the displayed contents, and it's shown in
figure13.1 0-2.
.,,;
Figure 13.10-1 System network drive component-System Net
214
i
!
·iJ
Figure 13.10-2 System network drive component- 10 station long-distance supervision and control
13.11 System Network Communication
Management Process "GatewayWatch.exe"
After se!Ver process is started, an icon will appear in the launch bar of taskbar. Click the
right mouse key and the context menu is shown in figure13.11-1. System network communication
management process is used to manage the GMonitor process which communicates with the
controller and restart GMonitor if abnormal.
Figure 13.11-1 Right menu
Click "Show Monitors" - "Monitor 10" in the context menu, and "Monitor'' window pops up to
monitor No. 10 station, shown in figure13.11-2.
·I
'
215
MacsV Gateway Diagnostics
fi1t-11DI
[\i:&ll<li<J
:lliili!!il'!o
!iltlfl.\t.:E:
!!iill<'!'!!Al'.lto o
!ijif!lfJlllllfl:il: 500 ms
>'!otitll:ltii:i!'o 1
12eM
IJiJHUI!
0 0
0 bytes
0
0 """'""
:§Si'Mflrt&:.lti,: MasterA(l) MasterB[O) SlaveA(O) SlavcB[O)
~Uti-ft;.E!$.1&: Master
Click "Enter Debug Mode" in the context menu to enter debug mode. Then click "Show Debug
Info" in the context menu and "Status Table" window pops up, shown in figure13.11-3. Click "Text
Mode" and the "GatewayWatch" window pops up, shown in figure13c 11-4.
. .. . .. ·-~
~('i
c.;
Figure 13.11-3 "Status Table" Window
216
In "Status Table" window click each icon after controller and controller status window pops
up, shown in figure13.11-5.
After view the information, click "Leave Debug Mode" in the context menu to exit debug mode .
.,
·'i
• • Note: ..........
I
1
• Only in master server can symbol list communication status of each 10 station be watched
. through "gateway watch" .
13.12 Other Processes
13.12.1 New Double Server Diagnose
"NewDsvrDiagnose.exe"
New double server diagnose process is used to manage the master/slave status of the two
servers and when the master server fails the slave server become master server.
217
i,,- i
',,_
..•.J ·'i
'
13.12.2 Real-time Database Management Process
"RTDBManage.exe"
Real-time database management process updates the real time data for each point.
13.12.3 Transmit Event Message Process
"TransmitEventMsg.exe"
Transmit event message process is used to transmit message between different functions of
server.
13.12.4 Event Process "EventProcess.exe"
Event process is used to deal with the log and so on.
13.12.5 Server Standard Calculation Process
"ServerStandardCacl.exe"
Server standard calculation process is used to operate server algorithm configuration.
"-- ---- ""--" 13.12.6···"····NodeDiagnoseProcess ''NodeDiagnose;exe" ··"" ·-·-···--······
i
\ .. Node diagnose process is responsible for the diagnosis of upper equipment's" status.
i
.::·:
"
.:~
13.12. 7 Check Time Process "CheckTime.exe"
Check time process is responsible for system check time, including software check time, hardware
check time and check time among domains.
218
MACS Software Configuration Manual
14 Engineering Application about Server
Settings .;·ll.
,,
I •>ill
i\f
!;;;.
The engineering application about server settings will be introduced in this chapter. The main
contents include: the modification and settings; the files to be copied from the field which are
useful for analyzing system problems; frequently asked questions and answers about server;
cautions when using server.
(. ;g Prohibitory:
• The check, modify and exit of each server process must be done under the authorization and
instruction of Hollysys technical staff. It's prohibited to change, exit each server process and
14.1 Modification and Settings
In the below the contents which can be modified and set in projects will be introduced.
14.1.1 Modify History Database Path
There are two ways to modify the history database storage path, the details as follows:
a) Modify through "Server Settings" in "Process Management"
Determine the servers' operation status and determine which one is master server and which is
slave server. If A is master server then B is slave server;
First modify slave server B, copy the HOB file in the original history database storage
path/HISTDATA to the target path;
Click the right mouse key on "Process Management" in taskbar of slave server B, logon and then
click "Server Settings". In the "Server Settings" dialog box modify "History database path"
and "Post trip path" and then click "OK".
Exit server B and restart server program, then after starting up check whether the storage path of
the started history database service is the path after modification. The online trend (about 10
minutes) during the time from copying the history database file to restarting the server will be lost,
however the other online trend will not be influenced.
219
l1"41\.tl"!i!
Jlldl Hbnys)f$ HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
· Switch server, the original slave server B becomes master server and the original master server A
becomes slave server.
Observe a few minutes and if nothing abnormal happens, then one can delete the original history
database in server B;
According to the same method modify the current slave server A.
b) Modify Datafilepath.ini directly
slave server. If A is master server then B is slave server;
First modify slave server B, copy the HDB file in the original history database storage
path/HISTDATA to the target path;
Open C: \WINDOWS (or C: \WINNT) in slave server B, click the right mouse key on
Datafilepath.ini and open it as notepad file. Modify [HDB_PATH] and [POSTTRIP_PATH] directly.
Save and exit.
however the other online trend will not be influenced.
Switch server, the original slave server B becomes master server and the original master server A
becomes slave server.
According to the same method modify the current slave server A .
. ,DNote:
• According to the two methods modify server A and server B separately. First modify the
\. history database storage path in slave server, then switch server and at last modify the history
database storage path in current slave server.
• The original history database storage path is selected during software installation and the
installation system will automatically create a related file. After modification through "Server
Settings" the system will automatically create a new folder for history database storage. If the
history database path is modified through Datafilepath.ini directly one has to manually create
a folder for history database storage.
14.1.2 Modify History Database Protective Capacity
The default protective purview is 2048M and if the available physical memory is less than the
current protective purview, the system will automatically delete the oldest history database file to
gain space. In "History Database 2.1V" window one can fill in the blank after "Protective capacity"
220
IP:i~~i "!;)
____ HcihiSliS MAGS Software Configuration Manual
to set protective purview. Click "Confirm Modification" to set a new "Current protective purview"
value, shown in figure14.1-1.
~... •·· Figure 14.1-1 "History Database 2.1V'' window
0 Note:
• Do the above operation for server A and B respectively.
• If the available physical memory is less than the current protective purview, the system will
automatically delete the oldest history database file to gain space. Therefore ifs necessary to
transfer the recorded history database file to other disk regularly. One can check the history
database through offline query software.
• After re-downloading of server the former recorded history database file has not been cleared
and one can check the former history database through offline query software.
221
ll'1f~t·l-s
fJil """"""" HOLLiAS MAGS Software User Manual
14.1.3 Modify Server Node No. and Port No.
There are two ways to modify the server node No. and port No., the details as follows:
1 Modify through "Server Settings" in "Process Management"
Click the right mouse key on "Process Management" in the taskbar of the server, logon and
select "Server Settings". In "Server Settings" dialog box modify "Server A or B" and "GPS port"
and click "OK".
2 Modify Macs.ini directly
Stop and quit HOLLiAS MACS server program ..
Open server installation path "D: IMACSV\MACSV_SERVER", click the right mouse key on
Macs.ini and open it as notepad file.
Modify "NodeiD" below [Server], "NodeiD=1" means that the server is A while "NodeiD= 129"
means that the server is B.
Modify "PortNo" below [CHECKTIME], "PortNo=O" means that no GPS signal is connected,
"PortNo=1" means that the GPS signal is connected to port 1 while "PortNo=2" means that the
GPS signal is connected to port 2.
Save and exit the file.
Log-off and restart, and then modification completed.
0 Note:
··~·····Theoriginal··· servernode··No. and· port No: are selected dUring the software installation and
they can be modified here.
14.1.4 Settings of Network Variables among Domains
First configure the network variables among domains. In the server installation path "D:
'
IMACSV\MACSV_SERVER", double click "ConfigNetvar.exe" and "ConfigNetvar" window pops up,
shown in figure 14.1-2:
1.
. ·,
I
222
;_.;
. .
.·'
···1··:·
...· . '.
\lJ
d
i
\-_
Figure 14.1-2 "ConfigNetvar" window
1) Show configuration:
Click "Show" in "Configuration" catalog and the current configuration information will be shown in
the information area.
Read configuration:
10 T Doiriiiin No: that NetViir arrived: ·1
Show configuration[The first 2 digits express hte station number and the total number of d,
2) Reconfigure
Click "Reconfigure" in "ConfigNetvar" window and information "It has already been emptied" will
be shown in the information area.
Read configuration:
Show configuration[The first 2 digits express hte station number and the total number of I(
Now the configuration is empty! '
lt~n emptied!!
3) Add
223
""~~~
Jlill••1"'""' HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
Fill in the blanks in "Configuration" catalog in "ConfigNetvar'' window and click "Add" to add new
configuration. Then the new added configuration will be shown in information area of
"ConfigNetvar'' window.
Example 1: transmit network variable in No. 10 station in domain 0 to domain 1 and domain 3, the
configuration is as follows:
Configure in the server installation path both in server A and server B in domain 1:
> Station no.: 10

> Number of transmitting domains: 2
> Domain no.: 1 3
The configuration is shown in figure14.1-3.
Figure 14.1-3"ConfigNetvar" window
Example 2: transmit network variable in No. 12 station in domain 1 to domain 0, the configuration
is as follows:
Configure in the server installation path both in server A and server B in domain 0:
> Station no.: 12

> Number of transmitting domains: 1
> Domain no.: 0

224
•..
•.··.·.1
·
I ~
t.
Station No.: 12 1 Domain No. that NetVar
4) Delete
Fill in the station no. to be deleted in the blank after "station no." in "ConfigNetvar" window and
click "Delete Station" to delete the station. Then the configuration information about this station will
be deleted.
After the configuration of "ConfigNetvar.exe" is completed, one can restart the configured server or
click "Reread station no. and domain no." in "NetvarExchange" window in all the configured
servers, shown in figure 14.1-5.
225
(
Figure 14.1-5 ''NetvarExchange" window
14.2 Server Check Time
Several methods for HOLLiAS MAGS server check time: without FM197, server internal clock is
adopted.
Without GPS and FM197 (GPS Time Synchronization Hub), server internal clock is adopted. If
"Use GPS" is not selected in "Select Check Time type" window during server software installation,
don't modify the contents of CAS2000serverExe.ini in the directory C: \WINDOWS (ore: \WIN NT).
· · ······ · ··········· ·· ·· ·· Can be modified manually:
( . File MACS.ini:
[CHECKTIME]
PortNo=O
"Use GPS" or "Use FM197" is selected during server software installation, while "Use GPS" is
selected the right port No. should be selected, don't modify the contents of CAS2000serverExe.ini
in the directory C: \WINDOWS (or C: \WINNT) CAS2000serverExe.ini. It can be modified
manually:
File MACS.ini:
[CHECKTIME]
PortNo=1
14.3 Backup
The files to be copied from the field which are useful for analyzing system problems:
226
"'"'{.I·!"!;)
M H&U11$JtS MACS Software Configuration Manual
Server A and server B: server installation path \macs\*.log.
Server A and server B: C: \DSvrDiagnose.
Server A and server B: C: \ EventProcess.
Server A and server B: operating system installation disk: \Documents and Settings\All
Users\Documents\DrWatson\drwtsn32.1og. (If the file doesn't exist, click "Start"- "All
Programs" - "Run" and enter "DRWTSN32", then you can see the log path to check
whether there is the file drwtsn32.1og)
Server A and server B: server installation path\HISTDATA\HDB\directory of the day when

default happened \SYSLOG.
Server A and server B: server installation path \HISTDATA\HDB\ directory of the day when
default happened \ DIG*** .dat and ••• .dat for 10 minutes before and after the fault.
Log in server A and server B: "Start"- "Control Panel"- "Administrative Tools"- "Event
Viewer''- "Export List" in context menu, save as TXT file.
8 Note:
o In addition, backup the engineer station 10 log: MACSV_ENG\CodeSys\*.log (Codesys
"Project"- "Option"- "log"- "Directory" when active log) .
14.4 Frequently Asked Questions and Answers
about Server
• Q 1: How to realize the diagnose function of server?
~ Server self-diagnose: when the load of the master server reaches 100% for continuous
\.
10 seconds, the server will automatically send a command to switch.
~ Operator station diagnose: No. 50 operator station monitors server B, No. 51 operator
station monitors server A, when more than 30 seconds the acquired data is not refreshed,
the operator station which is responsible for monitoring the master server will send a
command to switch.
8 Note:
o Operator station diagnose function is only suited for simplified network.
• Q 2: When the DPU module is not connected, the server constantly switches.
In SP2 version operator stations OP50, OP51 monitor server communication and if the
communication between server and DPU interrupts for 1OS then it will send a command to switch.
227
kt\,,tj.g
1!!118 """"'""
•
error" occurs in the two servers, what is the reason?
Q 3: After HOLLiAS MACS servers are started, an error "double server socket ·.··1·
_j ~
..•.•...
·4ill1
jfJi
Backup error, communication is not established: 1, check whether the settings of servers A and B
are right. 2, Check whether the network protocol installed correctly, and check whether the
network setting is right if it's simplified network.
• Q 4: Can the historical trend path of HOLLiAS MACS server be changed? How?
Historical trend path can be set during server software installation.
There are two ways to modify: modify through "Server Settings" in "Process Management'' window;
modify file Datafilepath.ini in server path C: \WINDOWS (or C: \WIN NT) directly; Save and restart.
• Q 5: The special keyboard of operator station doubled as server can't be used

1. normally, the light is ON but the switch to any right is not valid, only right 0 is available,
sometimes restart the computer will be OK.
"Use GPS" is selected during initial software installation and a serial port is occupied. Solution:
open file MACS.ini in server installation path and change PortNo= 0, restart server program.
• Q 7: Communication error between HOLLiAS MACS server and operator station,

both operator station and server are offline.
Solution: disable the system watch process "Syswatch.exe".
Method:
Stop and quit HOLLiAS MACS server program.
···.·.~c.·;I. ·•.
Open C: \WINDOWS·(or C: \WINNT)and clicktherightmouse key on···
CAS20000ServerExe.ini and open it as notepad.
Change [Process_17] to [Process_16], change [Process_16] to [Process_17], change ·<il

-~
ProcessNum=17 to ProcessNum=16, save and exit. •
Log off and restart server.
.0 Note:
• Q 8: Error: from 'BROWSER', the description is 'browser service can't get backup
list from \Device\NetBT_Tcpip_{... }. The backup browser has stopped ... '
Solution: "Control Panel"- "Administrative Tools"- "Services"- disable "Computer Browser''

service.
228
MAGS Software Configuration Manual
• Q 9: Error: from 'W32Time', the description is 'NtpCiient: an error happens when
DNS query 'time.windows.com, Ox1 '. NtpCiient will re-try NOS query in 15 minutes. The
error is: socket operation is attempting an unreachable host. (Ox80072751) ...
Solution: "Control Panel"- "Administrative Tools"- "Services"- disable "Windows Time" service.
• Q 10: After adding users online, switch the server, all added users do not exist?
In all the versions, add users on servers A and B separately, namely, add users when A is master
server, switch server, and add users again when B is master server.
0 Note:
• If an empty user is added due to mistakes and the user will be unable to modify, delete and it's
valid.
14.5 Cautions when Using Server
• After server software is installed successfully, industrial Ethernet protocol will

automatically name the four network connections in "Network and Connections" as
"SNETA", "SNETB", "MNETA", "MNETB". If there are only two adapter cards, the former
two names will be adopted. Industrial Ethernet protocol distinguishes the "A network" and
"B network" by the names "SNETA" and "SNETB" .If the two cards' names are wrong or the
corresponding network segment wrong, the server and lower network will not
communicate normally.
• During configuring the IP address of server adapter card, you may not configure
the IP address of system network and only configure the IP address of management
network. If we only run the server software, we may not select TCP/IP protocol for the two
. . carc!.s e>f l>Ylil~ell'l ne~ork ...
• If you re-install the server software the names of adapter cards may be a mess
which may cause the communication error between DPU and server. After each
re-installation remember to check whether the card's name is correct and whether it
corresponds with the correct network segment.
• For server transmitting information, network A and network B send information
··· alternately, once each cycle. If only a single network is working, it will send information
once two cycles.
• System manage process "SysManage.exe" can't be closed, otherwise it can't be
downloaded.
• When server starts up, if communication points can't be found in DPU a prompt
will be displayed and generate a file in path 0:\MACSV\MACSV_SERVER\Macs\.
• If the cycle is 500ms, the communication points of each 10 station are no more
than 5000 points and the total points doesn't exceed 75000 points (if the cycle is 250ms, the
limit of total points is 35000) • The number of total points is available in server online
installation path\macs\WATCH.Iog.
229
PLN (Persero) Pusat
~INIRJNG
1'[4'11
PLN Doc.No. J
HOLLIAS MACS
OPERATION MANUAL
0 Issue for Review
•
ll' CONSORTIUM
.
Consultant :
KETIRA ENGINEERING
CONSULTANT
HANDAN SHIDONG
ELECTRIC & CEMENT
./hg?
TECHNIC CO., LTD -::;S T

Prepared PL TU 2, Papua Preliminary
Checked 2xlOMW
HOLLiAS MACS Operation Manual
(
-C'CS
:I
..
s::
; C'CS
' ::E
s::
0
:;::.
E
Q)
c.
0
en
0
<C
::E
en
<C
:J
...J
0
J:
W\-.!1~
JAill<tlliiS"" HOLUAS MAGS OperatiOn Manual D~M HOLUAS MAGS Operation Manual
Copyright Statement Introduction

All contents of this manual, including text, charts, symbols, markings, trademarks, product Symbol icon:
models, software programs, page layout design and etc, are under protection of "Copyright Law of Use the following identification to indicate corresponding information in the manual.
the People's Republic of China", "Trademark Law of the People's Republic of China", "Patent Law ~~Tip,
of the People's Republic of China" and laws of applicable international conventions ~egarding
copyright, trademark right, patent right or other property ownership, and are owned or possessed Help the user in-depth understanding of the technical aspects of the system.
exclusively by Beijing HollySys Co., Ltd. and Hangzhou HollySysAutomation Co., Ltd.
This manual is provided only for commercial users to read and query, withoUt special
0 Note.
authorization of HollySys Company, regardless of whatever reasons and purposes, it is not • Pay attentiordO the use ofSYSte·m~ielated behaVror or safety probfems.
allowed to copy and transfer contents of this manual in any forms by any electronic or mechanical
methods. Otherwise our company will investigate legal liability in accordance with law.
0 Prohibited1
Contents and charts of this manual have been checked and are in compliance with hardware • Restriction operation of system-·o-r-pay attenti6i110-Safety problems.
devices mentioned, but it is impossible to avoid errors, and no guarantee is made as to complete
consistency. Meanwhile, contents and charts of this manual are subject to inspection, modification
and maintenance by HollySys Company without further notice. Version:
Release date: Feb. 2009
Version number: HOLLiAS MACS Operation Manual VS.O
Software version: MACS VS.X.X
For staff:
Type face and logo of HOLLiAS MACSTM, HollySys®, ;jp~Jil't®,
This manual primarily for operators and DCS maintenance persons provides operational guidance,
a ~H.g Honvsvs are trademarks or registered trademarks of

Beijing HollySys Co., Ltd. and Mangzhou
HollySys Automation Co., Ltd.
can also be reference manual for project managers, maintenance engineers and technicians.
The following information provided in this manual:

HOLUAS MACS graph structure of monitoring system.
Microsoft®, Windows® and WindowsNT® are trademarks or registered trademarks of HOLLiAS MACS functions instruction of monitoring system.
Microsoft Company in United States of America and/or its affiliates in other countries.
Other trademarks or registered trademarks referred to in this manual belong to their The purpose of this manual:
respective owners. This manual is used to help users to become familiar with the operating environment and functions
of HOLLiAS MACS monitoring system, to know how to control field devices with the monitoring
systems.
II
·D:~~ HOLLIAS MAGS OperatiOn Manual D~M HOLLIAS MACS Operation Manual
CONTENTS 3.9.2 Forcing Tag ... ......... . .............................................. 73
3.9.3 Add Tag to Trend Group... . ..... 74
1 OVERVIEW .......... 3.9.4 Tag Details .. .. .............................. 75
3.9.5 Tag Information.. ................ ............... .. ................ .
1.1 OPERATOR STATION FUNCTIONS INSTRUCTION.. ...................................................... I
3.9.6 Zoom.............. .......... ..... ............... ............. . ...... 77
1.2 OPERATING ENVIRONMENT. ...................... ....... .... ........ ............. ........ . . ...................... I
3.9. 7 Restore ..... ............ .... ............ ............... ............ ...... ....................... .. ...................... 77
1.3 OPERATOR STATION HARDWARE DEVICES.......... . . .. .............................................................. 2
3.9.8 Full·screen!Window... ........ ....... ............ .............. ..... 77
1.3.1 Operator Station Monitor Configuration ...................................................................... 2
3.9.9 Full-screen Display. .............. . ............................ .. ....................... 79
1.3.2 Operator Station Special Keyboard and Trackball. ..... .. ......................................... 2
3.9.1 0 Text Switch ......... ................ ....... ........ . ........................ .
2 OPERATOR STATION FUNCTIONS INSTRUCTION ............ ............. .. ............... 5 3.9.11 Size..................................... ... ................ .. ................................... 80
3.9.12 Open Base Graph .. . . ............ ................ ......... ..... .......... ............................. 80
2.1 OPERATOR STATION STARTUP ..................................................................................................... 5
3.10 ENGINEER FUNCTION... . ......................... . .. ............. . ................... 81
2.2 SELECT CURRENT DOMAIN.. ............. ......... ..... .... ......... ...... ........ ........ ........ ......................... 5
3.1 0.1 Logon ...... .......... ............. ...... . .............................................................................
2.3 OPERATOR STATION LOGIN ....................................................................................................... 6
3.1 0.2 Simulate Keyboard.. .......... ..... ............... . ...................... 82
2.4 EXIT OPERATOR STATION........ . ........................ .......... . ......... .. ............ ....... . .................. 9
2.5 SYSTEM GRAPHS INSTRUCTION... ................ ............ ......... ......... . ........... ............ .................. .. 10 3.1 0.3 Select Domain.... ................ ................. ......... ........................................... 83
3.10.4 User Management.............................. .. ............................................................ 83
2.5.1 Function Zones Instruction................................................ ....................................... 10
2.5.2 Toolbar Menus Instruction........ ............. ............ ........... .. .............. ................. 12 3.1 0.5 Right Management... ........... . .. .. ............ ............... . .............. ........ ....................... 85
3.1 0.6 Set Server lime.. ... . ........ ........... ............... .......... . ... ................ ........ 85
2.6FLOWCHARTGRAPH ..... ....... .... ........ ...... .......... ........... ...... ......... .. ...................................... 17
3.10.7 Change Master Server....... ................ ...... .................... . ................................... 87
2.6.1 Simulation Flowchart Display .......................................................................................... 17
2.6.2 Switching Flowchart ......... ............ ....... ......... ............ ............... . ............... 17 3.1 0.8 Print Setting ......... .... ........ .................... ....................... . . ........ 87
2.6.2 User-defined Key......................................... . ............................................. 18 3.10.9 Start Option......................... . ....... ..... ..................... .. .................................. 88
2.7POP-UPWINDOW.......... ............. ..................... . .................................................................... 18 3.10.10 Report Configuration... ......... ......... . . ......... ..... ................ .. .... 89
3.10.11 Disable Special Key........ ...... .......... . . .................. ........ ....... . .. 89
3 OPERATOR STATION FUNCTIONS INSTRUCTION .. 19 3.11 CONTROL AND REGULATING.. ............. .............. .......... ................. ............................. 89
3.1ALARMMONITORING... ....... ................ ............ ........... ............ ................ ............ ............... ...19 3.11.1 PID Regulator ............................................................................................................... 90
3.11.2 Analog manipulator (open loop)... . ........ ................ ........ . .. ...................... 98
3.1.1 Alarm Display.... ...... ....... ...... ..... ............ . ............ ............. . ............................... ..
3.1.2 SOEAiarm ........ ............. ......... .... ............ .......... .............. ........... .. .............. 22 3.11.3 Analog manipulator (close-loop) ......... ........ ................. .............. .. ........................... 100
3. 11.4 Sequence Control Equipment ................. ........ ...................................................... 102
3.1.3 Device Alarm.... ...... ............... ......... . ..... ....... ......... ....... . ............................
3.11 .5 Damper.. ........ ............... . .................. ..... ........ . .................... 105
3.2 FORCE......... ...... ......... .............. ........................ . . ........... ....... . ............................. 24
3.11.6 Servo amplifier.... . ............................................................................................... 106
3.2.1 Force Tag............. .......................... ......... .. ...... ....... ........ .. ........................................ 24
3.11.7Breaker... .............................. . ............................. 108
3.2.2 Force Table........ .... .......... .......... .................... . . ........ ....... . .................. 26
3.2.3 Force Delete...... . . ................... ..... ............ .............. ........ . ................ 27
3.3 LOG........... ........... ........... ....... ....... ...... .. .. ....... . ... 28
3.3.1 All Log................................... ........... . .......................... 29
3.3.2 SOE Log.. ..... ........................ ...... .... ............ . . .......... ............. .. .............................. 31
3.3.3 Simplified Log .. .33
3.3.4 Operation Log .. 34
3.3.5 Device Log ..... . 35
3.4 LIST ....................... .. .36
3.4.1 Basic System ........ . 36
3.4.2 Parameters Grouping ... . 38
3.5TREND ...................................... .. .... 42
3.5.1 Comprehensive Trend ......... . 42
3.5.2 Digital Trend.......................................................................... .. ........................... 48
3.5.3 XY Trend.......... ..... ........ ..... ........ ...... ......... ............... ........... ........ .......... ........ .. .... 51
3.5.4 Contrast Trend ...... ..................... ....... ............ . .......... ........ . .. ............. ..
3.5.5 Edit Trend Group.... ..... ..... ........ ...... ................. . . ......... .. ..................................... ..
3.6 POST DISTURBANCE REVIEW (PDR)...... ...... .......... ............ ........ .......... ......... ............. .. ............. 61
3.6.1 Analog Tag PDR... .................. ............ ............ ............ .. ........................ 61
3.6.2 Digital Tag PDR...... .......... ....... .......... .............. .......... . ................... 63
3.6.3 SOE PDR...... .............. ......... ....... ............ . .... .................... .. ........... 63
3.7PRINT.... .............. .......... ........ . ..... ...... ...... ................ .. ................................... 64
3.7.1 Print Setting........... .. ...... ........... .. ........................................................... 64
3. 7.2 Report Request... ........... ....... ....... . ............. . ........ .. ................... 65
3.7.3 Print Screen............................................ . .............. .. ..................... 68
3.8DEVICE STATUS GRAPH... .... ...... ........ .... ........ ........ ... ..................... ............. .. ............... 68
3.9 FUNCTION WITH RIGHT BUTTON.. ....... . .............. ..... ......... ........ .. ................. 71
3.9.1 Tag Trend.... ................. . ..... ....... ........ ................. .. .......... 72
lli IV
Dt!.!.~ HOLUAS MACS OperatiOn Manual -~~~~ HOLLiAS MAGS Operation Manual
(1280*1024 resolution, true color, 85HZ refresh frequency), mouse/trackball, special keyboard, 2
Ethernet cards, Industrial chassis.
1 Overview 2. Software
System platform: WindowsXP SP2/ above version, IE6.0 I above version.
Application software: HOLUAS MAGS special operator station software, OpenOffice.
HOLUAS MAGS real-time monitoring system can do real-time data acquisition, dynamic data
display, process automatic control, sequential control, advanced control, alarms detection and
monitoring; can do data recording, statistics, display, print and other processing. The monitoring system 1.3 Operator Station Hardware Devices
provides the data to the operators in the fonn of simulation flowchart, bar graph, numerical table, trend
cur.te, table, button and dialog box; performs operations command and sends the command to the field
control station. With the monitoring system, operators and engineers can monitor the process 1.3.1 Operator Station Monitor Configuration
automation, inter~ene and modify the real-time process, print reports automatically or as requirement,
provide graphs and data to plant managers with plant-level MIS. Operator station monitor uses 19" (or 19" above) color monitor. One operator station can connect to
the one color monitor, or connect to the two monitors with a Multi-screen graphic card. With multiple
monitors, multiple monitors share a special keyboard and a trackbalL
@)Tip,
• Re81~til11e information: real-time tags, CfOCk, alarm information, the system notice information,
operating instructions and real-time trends.
1.3.20perator Station Special Keyboard and Trackball
1 Operator Station Special Keyboard
Operator station special keyboard contains the initial function keys and auxiliary function keys.
1.1 Operator Station Functions Instruction When operator presses one initial function key at any time during system running, screen base
graph will switch to the graph described bY the initial function key.
Auxiliary function keys can only be used with the initial function keys when displaying a particular
The operator station software is HOLUAS MACS system special real-time monitoring software, runs
graph. The system will reject the mismatch use of the auxiliary function keys, and provide appropriate
on multi-tasking operating system. The main tasks of the software are display and conversation, alarm,
prompts.
log management and display, control and regulation, history database management, system database
The appearance of the operator station special keyboard is shown in Figure 1.3-1
management.
The operator station monitoring software is the most direct and important human-machine interface,
supports special industrial keyboard, trackball and other external devices.
1.2 Operating Environment

1. Hardware
CPU Pentium IV 2.8G, RAM 512M, CD-ROM, single-screen/multi-screen graphic card, color monitor
2
-~~~~~ .t.!!.~
B1
HOLUAS MACS OperatiOn Mi:HIUi:ll HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
Monitoring area: "Menu" key is used to call the main menu of the process graphs; «Device Status"
~ ~~·~ 0 B
u .. .-<~oftnodK')'
key is used to call the system status graph.
~~
0 ~T...... Uot Tol>lo
.:;;;n;::;;H;;:';l
[J:J[J:J[]][]]
rnrnrnrn
Print area: the keys are used to call print interfaces.
Alarm monitoring area: "Alarm Monitoring" keys are used to call general alarm monitoring graphs;
[;;:::J [;;:Q ~ i;;::;J [;;!! ~~r;:;;) DDO!JIXJ[J!J "F1" and "F3" keys are used to alarm acknowledgement.
(1'8 ~ ~ ~) [;:;;] [;;!l;J ~ b!J liD ~rn~ o::J[]'JIXJ[J:J User-defined area: there are 16 user-defined keys in this area. User can define what graph each
~
key to call.
rnrn~rn~ ~ ~rn~~~ ~ciJ~~~

PDRonaSOE
+ Letter and number keys section:
~~G!J b!J rnm~o::JG:J[:;:;) ~ ~~ R:J~

The functions of the keys in this section are same with the universal keyboard.
+Others:
~~ ~~GB IIIIIJIIJIIl Keyboard LED test key: the key is used to test the status of the keyboard LEOs;
[I][i]IIJ[I]IIJIIJIIJIIJ[I]IIJ[I]IlJ[;:;;l CRT1, CRT2 and CRT3 keys: null;
W~RTYUIOPillbd! Q;;l[;;;][lEJ IIJ[I]IIJ[I] Privilege lock: the lock can limit the operation privilege level of the operator station. The marks of
IIJIIJIIJIIJ[I]IIJ[I][I)[]c:J[I][;;] m [IJIIJIIliil the four positions of the privilege lock with clockwise are "Privilege Level 1", "PriVilege level 2",
[;;]IIJIIJIIJIIJ[I][I][I]IIIIIIIIJ[IJ~
Z~CVDNM•f%10
~III~ rnc:Jm~ "Privilege level 3" and ~Privilege level 4~. The one position has one LED; when the LED is on, it
means that the lock key is positioning here. Defining the privilege levels can be done online, can
~~\.M'!l also be done by the configuration of the general database control.
•
Speaker function: the speaker sounds when the alarm occurs, alarm sound stops after alarm
acknowledgment. If no alarm acknowledgement, speaker sounds even exit operator station
program; pressing keyboard LED test key can stop the alarm sound. If selecting the items of
"Alarm Sound" and "SOE Sound" in "Graph Management" menu, the speaker sounds when the
+ Dedicated function keys section is divided into 11 areas.
alarm occurs; otherwise no speaker sound when the alarm occurs.
Trend area: the keys are used to call the comprehensive trend, digital trend or XY trend graphs;
Log area: the keys are used to call various log windows; 2 Mouse I Trackball
List area: the keys are used to call various list windows; Mouse I trackball can be used to select the basic functions or the function menus. It means that
Table area: the keys are used to call various event tables; operator can use mouse/trackball to call the basic function graphs or the menu windows. If selecting the
Post Disturbance Review {PDR) and SOE area: the keys are used to call digital and:, analog PDR basic functions, the menu windows will close automatically. The main uses are shown as follows:
and SOE trend graphs; + Select base graph technics system
Engineer area: the keys are used to call engineer operating graphs; + Select the tags of the flowcharts and analog graphs
Operator area: the key are used to the operator to call control and regulation windOws (ex. PID + Press the button of displaying the branch graph
controllers, manual operators, manual switches, sequential control equipments, adjusting Doors) to + Display and close the important information prompts
achieve the switch between operating graph and operating mode, the regulations of sbt and output + Close the windows on the screen
values. ·
4
..--··
WI !.lf ".! WI {,fl'J

J!A IIOitfSn HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual ,.II<IIIW~1111 HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
2.3 Operator Station Login

2 Operator Station Functions Instruction'
To operator station online software, the different login level corresponds to the different operating
privilege level. There are the three login levels such as monitoring, operator and engineer levels. Press
2.1 Operator Station Startup the "Login" key of !IJj] ~Engineer Function" through the special keyboard or monitoring graph to call
OPS Login interface as shown as in Figure in 2.3-1, input different user name and password to login the
The sequence of the operator station startup is same with PCs: start peripheral eqUipment then operator station with diffei"ent login level.
computer. While the operating system works, click left mouse I trackball button to select astart" \
"Program"\ "MACS" \ "MACS_OPS" to start the online software of the operator station.
~~Tip,
• Project normally sets that start computer then run operator station program automatica(ly.
Q Note, Figure 2.3-1 OPS login Interface

It is necessary to make sure that the server works before the operator station real-time online Online operating setting is done with the engineer level. Operator is responsible for the specific
operations after the system commissioning, and all the operations also can be done under engineer level.
running; otherwise the operator station can only display static data, the various functiori.s can not be
To the functions, which can not be used by operator, their icons are marked gray in system menu with
called correctly, the online program can not run normally. operator login.
Monitoring level: only can monitor the system data, observe the graphs; can not do any operations
and modifications to the system.
Operator level: can observe graphs; do the operations (with operator level) to the field such as field
devices startup, modifying the set and output values of the actuators; do alarm acknowledgement, print
2.2 Select Current Domain reports, etc. This privilege level applies to the qualified DCS operators.
Engineer level: can modify important control parameters such as PIC parameters, exit system, do
If the project is single domain project, the system will call the project main system maintenance, change the operation privilege level and the password of operator, etc. This
menu automatically without selecting the current domain. If the project is multiple privilege level applies to the DCS maintenance persons.
domains project, the current domain can be selected. Please follow the steps The operation levels and contents are shown as in Table 2.3-1.
below to select the current domain: project main menu I m "Engineer Function"
Table 2.3-1 Operation levels and contents definitions
menu I "Select Current Domain", then "Set Current Domain" window is called as
Operation level
shown as in Figure 2.2-1; select the current domain, press "OK" button. Remarks
Operations
6
1111 ~ «~ ' 1111 ~ ll o\1.
JI!Aiunl~ HOLUAS MAGS Qperati~n Manual N11onvtw HOlliAS MAGS Operation Manual
PID controller operation -1 -1 OperatOr can not do Information with
I parame'ter tuning. operator privilege
Exit system -1 lever.
:
""
Page u and Page down -1 -1 -1 force table
"Graph call base graph, home page, system status
Manag graph, video monitoring, alarms display,
-1 -1 -1 "Call base graph"
means to call a base
"Log"
menu
"SOE Log· key
"
ement" Information display, alarm sound, SOE
menu sound
graph, i which
been called before. ""
"Log Simplified" key
"Device Log" key
" "-1
-1
"All Logs" key
""
""
call again, call all again ' "Ooeralion Log" key
screen copy, call base graph "Call base graph"
means : to open a
There are 5 system privilege levels such as Level 0, Level 1, Level 2, Level 3 and Level 4. Level 0
base gl13ph file in a
folder. can be set through universal keyboard, and the other privilege levels can be set through the special
-1 keyboard.
"Engin
eeC
login, keyboard simulation, selecting
current domain " " .'
The default system privilege level is Level 0 after operator station startup without installing the
menu users management, privileges
management, set the server system time,
server switch, print settings, startup
" special keyboard. If installing the special keyboard, the default privilege level depends on the privilege
lock positioning after operator station startup; privilege lock positioning can be changed by the lock key,
and then the privilege level is changed.
options, report configuration, function keys
shield
~~Tip,
"Compr
ehensi
parameters group, basic system
" "1 " • Each system privilege level corresponds to 3 user levels such as monitoring, operator and engineer
ve
Functio
n"
report printing
SOE post disturbance review, analog post
disturbance review, digital post disturbance
"" •
level. The initial user level is monitoring level.
menu review • The settings of the login level, user name, password and respecUve privilege level can be done
•
"Trend"
menu"
comprehensive trend, switch trend, XY
trend, contrast trend, editing trend group,
displaying trend group
" " " OperatOr can only
observ:e trends but
can not define the
through engineer station configuration software or operator station online interface, which to add,
modify and delete user through "Engineer Function"\ "User Management".

trend :groups with
monitOring • The settings of the operations of Level 1 to 4 can be done through engineer station configuration
privilege leveL
software or operator station online interface, which through "Engineer Function" \ "Privilege
-1
''Table"
menu
process alarm, device alarm
" " OperatOr can only
observer
information and can
alarm
Management".
not do alarm
acknowledgement
with monitoring 8 Note,
privilege level, and
If add the operation privileges to a graph operation, the privileges should be added to Engineer
can 1'10tprin_l_i3J13,_r!!!_
-~·~~
M·~~~"y$""" HOLLiAS MAGS OperatiOn Manual -"~""
.11011\lb!l HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
Level also; otherwise the operations are prohibited even with engineer login. The op'erations can
2.5 System Graphs Instruction
only be done with the user added to the graph operation.
• If use the special keyboard, the Engineer Level user should be added to Level 1-4 trough engineer 2.5.1 Function Zones Instruction
-
station offline configuration; otherwise the operation of adding user can not be done in operator
Operator station online monitoring interface can be divided into 10 zones as shown as in Figure 2.5-1.
station online interface.
After system re-download, the "User Management" and "Privilege Management" modified in online
interface will be updated by the corresponding contains of offline configuration.
2.4 Exit Operator Station
Press Ill "System" I "Exit System" in online monitoring interface to pop-up the exit dialog box as
shown as in Figure 2.4-1, press "Yes" button to pop-up the reconfirmed exit dialog box as shown as in
Figure 2.4-2, press "Yes" button to exit operator station online software.
Figure 2.4-1 Exit dialog box Figure 2.4-2 Reconfirmed exit dialog box
0 Note:
User only with engineer level can exit system.
Figure 2.5-1 Monitoring interface
9 10
w~~";l -~«o!i!
, . . KOtiJ$'n
H'OLUAS MACS Operation Manual JI!A HIIHWSr)l HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
+ The functions of the 10 zones:

2.5.2 Tool bar Menus Instruction
I zone: tool bar menu zone. Click the icon buttons with the mouse or trackball to pop-up the
corresponding menus.
II zone: project name zone. Display the current project name.
Ill zone: alarm prompts zone. Include process alarm, device alarm and SOE alarm prompts.
When new alarm messages, alarm display bar flashes; if login revel is operator leVel or above,
double-click "Alarm Display- or "Device" bar with mouse to open Alarm MonitorinQ window or Click the icon button to select "Exit System" or to display MACS version number.
Device Alarm Messages window. When there are new SOE messages, "SOE" bar flashes; if the
login level is operator level or above, double-click "SOE" bar with mouse to open SOE Log
window.
IV zone: time and version zone. Display operation station system current time or the running
time of current operator station, and MACS version number. Click the zone with mouse to do the
IDJ The icon button has memory function so clicking the button can open the graphs,
which opened before, in being opened order. Click the button to open the last graph.
switch between system current time and running time.

V zone: system developer logo zone. The icon button has memory function so clicking the button can open the graphs,
VI zone: alarm messages zone. Display the new alarm which opened before, in being opened order. Click the button to open the next graph.
messages.
vn zone: operation logs zone. Display new the new operation
IB~
Click the icon button to pop-up Graph Management menu as shown as in Figure
logs. 2.5·3.
VDI zone: operation station status informations zone. Display the·
computer name, login domain name, station number, user name,
login level, privilege level and memory usage information. Open Graph: select the "Open Graph" in Graph Management menu to pop~up the active dialog
IX zone: graph display zone. Display a maximum of 8 graphs box as shown as in Figure 2.5·4. The dialog box shows the names of the graph files shown in
windows in this zone. the 8 segmentation windows. Double-click the file name with mouse or trackball, and the graph
X zone: status bar zone. Display the current login level, privilege will be opened in the corresponding window.
level and server status icon. Click the server status icon to pop~up Figure 2.5-2 Server information
"Server Information" window as shown as in Figure 2.5~2.
The server status icon is marked green, it means the server is master; yellow means standby; red
means server failure (including the server is not running). "*"symbol means the current domain number.
11 12
........
..... M!'\1
HOLLiAS MACS Operatihn Manual
-.~fi.;j
fJIIIIIIQilYSVJI HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
syStem Graj.ih:CITC-k"SYstem-GrapFi'' in Graph Management menu to display the-SYStem-status
graph in current active window, please refer to "3.9 Devices status Graph Display" for the more
details.
Screen Copy: click "Screen Copy" in Graph Management menu, the graph in current window
can be saved as graph file or send it to printer to print it.
Video Monitor: click "Video Monitor" in Graph Management menu to start video monitoring
program. "Video Monitor" must work with video capture care!.
Show Alann Bar: select the menu item with mark Ia to display the alarm bar, as shown as in
Figure 2.5~1 (VI zone), in current main window; otherwise no the alarm bar in current main
window. Displaying the alarm bar is system default selling.
Information bar: select the menu item with mark ~ to display the information bar, as shown
as in Figure 2.5-1 (Vll, vm zone), in current main window. The information bar can be bragged
everywhere on the screen with mouse. The alarm messages are displayed in the upper window;
the operation station information, which includes computer name, domain name, operation
Figure 2.5-3 Active dialog box Figure 2.5-4 Graph Management Menu station number, user name, login level, privilege level and memory information, is displayed in
Main Graph: click ~Main Graph~ in Graph Management menu, main graph will be opened in the window below. If the menu item is not marked with~, the information bar is not displayed in
current active window; the main graph file name is amain.hsg". the current main window. No the information bar display is system default setting.
Alarm Sound: select the menu item with markra; when there are alarm messages, alarm
sounds. If the menu item is not marked withE~, turn off alarm sound. Alarm sounding is system
(t Note, default setting.
• User only with engineer login has the privilege to open graph. SOE Sound: select the menu item with mar~; when there are SOE messages, SOE alarm
sounds. If the menu item is not marked withla turn off SOE alarm sound. SOE alarm sounding
is system default setting.
Open Again: during on-line system running, the graph, which has been opened, is 'deposited in
••
the buffer; re-opening the graph means calling the graph from the buffer directly. Even the Click the icon button to pop-up Engineer Function menu as shown as in
graph is modified and saved to current file folder, the graph file in the buffer is not ~et changed; Figure 2.5-5; user only with engineer login can use the functions of all the
so click ~open Again~ to deposit the graph file modified in the buffer to replace the o_ld graph file, menu items; please refer to "3.1 0 Engineer Function" for the more details of
and to display the modified graph. the menu items functions.
Reopen All: clear all graph files in the buffer, reopen all graph files on the disk, display main
Click the icon button to pop-up Comprehensive Function menu as
graph. ,
shown as in Figure 2.5-6.
0 Note,
• User only with operator level or engineer level has the privilege to do "OpEm
Again" and "Reopen Alln.
13 14
--.~.1!'!} --~~;,\
,..11-lllhSn HOLLiAS MAGS OperatiOn Manual J'JIIIIaUVSn HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
Figure 2.5-7 Trend menu
Click the icon button to pop-up Table menu
Figure 2.5-5 Engineer function menu Figure 2.5-6 Comprehensive function menU
II as shown as in Figure 2.5-8; please refer to "3.1
Alarm Monitoring" and "3.2 Force" for the more
details of the functions of the menu items.
Var Group: the menu item is mainly used to see variables values in the form of Variables Groups,
please refer to Chapter 3, Section 5 for the more details.
Basic System: the menu item is mainly used to see variables ·values in the form
Groups, please refer to Chapter 3, Section 5 for the more details.
SOE PostTrip: please refer to "3.6.3 SOE Post Disturbance RevieW" for the more details.
Analog PostTrip: please refer to "3.6.1 Analog Post Disturbance Review" for the moreidetails.
:of Variables
Digital PostTrip: please refer to "3.6.2 Digital Post Disturbance Review" for the more details.
I Figure 2.5-8 Table menu
Click the icon button to pop-up Log menu as

Report Request Print: print reports with real-time triggering mode, please refer to "3.7.2 Report l£till shown as in Figure 2.5-9; please refer to "3.3
Request" for the more details. ~~ Log" for the more details of the functions of the
menu items.
I :tl~~1~~~t~·~i,:::
:IOOit:!W~i~i'i
Click the icon button to pop-up Trend menu
as shown as in Figure 2.5-7; please refer to "3.5
'.H
:SOE:: xjog;l<·:.::' :,,,;
Trend" for the more details of the functions of the
menu items.
Figure 2.5-9 Log menu
.Tip,
If the menu items are marked with grey, the user has not the privilege to operate the items; the user
15 16
---.-,.,---c
-~~"
rAn~~~ HOLliAS MAGS Qperatibn Manual -~JJ~~ HOLUAS MAGS Operation Manual
needs login with higher level to operate the items. User can configure switching base graph of graphic object with the offline graph configuration
software, then operator can switch base graph with left clicking the graphic object with mouse I trackball
on the operator station. If the option of Check Operation Level is selected when defining the switch of
base graph, it is necessary to verify the operation level before online operation.
2.6 Flowchart Graph

2.6.2 User-defined Key
2.6.1 Simulation Flowchart Display The definition of user-defined keys can be done with the offline graph configuration. Users can use
the function keys user-defined on the keyboard to switch quickly to a specific flowchart.
Flowchart graph is used to display the main processes and the relative dynamic informci:tion, consist
of background graph and dynamic data; the dynamic data includes analog data and digital data. The
~~~Tip.
dynamic data can be displayed with the comments; when point the mouse cursor to the dynamic data, After the definitions of the function keys, the "F" keys of universal I special keyboard are still
the comments will be displayed as shown as in Figure 2.6-1. The analog data can be diSplayed with
available.
digitals or bar graphs; the digital data states can be displayed with graphics or symbols. A "Hot Point"
button can be set in a graph to call another graph.
To dynamic data display, un» means invalid data 1 , "VII• means forcing data, "?» meanS suspicious
data 2 • 2.7 Pop-up Window

Refresh the analog data according to the scan rate or processing cycle; the refresh :cycle of the
The window is active graph on the base graph, used to do some specific operations or guides; the
digital data is 1s. The flowchart graph displayed can be sent to printer to print.
size of the active graph is smaller and the graph can be closed. User can configure pop-up window of
graphic object with the offline graph configuration software, then operator can pop-up window with left
clicking the graphic object with mouse I trackball on the operator station. If the option of Check Operation
Level is selected when defining the switch of base graph, it is necessary to verify the operation level
before online operation.
Figure 2.6-1 Dynamic Data Display
~~~Tip,
There is an icon ~ in the upper right corner of the pop-up window; click on the icon, the icon
2.6.2 Switching Flowchart
becomesiiJ; I!J means that switching base graph will close the window; III means that the
Flowchart generally displayed in the form of base graph. Base graph is displayed in furr screen, and window will still be displayed on the base graph even switching the base graph.
base graph files can not be closed; cover base graph is only with pop-upping a new base gr_Bph.
' Invalid data: the relative hardware failed, the networ1< failed, or the data value out of the range.
2
Suspicious data: the data value Is In the dead band.
17 18
/"~-.
llilll.l! o,l , -~1!<\\1

. . Jiollllrtn HOLUAS MACS OperatiOn Manual ~'I!QR~IIII. HOLLIAS MACS Operation Manual
works to the 30 alarm messages.

3 Operator Station Functions Instruction'
Alarm response time: 1s (SOE alarm response time is 1ms).
3.1 Alarm Monitoring

3.1.1 Alarm Display
Alarm contents: analog limit alarms, digital status changing alarrils, system devices 8Jarms, SOE
When pressing "Alarm Monitoring~ key of the special keyboard, clicking "Alarm Display~ of the alarm
alarms.
Alarm levels: there are 4 alarm levels no matter to analog values or digital values, Snd different
alarm levels are marked different colors; red, yellow, white and green mean alarm level 0-4
prompt zone or selecting "Process Alarm" of "Table~ of Toolbar menu 111 in the top of the screen; the
respectively. screen base graph will be alarm monitoring graph as shown as in Figure 3.1-1.
Alarm sounding: when there are new alarms, the special keyboard sounds; configure whether
alarm sounding with ~Alarm Sound~ of "Graph Managemenr.
Alarm display graphs: "Alarm Display" graphs, "Device Alarm" graphs and "SOE Log": graphs.
Alarm messages zone: please refer to VI function zone. There are 10 alarm messaQes shown in
the zone, the top one is newest alarm, the older alarm message iS covered by the neWer message
in turn. The alarm messages unacknowledged are flashing. User can double-click !the zone to
acknowledge the alarm messages
Alarm prompts Zone: please refer to Ill function zone. The zone consists of three
parts such as "Alarm Display" (process alarm), "SOE Alarm" and "Device Alarm".
When there are alarm messages unacknowledged, "Alarm Display" and "Device
Alarm" flash in red, "SOE Alarm" flashes in blue; click the zone to display the correspOnding alarm
display graph.
Alarm acknowledgement: there are two kinds of alarm acknowledgement: "Row
Acknowledgement" and "Page Acknowledgemenf. After the alarm acknowledgemerit; the alarm
messages acknowledged will be deleted, the relative alarm flash will stop. Alarm acknqwledgement
works to all relative operation stations.
0 Note,
• "Page Acknowledgemenr works to the alarm messages displayed on the screen; for example, the
201th-230th alarm message are displayed on the screen, then· "Page AcknowledQemenr only Figure 3.1-1 Alarm messages window
19 20
«
lllrl ~ '!l
. . lfl>ll•b$ HOLUAS MACS OperatiOn Manual
-~~~ .t
Mn<thlln HOLliAS MAGS Operation Manual
To each alarm message, the relative messages, which are alarm occurrence time, variable names, monitoring level, only the three softkeys, uFilter by Alarm Level", "Print" and "~Exit", are available.
variable description, alarm values I alarm status, are displayed on the screen. The relative rrlessages are
marked in different colors with different alarm levels. All alarm messages are arranged i~ occurrence • The variable alarm limits and levels are configured in the database configuration of the engineer
time order. station, and can be modified in online software of the operator station with "Tag Details" of the
There are two kinds of the alarm status of the digital status changinQ: alarm and no aIarin. There are
four kinds of the alarm status of analog limit alarm: upper limit alarm, loWer limit alarm, upper upper limit right-clicking menu (only to engineer level); after the restart of the server program, the modifications
and lower lower limit alarm; the alarm statuses are marked in red, yellow, white and green respectively. are restored to the original settings.
\Nhen there are new alarm messages in the alarm monitoring graph, the messages: will flash in
corresponding colors, and the special keyboard alarm sound.
If the alarm messages are displayed with track mode, the messages are arranged i~ occurrence 3.1.2 SOE Alarm
time order, the newest alarm message is displayed at the bottom Of the screen. Wh~n the alarm
messages are displayed full screen; the oldest message will be removed from the top of the screen if SOE alarm and SOE log use same interiace, please refer to "SOE Log" for the more details.
there is a new alarm message. The alarm messages removed will be stored in the alarm bl!ffer and can
be viewed with scroll bar; when scroll for.vard one screen, the alarm monitoring graph is in h,istory mode.
When the alarm messages quantity are more than alarm buffer capacity, the new alarm meSsage will be 3.1.3 Device Alarm
lost Alarm monitoring graph can display up to 570 messages.
The instruction of the softkeys of the toolbar of the alarm messages window: Click "Device" in the alarm prompt zone or "Device Alarm" of "Table" of toofbar menuJII in the top
»- Operation: when there are new alarm messages in the alarm monitoring graph, t~e messages of the screen, device alarm graph is displayed on the screen as shown as in Figure 3.1-2.
flash with alarm sound; select the message and click "Row Ack" softkey in the befqw toolbar or
"Row Ack~ key of the special keyboard to stop the flashing and sounding. Whe~ the alarms
recover, the alarm messages become alarm recovering meSsages in the ala~ monitoring
graph; select the recovering message and click "Row Ack" softkey in the below too,lbar or "Row
Ackn key of the special keyboard to delete the message in the alarm monitoring Qraph. "Page
Ack" is only used to current screen displaying messages, and Works as "Row Ack" .·
)- Query: when selecting "Filter by Time", the alarm messageS are displayed accOrding to the
time interval selected in the alarm monitoring graph,
»- Alann level: when selecting Filter by Alarm Level", the al8rm messages are displayed in
different colors; Red, yellow, white and green means alarm fevel1-4 respectively. '
»- Print: click "Print" to print the alarm messages in the current alarm monitoring graPh.
»- Exit: click "Exit" to exit the current alarm monitoring graph.
13 Note,
• If the user login with engineer level, all the softkeys in the toolbar o_f the alarm monitbrir1g graph are
available; if the user login with operator level, the "Print" softkey is not available; if the uSer login with
21 22
_(--
-~~~~ HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual

The instruction of the softkeys of the toolbar of the device alarm graph:
> Row Ack: when there are new alarm messages in the device alarm graph, the messages flash
with alarm sound; select the message and click "Row Ack" softkey in the below toolbar or "Row
Ack" key of the special keyboard to stop the flashing and sounding. When the alarms recover,
the alarm messages is removed from the alarm monitoring graph.
» Page Ack: "Page Ack" is only used to current screen displaying messages, and works as "Row
Ack". "Page Ack" can acknowledge all the flashing messages in the current device alarm graph.
» Print: click "Prinf to print the alarm messages in the current alarm monitoring graph.
> Exit: click "Exif to exit the current alarm monitoring graph.
0 Note,
If the user login with engineer level, all the softkeys in the toolbar of the alarm monitoring graph are
available; if the user login with operator level, the "Print" softkey is not available; if the user login with
monitoring level, only the two softkeys, "Print" and ""Exit", are available.
3.2 Force
3.2.1 Force Tag

Right-click the dynamic tag in the flowchart graph, select "Force Tag" in the right-clicking menu; the
Figure 3.1-2 Device alann window
force tag dialog box is displayed on the screen as shown as in Figure 3.2-1. Right-click the static graphic
To each alarm message, the relative messages, which are alarm occurrence time, vari"able names, object or the blank of the flowchart graph, select "Force Tag" in the right-clicking menu to pop-up the
variable description, alarm values I alarm status, are displayed on the screen. All alarm messages are Force Tag dialog box; force the tag by selecting the tag in two sub-windows, "Basic System Variables"
arranged in occurrence time order. and "Basic System", or inputting the tag manually as shown as in Figure 32.-2.
When there are new alarm messages in the alarm monitoring graph, the messages wilt flash in red,
and the special keyboard alarm sound.
8 Tipo
• Other display modes are same with alarm monitoring graph.
23 24
.,.--
-~IJ;l
-~~~ HOLUAS MACS OperatiOn Manual ~ll<lllw_$!1~ HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
can be forced with the controller algorithm configuration tool after controller login; the forced tags of
the controller will not be listed in the force table of the operator station.
Only the user with engineer level can force tags.
3.2.2 Force Table
Force operation messages will be recorded in the force table and all logs. When delete the force
messages, the force messages will be deleted from the force table, and the force stop messages will be
written into all logs.
Press "Forbid Force" key of the special keyboard or "Force Table" of the toolbar menu .fli in the
top of the screen to display "Force Table" on the screen as shown as in Figure 3.2-6.
Figure 3.2-1 Force Tag Wndow 1 Figure 3.2-2 Force Tag VVindow 2
Select the tag will be forced, click "Add Tag", select the tag, input the forced value .(floating-tag
number to analog tag, 0/1 to digital tag), click "Force" to pop-up the dialog box as shown as in Figure
3.2-3, click "Yes" to force the tag. If no inputting the forced value before clicking "Force", the dialog box
will pop-up as shown as in Figure 3.2-4. After forcing the tag, successful forcing prompt box will pop-up
as shown as in Figure 3.2-5. The tag forced will be listed in the force table.
Figure 3.2-3 Prompt dialog box Figure 3.2-4 Prompt dialog box Figure 3.2-5 Successful forcing prompt box
0 Note,
• The forcing tag function of the operator station only can force server tag. The tags of the controller
25 26
•
lli2!,«~
Jjl,trollvSII$ .t!!.~ HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
shown as in Figure 3.2MB, will pop-up; click "Yes" button, the prompt box of successful force delete, as
shown as in Figure 3.2-8, will pop-up in the bottom right corner of the screen; the variable is deleted
forcibly, and the force information is deleted from the force table.
Figure 3.2-7 Force delete dialog box Figure 3.2-8 Successful force delete prompt box
Select the variable name in the force table, press "Relieve" to recovery the variable, press "AU
Relieve" to recovery all the variables forced.
G Note,
• User only with engineer level can force deleting.
3.3 Log
Figure 3.2-6 Force table
Force table can display up to 600 messages. The messages are displayed in forcin9 time order, Log is used to record all the system events information and store the information in the event
each message occupies one row on the screen. To each message display, the content of the brackets is occurring time order; event here means the changes of analog values and digital values.
the number of the operator station, which does the forcing operation. The categories of the log are divided into: all log, SOE log, simplified log, operation log and device
log.
0 Note, Log mainly records all the events information written into the table, the events of the parameters
• User only with engineer level can open the force table. settings of the operator station, alarm monitoring information; all the information will be written into all log
and the various types of the logs according to different attributes.
There are two kinds of the modes of the log display: track mode and history mode. Track mode
3.2.3 Force Delete means the system will display the newest information automatically; history mode means that the
operator can view the past events information with the scroll key and can view the last log page.
Forcing Delete can be done with force dialog box or force table.
Select the variable name in the force tag dialog box, press "Force Delete" button, the dialog box, as
27 28
/---
Wl~llOJ
lillf(>ll~ HOLliAS MACS Operation Manual -~~.~ HOLliAS MACS Operation Manual
alarm level, query by tag name and query by time. The query condition also can be any combination of
3.3.1 All Log the three query conditions with "and" logic.
The instruction of the softkeys of the toolbar of the all log graph:
> Track: select "Track", the newest system event information will be displayed in the log graph.
Press "All Log" key of the special keyboard or select "All Log" of the tool bar menum: in the top of Selecting "Track" is the system default setting. The "Filter by Tag Name" and "Filter by Alarm
the screen, "All Log" will be displayed as shown as in Figure 3.3-1. Level" queries can be done in the "Track" mode.
All Log buffer includes a variety of information, each occupies one row on the screen. Each piece of > History: select "History", all log information will be displayed in the log graph; the past log
information contains the time; most information contain tag names and the descriptions, "*" in the front of information can be viewed with scroll bar. The "Filter by Time" query can be done in the
the tag name means the tag has the attribute of the simplified log. "History" mode.
> Filter by tag name: select "Filter by Tag Name", click "User-defined Querying Tag", pop-up the
window as shown as in Figure 3.3-2. Select the querying basic system and tag name, click
"Add" button; the querying tag name will be displayed in the left list box; close the list box, the
event information of the tag will be displayed in the all log graph; select the tag name in the left
list box, click "Delete" button, the querying to the tag will be canceled.
Figure 3.3-2 Query by tag name
> Filter by alarm level: select "Filter by Alarm Level" and "Alarm Level", the event information will
be displayed in the all log graph.
> Filter by time: click "History" button, select "Filter by time", set the querying time segment, click
All Log buffer is a ring buffer, can record up to 30000 records. When the records amount is more "Start Query" button, the event information of the time segment will be displayed in the all log
than 30,000, the top-ranked record will be deleted automatically. graph.
When querying All Log, all the log information can be listed; the log information, selected with the > Print: click "print" button to print the all log information in the current window.
specific query conditions, also can be listed. There are three kinds of query conditions such as query by
29 30
-~«~
J!AnoltJ'S~ HOLliAS MACS OperatiOn Manual
@Note,
• User only with engineer level can open "All Logn.
3.3.2 SOE Log

SOE log displays the events information of the status changes of tlie SOE variables.
Each piece of SOE log information occupies one row on the screen. Each piece of information
contains the time; most information contain tag names and the descriptions, "*" in the froi1t of the tag
name means the tag has the attribute of the simplified log.
All Log buffer is a ring buffer, can record up to 2000 records. When the records amount :is more than
2000, the top-ranked record will be deleted automatically.
Press "SOE Log" key of the special keyboard, select "SOE Log" ot'the toolbar menu m in the top
of the screen or click "SOE" in the alarm prompt zone to display "SOE Log" on the screen as· shown as in
Figure 3.3-3.
Figure 3.3-3 SOE log
The instruction of the softkeys of the tool bar of the SOE log gmph:
> Query: click "History" button, select "Filter by Time", set the querying time segment, select
"Start Query", the SOE alarm information of the time segment will be displayed in the current
graph.
> Options: the SOE alarm information can be displayed with "Filter by Tag Name" and "Filter by
Alarm Level", or dick "User-defined Querying Tag" to select the querying SOE tag.
Please refer to "3.3.1 All Log~ for more details.
@Note,
• User login with operator level or engineer level can open "SOE Log".
3l 32
-~i1Js2 KOLUAS MACS Operation Manual D f.t!.:! HOLUAS MACS Operatlon Manual
3.3.3 Simplified Log 3.3.4 Operation Log
Simplified log records the events information of the analog and digital values with simplified log Operation log records the operations information, and records the alarm information of the tags
attribute. configured with the attribute of the operation record.
Press "Simplified Log" key of the special keyboard, or select "Simplified Log" of the tOol bar menu Press "Operation Log" key of the special keyboard, or select "Operation Log" of the toolbar menu
m in the top of the screen to display "Simplified Log" on the screen as shown as in Figure 3.3-4. l!BJ in the top of the screen to display "Operation Log" on the screen as shown as in Figure 3.3-5.
Figure 3.3-4 Simplified Log
Simplified Log buffer can record up to 12000 records. When the records amount is more than 12000,
the top-ranked record will be deleted automatically. Figure 3.3-5 Operation Log
Please refer to "3.3.1 All Log" for more details.
Operation Log buffer is a ring buffer, can record up to 1000 records. When the records amount is
@Note, more than 1000, the top-ranked record will be deleted automatically.
• User only with engineer level can open "Simplified Log". Operation log display format: date, time, device name, device tag descriptions, current value,
operator station number (in parentheses).
Please refer to "3.3.1 All Log" for more details.
33 34
ar.~ HOLUAS MAGS Operation Manual Dt.t!.~ HOLUAS MAGS Operation Manual
Each piece of device failure alarm displayed on the screen includes the occurring time, variable
0 Note, name, variable attribute, alarm descriptions. All alarms are arranged in the occurring time order.
User only with engineer level can open "Operation Log".
0 Note,
If operator station is offline, or not in the current domain; there is the failure alarm of system device
3.3.5 Device Log
of the current domain and the alarm description is "node failure".
Device failure log records the failure information of the devices. Please refer to "3.3.1 All Log" for the more details.
Press "Device Log~ key of the special keyboard, or select "Device Log" of the toolbar menu iJI in 8 Note,
the top of the screen to display "Device Failure Log" on the screen as shown as in Figure 3.3·6. • User login with operator level or engineer level can open ~Device Log".
3.4 List
3.4.1 Basic System
The basic system is the sets of the tags, which the first four characters of the tag names are same.
Press "Basic System" key of the special keyboard, or select "Basic System" of the toolbar menu !ill in
the top of the screen to display "Basic System" graph on the screen as shown as in Figure 3.4·1; the
graph is used to query basic system and the tags information.
Device Log buffer can record up to 1000 records. When the records amount is more than 1000, the
top·ranked record will be deleted automatically.
35 36
-~«'ll
Ji!411n~ HOLUAS MAC$ OperatiOn Manual -~~Js~
Figure 3.4-1 Basic System
There are two windows in the basic system graph. The basic system is displayed in the upper
Figure 3.4-2 Tag details Figure 3.4-3 Ponit Information
window, and the variables number of a basic system is shown in parentheses following the basic system.
The variables information of the basic system, which is selected in the upper window, is displayed in the The instruction of the softkeys of the toolbar of the basic system graph:
window below; if the variables alarm, the variables values will be marked in red.
The user, which login with engineer level, double-clicks the variable name to pop-up,the detailed )> All tags: display all the variables of the basic system.
variable window as shown as in Figure 3.4-2. The maintenance personnel view, modify the variables )> Analog tags: If select the item, only display the analog variables of the basic system.
information with the window; please refer to "3.9.4 Tag Details" for the more details. )> Digital tags: If select the item, only display the digital variables of the basic system.
The user, which login with operator level, double~cficks the variable name to pop-up tag information )> Print basic system: select "Print Basic System" to print all basic system groups.
window as shown as in Figure 3.4~4. The maintenance personnel view tne variables information with the )> Print basic system variables: select "Print Basic System Variables" to print all basic system
window; please refer to a3.9.4 Tag Details" for the more details. variables.
0. Note,
User only with engineer level can do "Print Basic System" and "Print Basic System Variables".
3.4.2 Parameters Grouping
Parameters Grouping is mainly for the convenience of the field staff to copy data. There are two
37 38
/-~--:
ki\.«';1 Mll\.1{;\
ltAHo!Mn HbLLiAS MAGS Operation Manual Jli.IICIIr'ISIII'
display modes to parameters grouping: digital mode and graph mode; the digital display :mode is the
system default setting. Select "Parameters Grouping" of the toolbar menu m in the top cif the screen
to pop-up the window as shown as in Figure 3.4-4.
Figure 3.4-4 Parameters Grouping Window Figure 3.4-5 Parameters Grouping Edit Dialog Box
The first column of the parameter group is the serial number, the second column is tag: description, Add tag: select the system name in basic system window, all variables of the system selected are
the third column is tag current value, the fourth column is the lower limit, the fifth column is the upper limit displayed in the basic system variables window; select the variable to be added, click "Add" button to
and the sixth column is the unit. add the variable to the group. The maximum of 80 variables can be added to a parameter group.
The instruction of the softkeys of the tool bar of the parameterS grouping graph:
Delete tag: select the variable to be deleted in the left list box, click "Delete» button to delete the
> Group number: the current parameter group number. A total of 30 parameter groups, group variable from the group.
number is 0~29.
Exit the dialog box, the settings take effect.
> Display: the last group: displays the last group variables information. > Print: print all the variables information displayed in the current window in the serial number
The next group: displays the next group variables information.
order.
> Group operation: group edit: add or delete the variables in the current variables :group. Click > Graphical display: display the values of the analog tags of the current group in the form of bar
the button to popwup the dialog box as shown as in Figure 3.4w5.
graph. Click the button to pop-up the dialog box as shown as in Figure 3.4~6. One graph
window can display up to 10 analog values. If the number of the analog values of the group is
more than 10, view the values with the buttons "Last Page" lll!l!llm and "Next Page"
HJ!Ii!l~l at the bottom of the dialog box. Click "Close" button to return to the numerical display
39 40
Wl\..1!.'!1
MIIOII"f$P H'OLLiAS MACS Qperatlbn Manual -~..~iii
JIIJIII'II~IlVSilw HOLLIAS MACS Operation Manual
3.5 Trend
The types of the trend are divided into comprehensive trend, digital trend, XY trend and contrast
trend.
Comprehensive trend, digital trend and XY trend can be displayed with "Track" status and "History"
status, the default status is "Track". Under the "Track" status, the tag values and status are tracked and
displayed continuously with time and data marks in the trend graph. "History" status is used to display
the trend values within the specified historical time. Click "«" and "»" buttons to view the tags values
stored in the server and the historical database, which the version is same as the version of the current
using database.
Comprehensive trend can be displayed in the two modes such as "Curve Trend" and "Numerical
Trend", and the "Curve Trend" mode is default setting. Digital trend and XY trend display mode only is
curve mode.
When displaying analog trend and digital trend, a maximum of 8 tags trends can be displayed in one
graph; when displaying XY trend, a maximum of 4 curves can be displayed in one graph. In the curve
mode, the display range is real~timely corrected according to the fluctuations of the curve displayed on
the screen; it is convenient to view the changes of the curves; the function can be selected or shielded
by the operator. The 4 graphs can be displayed to contrast trend to show the differences between the
trend tag displayed and the inputted.
Trend response time: 18.
0 Note,
• User only with engineer level can print 3.5.1 Comprehensive Trend
Press ~comprehensive Variable" key of the special keyboard or select "Comprehensive Trend" of
8 Tip, !ll!l!iH
the toolbar.Uin the top of the screen to pop-up «Comprehensive Trend" graph to show analog trend
The user~defined parameters grouping file is saved in the folder at: Operator station installation
and digital trend. Curve mode is default display mode as shown as in Figure 3.5-1.
directory\ config, the file name is paragroup**, ** means the group number 00-29. The file can be
copied between the different operator stations instead of repeating the definition of parameters
group.
41 42
Mih~">l -~«iii
,.llloltrSn HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual Jill li<IRI(S"Ifll HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
minutes is displayed on the screen with each click of D button; if the tag value of the curve
variable is not recorded in the historical database in the moment, no curve display; the trend
curve of the later five minutes is displayed on the screen with each click of .mliJ button till the
time from the moment of clicking "History" button is less than 5 mins.
Under the "history~ status, click "Track" button to retum to track status.
3) Select display mode: click "Curve" or "Numeric" to select display mode. Select "Numeric" mode
in the cwve window, the trend will be dispalyed in the numerical mode as shown as in Figure
3.5~2; the first row displays the names of the 8 analog tags of the current unit group, the first
column displays the variable time, the column 2-9 display the variable values at the variable
time.
Under the track status, the screen wiff automatically scroll upwards to a new display.
Under the history status, view the previous tag value with the ~ and .mmll keys in the window
below.
Figure 3.5-1 Comprehensive Trend Group Curve Graph
The Curve is displayed from left to right in time order, the display includes variable Captions and
variable trend curve. Different curve is marked with different color.
In the curve display area, the horizontal axis represents the time range, the vertical axis represents
the value range. The area is divided into 5 large unit grids; each one below has time mark., The vertical
axis coordinates is same as the currently selected curve coordinates, and its color is Same as the
selected curve also.
The instruction of the softkeys of the toolbar of the comprehensive trend graph:
1) Select trend group: click the drop-down list box, select group number and unit group number.
The system contains a total of 30 trend groups, each with 32 tags. The maximum of;B tag trends
Figure 3.5-2 Conprehenslve Trend Dsipaly In the Numerical Mode
can be shown in one screen, so 8 tags are one group; each group contains the maximum of 4
unit groups. Selecting the trend group to be viewed also can be done with "Curve Group 4) Time setting: the time range of the abscissa can be set as 5 minutes, 10 minutes, 25 minutes,
Selectionn button. 50 minutes, 60 minutes, 4 hours, 8 hours, 24 hours or 60 hours. The window will display the
2) Select display status: click "Track" or "History" to select the display status. VVhen selecting variable curves or values during the time being set in "Time Setting".
"Historyn status, the changing of the curve stops, the buttons Jm1 and m in the;rower left of 5) Trend query positioning: the button only can be used under "History" mode. Select "Trend
the window are avaiable. Click the buttond ~ and E to view the historical trend curves. For query positioning" button to pop-up the dialog box as shown as in Figure 3.5-3; input the time,
example, the current time setting is 5 mins, it means that the trend curve of th6 former five acknowledge it, the window will display the variable curves or values after the time.
43 44
ar.!!.i! HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
Pill \. 1·1 iii
~~~~11•$11• HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
6) User-defined trend tag: click "User-defined trend tag" to pop-up the dialog box as shown as in button, the variable will be deleted from the group. Curve color is system default setting; double-click one
Figure 3.5-4. CUIVe color or select one variable then click "Color" button to change the variable curve color. Click "OK"
button, the window will display the variables trends of the group.
7) Select tag information: the detailed tag information is displayed in the list of the upper curve
window; click the check box to select whether display the curve. Click a piece of tag information,
the vertical coordinates in the curve window will be the variable range and the variable curve
will be the currently selected curve.
8) Select tag line: if drag !.ill with mouse, a white vertical line pointer will be displayed in the curve
window; the pointer can be used to calibrate a variable value of a certain moment. Hold down
the left mouse button, move the white vertical line pointer; the variable value of the moment
positioned by the pointer will be displayed in the list of the upper curve window. The variable
time is the curve time positioned by the pointer.
9) Modify curve range: click "Modify Curve Range" to pop~up the dialog box to modify the
display range of the currently selected curve.
10) Print Trend: print the curve displayed in the current window.
11) Save current curve: the button only can be used under the "History" status. Click the button
to pop~up the Save Current Curve dialog box, input a file name in the dialog box to save the
curve; the curve can be used to Contrast operation.
12) Function with right button: click right trackball/mouse button in the curve area of the curve
window to do the operations below:
Move Curve: select "Curve Move Up", the currently selected curve will move up 10% of
its range; select "Curve Move Down", the currently selected curve will move down 10% of
its range.
Restoring operation: select "Restore Curve" to restore the curve scaled and moved to its
original position and size.
Display grid: click the button to select whether display the grid and the types of the
display grid: large or small grid.
Curve display setting: click the button to pop~up "Curve Display setting" dialog box as
shown as in Figure 3.5~5; change the widths of the curve and grid lines and the colors of
the background, selecting lines, grid lines and X scale. "Draw Tag" can display the tag
Figure 3.5-4 User-defined Trend Tag value of the each moment on the screen, so the trend is not a continuous curve, but rather
a series of tags distributed in time order; to the axis time display, you can choose the
The definition details of the comprehensive trend group: select one trend group in the "Analog tag
display time and date, the display time and the display relative time, in which the relative
groups list", select the number of trend unit group, add the trend group description, select system name
time is based on X~axis origin is 0 time.
in the "Basic System" list, select the variable in the "Basic system variable", double~click the variable or
click "Add" to add the tag to the group; if select one variable in "Analog tag groups list" then click "Delete"
45 46
_,--
'ni>«'>l
,P4n,u'(l;,-s HOLLIAS MAGS Operation Manual D~.~ HOLLIAS MAGS Operation Manual
installation directory\ config, the file name is zhcurvedef"*, **means the group number 01-30. The
file can be copied between the different operation stations instead of repeating the definition of trend
group.
3.5.2 Digital Trend
Press "Digital Trend~ key of the special keyboard or select "Digital Trend" of the toolbarlmin the top
of the screen, the digital trend curves graph is displayed on the screen as shown as in Figure 3.5-6.
Figure 3.5-5 Curve Display Settings
The corresponding relationship between the operating level and contents of comprehe~sive trend is
shown in Table 3.5-1.
Table 3.5-1 The operation levels and contents of comprehensive trend

Operation level Manit Opera! Engine
Operations oring oc ., Comments :
Select trend group -1 -1 -1

Select display status -1 -1 -1
Select display mode -1 -1 -1
Time setting -1 -1 -1
Digital tag bit check The function is not available to
.
Compreh comprehensive trend.
ensive Select trend group -1 -1
trend Trend query positioning -1 -1 -1 Must be under History status.
User-defined trend tag -1 -1
Modify curve range -1 -1 -1
Print Trend -1
Save current curve -1 -1 -1 Must be under Histo status.
Function with right button -1 -1 -1 .
i'b Tipo
Figure 3.5-6 Digital Trend Group
The user-defined comprehensive trend group file is saved in the folder at: operator station
Digital trend display is similar to the comprehensive trend, the differences between them are:
47 48
•
·~-'!.~
W~tf~
HOLLiAS MACS Operation Manual M l!~fno$!1s
1. Digital tag only has two status: 0 and 1, so the 8 digital trend curves don't cross; Y~axis marks the 0,
1 status of the each digital tag orderly.
2. Digital tag trend only can be display in curve.
3. To digital tag trend, the function "Modify Curve Range" is not available.
4. Time setting can be 12s, 5mins or 10mins.
5. Add "Digital· Tag Bit Check" function. Click "Digital Tag Bit Check" button to pop-up "Set Query
Conditions" dialog box as shown as in Figure 3.5-7; input the query time range; if querying by the
tag number, select "TagNo"; if querying by the tag name, select "Tag Name"; click "OK" button to
pop-up the digital tag bit check table as shown as in Figure 3.5-8. The table lists the bit check
information of the tags queried during the query time range. Click "Print" button ·to print the
information listed in the table; click ~set Query Condition" button to pop-up "Set Query Condition"
dialog box, re-input the time range and the tag information to query again.
Figure 3.5-8 Digital Tag Bit Check Table
The other display operations of the digital trend is same as the comprehensive trend, please refer to
the comprehensive trend introduction for the more details.
The corresponding relationship between the operating level and contents of digital trend is _shown in
Table 3.5-2.
.,
Table 3.5-2 Operation levels and contents of digital trend
Figure 3.5-7 Set Query Conditions Operation level Monit Operat Engine
Comments
Operations orina oc
Digital Select trend group v v v
trend
Select dis Ia status v v v
Select display mode v v v
lime sellfng v v v
Digital tag bit check v v v
Select trend group v v
Trend auerv Positionina v v v Must be under Hlstorv status,
User-defined trend taO v v
Modify curve range The function Is not available to digital
trend.
49 50
~·
-~!i~
kii~R~
M11on-an HOLUAS MACS OperatiOn Manual HOLLiAS MACS Operation Manual
Print Trend 1 XY trend display is similar to the comprehensive trend, the differences between them are:
'I 'I
Save current curve
Function with right button ''I 'I 'I
Must be under History statuS. 1. The number of the user·defined XY trend groups is only 8; the each group contains 4 trend
curves. Click "User·defined Trend Tag" to pop-up the XY trend curve definition dialog box as
shown as in Figure 3.5-10; input two analog tag names in "X" and "Y" items respectively; click
1!1 Tip,
"OK" button to view the XY trend curves.
The user-defined digital trend group file is saved in the folder at: operator statiori installation
directory\ config, the file name is kgcurvedef**, **means the group number 01-30. The file can be
copied between the different operation stations instead of repeating the definition of trerid group.
3.5.3 XY Trend
Press uxv Trend" key ofthe special keyboard or select "XV Trend" of the toolbarllin the top of the
screen, the XV trend curves graph is displayed on the screen as shown as in Figure 3.5~9; XV trend
curves show the values changes of the two related analog tags.
U:l"''"'""'""m~ ...... tfrii """'·!!h"'!IU
Figure 3.5-10 XYTrend Curve Defination Dialog Box
2. X-axis and V-axis show the analog values rather than time.
3. The curves during the setting time can be displayed on the screen. The setting time can be
5mins, 10mins, 25mins, 50mins, 100mins or 5hrs. For example the setting time is 5mins; under
track status, the trend curves of the 5mins away from the current time are displayed; under
history status, use ~ and .!!mill keys to view the curves of the each past 5 mins.
4. Move the white line pointer to a point on the X-axis, the "Selected Values List" area in the
bottom right of the screen will display all the Vvalues corresponding to the point on the X-axis.
5. When trend query positioning, display the curves during the period, which starts from querying
time and the length is the setting time.
6. The function with right button is not available.
The other display operations of XV trend is same as the comprehensive trend, please refer to the
comprehensive trend introduction for the more details.
The corresponding relationship between the operating level and contents of XV trend is shown in
Figure 3.5-9 XY Trend Curves Graph Table 3.5-3.
51 52
11'2!.«'!1 11'2\,lfii
Mlfoll~ H,OLLiAS MACS OperatiOn Manual JJIIIIIII~tlil'hs HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
Table 3.5-2 The operation levels and contents of XY trend

Operation level Manit Operat Engine
Operations orin a oc ., Comments -
Select dis Ia status v v v

Time setting v v v
XYtrend
Select trend group v v '
Print Trend v v
Trend query positioning v v v Must be under History status.
User-defined trend tag v v
,e Tip.
The user-defined XV trend group file is saved in the folder at: operator station installatiOn directory\
config, the file name is xycurvedef**, ** means the group number 01-QB. The file can be copied
between the different operation stations instead of repeating the definition of trend group.
Figure 3.5-11 Contrast Trend Curves Graph
There are 4 small contrast trend graphs on the screen; the operations of the trend contrasting of 4
3.5.4 Contrast Trend
groups can be done at the same time.
(1) Switch trend graph: activate a small trend graph by clicking the white line pointer in it.
(2) Input contrast curve: click "lnput/Modifyn button of the contrast trend graph to pop-up Input
Select ·contrast Trend" of the toolbarlllJin the top of the screen, the contrast trend curves graph is
Contrast Curve dialog box as shown as in Figure 3.5-12. Operator can input a new contrast
displayed on the screen as shown as in Figure 3.5-11. curve in the dialog box, the default curve range is 0-100 and the color is yellow. Operator also
can define the curve range, color, relative time and engineering value to create a new contrast
curve in the dialog box.
Input curve name, click "Save" button to save the new curve. The curve file will be saved at
Operator station installation directory\config, and the file name is the curve name.
Click "Open" to open a saved curve, modify its parameters.
53 54
-~~~~- HOLUAS MAGS Operation Manual
the contrst curve in the graph.
(5) Contrast: input the tag name, which will be contrasted with the curve displayed in the trend
graph, in the "Input Track Tag" edit box as shown as in Figure 3.5-14; press ~Enter" key of the
keyboard to do the contrast; the contrast curve will be displayed in the trend graph with track
statues; click IQIJNIIUIJ button to adjust the changing time of the contrast curve.
0.00
0.00
IHII!UIIIlllllllllilliiiiiiiiiHIIII!fllllHHilll!ftll!l
0.00 ' '
0.00
0.00
0.00
o.oo
0.00
D.OO
(6) Display status: there are 2 trend display status such as "History" and "Track". "Track"
status is the system default detting: the period is 2s and the X-axis time interval is 15mins.
Select "History" item below the trend graph to switch to "History" display status, adjust the
trend display time with the buttons .nmnl and mil below the trend graph.
(7) Full screen trend display: select a small trend graph, click "Full Screen Display" button,
Figure 3.5-12 Input Contrast Curve
the trend graph will be displayed full screen as shown as in Figure 3.5-15; click "Restore
(3) Open contrast curve: select one small contrast trend graph, click "Insert" buttOn to pop-up Trend" to restore the 4 small trend graph display.
Open Curve dialog box as shown as in Figure 3.5-13. You can display a trend curve, which has
been saved, to do contrast.
Figure 3.5-13 Open Curve Dialog Box
(4) Delete contrst curve: select one small contrast trend graPh, click "Delete" button to delete
55 56
-~Ji~- HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
Display full screen .J .J .J

Select display status .J .J .J
Adjust contrast trend .J .J .J
chanaina time
Function with right button .J .J .J
3.5.5 Edit Trend Group
System supports user-defined trend group.
Select "Edit Trend Group" of the toolbarll!lin the top of the screen to pop-up ~Edit Self-define Trend
Group" dialog box as shown as in Figure 3.5-16; input trend group name, click "Add" button , the trend
group name is displayed in "List of defined trend group", click "OK". Select the trend group name in "List
of defined trend group", click "Delete" to delete the user-defined trend group.
Figure 3.5-15 Full Screen Contrast Trend Display
(8) Function with right button: the detailed operations are same as the comprehensive
trend.
The corresponding relationship between the operating level and contents of contrast trend is shown
in Table 3.5-4.
Table 3.5-4 Operation levels and contents of contrast trend
Operation level
Monitoring Operator Engineer Comments
Operations Figure 3.5-16 Edit User-defined Trend Group
Contrast lnpuVModffy .J
trend
Insert .J .J .J
Delete .J .J .J Select "Display Trend Group" of the toolbar!ll!lin the top of the screen, and select the trend group
Input track tag .J .J .J name, pop-up the trend group graph as shown as in Figure 3.5-17.
57 58
•b«';l
J!,;iiMn~sn It~$~ HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
If you would like to display the variable trend and pop.up the relative control panel at the same time;
select the control panel type in ~Relative Panel Type" item, input or select Panel Tag Name as shown as
in Figure 3.5-20. Click "OK" to pop-up the trend graph as shown as in Figure 3.5-21.
Figure 3.5---20 Trend Tag Setting
Figure 3.5-.17 Trend Group Graph without Trend Variabls
A maximum of 8 analog tag trends can be defined in one trend group; the different trend curve is
marked in different color. The each tag trend can be displayed separately; the relative control panel
pop-up also. Click a color box with right mouse button to pop-up Trend Tag Setting dialog box as shown
as in Figure 3.5-18. You can input trend tag name in "Input Trend Tag" item directly, or click_"Select Tag"
button to pop-up the dialog box as shown as in Figure 3.5-19 and select the trend tag name with the
basic system list.
Figure 3.5-21 Trend Group Graph

Figure 3.5-18 Trend Tag Setting Figure 3.5-19 Dialog Box
The trend tag names and values positioned by the white line pointer are displayed in the top of the
59 60
w~~ii
-~!Js! H'oLUAS MACS OperatiOn Manual -~~~11\IIWI HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
trend graph. The time range of the X-axis can be 5mins, 1Omins, 25mins, 50mins and 60niins, and the
trend curves will be displayed during the time range. toolba8n the top of the screen to pop-up "Analog Tag PDR" window as shown as in Figure 3.6-1. The
Click the highlighted variable value next to the variable name in the lower right comer: of the trend window can display up to 5 analog tag PDR records, and the each includes the disturbance occurring
group graph to pop-up the pre-set panel as shown as in Figure 3.5-22. time and PDR description.
Select one analog tag PDR, click "Display" button to pop-up the PDR curve display window.
Group number: the default PDR group number is 1. Each PDR includes 6 groups, and one group
includes 10 variables.
> Sub-group number: the default unit group number is 1. One group includes several
sub-groups, and one sub-group includes 10 variables.
> Print click "Prinf button to print all PDR records displayed in current list box.
> Exit: click "Exit" button to clo'se the PDR display window.
+ Numerical mode:
A maximum of 10 analog tag names and units of the current group of the analog PDR can be
displayed at the top of the list box. The first column of the PDR in the list box display the variable time,
the column 2-11display the variable values in the variable time. One row in the list box means one PDR
record. The first record is disturbance source, and the record with # mark means that the disturbance
source changed the status.
+ Curve mode:
Figure 3.5-22 Trend Group Graph with the Panel Select "Curve" to switch to curve display mode. All the parameters of the groups and sub-groups are
kept.
Click "Save" button in the lower right corner to save the trend group. The trend file willibe saved in
The softkeys functions instruction under CuiVe mode:
the folder at Operator station installation directory\ config, the file name is CurvePiateDef_O~
> History: A screen a maximum of 300 PDR records can be displayed in current PDR curve
window. When the number of the PDR records is more than 300, select "History" and view the
8 Note, historical curves with the keys ml and R below the window.
• User with any login level can edit and display trend group. > Tag name and description: select Ia or not, it will decide whether display the tag curve. Click
a tag name and the description, the range of the ordinate of the curve window will be the range
of the currently selected tag.
> Change status line: when there are the status changes of the digital tags during the time range
3.6 Post Disturbance Review (PDR) in the curve window, the time of the status changing will be displayed in the drop-down list box
of "Change Status Line".
3.6.1 Analog Tag PDR

8 Note:
• User only with engineer level can open "Analog PDR".
Press "Analog Tag" in the PDR area of the special keyboard or select "Analog Tag PDR~ of the
61 62
~~~1!s~ HblUAS MACS Operation Manual
Ml\,ljOJi
-~~~RWSl11 HOlliAS MACS Operation Manual
3.6.2 Digital Tag PDR 3.7 Print
Press "Digital Tag" in the PDR area of the special keyboard or ·select "Digital Tag PDR" of the
3. 7.1 Print Setting
toolbariln the top of the screen to pop-up digital tag PDR window. The window can display up to 5
digital tag PDR records, and the record includes the disturbance occurring time, the PDR description and
the PDR status. Click one PDR record to display the PDR curve.
Click "Print Setting" of llJi "Engineer Function" menu of the main menu on the screen to pop-up
Click one PDR record, click "Display" button to pop-up the window. "#!' in the front qf the record the print setting dialog box as shown as in Figure 3. 7-1.
means that the disturbance source changed the status; one "#!' means changing status once.
Print: click "Print" button to print all the records in the current list box.
Exit: click ~Exit" button to close the PDR display window.
0 Note,
• User only with engineer level can open "Digital Tag PDR".
3.6.3 SOE PDR
The SOE main function is collecting the information of all alarming SOE variables.
When pressing "SOE" key of the special keyboard, the SOE information will be displayed on the
base graph.
Each piece of the information occupies one row on the screen, and includes time; most information
includes the tag name, description and alarm status.
Click "Display" button to pop-up the window. "#!' in the front of the record means that the disturbance
Figure 3.7-1 Print Setting Dialog Box
source changed the status; one "#!' means changing status once.
The print settings instruction:
The specials:
( 1 ) Alarm recovery event is not recorded in SOE record. > Auto Print: select the contents to be printed automatically.
The mark R1 means the item is selected. There are two options to Report Auto Print: "Only
(2) No the disturbance source triggering, SOE tags are not recorded in the SOE record.
save to file" and "Print and save to file"; the report file saved can be print at any time, and the
0 Note, file is saved in the folder at Operator station installation directory \ start; the folder name is the
report name.
User only with engineer level can open "SOE PDR".
> Screen Print: selecting "Screen Print" means that the key "Pr Scm" of the special keyboard
and the softkey "Print Screen" of "Graph Management" menu are available, otherwise they are
63 64
Wi~«'!l w.~t!'!l
PA~ron.,sn HOLLiAS MACS Operation Manual S111illun~ HOlUAS MACS Operation Manual
unavailable. There are two options to Screen Print "Only save to file• and ~Print:and save to
file~; the screen print file saved can be print at any time, and the file is save in the folder at
Operator station installation directory \ config; the folder name is the operating: date of the
screen print.
> Alarm print direction: can be default setting of the printer, horizontal, or vertical.
)> Log print direction: can be default setting of the printer, horizontal, or vertical.
> Graph print color bit: can be the screen color bits or 16 bits.
> Screen print color change table: change the old screen display colors (not conducive to
printing and viewing) with the new color (conductive to printing and viewing).
Q Note,
• User only with engineer level can open "Print Setting".
3.7.2 Report Request

Figure 3.7-2 Report Print Configuration Window
Press "Report Request" of the special keyboard or select "Engineer Function" of the main
menurlfin the top of the screen, click "Report Print Configuration" to pop-up the dialog as shown as in + Schedule Operation
)> Add Schedule: input the description information in "Schedule descrip" edit box, set schedule
Figure 3.7-2.
time, click "Add schedule" button to add the schedule to the left tree-list-box.
)> Modify Schedule: select the schedule to be modified in the ieft tree-list-box, modify the
schedule description and time, click "Affirm Modify" button.
)> Delete Schedule: select the schedule to be deleted in the left tree-list-box, click "Delete
schedule" button.
+ Event schedule
)> Add Event: select a schedule in the left tree-list-box, select the report name to be printed in
"Report name" edit box, input Report Description, click "Add event" button.
)> Modify Event, Delete Event: the operations are same as the Modify Schedule, Delete Schedule.
0 Note,
• You can input the report name in "Report name" edit box, or click the right selecting button to select
the report to be added from the file folders. The report file must be at the directory: Operator station
65 66
•
Dr.~ HOLUAS MAGS OperatiOn Manual Dt!!.:! HOLUAS MAGS Operation Manual
installation directory\ start. input print time and select Print Output Mode, click "OK" button to print the report seleted.
• Number of scheduling events can be added to a schedule, it means that a number of reports can be
printed at the same time. A report file can be called by a number of schedules, which means that a
D Note,
• User only with engineer level can open "Configuration of report printing".
report file can be printed at different times.
• User with operation level or engineer level can open Report Request Print Window.
Schedule is used to determine the print time; Event is used to determine the report file to be printed.
When selecting "Report auto print" item in "Print setup" window, system will .print report
automatically if meeting the print time. 3.7.3 Print Screen

+ Report request print Select the graph to be copied with mouse cursor; click "Print Screen" key of the special keyboard or
Select "Report request print" in the main menu !ill to pop-up the window as shown as in Figure select "Print Screen" of "Graph Management" menu l!iii!J of the main menu to print screen.
3.7-3; select the name of the report configured, click "Request print" button to pop-up "Selecting report
print time" window as shown as in Figure 3.7-4, input print time and select Print Output Mode, click "OK" D Note,
button to orint the reoort seleted.
Only Selecting "Print Screen" in "Print Setup" dialog box of "Engineer Function" menu, screen can
be printed.
3.8 Device Status Graph
When pressing "Device Status" button of the special keyboard or selecting "System Status" in the
main menulll the system status graph will be displayed on the screen base graph as shown as in
Figure 3.8-1.
Figure 3.7-3 Report Request Print Window Figure 3.7-4 Selecting Report Print lime
Select the report name in the left tree-list-box in "Configuration of report printing" Window, click
"Reports request print" button to pop-up "Selecting report print time" window as shown as in Figure 3. 7-4,
67 68
11'2\,.lhl
,..ll<'lll)l$y;j
-~~~~ HOlllAS MACS Operation Manual
Communication
OK Failed/Offline
station
Printer OK Failed/Offline
~--'---
+ Server
,... The system is dual Hot~backup system. The master server is marked in green; the standby
server is marked in yellow; red is used to indicate t\ovo situations: server failure or the
versions of the databases downloaded to the two servers are different.
+ Field control station
> Green indicates that the master main control unit works normally; yellow indicates that the
standby main control unit works normally; red indicates the main control unit failed or
offline. The each 1/0 module status is shown in Figure 3.8~2: green indicates the 1/0
module works normally, red indicates the 1/0 module failed, yellow indicates the wrong
module configuration.
+ Network
)> The system adopts dual networks architecture. Green indicates the network works
normally, red indicates the network failed.
+ Operator station
)> Green indicates the operator station is online and works normally; red indicates the
Figure 3.8-1 System Status Graph
operator station is offline or failed.
Click the softkey "110 Version Statistics" in System Status Graph to view the software version + Printer
number of the control station, which is running currently. > Green indicates the printer is online and works normally; red indicates the printer is offline
The system status graph shows the operations of the system devices in real-time ard uses the or failed.
different colors to indicate the different device statuses. The correspOnding relationship between the Operator can follow the steps below to view the statues of the panels and tags of the field control
device statuses and the colors is shown in Table 3.8-1. station:
Click the field control station in Figure 3.8-1; the graph, as shown as in Figure 3.8-2, will be
Table 3.8-1 System device statues table
displayed on the screen base graph. The current status of the each 1/0 module of the field control station
Device Green Yellow Red
will be shown in Figure 3.8-2: green indicates that the 110 module works normally, and red indicates that
Server Master OK Standby OK Failed the 1/0 module failed, yellow indicates the wrong configuration of the 1/0 module.
Select an 1/0 module in Figure 3.8-2, the information, such as the tag name, tag description, the
Main control
Master OK Standby OK Failed current tag value and etc., will be displayed in the window as shown as in Figure 3.8-3. User can close
unit
the window to view the other 1/0 module information.
UO module Module OK Configuration failure Failed
Network OK Failed
Operator station OK Failed/Offline
69 70
- ·;·
WI~>«'.! ~~~j-
JJI llall•Sn HOLUAS MAGS OperatiOn Manual
Figure 3.9·1 ·Level Right-button Function 1
Figure 3.8-2 Panel Status of FCS Figure 3.8-3 Points list
3.9 Function with Right Button
Click the dynamic tags of the flowchart with the mouse/trackball right button, the right-button menu
will pop-up. The right-button menu with engineer level is shown as in Figure 3.9-1, displayS Tag Trend, Figure 3.9-3 Engineer Level Right-button Function 2 Figure 3.9-4 Engineer/Monitoring Level Right-button Function 2
Force Tag, Add Tag to Trend Group, Tag Details, Zoom, Restore, Full-screenlwindow,- Full-screen
Display, Text switch, Size, Open Base Graph. The right-button menu with operator or monitoring level is
3.9.1 Tag Trend
shown as in Figure 3.9-2, displays Tag Trend, Tag Information, Zoom, and Restore, Full-screen/window,
Full-screen Display, Text switch, Size.
Click the static tags of the flowchart with the mouse/trackball right button, the right-button menu with Click the "Tag Trend" item in the right-button menu; if it's an analog tag, the window as shown as in
engineer level will pop-up as shown as in Figure 3.9-3. There isn't "Add Tag to Trend GroUp" and "Tag Figure 3.9-5 will pop-up. The tag trend curve will be displayed in the window.
Details" items in this menu; the others items are same as the dynamic tag menu. The right-button menu
with operator or monitoring level is as shown as in Figure 3.9-4, there isn't "Add Tag to Trend Group" and
"Tag Information" items in this menu; the other items are same as the dynamic tag menu.
71 72
kl~li.J
PAIIoltJS'n HbLUAS MACS Operation Manual -~~f~ HOLLJAS MACS Operation Manual
3.9.3 Add Tag to Trend Group

Comprehensive trend group is used to display the trends of the analog and digital tags. Digital trend
group is only used to digital trend display. Comprehensive trend group and digital trend group can be
defined online on the operator station. Operator must re~open the trend graph to view the trend group
modified.
Click the dynamic tags of the flowchart with the mouse/trackball right button, select "Add Tag to
Trend Group"; the dialog box "Add Tag to Trend Group" pop-up as shown as in Figure 3.9-7.
Figure 3.9-5 Tag Trend (curve) Wndow Figure 3.9-6 Tag Trend (numeric) Wndow
Select "Numeric» in the top of the Tag trend {curve) window; the Window, as shown as in Figure
3.9-6, pops up, and the tag values are shown in the window. Select "History" to display the data or curve
recorded in the history database. Select "Track~ to display the data or curve in real-time. Input new
datum in the "Interval" edit box, click "Update", the sampling period will be changed. Click i!lfl button to
pup-up the basic system fist, select the other tag in the fist; the tag trend will be displayed in Tag trend
window. Figure 3.9-7 Add Tags to Trend Group
Select the system name in the basic system fist, select the variable in the basic system list, select
3.9.2 Forcing Tag the trend group type and number; the variable will be added to the trend group selected.
If selecting "OK", the dialog box will be closed and the variable is added to the trend group.
VVhen the variable status is changed from Auto to Force, system will stop the sampling and If selecting "Abandon", the dialog box will be closed and the variable is not added to the trend group.
processing of the variable and produce "Force start" event information; the information will b6 sent to the If selecting "Trend", the variable will be added to the trend group, the comprehensive trend or digital
relative Log and Force Table. For the more details, please refer to "3.2 Force". trend will be displayed according to the trend group type and number selected, and the dialog box will be
closed.
8 Note,
User only with engineer level can do the operation.
8 Note,
• User only with engineer level can do the operation.
• Forcing tag must be server tag.
73 74
«
1'2 \, o,J
J!'An..u~"' HOLUAS"MACS Operation Manual ~~~~ HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
3.9.4 Tag Details
Click the right mouse button on a dynamic tag and select "Tag Details", a dialog box pops up, shown in
figure 3.9~8. The engineers can modify some items of the variables, such as the range of analog, higher
limit, higher-higher limit, lower limit, lower-lower limit of alarm and its alarm priority.
Click HI button, a dialog box pops up, shown in figure 3.9-9. First select a system naine in "Basic
System" catalog, then select a variable in "Variables in Basic System" catalog, and then you can check
or modify the parameters of the variable.
The modification of variable parameters will create event information of starting modification and it
will be recorded in operation log.
Figure 3.9·9 "Tag Details~ window
0 Note:
• This operation can be done by the users with engineer rights.
3.9.5 Tag Information
Click the right mouse button on a dynamic tag and select "Tag
Information", a dialog box pops up, shown in figure 3.9-10. The Tag
Figure 3.9·8 "Tag Details" window information is displayed in the window. Click ~ button, at the bottom of
the window a trend of the variable will be displayed.
~~Tip:
• In "Tag Details" window the values in white background can be inodified. When you restart the Flgure3.9-10 "Tag Info" window
server, the modified contents will restore the settings in original database. 0 Note:
• This operation can be done by the users with operator rights and monitor rights.
75 76
W~t!o,l
, . llt>llJSn
HOLUAS MACS OperatiOn Manual -~~2. HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
"Do you want to assign the size automatically?" is selected, click "OK" the system will assign the size of
3.9.6Zoom window automatically. If "Do you want to a~ign the size automatically?" is not selected, you can fill in the
window position in the blanks in "Window position" catalog manually.
Select the screen to zoom and click "Zoom" in the context menu, then the screen will display in
enlarged size.
3.9. 7 Restore
Select "Restore" in the context menu to restore the enlarged screen to the initial size.
If it's a multi~window screen, the restored screen will be displayed in current window.
3.9.8 Full-screen/Window
Multi-window mode can be set for operator graph, the method is: click "Start"\ "AU- Programs"\
"MACS"\ "MACS_OPS"\ "Config• and "MACS2001 Settings" dialog box appears, shown in figure 3.9~11.
Click "Advanced Settings" in "MACS2001 Settings" dialog box, a dialog box to set multi~window pops up,
shown in figure 3.9~12.
Figure 3.9-13 Multi-window Screen

If multi~window screen is set, when you open online screen a multi~window screen will appears,
shown in figure 3.9-13 (set 4 windows).
If multi~window screen is opened, click "Full-screen/Window" option to switch between multi-window
screen and single-window screen.
0 Note:
• For "Full-screenMJindow" option, the full-screen window is the one on which the mouse click, if
there is no clicking, the default window 0 is the full-screen window.
Figure 3.9-11 "MACS2001 Settings" Dialog Box Figure 3.9-12 Multi-window Settings Dialog Box
Maximum 8 windows can be set, the method is: first fill in "Total number of backpictureS", such as 4
and click "OK" after the number. Fill in the file name in "Name of the file that the window opened", and if
77 78
--~«"
,BIIIfoll'l1:n HOLliAS MACS Operation Manual lt~a~
3.9.9 Full-screen Display
Click this option, and the window will be in full-screen display.
3.9.1 0 Text Switch
Click "Text switch~ in the context menu, the value of the dynamic tag and the tag name 'in database
will be switched and through this it's easier to check the tag name of the dynamic tag, shciwn in figure
3.9·14 and 3.9·15.
Figure 3.9-15 "Text switch" Window 2
3.9.11 Size
Click "Size" in the context menu and a window pops up at the lower right
corner of the screen, shown in figure 3.9-16. Here you can see the
appropriate size of current screen.
3.9.12 Open Base Graph Figure 3.9-16 Screen Size lips
Figure 3.9-14 "Text switch" Window 1

Click "Open base graph" in the context menu, the "Open base graph" dialog box pops up, shown in
figure 3.9-17. Here you can directly open all the graph files with the suffix «.hsg".
79 80
•~>«"
fAn<>IIJ1:n HOLLiAS MACS Operation Manual ~~~~~ HOLLiAS MACS Operation Manual
> Disable Special Key
Figure 3.~17 "Open base graph" Dialog Box
Figure 3.10-1 Comprehensive Function Menu

@Note:
• This operation can be done by the users with engineer rights.
3.1 0.1 Logon
Only after logon can users do these operations, see section ~2.3 Logon Operator Station" for details.
3.10 Engineer Function
3.10.2 Simulate Keyboard
Engineer-level users have special functions, press "Engineer" button in system special keyboard or
click~ "Engineer Function" in screen main menu, a window will pop up, shown in fi9ure 3.10-1,
including:
Click 1m "Engineer Function"\ "Simulate Keyboard" in screen main menu, the following small
simulate keyboard will pop up, shown in figure 3.10-2.
> Logon
Simple input can be done on small keyboard and click "Std Key", the simulated operator keyboard
> Simulate Keyboard
will appear, shown in figure3.10-3.
> Select Domain
)> User Management
> Right Management
> Set Server lime
> Change Master Server
> Print Setting
> Start Option
)> Report Configuration
Figure 3.10-2 Simulate Keyboard
81 82
-~~ -~!!.1! HOLUAS MAGS Operation Manual
-Monitor
'~J· Rlght2
. ·ENG
OPS
.. Monltar
r-r. 1'1\ghtJ
·ENG
OPS
Figure 3.10-3 Simulated Operator Keyboard

The functions of simulate keyboard is the same with that of operator special keyboard. Figure ~.1 0-4 ~user Managemenf' Window
In this window you can add, modify or delete the right, user level, user and password of ENG, OPS
and Monitor, you can also set the maximum number of engineer-level users or operator-level users to
3.10.3 Select Domain logon simultaneously. After modification click" Add/Modify" to exit.
Click "start"\ "All Programs"\ "MACS"\ "MACS_OPS"\ "Config" and "MACS2001 Settings" dialog box 0 Note:
appears, click "System Settings" and then fill in "Initial landing domain". After setting the system will
User management function belongs to online modification function, and if you want to modify ensure
enter the main graph of the selected domain directly. The default "Initial landing domain» is :domain 0.
After logon operator station, refer to section "2.2 Select Domain" about how to switch domains. that the server is in normal running. The modified data is stored in server and the data will be lost if
the server directory is deleted.
3.1 0.4 User Management • Online adding a user must be done on two servers, namely, add a user, switch server and then add
a user again.
Click ~ »Engineer Function»\ "User Management" in screen mairi menu, and "User management"
• The users in "User Management" are preset in offline configuration soft.Nare and after downloading
window pops up, shown in figure 3.10-4.
the online modified information will be covered by the offline configuration information.
83 84
,----
Dt.l~:'l HOLLiAS MACS Operation Manual

-~«.;!!
rAI:IIalh!S\ril HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
server. The check time of central server can be done by local clock or GPS. If local clock is adopted,
3.1 0.5 Right Management system allows the engineers to set the1 initial time of server clock and after setting the time send it to
central server, and then central server will broadcast it to each station for synchronization.
2 Special Situations
Click mil "Engineer Function"\ "Right Management" in screen main menu and "Right-Lock Setup" (1) Through two layers of network communication the settings will reach target station, and
window will pop up, as shown in figure 3.10-5. Define the tags that can't be operated under each right. generally the local time modification of target station lags for several milliseconds, so the clock
Fill in tag name (first 6 characters) and select the right, click "Add" and at last click "Update". modification operation should be avoided at the critical point of zero o'clock.
(2) The clock changes only in the second level, so the absolute time of system is exact in seconds.
For the digitals which are displayed in milliseconds, their milliseconds are relative.
(3) After clock changes, the system data may become inconsistent.
The system clock modification may result in the following affects for historical data already stored:
The time of corresponding historical data is also modified, namely, the time of historical data will be
displayed according to the time after modification. However the time of the logs and alarms which
already occurred is no longer modified, resulting that the time of historical data is inconsistent with the
time of logs and alarms.
For the back forward time modification (time after modification< current time), during the time
difference, the record of logs and alarms may not be arranged in chronological order.
3 Operations
Click "Engineer Function"\ «Set Server Time" and "Select Time" window pops up, shown in figure
3.10-6. Click "OK" to change system time.
Figure 3.10-5 "Right Management" Window

Right management is used to set whether the tags can be operated under each right. The rights of
operator station are locked by the lock position in operator special keyboard and there are four levels
Right 1, Right 2, Right 3 and Right 4.
3.1 0.6 Set Server Time

Figure 3.10-6 "Select Time" Dialog Box
1 Overview
The clock of system operator stations and field control stations are synchronized by system central
85 86
Dti~S~ HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual -~!!:! HOLliAS MACS Operation Manual
> Suppression and recovery of auto print can be done on designated operator station.
3.1 0. 7 Change Master Server > When SOE auto print is suppressed, operators can check whether the accident occurred at
any time.
1 Overview 2 Priorities
Two servers do the same data processing, when the master server thread or other masks fail, the When the printing conflicts:
master server and slave server can be switched manually, the master server changing from 'slave server (1) The priority of auto print is higher than that of request print.
will send data package to network message queue. (2) The priority of report auto print is lower than that of SOE auto print.
2 Operations 3 Operations
Click "Engineer Function"\ "Change Master Server'' in screen main· menu and the following window
pop up, shown in figure 3.10-7. Click "Yes" to change master server. Click & "Engineer Function"\ "Print" Setting" in scrklen main menu, "Print Setup" will pop up. Refer
to section "3. 7.1 Print Settings" for details.
3.1 0.9 Start Option
Figure 3.10-7 Prompt Dialog Box

Click Ia "Engineer Function"\ "Start Option" in screen main menu, "OPS Startup Options" window
3 Server Indications pops up, shown in figure 3.10-8.
When changing master server, the server name at the bottom right of the window status bar will
change, you can monitor the server status, shown in figure 3.10-8.
~,,,;c::g~;:io!;~;o,;;•;: '"' iidi;iiN~V~·iVfll!J.$.':•·••··.·········

Figure 3.10-8 the Bottom Right ofthe Window Status Bar
3.10.8 Print Setting

Figure 3.10-8 Prompt Dialog Box
1 Overview Startup options description:
In "Print Setup" window you can set auto print function and screen hard copy function. Automatically login the operation system: If the option is selected, automatically login the operation
+ Contents of auto print: system when operator station startup without password restriction.
> SOE auto print, report auto print. Automatically run OPS applications: If the option is selected, automatically run OPS applications
+ Conditions to start auto print: when operators login the operation system.
> SOE auto print when the source of accident appears print automatically.
> Report auto print: when the "Occur time" in "Configuration of report printing" arrives print ~~Tip:
automatically. • After operator station runs normally, it's recommended to select the two options in order to run OPS
+ Suppression and recovery of auto print:
87
r:·-
kl\,«o\1 ki\.Uo\1
. . . llafll'$'1111
,..llolllfhS H,OLliAS MACS Operation Manual HOLLIAS MACS Operation Manual
applications quickly when re-startup caused by accidents. manipulator, damper and breaker, a tip appears to provide guidance.
• The light gray button in the operation plate is not available.

3.1 0.1 0 Report Configuration
Click ~ mEngineer Function"\ "Report Configuration" in screen main menu, «Configuration of

3.11.1 PID Regulator
report printing" window pops up. Refer to section "3.7.2 Report Request" for details.
PID regulator also known as loop regulator, the regulator provides specific functions including:
switch of manual, auto, and cascade, trace modes, tuning of set value and manual output value, PID
3.1 0.11 Disable Special Key parameter tuning and so on.
There are three kinds of windows for PID regulator: loop operation window, trend display window
and parameter setup window. The following describes each window's information and usage.
Click ~ "Engineer Function"\ "Disable Special Key" in screen· main menu, "Disable windows 1 Loop operation window
function keys" window pops up, shown in figure 3.10-9. If the option is selected, disable ~he windows Click on preset PID hot tag, the loop operation window pops up, shown in figure 3.11-1. Click
function keys, Alt+Shift key.
·~~~ij. and "mimt on loop operation windc.1w to enter parameter setup window and trend display window
separately.
Figure 3.1 0..9 "Disable windows function keys" \Nindow
3.11 Control and Regulating
The control and regulating function provided by system is achieved by opening and closing
regulating instruments in flow chart. The regulating instruments include PlD regulator, analog
manipulator (opened loop), analog manipulator (closed loop), sequence control equipment (f_ossil power),
sequence control equipment (thermal power), damper, servo amplifier, Circuit breaker and sO on.
8 Note:
• Place the mouse on the status indication and numerical display area of sequence control equipment,
89 90
D~!!.~ HOLliAS MAGS OperatiOn Manual
l'lil. !<. I! os.
Mlilon~s"" HOLLiAS MAGS Operation Manual
Alarm indication When PID in manual, auto or trace mode, the set value is the inside set value; when PID in cascade
Operation mode: switch button mode the set value is the cascade input value.
When PID in manual mode, output value is given m~nually; when PID in auto or cascade mode, it's
given by algorithm; when in trace mode, it's the value of traced variable.
Operation mode· indication > Alarm status indication
Output value bar graph When deviation alarm appears, the light at the upper left corner is lightened (in red); when alarm
disappears, it returns to normal color.
Process value bar graph > Operation mode indication
PID operation modes include man, auto, cascade and trace. When the status indicator under one
Set value operation mode is in green, then it means that the PID is in this operation mode.
Set value bar graph )- Others
Process value
The static displays in PID loop operation window include tag name, tag description and so on.
(2) Operations
Output value In PID loop operation window the following operations can be done: switch of operation modes
(MAN, AUTO, CAS and TRACE), changing set values by increase and decrease buttons, changing
Set value of manual adjustment button Trends screen pop button
output values by increase and decrease buttons, switch to trend display window or parameter setup
window. All these operations are achieved by buttons. As the operations are subject to various
conditions, when the button in gray, it means that the button is not operational.
Setup screen pop button )- Switch of operation modes
Output value of manual adJustment There are four operation modes (MAN, AUTO, CAS and TRACE) and they can be switched without
disturbances.
Figure 3.11-1 PID Loop Operation Window
-} MAN: PID stops operation and change output value by increase and decrease buttons.
(1) Information -} AUTO: PID operates according to formula and the set value is the inside set value which is set
The information displayed in loop operation window includes: bar graph and numerical display of set by operator.
value (S), process value (P) and output value (0); operation mode indication; alarm status :indication. -> CAS: PID operates according to the outside set value from primary loop or other operation
)- Bar graph modules; if there is no cascade input signal, then you can't switch to CAS mode.
The three bar graphs in the left of the loop operation window are set value (S), proce'ss value (P) ~ TRACE: PID stops operation and it varies following the traced variable. According to the
and output value (0) and their colors are blue, cyan and magenta. method of entering TRACE mode, trace can be divided into manual trace and auto trace:
The height of set value bar is a percent of current value over the range. If PID in cascade mode, manual trace is achieved by pressing "TRACF button on PID loop operation window; for auto
then the bar of set value is outside set value, in other operation modes ifs inside set value. trace, enter auto trace when trace switch is "1" and return back to the previous operation mode
The height of process value bar is the process input value. when trace switch becomes"O".
The height of output value bar is the output value. The schematic diagram of switch of operation modes are shown in figure 3.11-2 and figure 3.11-3. In
)- Numerical display schematic diagram, the text in each circle is the operation mode, and the text above the line shows the
At the lower right area of the window the current set value, process value and output value are switching conditions and the operation, the arrow points to the operation mode after switch.
displayed and the colors of values are the same with that of the bar graphs. If manual allow and auto allow are set in parameter setting window, then click "MAN" or "AUTO" key,
9! 92
-~ll'!l -~ll'!l
,1111
J'A lfoii~'Sn HOLLiAS MACS Operation Manual
llatlw,ail
HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
or press "Manual" or "AUTO" key in special keyboard to switch PID operation mode to manual mode or
trace swlteh becomes 0 from 1
auto mode.
If cascade allow is set in parameter setting window (decided by ttie input signal), theri click "CAS" trace swllch becomes t from o and tho pravlous operation mode Is manual
key or "CAS" key in special keyboard to switch PID operation mode to cascade mode.
manual trace allow, press "TRACE~ button
manual allow, pron "MAN" button
Figure 3.11-3 Schematic Diagram of Auto Trace Switch
In trace mode, the output of PID follows the traced tag. According to the method of entering TRACE
mode, trace can be divided into manual trace by pressing buttons and auto trace controlled by switches.
Figure 3.11-2 Schematic Diagram of Manual Trace Switch
The method through which the PID enters trace mode is set by offline configuration and the description
of trace mode is shown in table 3.11-1.
Table 3.11-1 Description of trace mode
Trace
Traced tag Trace mode
switch
No No can enter trace mode
No Ye• Manual trace allows
93 94
Dr.~ HOLUAS MAGS Operation Manual -~JJR~ HOLUAS MAGS Operation Manual
Click ·oom~Ml
Can't enter trace mode
Auto trace allow

"icon or press «Setupn key in special keyboard to switch to parameter setting window.
Click ·D icon to dose the operation window.
If the configuration result is manual trace, then the operation mode is shown in figure 3.11-2,
Click •B icon, maintain the operation window open and be placed in the front even if switching
click "TRACE" key in PID window to switch operation mode to trace mode; click other keys to exit trace
windows.
mode and enter the corresponding mode.
If the configuration result is auto trace, then the operation mode is shown in figure 3.11 ~s. and when 2 Trend display window
the trace switch is 1, the operation mode switches to trace mode automatically. Only when the trace Except for the display function of PID loop operation window, PID
switch becomes a, exit trace mode automatically and enter the previous operation mode. trend display window shows the trend of process value, set value and
The switch of auto trace is performed by slave machine, when the operator station enters auto trace output value within 5 minutes.
mode, the trace running light is lightened and other keys get gray; when exit auto trace mode, the keys In PID loop operation window, click ·D· icon to pop up trend
return to normal. display window, shown in figure 3.11-4.
> Modification of set value The colors of three curves in trend display window are the same
When PID regulator is in manual mode or auto mode, the set value can be modified. with that of bars. At the bottom of trend display window shows the
~.
Click "!Er or
!Ill icons below the bar of set value or "i
"mt' ~" keys in special keyboard to increase or
upper limit and lower limit of the range of set value (S), process value
(P) and output value (0) from top to bottom. The left side shows the
decrease the set value. Click ·I key once or press "i r button in special keyboard once, the set value
lower limit and the right side shows the upper limit.
Click "il!t icon to close loop operation window.
!!!L
changes 1% of its range; Click "w· key once, the set value changes 5% of its range. The users can also
3 Parameter setup window
Figure 3.11-4 PID trend display
In parameter setting window, the PID parameters can be
type a value directly to modify the set value, click the set value in the numerical display area in PID
displayed and modified.
window and type a value and press "Enter".
In PID loop operation window, click .. ~:~~'MNI• icon or press "Setup"
> Modification of output value
key in special keyboard, if the operator has the rights, the following
When PID is in manual mode, the set value can be modified.
parameter setting window pops up, shown in figure 3.11-5.
~
Click ·~· icon below the bar of output value or ".&." "T" or " t" ., " keys in special keyboard to
!!lit
increase or decrease the output value. Click "!!ili key once or press ".&." "T" in special keYboard once,
the output value changes according to the PJD parameter "Slow manual rate of change". Press
'i "" f keys in special keyboard once, the output value changes according to the PID pararlleter "Quick
manual rate of change•. The users can also type a value directly to modify the output value, click the
output value in the numerical display area in PID window and type a value and press "Enter".
> Keys to switch windows
Click •g to switch to PID trend window.
95 96
•
-~li.;l
ar..~~~ JIJiii!olh:M HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
gray and can't be operated.

~ When a certain parameter is in gray, it means that this item is non-optional and can' be
modified.
> After parameter setting, click "Modify" button to take effect.
After parameter setting, click "Modify" button to take effect. After parameter setting, click "Refresh"
button to restore the value before modification. Click "Close" to exit.
0 Note:
• "PID param setup" window can be opened by the users with engineer rights.
3.11.2 Analog manipulator (open loop)

Figure 3.11-5 "PID param setup" Window Analog manipulator is a soft manipulator targeting at analog output variables inside the system,
In parameter setting window, the PID parameters can be displayed and modified. Wherein: through which the output value can be modified manually.
)> Slow manual rate of change/ Quick manual rate of change: when modify the output value in
1 Operation window
manual mode, the output value changes according to this rate.
)> Alarm Limit of Deviation: if input deviation is greater than this value, generate a deviation alarm Click on preset analog manipulator hot tag, manipulator (open loop) operation window pops up,
and the alarm indicator at the upper left comer of PID loop operation window is lightened. The shown in figure 3.11-6.
alarm limit of deviation is greater than 0 (%).
)> Set value: in parameter setting window the set value can be modified.
)> Integral separation value/Anti·quadrant if input deviation is greater than this value, integral
calculation stops, this feature can be used to avoid integral saturation. lntegr.:il separation
value/Anti·quadrant >= 0 (%)
)> Input dead/All switches limit: if input deviation is less than this value, then the PID doesn't
respond to the input deviation. This feature can be used to aVoid the frequent actions of PID
output within the scope of deviation. Input dead/All switches limit>= 0 (%).
)> Trace Mode: "Trace~ means that in non.auto mode the set value changes according to the
process value. "Non-trace~ means that the set value doesn't change according to process
value.
)> Direction Of Movement direct PID, reverse PID optional
)> Setting: when the items in #Setting• catalog are selected, you can do the corresponding switch
of operation modes in the PID loop operation window, or else the operation modes become
97 98
li'Jihl!-9
,..,.....,. HOLUAS MAGS Operation Manual -~!~- HOLUAS MAGS Operation Manual
the numerical display area in operation window and type a value and press "Enter".
algorithm block name
> When the contents in a box are in gray, it means that the item is not operational.
valve position feedback 3.11.3 Analog manipulator (close-loop)

L~rrmrithm block description
valve position output pointer Analog manipulator is a soft manipulator targeting at analog output variables inside the system,
through which the algorithm result can be outputted and the output value can be modified manually.
The regulating functions provided by system include: switch of manual mode and auto mode,
valve position feedback value valve position cominend value
modification of output value.
Manual quick decrease-- Manual quick increase Operation window
Click on preset analog manipulator hot tag, manipulator (close loop) operation window pops up,
shown in figure 3.11-7.
Manual decreas~ Manual increase
Figure 3.11-6 Manipulator (open loop) Operation Window
2 Information
The information displayed in manipulator (open loop) operation window includes: feedback value,
output value, scaling and so on.
> Numerical display
The displayed values include the current values of valve position feedback value and valve position
output value.
> Scaling
The pointers above and below the scale move according to the feedback value and the output value,
the length of moving is a percent of valve position feedback value and ·varve position outpUt value over
the range.
3 Operations
> Modification of output value
Modify the output value through manual-increase, manual-decrease buttons and
manual-quick-increase, manual-quick-decrease buttons in operation window.
Click ~ buttons in operation window or a"- T» keys in special keyboard once; the output
value changes 1% of its range. Click IIHIII1& buttons or "t· ",.
keyS in special keyboard, the output
value changes 5% of its range.
The users can also type a value directly to modify the output value, double click the output value in
99 100
a:~!!s~ HOLUAS MAGS Operation Manual
lilill,~~
J!4111111BWSIOI HOLUAS MAGS Operation Manual
Algorithm block name ·.!l!f· button, and the corresponding operation mode will be displayed in the box above the buttons. If
"Force manual» is set in control algorithm, and if uForce manual" is true, then the operation mode is
Algorithm block description

"Force manual", and ·If button and ·I!J. button will be in gray and can't be operational.
3 Operations
Valve value
The operations can be done in operation window include: switch of operation mode (manual, auto),
L--Process set value modification of output value by increase button and decrease button or by typing a value directly.
.> Switch of operation modes
I-- Valve position comme~.d value
Auto
L Manual quick increase If manual allow and auto allow are set in parameter setting window, then click · • ·liiJ.buttons or
"Manual" "AUTO" keys in special keyboard to switch the operation mode to manual mode or auto mode.
Manual
button 0 Note:
Manual increase When the condition of "Force manual" is satisfied, the auto mode and manual mode can't be
Valve feedback value
Manual switched.
decrease
Figure 3.11-7 Manipulator (close loop) Operation Window .> Modification of output value
When manipulator in manual mode, modify the output value through manual-increase,
2 Information manual-decrease buttons and manual-quick-increase, manual-quick-decrease buttons at the lower right
The information displayed in manipulator (close loop) operation window includes: process value, corner in operation window.
feedback value, process set value, valve position feedback value, valve position output value, scaling, Click ~ buttons in operation window or • A T" keys in special keyboard once, the output
operation mode indication, and switch buttons of operation modes and so on. value changes 1% of its range. Click tmlHI buttons or" t" "'u keys in special keyboard, the output
.> Numerical display value changes 5% of its range .
The displayed values include the current values of process value, process set value, v~lve position The users can also type a value directly to modify the output value, double click the output value in
feedback value and valve position output value. the numerical display area in operation window and type a value and press "Enter".
> Scaling When the contents in a box are in gray, it means that the item is not operational.
The pointers above and below the scale move according to the feedback value and the output value,
the length of moving is a percent of valve position feedback value and Valve position output value over
the range.
3.11.4 Sequence Control Equipment
.> Display of operation modes
The sequence control equipment is mainly used to drive and control the motor, motor operated
The operation modes of manipulator include manual mode and auto mode. Click ·ffim. button or valve and solenoid valve the three typical sequence control equipments, and automatically finish the
!OJ 102
-~.~~~ HOLliAS MAGS Operation Manual -~J!.~ HOLUAS MACS Operation M """"''
work of start-stop control, protection logic and alarm processing, which are finished through complex Off Flash opening
configuration before.
Normally on Off closed
The control functions provided by sequence control equipment include: open, close, check,
Off Normally on opened
reseUOK.
Current status Current status Electrical fault/status feedback error
Operation window Closing overtime/status deviation from close
Click on the preset sequence control equipment hot tag, and sequence control equipment operation Off Current status
to open
window pops up, shown in figure 3.11-8. Opening overtime/ status deviation from
Current status Off
Algorithm block name open to close /device protective close
Check status: pink.
Algorithm block description Electrical fault: red, electrical fault; green, no electrical fault; gray, invalid.
Jto command s1atus Remote/Local: red, remote; green, local; gray, invalid.
Close feedback commend Open allow: red, open allow satisfied; green, open allow not satisfied; gray, invalid.
Close allow: red, close allow satisfied; green, close allow not satisfied; gray, invalid.
Open feedback commend ( r e d ) - - - - - Check status Auto command status: red, auto open/auto close/protective close command exists; green, auto
"Check" button open/auto close/protective close command not exists, close allow not satisfied; gray,
invalid ..
Device status: red, closing; green, opening; yellow, feedback status error; gray, no feedback status.
Status tips: if normal, then display "normal";
allow If "open" command is executed and no opened feedback in set time, display "opening overtimen;
If "closen command is executed and no closed feedback in set time, display "closing overtime";
Open allow In normal status no opened feedback and closed feedback, display "status feedback error";
If the device is not operated by panel or feedback disappears, display "status deviation from close to
Figure 3.11-8 Sequence Control Equipment Operation Window openn or "status deviation from open to close"
2 Information 3 Operations
Operation window displays: algorithm block name, algorithm block description, status tips, auto The operations can be done in operation window include: open, close, check, reseUOK.
command status, device status, opened feedback status, closed feedback status, check status, electrical There are four buttons when the device is working, and click on the button to execute command
fault, local, open allow, close allow and the buttons of open, close, check, reseUOK. when conditions permitting. When operating on a device and it changing from one status to another
The description of open and close is shown in table 3.11-2. status, then you can't do the same operation on it.
> Open, close
Table 3.11-2 description of running indicator When the following conditions: open allow satisfied (or open allow invalid), no electrical fault (or
Running Indicator electrical fault invalid), remote operation allow (or remote/local invalid), no protective close command
Device status
Green Red and external circuit normal are satisfied, start the device normally. Display the feedback status correctly,
Flash I Off closing or else status error tip appears in status tips area.
If you want to close the device, it's necessary to satisfy the close allow.
103 104
<--
W!.lhl
J!'4ngtJT$.., HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual -~J!~"! HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
Device protection is not limited by open allow conditions, and when device protection happens the > Status display
dynamic tags on operator interface will flash in yellow. lJ\Ihen in check status, the background of "check" button becomes pink.
Plant protective open and plant protective close are not limited by open/close allow conditions, so lJ\Ihen in force status, the background of "force" button becomes red.
when plant protection happens the dynamic tags on operator interface will flash in yellow. 3 Operations
Auto open command is limited by open allow conditions and auto close command is lim.ited by close The operations can be done in operation window include: valve position output command, valve
allow conditions, so when auto open/close command happens, the status indicator changes:according to position set value, check and force.
the auto operVclose command. > Output command
> Check Click the buttons of manual-slow-open (close) and manual-quick-open (close) to open (close) the
Click "Check" button, then the device enter into check status and it can't be operated. valve.
> ReseUOK Click manual-slow-open button and manual-slow-close button ·tnm·once, short pulse outputs,
When error status occurs, only after clicking "ReseUOK" button to reset, the next operl:!tion can be
done. If the second confirmation function for starting and stopping devices is set, then click "Reset/OK" click manual-quick-open button and manual-quick-close button . . . . once, long pulse outputs.
button after clicking "open" or "close" buttons to execute the command. > Modification of valve position
Double click the valve position value and type a value and press "Enter" to modify the set value
manually.
3.11.5 Damper > Check
Click "check" button, the device enters into check status and it can't be operated, click "check"
The damper can finish the drive and control function of sequence control equipment, and button again to return to normal.
automatically finish the work of start-stop control, protection logic and alarm processing, which are > Force
finished through complex configuration before. Click "Force" button to enter force status, and then execute output command to quick/slow open and
The control function provided by damper include: open and close valve. close the field valve and now the valve set value is invalid.
1 Operation window
Click on preset damper hot tag, the operation window pops up.
2 Information 3.11.6 Servo amplifier
Operation window mainly displays: the static contents like device name, device description and
dynamic contents like valve position feedback value, valve position output valve and _the scaling. The servo amplifier is a soft servo amplifier targeting at analog manipulator. In manual mode, analog
lJ\Iherein, the device name and device description are configured offline, the pointers above and below manipulator controls the output of device by clicking increase button and decrease button. In auto mode,
the scale move according to the feedback value and the output value. the servo amplifier controls the output of device according to its input status bias.
> Numerical display 1 Operation window
The displayed values include the current values of valve position feedback value and valve position Click on preset servo amplifier hot tag, the operation window pops up.
output value. 2 Information
> Scaling Operation window mainly displays: the static contents like device name, device description and
The pointers above and below the scale move according to the feedback value and the output value, dynamic contents like operation mode, "MIA" button, the scaling of valve position feedback value and
the length of moving is a percent of valve position feedback value and valve position output value over valve position output valve, process value, process set value, valve position feedback value, valve
the range. position set value.
105 106
-~~'~
lli'MI,«"!l
NII<>U~ HOLLiAS MACS Operation Manual HOLUAS MACS Operation Manual
> Numerical display

The displayed values include: the current values of process value, process set value, valve position 3.11.7 Breaker
feedback value and valve position output value.
> Scaling The breaker display: operation panel.
The pointers above and below the scale move according to the feedback value and the .output value, The control function provided by breaker includes: open, close, check, OK, reset.
the length of moving is a percent of valve position feedback value and valve position output value over 1 Operation window
the range. Click on preset breaker hot tag, the breaker operation window pops up, shown in figure 3.11-11.
> Status display Algorithm block name
The meanings of status indication: manual (green background), auto (red background), trace (gray
background), fault (yellow background).
block description
When in check status, the background of "check" button becomes pink.
When in force status, the background of "force~ button becomes red.
3 Operations Switch off feedback commend
The operations can be done in operation window include: switch of operation modes, valve position
output command, check and force.
}> SWitch of operation modes
Click "M/A" button to switch the operation mode between auto mode and manual mode. When the
Switch off butto:m-- button
button is pressed it means that it's in auto mode and when the button is released it means that it's in
manual mode.
}> Output command
Check button
Click the buttons of manual-slow-open (close) and manual-quick-open (close) to open (close) the
valve.
OK
Click manual-slow-open button and manual-slow-close button "~ once, short pulse outputs,
click manual-quick-open button and manual-quick-close button ·BR once, long pulse outputs. Reset button
}> Modification of valve position

Double click the valve position value and type a value and press ~Enter'' to modify the set value Figure 3.11-11 Breaker Operation Window
manually. 21nformation
}> Check Operation window displays: algorithm block name, algorithm block description, status tips, auto
Click "check" button, the device enters into check status and it can't be operated, click »check"
command status, device status, opened feedback status, closed feedback status, check status, electrical
button again to return to normal. fault, local, open allow, close allow and the buttons of open, close, check, reset, OK.
}> Force Check status: pink.
Click "Force" button to enter force status, and then execute output command to quick/slow open and Electrical fault: red, electrical fault; green, no electrical fault; gray, invalid.
close the field valve and now the valve set value is invalid. Remote/Local: red, remote; green, local; gray, invalid.
Open allow: red, open allow satisfied; green, open allow not satisfied; gray, invalid.
107 108
. , ~<.«o,J
,... KoltJSn
HOLUAS MAGS OperatiOn Manual
Close allow: red, close allow satisfied; green, close allow not satisfied; gray, invalid.
Auto command status: red, auto open/auto close command exists; green, auto op9n/auto close
command not exists; gray, invalid.
Device status: red, closing; green, opening; yellow, feedback status error; gray, no feedback status.
Status tips: if normal, then display «normal";
If "open" command is executed and no opened feedback in set time, display "opening Overtime";
If ~erose" command is executed and no closed feedback in set time, display "closing overtime";
In normal status no opened feedback and closed feedback, display «status feedback error";
If the device is not operated by panel or feedback disappears, display "status deviation from close to
open" or "status deviation from open to close"
3 Operations
The operations can be done in operation window include: open, close, check, reset, OK.
There are five buttons when the device is working, and click on the button to execute command
when conditions permitting. When operating on a device and it changing from one statuS to another
status, then you can't do the same operation on it.
> Open, close
When the following conditions: close allow satisfied (or open allow invalid), no electrical fault (or
electrical fault invalid), remote operation allow {or remote/local invalid), no auto open cO:mmand and
external circuit normal are satisfied, close the device normally. First press "Close" button and secondly
click "OK" to confirm, then the command will be executed. Display the feedback status correctly, or else
status error tip appears in status tips area.
When the conditions: open allow satisfied and no auto close command are satisfied, open the
device normally. First press "Open" button and secondly click "OK" to confirm, then the command will be
executed.
Auto open command is limited by open allow conditions and auto close command is limited by dose
allow conditions, so when auto open/close command happens, the statu's indicator changes according to
the auto openfclose command.
> Check
Click "Check" button, then the device enter into check status and it can't be operated.
> Reset
When error status occurs, only after clicking "Resee button to reset, the next operation can be done.
> OK
If the second confirmation function for starting and stopping devices is set, then click '"OK" button
after clicking "open" or "close" buttons to execute the command.
109
( '
-n:s
::::J
r::
n:s
-
E :E
Q) Q)
r::
t/) (.)
>. n:s
en r::
enS
0 r::
<C ·n;
:E:E
en 'C
<C r::
·-
..J
n:s
J: -
..J r::
0 0 ·-n:s
-n:s
--
t /)
r::
_,.-----:
Mil>«"
.PJI.HaUv~~ HOLUAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
-~«..;,
~"l>ll0'$li= HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
FOREWORD
COPYRIGHT STATEMENT Symbols and icons
For the purpose of this Manual, following marks are used for clarification of relevant information:
All contents of this Manual, including wordage, charts, symbols, marks, trademarks, product models, • Tip:
software programs, layout design and etc., are under protection of "Copyright Law of the People's
Republic of China", "Trademark Law of the People's Republic of China~, "Patent Law of the People's
Republic of China~ and laws of applicable international conventions on copyright, traderi1ark right,
Used to help users to get in-depth understanding of technical issues of the system.
patent right or other property ownerships, and are exclusively owned or held by Beijing HollySys Co.,
Ltd. and Hangzhou HollySysAutomation Co., Ltd.
This Manual is only provided for commercial users to read and inquire, without special authOrization by
HotlySys, no matter for whatever reasons and purposes, it is prohibited to duplicate and coinmunicate 8. Notice:
contents of this Manual in any forms by any electronic or mechanical method. Otherwise ouf company
• Used to clarify relevant general"piCI.ctlce-o·r safety issues to be noticed for usage of system.
will ascertain legal responsibility according to law.
Efforts have been made to verify that contents and charts in this Manual are in compliance with
hardware equipments, but errors may exist, and it is impossible to ensure complete cOnsistency.
Meanwhile, contents and charts are subject to regular inspection, modification and maintenance by _g: Prohibition:
HoltySys without further notice. • Used to clarify relevant restricted behavior or safety issues to be noticed for usage of system.
1993-2008 Copyright HotlySys
Wordage and logo of HOLUAS MACS'", HollySys® . . ,/ .~ ..::0 r Houvsvs Description of editions:
and .lltlfiJ!M"® are trademark or registered trademark JIJIII ~ 'it'' ":'8
of Beijing HollySys Co., Ltd. and Hangzhou HollySys "HOLLiAS MACS System Manual" VS.O edition was published in February 2009, and the edition
Automation Co., Ltd. corresponds to MAC$ VS.X.X software.
Microsoft®, Windows® and WindowsNT® are trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft branches User objects:
in U.S. and/or other countries. This Manual is mainly aimed at engineers and technicians engaged in engineering project design,
All other trademarks or registered trademarks referred to in this Manual belong to their respective sales, installation, debug and maintenance.
owners. This Manual provides following infonnation:
Power supply and grounding of system
Transportation, storage and acceptance inspection of system
Installation of system
Operation and maintenance of system
Purpose of this Manual
This Manual is used to help users to understand and grasp relevant knowledge of structure,
transportation, storage, installation and maintenance of HOLUAS MACS system. It can be used as
criterion for correct installation and usage of HOLLiAS MACS system.
II
.., ~.li.J ~~!!;]
Hl>l111$li~
MHolfvS'lltl HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and MaintenanCe Manual
2 Debug and operation maintenance .. .. 31

CONTENTS 3 Field problems and handling of problems ....................................................................... 34
CHAPTER 1 SYSTEM OUTLINE INTRODUCTION ...................................................................... 1

1 Outline introduction................................................................................. ............................... 1
1.1 System network ..........................................................................................................'.............. 1
1.1.1 Monitor network............................................................................................... ............. 1
1.1.2 System network connection ................................................ ......... .. ....................... '.............. 2
CHAPTER 2 FIELD CONTROL STATION AND SUBSIDIARY EQUIPMENTS ............................ 4

1 DPU ...................................................................................................................................... 4
2 I!Ounit ...................................................................................................................................... 4
3 Power supply module .............................................................................................................. 4
CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUNDING ..................................................... 5

1 System power supply............................................ .. .................................. ~·· .......... 5
1.1 Requirements on power supply ............................................................................................ 5
1.2 AC power input of DCS system .. ..... .. .. .. .. . . .. .... .. ..................................................... 5
1.3 DCS system power supply ................................................................................................... 6
1.3.1 Power supply of operator station (engineer station) and server...................................:............. 6
1.3.2 Power supply of field control station........................... ..................................... ..................... 6
2 System grounding.................................................. .. ........................................................ 6
2.1 Grounding classification ........................ ........ .............. ....... . ..... .. ......... 7
2.1.1 DCS grounding classification .................. ................. .... .............. .............. ........ .. ............... 7
2.1.2 Classification of grounding related to DCS............................. ......... .......... . ................. .. .... 7
2.1.3 Classification of grounding pole ............................................................................................. 8
2.2 Brief stipulations on grounding system design ........................................................................ 8
2.2.1 Grounding body installation .................................................................................................. 8
2.2.2 Material requirements on grounding body and ground grid trunk line ...................................... 10
2.2.3 Requirements on grounding connection line ....................................................................... 10
2.3 Grounding requirements..................................... ............... ........... ....................................... 10
2.3.1 General grounding principle ......................................................................................................11
2.3.2 Connection of"three groundings~ Inside cabinet..................................... ............................ 12
2.3.3 Grounding method of DCS equipment of scattered arrangement.... ............ .... .. ... ..... .. 13
2.3.4 Requirements on common grounding pole (grid) .........................................................:........... 13
CHAPTER 4 TRANSPORTATION, STORAGE AND ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION ...... ,........... 14

1 Product transportation .............................................................................................................. 14
2 Storage environment ....................................................................................................:........... 14
3 Unpacking and acceptance inspection of products .................................................................. 15
CHAPTER 5 INSTALLATION OF DCS SYSTEM ............................................................;........... 16

1 Requirements on control room....... ................. ....... .............. ..... ........ .......... .. .. 16
1.1 Working environment. ............................................................................................................ 16
1.2 Requirements on floor and load bearing......................... ......... .......................... 16
2 Installation of operator station .............................................................................................. 17
2.1 Installation dimension of operator console............................. ...................... .. .......... .. ........ 17
2.2 Operator desk layout.............................................................. ................. ........................ 19
2.3 Operator console installation and wire connection ............................................................... 19
2.4 Mainframe cabinet type operator station installation ........... .......... ........ .... .. ................... 20
3 Installation of cabinet. ............................................................................................................... 20
3.1 Dimension of cabinet........................... .......... ... .......... . ........ ......... .. .... 20
3.2 Installation layout of cabinet ................................................................................................... 22
3.3 110 control cabinet structure............................................. .. ................................................ 25
3.4 ItO Installation and wire connection of control cabinet.. .. ................................... 26
CHAPTER 6 SYSTEM OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ....................................................... 29

1 System starting................................................. .... ................... ........... .. ................'........... 29
1.1 Preparation before system power-on ................................................................................ 29
1.2 Power-on and operation rules of ItO cabinet......................................... ........... .. ................ 29
lli IV
-~.~ HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and Maintenarice Manual
•\.«.j
, . . ROI!r:\jls
HOLUAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
field control station. Topological structure is of star topology, is in compliance with IEEE802.3 and
IEEE802.3u standard, is based on TCP/IP and real·time industrial Ethernet protocol, and features
CHAPTER 1 SYSTEM OUTLINE INTRODUCTION communication rate 10/1 OOMbps self-adaptation, communication medium adopts category 5
unshielded twisted-pair or optical fiber featuring RJ45 connector, its maximum transmission
Outline Introduction distance is related to medium adopted: the maximum distance for each section of optical fiber is
Through numerous years of DCS system R&D (Research and Development) and industrial 2km; the maximum distance is 1OOm for each section of twisted-pair, and two stages of cascade
automation project Implementation, on the basis of systematic summary of comments and connection are allowed most.
recommendations of users of various industries, adequate investigation of the latest development 1.1.1.2 Control network
tendency of aspects such as computer technology, network technology, application software
technology, signal processing technology and etc., HollySys has launched 4th generation DCS Control network (CNET) is an internal network of field control station, it realizes interconnection and
system HOLLiAS MAC$ system based on the state-of-the-art technology and adoption of mature information transmission between each 1/0 module inside control cabinet and DPU (Distributed
advanced control algorithm. Processing Unit), adopts ProfiBus-DP field bus for connection with 110 modules and intelligent
equipment, completes process or field communication tasks in a real-time, quick and high efficient
HOLLiAS MACS system is a product based on field control layer of HOLLiAS series products of manner, and is in compliance with the maximum communication rate SOOKbps of international
HollySys Company. The system is a set of comprehensive information system featuring standard IEC61158 (national standard: JBff10308.3-2001/European standard EN50170). Its basic
omnipotence, all-around and integration, and is widely adopted in flow controL of industrial characteristics are as follows:
enterprises. It is designed in compliance with relevant standards and norms, and adopts advanced
field bus technology, it can not only use safe and reliable FM/SM series hardwa~ module for Topological structure is of bus type, and active bus terminators are available on both sides of bus;
acquisition of field data, but also be conveniently connected with various kinds- of field bus
equipments or modules such as remote 1/0, CAN, Profibus and etc.; real-time high-efficiency Maximum number of nodes is 126, in which each subsection can be connected with 22 nodes most,
reliable redundant manipulator can complete functions such as 110 signal processing, PID tuning, all sections can be connected through relay;
logic control, sequence control, network communication processing and etc. quickly alid accurately; Transmission rate is 9.6Kbps-12Mbps, and is related to distance of each section. In case distance
the upper layer monitor system based on Ethernet provides human-machine interface that is is within 100m, transmission rate can reach 12Mbps. All equipments in one same system shall
dynamic, abundant, visualized and convenient for manipulation; configuration programming and adopt one same rate;
debug software that feature easy reaming and powerful functions realize configUration of all
functions of whole system; powerful data storage and processing capability can record all important Communication medium adopts ProfiBus-DP communication cable or optical fiber.
historical data and provide production data analysis report.
1.1.2 System network connection
1.1 System network
1.1.2.1 Connection of monitor network
1.1.1 Monitor network
In operator station, engineer station, system server and communication station, normally there are
Monitor network (MNET) is constituted by 100Mbps redundancy fast Ethernet, is used for two 1OOM Ethernet cards used for completing the function of network communication monitor,
connection between system server and engineer station, operator station and cOmmunication Ethernet cards are set with different IP addresses, the two Ethernet cards are connected with
station, and completes data download of engineer station and real-time data cOmmunication network switch of respective network sections by Ethernet cable, then connection of monitor
between system server and operator stationfcommunication station. Topological structure is of star network is completed.
topology, communication medium adopts twisted-pair or optical fiber, its maximum ,transmission
1.1.2.2 Connection of system network
distance is related to medium adopted: the maximum distance for each section of Optical fiber is
2km; the maximum distance for each section of twisted-pair is 100m, and two stages of cascade System server is configured with two additional 1OOM Ethernet cards for completing system
connection are allowed most. network communication function, which are used for communication with DPU. Engineer station is
also configured with two 1OOM Ethernet cards for connection with system network, so as to
1.1.1.1 System network
complete the debugging and download of control program in DPU. ocs system DPU provides dual
System network (SNET) is constituted by 100Mbps redundancy industrial Ethernet, is used for redundancy Ethernet interface.
connection between system server and nodes such as field control station and etc., and completes
data dovmload of field control station and real-time data communication between system server and
2
-~~.,) -~~.,)
JIJI. ROll~ HOLLiAS MACS System lnsta118.tion and Maintenance Manual B4.·Roii!IS1ts HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
1.1.2.3 Connection of control network
Control network interface of DPU CHAPTER 2 FIELD CONTROL STATION AND SUBSIDIARY EQUIPMENTS
DPU of system field control station features built~in ProfibuswOP master interface. DPU provides Field control station mainly consists of DPU, 10 unit, power supply module and other equipments, and is
DP connection port to outside through backplane of DPU rack. mainly used for realization of system control functions such as operation status monitor of field equipments,
2 Control network interface of 1/0 module data acquisition and processing, automatic closed loop control, electric equipment switch control and etc.
The intelligent 110 unit of FM series hardware system consists of 110 module installed on rail DPU (Distributed Processing Unit)
and corresponding terminal module. 1/0 module is combined with terminal rriodule and is The DPU is the core of field control station in HOLLiAS MAGS system, it adopts dual-computer
connected with field signal cable through terminal module for acquisition, processing and redundant configuration, and features internal hardware redundant change-over circuit and failure
driving of field data and realization of digitalization of field data; 1/0 module communicates with self-diagnose circuit, it is not only a platform implementing various control strategies, but also a pivot
OPU through ProfiBuswDP field bus build in terminal module. between system network and control network. DPU is used for implementing dispatch and calculation of
The intelligent 1/0 unit of SM series hardware system consists of 1/0 module installed on DPU various real-time tasks (such as algorithm, 1/0 management and etc.). Built-in micro-kernel real-time
rack /extension rack and corresponding terminal module. 1/0 module is cohnected with multi-task operating system provides quick scan cycle and open structure, and integrates network
corresponding terminal module through prefabricated cable (0825) for acquisition, processing communication, data processing, continuous control, discrete control, sequence control, batch process
and driving of field data and realization of digitalization of field data; each 1/0 unit and etc., forming advanced control system that features stability, reliability and low consumption.
communicates with DPU through ProfiBus-DP field bus. 2 1/0 unit
3 Brief introduction of control network connection 1/0 unit provides a signal interface between factory area operation and l/0 unit to HOLLiAS MAGS
Connection of DP communication port of DPU with l/0 module constitutes the control network system. Generally speaking, all 1/0 unit modules feature following characteristics: built-in Profibus-DP
of system. slave interface; 24VDC reversal protection, current overload protection, signal channel overvoltage
protection; hardware watchdog; support of hot swap; real-time state display.
For the sake of convenient plug in/out and maintenance of DPU, instead of u·sing DPU as
terminal connection point of DP network, it is necessary to select two 1/0 modules as terminal 3 Power supply module
connection points of DP network, and install active terminal module on four-hol,e connecting The system power supply module of HOLLiAS MAGS system is an AC/DC change-over equipment, and
terminal of the unit. DPU, DP repeater and terminal matching unit constitute communication it adopts change-over power supply technology to realize the change-over from 220VAC to 24VDC
node of control network. Control network adopts ProfiBus-DP communication cable or optical and/or 48VDC, and provides power supply to field equipments such as DPU, 1/0 module and etc. System
fiber. In case the DP communication speed is configured as 500K, provided that no DP repeater power supply module can not only be used independently, but also be configured redundantly. In order to
is added, the longest distance of shielded twisted pair is 200 meters. In case optical fiber enhance system reliability, power supply module adopts parallel redundancy design, which features
transmission is adopted, it is necessary to add DP bus photo-electricity transceiver on both redundancy configuration of two units of power supply module and parallel operation, so as to reduce the
sides of optical fiber, the length of driving multimode fiber is no more than 1,000 meters. malfunction caused due to power supply, under 1+1 mode, it is possible to realize interference-free
change-over and online replacement of power supply; during parallel operation of power supply module,
power supply module adopts parallel connection/current balance design, in which malfunction or stop of
output of any power supply module will not affect the power output of the system, other power supply
modules share load again, so that interference-free change-over and online replacement of power supply
are realized.
3 4
-~~~ HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and MaintenanCe Manual 1:~~~ HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
The most ideal DCS system power supply mode is: 22DVAC or 380VAC from auxiliary power section
one is transmitted to power distribution cabinet through special UPS of DCS system, and 220VAC
CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUNDING led separately from auxiliary power section two is transmitted to power distribution cabinet. Major
part of power supply outputted from transfer switch equipment of power distribution cabinet should
System power supply be UPS power, the reason is that 22DVAC power quality after inversion is good, and is beneficial for
stable operation of operation station and etc.
1.1 Requirements on power supply
HOLLiAS MACS system realizes realwtime monitor of field signal, recording and reaiMtime oontrol of 1.3 DCS system power supply
field, and requires that operation power supply must ensure continuous uninterrupted power supply. 1.3.1 Power supply of operator station (engineer station) and server
The basic requirements of system upon operational power supply are as follows:
Upon delivery from factory, DCS system special operator console is normally configured with power
Voltage: single phase 220VAC + 10%- 220VAG-15%; supply terminal block and air switch, 220VAC power led out from power distribution cabinet is
directly connected in air switch inlet. Grounding wire of power supply terminal block and grounding
Frequency: 50HZ± 2HZ;
wire of common terminal block should be connected to screw (such as set screw of partition board)
waveform distortion rate: less than 3%. of operator console cabinet.
1.2 AC power Input of DCS system Mainframe cabinet installation is adopted, and power distribution cabinet shall provide one channel
of power supply for each unit of mainframe computer separately, power supply is normally switched
HOLLiAS MACS system is equipped with power distribution cabinet, duaiMchannel Power supply over through wiring terminal. Grounding wire of power connection terminal block and grounding wire
provided in field enters power distribution cabinet (one channel is from UPS, while another channel of common terminal block should be connected to screw (such as set screw of partition board) of
comes tram factory security section), and are provided respectively to equipments such as operation operator console cabinet.
station, field control station and etc. after distribution.
Server of DCS system is normally installed inside server cabinet, UPS and auxiliary power provide
For operator station, power distribution cabinet supplies power through special ATSE (Automatic power to redundant servers, and power supply is normally switched over through wiring terminal.
Transfer Switch Equipment); for server, due to its importantance in system operation, therefore UPS Grounding wire of power connection terminal block and grounding wire of power distribution cabinet
and auxiliary power system provide power to redundant servers. should be connected to screw (such as set screw of partition board) of operator console cabinet.
For 1/0 control station, UPS power and auxiliary power should be transmitted to redUndant power 1.3.2 Power supply of field control station
supply modules, and are supplied to DPU or 1/0 module through redundant power output of
24VDC/48VDC, relay cabinet, ETS cabinet and etc. may supply power to relay by! using power Field control cabinets (110 control station, relay cabinet, ETS cabinet and etc.) require duaiMchannel
supply, its power supply theory is identical with 110 control cabinet. power supply: UPS power and auxiliary power safety section power supply.
In case field system is not equipped with power distribution cabinet or dualwchannel pciwer supply is For 110 control station, connect duakhannel power supply respectively to two airMswitch inlets on
not available in field, then in order to ensure safe and stable operation of DCS :system, it Is upper left oomer of the back of cabinet, dua!Mchannel incoming feeder of each air switch
necessary to provide at least one channel of UPS power. corresponds to left (N) and right (L) respectively. Protection grounding of AC power supply delivered
together with power supply should be connected on protection grounding screw of cabinet.
• Tip: For relay cabinet, ETS cabinet and etc., it is necessary to connect dua!Mchannel power supply on
relevant position as per design drawing of cabinet.
• In order to ensure normal operation of DCS system, DCS system power supply should be led out 2 System grounding
separately from power supply section, with the exception of power supply to DCS sy~tem, it is not In case of problems of signal entered DSC system, power supply source or DCS system equipments,
allowed to supply power to other high load equipments, especially it is not alloWed to supply effective grounding system can oonduct overload current to ground quickly, so as to avoid electric
power to large inductive load, such as automatic door, actuator, motor and etc. shock injury of personnel and damage of equipment. Grounding system can also provide shield for
110 signal, eliminate electronic noise interference, prevent electrification of equipment shell or static
electricity accumulation, and avoid electric shock injury of personnel and damage of equipment.
5 6
-~.l!.."l HOLLiAS MAGS System lnstall8tion and MaintenanCe Manual J'A'·~j~~ HOLLiAS MAGS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
conduction down lead point.
• Tip:
2.1.3 Classification of grounding pole
:> Electric ground grid: take thermal power plant as an example, electric ground grid is band steel
Correct grounding is the key for successful operation of digital control system, in case of failure of cross section above 150 mm2 buried underground in whole plant area, at certain spacing,
to form good grounding habit or shortcut during grounding installation, serious problem of the grounding pole should be configured for connection with ground grid; underground pipes of the
whole system and imponderable loss may be caused. whole plant and building framework are connected with ground grid in electric engineering,
forming comprehensive grounding body covering the whole plant objectively, i.e. electric
grounding, its distribution resistance to ground is normally less than 1 ohm. In power plant, all
2.1 Grounding classification lightning protection equipments, technique equipments, pipelines, electric appliance grounding
and transformer neutral point connected with ground are connected with electric grounding,
2.1.1 DCS grounding classification forming a unified reference electric potential that is deemed as reference point. Electric
Under normal circumstances, DCS control system needs three types of grounding: system grounding covers the whole plant area, and in theory the whole plant area is an equipotential
grounding, protection grounding and shielding grounding. body.
)> Protection grounding: is a protection measure adopted to prevent electroStatic charge :> Special grounding pole (grid): is normally located in the scope of industrial plant area,
accumulation on equipment shell and avoid injury of human body. All operator cabinets, field numerous pieces of grounding pole are connected with each other and constitute special
control station cabinets, printers, tenninar cabinets and etc. Of HOLLiAS MAGS sYstem should grounding pole (grid); and is independent from electric grounding (potential difference from
feature protection grounding. electric grounding may exist).
> System grounding: i.e. system power supply grounding, it provides reliable and accurate 2.2 Brief stipulations on grounding system design
reference point for DCS electronic system. Stipulations of instrument grounding system design on grounding method, ground grid trunk line and
:> Shielding grounding: it can shield electromagnetic interference received during signal grounding connection line are introduced briefly as follows. If it is necessary to find further
transmission, so as to enhance signal quality. Shielding grounding is required for 110 signal in information, please refer to relevant industrial standard.
DCSsystem. 2.2.1 Grounding body Installation
2.1.2 Classification of grounding related to DCS Installation of individual grounding body is shown in Figure 3.2.2-1:
:> ISG, i.e. intrinsic safety grounding, is the ISG of intrinsic safety instrument and :zener safety
barrier; it is normally required that zero potential of intrinsic safety instrument and ·safety barrier
should be identical with ground potential of geographical environment and technique
equipments connected with intrinsic safety instrument, so as to ensure that field signal circuit is
free from extreme electric charge accumulation, and .spark energy generated during
malfUnction is Inadequate to become explosion fire source. In practice, usually fie:ld equipment
shell are connected with system grounding (signal grounding) and ISG, so as to ensure reliable
work of safety barrier, under this circumstances, power supply grounding (+24V negative
terminal) supplying power at DCS side to Zener safety barrier floats. Connect into common
grounding pole.
:> Lightning protection grounding: conduct lightning energy into grounding of earth. Within the
scope of electric ground grid coverage, there is normally more than one lightning protection
grounding. The lightning protection grounding can be connected with common grounding pole
through equipotential connector. Due to the fact that the energy conducted by lightning arrester
into earth is huge during lightning strike, rapid rise of electric potential of partial ground grid will
be fOrmed, therefore grounding point of DCS shalf be over 15 meters away from lightning
7 8
-~~.,\
-~~~
pjlMoli!ISY• HOLLiAS MACS System lnsta118.tion and MaintenanCe Manual N:Moll.n~Y• HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
Q'ounding sub-trunk nne r--Ground surface
500-800
-
More than
~ 25X4
1! steel ground gMd
Ground surface "' trunk line
---
steel X>verboard
L50X50
' '----t-
Angle steel
2500
I Ja Q'oundingmastertrurkline grounding bod
600
J
' v - y v
0 1':1 Ale top
Reinforced concrete
- 5000 5000
-
1:: ro.,r grounding well
Figure 3.2.2~2 Typical installation of multiple grounding bodies
l2500 0057X00.5
Zinc plating pipe 2.2.2 Material requirements on grounding body and ground grid trunk line
grounding body 7 Grounding body lip
Specification of steel material used for grounding body and ground grid trunk line can be selected as
Table 3.2.2w1, in case grounding resistance fails to meet requirements, it is allowed to select copper
Figure 3.2.2-1 Typical individual grounding body installation material. If grounding body and ground grid trunk line are installed in location where corrosion is
very strong, it is necessary to adopt corrosion proof measures such as hot galvanizing, hot tinning
Grounding master trunk line: the system gathers all grounding sub-trunk lines through common and etc. or enlargement of cross section appropriately in accordance with corrosion property.
connection board, and grounding master trunk line is led out from common connection, and is
connected to grounding body. Common connection board shall be fabricated by using copper board, Table 3.2.2~1 Typical installation of multiple grounding bodies
and shall be configured inside grounding connection box and shall be insulated from box. Equilateral angle steel Steel pipe
Name
Grounding body: is good conductor nailed underground, current transmitted from grounding master Specification 40x4Qx4 !ll45xci>3.5
trunk line is conducted Into ground through grounding body. COpper brazing is adopted between <mm) 50x5Qx5 ci>57x3.5
grounding body and grounding master trunk line, and corrosion proof treatment is required after
welding. 2.2.3 Requirements on grounding connection line
Intrinsic safety grounding must be configured with independent grounding body. Protection grounding and shielding grounding of HOLUAS MACS system shall be connected to
plant area special electric ground grid or grounding body by using copper core insulation wire or
Ground grid trunk line can be utilized to connect multiple grounding bodies into network. cable. Grounding wire should adopt insulation copper core wire, of which the cross section is no less
When overlap welding is adopted for ground grid trunk line and grounding body, its oVerlap length than 2.5mm 2, and grounding bus should adopt multi-strand insulation copper core wire, of which the
2
must be 2 times of flat steel width or 6 times of round steel diameter. Figure 3.2.2-2 is the typical cross section is no less than 16mm .
installation of multiple grounding bodies. 2.3 Grounding requirements
All shells of operator cabinet, field control station cabinet, printer, terminal cabinet and etc. should be
connected with protection grounding, so as to prevent human electric shock accident. Protection
grounding should be connected to plant area electric ground grid or grounding of building where
9 10
r.ri,H'!l ...,~,~oil
,...-llorlltiS¥:!
,..lloiiVSn HOLUAS MAC$ System Installation and Maintenance Manual HOLUAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
equipment is located (in thermal power plant, building grounding and electric grciund grid are
connected with each other), and the grounding resistance should be less than 40.
2.3.2 Connection of "three groundings" Inside cabinet
System grounding should normally be connected to plant area electric ground grid, sci as to ensure
equipotentiality between 110 of MACS system and field signal device and control device (in thermal 2.3.2.1 Grounding device of system configuration
power plant, all technique equipments, technique pipelines and auxiliary model devices and control > Operator console, printer console, server cabinet protection grounding screw is configured.
devices have been connected to electric ground grid), and the grounding resistance should be less
than 40. > Relay cabinet and power distribution cabinet: protection grounding screw is configured.
2.3.1 General grounding principle > 10 cabinet: shielding grounding bus bar, protection grounding screw and system grounding bus
bar (connected with protection grounding, float as far as possible in case of inquiry power
)- The whole system is divided as "system grounding", "protection grounding" and "shielding supply) are configured. ·
grounding", which can not be mixed inside cabinet.
"Three groundings" are collected into one point grounding in cabinet, and grounding resistance
> Instrument cabinet and manual operator console: shielding grounding bus bar and protection
grounding screw are configured.
should be less than 40. In case Zener safety barrier is available in field, it is esseritial to ensure
that protection grounding resistance is less than 1Q, in case it is impossible to en~ure this, it is > Safety barrier cabinet: shielding grounding bus bar, intrinsic safety grounding bus bar and
necessary to make another grounding pole as intrinsic safety grounding, and ensure that protection grounding screw are configured.
grounding resistance Is less than 1n.
2.3.2.2 Connection of "protection grounding"
> One system shall have only one-point grounding, and shall share grounding· with electric
Protection grounding copper billet of field control cabinet is connected with field control cabinet,
ground grid.
protection groundings of field control cabinets can be connected in serial through copper conductive
> Lightning protection grounding is connected with master trunk line of electriC ground grid cable (above$ 6), and be connected with common grounding pole at the final point.
through lightning arrester/shock wave suppressor.
2.3.2.3 Connection of "system grounding"
> In order to ensure good contact between stranded wire and threaded terminal, it is· necessary to
Upon delivery of cabinet from factory, system grounding in cabinet Is connected to protection
configure copper spade shape lug.
grounding inside cabinet, and then is connected to ground grid through protection grounding. In
Upon delivery of cabinet from factory, system grounding and shielding grounding have been case of poor field system grounding, it is allowed to adopt floating grounding method. In case of
connected with protection grounding. The three groundings are separated froril each other definite existence of unshielded signal, regarding unshielded input signal of field grounding, it is
Inside cabinet, and have respective usages, but are connected together on cabinet, each of necessary to add signal isolator or adopt isolation type of input module, in case isolation module is
which is deemed as a small system. not available, then rather than connect +24V negative terminal to a ground, it is allowed to suspend
the system ground of cabinet of the signal in air (dismantle the connection line between system bus
• • Tip: bar and protection grounding).
2.3.2.4 Connection of "shielding grounding"
• The precondition for connecting three groundings is that there is no potential .difference or "Shielding groundings" are collected into master bus bar through branch bus bars inside cabinet, are
current between them, no interference will be introduced, then it is al!owed to Connect them connected to protection grounding at one point, and are connected to field ground grid through
together. Under normal circumstances, there is no potential difference between shielding protection grounding inside cabinet. Shielding lay~r of field signal entered single cabinet is required
grounding, system grounding and protection grounding inside cabinet, and 'there is no to be connected at one side to shielding grounding bus bar inside cabinet Shielding layer of
interference if there is no circuit or current. In order to ensu·re that they form an :equipotential communication cable (including DP cable) is also required to be connected with shielding grounding
body, it is necessary to connect them together. Under abnormal circumstances,:as the three bus bar. Upon delivery of cabinet from factory, system grounding inside cabinet has been connected
groundings are connected together, ensuring that system is an equipotential body, danger is to protection grounding.
released through protection grounding, and human body is free from potential: hazard, it is
necessary to select cross section and length of protection grounding cable for guarantee.
11 12
·,
ar..li.~ HOLUAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual --~~~ HOLUAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
2.3.3 Grounding method of DCS equipment of distributed arrangement
Connection between HOLUAS MAGS system equipments of distributed arrangement _is normally of CHAPTER 4 TRANSPORTATION, STORAGE AND ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION
network (communication) wire, for example: field control stations are distributed to field, operators
are in different control rooms, stations are connected by using multimode fiber, or category 5 twisted Consisting of engineer station, operator station, system server, field control station, high-level calculating
pair or DP shielded t-Nisted pair. station, administrative net gateway, communication control station, network and etc., HOLLiAS MACS system
is a computer system used to realize functions including large/medium-sized distribution control and
:»- stations connected with optical fiber. grounding method and requirement of- stations are large-scale data acquisition and supervision. Each 110 unit and DPU inside field control station is connected
identical with DCS equipments of concentrated arrangement, and is connected to electric through control network for communication, field control stations, servers, operator stations, engineer stations
grounding in adjacency. and etc. are connected through system network and control network, constituting the whole control system.
> Stations connected by using category 5 twisted pair or DP shielded twisted pair: In order to ensure normal operation of HOLLiAS MACS system, after delivery of the system from factory,
Method 1: protection grounding of control room is firstly connected with common connection correct packing/transportation, appropriate storage environment, working environment and correct/reliable
board, which is connected with common grounding pole through master grounding trunk line. field installation are very important. In which, field installation includes several parts as follows: installation of
Observing from the direction of common grounding, the whole ground grid is a star-type cabinet, installation of system grounding and system power supply, connection of system network, laying of
signal cable, connection of signal line and etc. Hereunder introduction is made for each part respectively.
structure.
Method 2: stations on both sides have their own common grounding poles, which need no Product transportation
metal connection, and the grounding method of stations is identical with DCS equipment of Product transportation should be implemented in strict accordance with the following stipulations:
concentrated arrangement. Category 5 twisted pair or DP shielded twisted pair must be laid
through galvanized steel pipe or metal bridge, which must be! grounded reliably. > It is required to adopt good protection measures during transportation, packing box should be
free from rain, snow or liquid substances and mechanical damage. During long distance
2.3.4 Requirements on common grounding pole (grid) transportation, loading in open ship cabin and vehicle carriage is prohibited; during
> In case distributed resistance to ground of plant area electric ground grid S40, iUs allowed to transshipment, storage in outdoor warehouse is prohibited.
deem plant area electric ground grid as common grounding pole (grid} of DCS syStem. > Box containing engineer station and operator station should be in compliance with grade I
> In case resistance to ground of plant area electric ground grid is comparatively large or is in a stipulations of GB9813 on vibration, collision and impact adaptability; box containing 110 station
should be in compliance with grade II stipulations of GB9813 on vibration, collision and impact
state of disorder, it Is necessary to configure grounding system independently, i.e. common
grounding pole (grid) of DCS system. adaptability.
> The distributed resistance to ground of common grounding pole (grid) without hitrinsic safety > During handling of cabinet box, violent shock, collision and falling are strictly prohibited, and it is
necessary to pay attention to "upwards" mark on cabinet box, upside down of cabinet is strictly
grounding is less than 40; less than 10 in case intrinsic safety grounding is available. Line
impedance of master grounding trunk line is less than 0.1 0. prohibited.
There is no connection point of lightning protection grounding or connection point of welding

> Weight of product:
grounding within 15m In adjacency of common grounding pole, no connection point of over -¢- The gross weight of 110 station and equipments installed inside should be 270Kg--350Kg
30KW high/low voltage power consuming equipment shell within Sm. In case the condition can per cabinet.
not be met, lightning protection grounding is connected with master trunk line of common
grounding pole through lightning arrester/shock wave suppressor. {- The gross weight of operator console and equipments installed inside should be
260Kg--290Kg per unit.
2 Storage environment
After products arrive at field, in case installation conditions are not available for the time being, it is
necessary to store products in warehouse without unpacking, and it is strictly prohibited to store
equipments outdoor. Requirements on storage environment are as follows:
13 14
-i.~.,\
BI,KOHIISY:o
-i.~'!\
HOLliAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual NKali!ISY:I HOLUAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
> Temperature: 0-+40'C; Relative humidity: 40%-80%, non-condensing.
> It is prohibited to store inflammable, explosive or corruptive gas or article in warehouse. CHAPTER 5 INSTALLATION OF DCS SYSTEM
> Warehouse should be free from violent mechanical shock, impact and strong magnetic field. For the purpose of this document, "cabinet" refers to 1/0 control cabinet, relay cabinet, power
> Ground clearance of packing bo~ and wood box cushion should be no Jess than 1OOmm, distribution cabinet, operator console and etc. contained in DCS equipments.
distance from wall, heat source, cold source, window or air ventilation opening: should be at Requirements on control room
least 500mm.
DCS system cabinet is normally installed in control room, and field signal is connected to 1/0 control
> storage period should be no more than six months. station through signal cable. In order to ensure normal operation of system, conditions of control
room are important.
3 Unpacking inspection of products
Upon unpacking of products, the two parties of manufacturer and user shall inspe~ equipment 1.1 Working environment
appearance, check whether there are damage or other problems during transportation or storage Environmental temperature: O'C-40"C;
period, and inspect equipments as per packing list, and check whether quantity and type are in
compliance with the packing list. Relative humidity: 40%-90%;
Atmospheric pressure: 86KPa-1 06Kpa.
Control room should be free from violent mechanical shock and strong magnetic field.
After completing installation and wiring of control cabinet and operator console, it is necessary to
conduct dust-proof and seal treatment of cable opening. In case it is difficult to improve dust-proof
effect, it is necessary to conduct dust elimination regularly inside operation mainframe and control
station, the effect of electric dust-blowing pump is comparatively good.
In order to meet working environment conditions, it is necessary to maintain cleanliness in control
room, and pay attention to dust-proof, windows/doors of control room should be of good sealing, it is
recommended to install air conditioner in control room.
1.2 Requirements on floor and load bearing
Channel steel should be fixed and installed on floor of control room, and field control cabinet and
operator console should be installed on channel steel, therefore, floor of control room should have
Figure 5.1.2-1 Schematic diagram of control room cable routing
15 16
/-
lli2\.~".l lli2.\.~'il
fA.H01111$VS. HOLUAS MAC$ System lnstalhil.tion and Maintenance Manual ,...:KOJI!IW-I HOLUAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
adequate strength to support the weight of cabinet. Table 5.2.1-1 Exterior dimension of operator console and printer console
Cabinet is connected with base through insulation screw, and therefore cabinet is insulated from
base.
In order to ensure safety of operator and avoid signal interference, it is necessary to lay signal line
and power line connected to operator station and field control station in cable trench or lay them by
adopting cable tray, rather than to lay them directly on floor.
:> If floor in control room adopts general anti-static raised floor used in computer room, the height
of raised floor should normally be 30mm-5Dmm. Signal line and power line should be laid in
hollow layer underneath floor, and floor cable duct should be adopted as far as possible. Figure
5.1.2-1 is the schematic diagram of control room cable routing.
See the final installation effect of operator console as Figure 5.2.1-2.
> If control room is of terrazzo floor, it is necessary to build cable trench undergrOund, and fix
cabinet above cable trench through foundation bolt hole of cabinet
2 Installation of operator station
There are two types of installation method of DCS system operator station. One method is operator
console type installation, and another method is mainframe cabinet type installation.
2.1 Installation dimension of operator console
Mainframe, large screen monitor, printer, standard keyboard, track ball and operator special
keyboard of operator station can be placed on the operator console. One operator console
corresponds to one operator station.
Supportive devices of operator console include printer console, of which the overall 'dimension is
completely identical with operator console. The difference between operator console and printer
console is that special keyboard opening is not available on printer console, but two paper-feeding
holes are added on printer console.
See exterior shape and installation dimension of operator console and printer console as Figure
5.2.1-1 and Table 5.2.1-1respectively.
Figure 5.2.1-2 Field installation example of operator console

If user uses other operator consoles rather than adopts operator console of HOLLiAS MAGS, then it
is required to reserve position for special keyboard and trace ball on operator console, and punch a
cable hole on the left side of operator console. See exterior dimension of special keyboard as Figure
5.2.1-3.
Figure 5.2.1-1 Exterior shape of operator console and printer console
17 18
.--:--
-~.~ol
JIJCHnll~~ HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and MaintenanCe Manual -~.~-s
JIJI. llolii'Sn HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
4) Upon delivery from factory, operator console is normally configured with air switch and power
supply terminal block, and power supply cable is connected on inlet of air switch in operator
console;
,., '" 5) Place monitor on appropriate position in the center of operator console surface;
35
6) Place mainframe of operator station on partition board of operator console cabinet;

7) Place printer on printer console ;
"" " 8) Place standard keyboard, trace ball and special keyboard on operator console;
9) Insert signal line of monitor on VGA display interface of mainframe;
Figure 5.2.1~3 Exterior dimension of special keyboard 10) Connect printer with operation station mainframe by using printer signal cable;
Another installation method of operator station is operator station mainframe cabinet, and with 11) Insert standard keyboard into keyboard interface of mainframe;
adoption of this method it is possible to meet requirements of neat and unified control room layout
better. The method is to place mainframe of operator station 'in mainframe cabinet, and place 12) Connect special keyboard on interface (USB) of mainframe;
equipments such as monitor, printer, keyboard and etc. on operator console, equipments such as
monitor, printer, keyboard, mouse/trace ball and etc. are connected with mainframe through 13) Connect mouse on interface of mainframe;
extension tine. Each mainframe cabinet can contain maximum 6 units of mainframe -box. Exterior 14) Connect laid Ethernet line on corresponding Ethernet adapter interface;
dimension of operator station mainframe cabinet is completely identical with field cpntrol station
cabinet. 15) Connect laid grounding on set screw of cabinet, such as set screw of partition board;
2.2 Operator console layout 16) Insert power cable of operation station mainframe, monitor, printer or other equipments (such
as hub) on power supply tenninal block.
Operator console is the location where the operator works, during arrangement of operator console,
in order to facilitate the placement of operator seat, and reserve personnel passage space, the 2.4 Mainframe cabinet type operator station instalfation
distance between operator console and neighboring objects or wall should be more than 1 ,OOOmm.
Another important factor is that orientation of monitor should be reasonable, and indoor light ray If operator station adopts mainframe cabinet, it is necessary to place peripheral equipments such as
adaptation should be appropriate, so as to ensure monitor, printer, keyboard and etc on operator console. Then connect the connection line between
clear display screen, free from reflection and etc. mainframe, monitor, printer, keyboard, mouse and etc. The longest distance of directlindirect
~~onnec!lon boll between rack connection line between mainframe, monitor, printer and keyboard is:
Reck ----, nd base
2.3 Operator console installation and wiring
Mainframe and monitor. 10 meters at its maximum, it is necessary to add long line video driver in
Installation steps of operator console are as follows: Rubberinsulati~ ... lnsulatloncovering case of exceeding of this distance;
1) Install and fix foundation bolt on control room Mainframe and printer. 10 meters at its maximum;
floor as per installation dimension; Cabinet b.ase
Mainframe and special keyboard: 60 meters at its maximum;
2) Connect and fasten operator station cabinet
Mainframe and standard keyboard: 10 meters;
base and foundation bolt, as shown in Figure
5.2.3~1; Mainframe and mouse/trace ball: 60 meters if serial port connection is adopted.
3) It is allowed to weld base directly on fixture 3 Installation of cabinet
channel steel rather than adopt foundation
bolt installation; Concrete 3.1 Dimension of cabinet
Cabinet includes 1/0 mainframe cabinet, 110 extension cabinet, relay cabinet, power distribution
Figure 5.2.S..1 Installation of foundation bolt
19 20
~·
1'2\.~.J
.Bil•onwsvl HOLLiAS MACS System lnstall8tion and Maintenance Manual D!:.l!.;! HOLUAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
cabinet, server cabinet and etc. In which, with the exception of the difference of s~rver cabinet
dimension, exterior shape and installation dimension of other cabinets are completely_ identical. An !1$0
~,,v
introduction is made as follows by taking 110 mainframe cabinet as an example.

1/0 mainframe cabinet is of framework structure, and front/rear doors and left/right side panels can HOlt
be dismantled. Cabinet Is designed with ventilation hole and .dust-cover under front/rear door,
cabinet is equipped with ventilation unit on the top, document bag is installed inside frOnt door, and
four hoisting rings are Installed on top of cabinet. Rubber insulation is between cabiilet base and
cabinet body. Two grounded screw holes (MS) are configured under cabinet body, 4 M15 foundation I
bolt holes are configured on base. Field signal line enters cabinet from the bottom of cabinet.
g i
'
I
• Tip: !
-·-·--·-+--·-·-· -~~
• Multiple cabinets can be installed Intensively, in case of intensive installation, for the sake of
convenient connection and fixture between cabinets, it is necessary to remove side panels
between cabinets.
_, :
Totalin~
four ,
,.,Aocatior!;
See exterior dimension of 1/0 mainframe cabinet as Figure 5.3.1~1. Cabinet frontal face Cabinet lateral face " '
800 ~.
Figure 5.3.1~2 Exterior dimension and installation dimension of server cabinet
3.2 Installation and layout of cabinet
~=-1
Cabinet can be installed independently or intensively. Intensive installation is namely
combination installation of multiple cabinets, it is necessary to remove side penal from both
soo' sides of middle cabinet, reserve only outer side panels at two sides of cabinets, and connect
• lmllimliDIIIDI
·-
iii In --·-·--· !.":".."= l
racks of two adjacent cabinets by using bolt (M10) used for fixing side panel.
In order to ensure good ventilation of system, facilitate opening/closing of cabinet door and work of
operator, during installation of cabinet, the distance from roof should be no less than 500mm, i.e. the
height of roof from ground surface should be no less than 2,700mm, the distance between lateral
1!111111!!'
- ~
~-·
flank of cabinet and wall or object should be no less than 1 ,OOOmm, the distance between front/rear
side of cabinet and wall or object should be no less than 1 ,500mm, if cabinets are arranged
longitudinally, the distance between two rows of cabinets should be no less than 2,500mm.
tor intensive installation of m units of cabinets in parallel is at least:
C.bhwol 1'"""'1r- Cabl""l lolonl r~ Length of space required
L~100Qx2+799xm+cablnet side panel thlcknessx2

Figure 5.3.1-1 Exterior dimension and installation dimension of 1/0 control cabinet
The depth of server cabinet is larger than that of 1/0 cabinet, and its installation exteriOr shape and Width of space required for installation of n rows of cabinet is at least:
installation dimension as Figure 5.3.1-2: ~15QOx2+650xn+2500x (n-1)
21 22
-~·-
IIQ'I,~~
r.caoums HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual ar..~ HOLUAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
Figure 5.3.2w1 is schematic diagram of intensive installation of cabinets
114 .s 4j) eollr
I· .l
1 1. I 'I I' I .l =· 'I
~
ll'"fi:l8l<fulrlfe:Emllire ~
-·-·-·f-·-·-·-·- ·-·--·-·-t+---1+-·-·---·---·- -----t·t---·---·-·-
---. --.................... '""'
"'~
~ I~ lrsta'!aioo ct muits
~ ..I ·~ cl Ia I lr. Co CJ
Note: for independent inslallalion,
X
=
=
ctcairetin~la 1fl} the distance between two adjacent
;;:::ease distance b~ses should be~ least 8mm (the
~ ~ thickness of two s1de doors);
+ ~
•
X
=
Figure 5.3.2w2 Independent installation dimension of cabinet
----------------- "'""'"
~
~ Length of space required for independent installation of m units of cabinets in parallel is at least:
+
... ""'""' L2:1000 x 2+799 xm+distance between basesx(mw1)+ thickness of cabinet side panelx2
X
I Width of space required for installation of n rows of cabinets is at least:
~
~
I
I
I W<!:1500x 2+650xn+2500 x(nw1)
N. I
~ I
Figure 5.3.2-3 is schematic diagram of independent installation of cabinet.
------------------------
~tm><2i-799XIlli-Tiid<ooss d cctilltsi~Wlll f81!!!X2
Figure 5.3.2w1 Schematic diagram of intensive installation of cabinets

If cabinet is of independent installation, the distance of foundation bolts between two cabinets
should plus the thickness of baffle plate on two sides and the distance between two cabinets, 40mm
should be added at least, as shown in Figure 5.3.2-2.
For cabinet Installed Independently, the opening dimension of channel steel between two
cabinets
23 24
IN!,~~ IN!,~~
, . . . hnllll$'\l~ HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and MaintenanCe Manual ~Hilllll$\l~ HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
}> 1/0 assembly, which provides signal interface, and completes input/output signal switch. Three
rows of rails can be installed on front/back sides of cabinet respectively, totaling 66 installation
positions at its maximum, 33 installation positions on front and rear sides respectively (terminal
§ matcher occupies two installation positions, DP repeater occupies one installation position,
'.."""""'
,""""' "
thermocouple compensation module also occupies one installation position if any).
0--------------' Front face of cabinet Fan unit Back side of cabinet
fs \
l~insta'lalionr:Jiili.J'rel!Xtabiletinpaa!el
; Air switch
'
~ ~
/1\ I Basedstan::e;o,Tlicl<rms of cabinet sidewall paneiX2
t~~tf,2 I •• I f1 I
Main control unit
and power supply
+
•
~ """'"
+M
""""'
0
Iii
~
~
l"vo modul~
0-----------------
l;;,'IOOlX2t799XmtBase dstn:eX{m-1)tlhickress d cabiret
lit
sldeVk10paneiX2
Ill lfl
Figure 5.3.2~3 Schematic diagram of independent installation of cabinet

3.3 110 control cabinet structure )>
1/0 control station consists of two parts of cabinet shell and assemblies installed in cabinet, as Figure 5.3.3~1 Schematic diagram of 1/0 control station
shown in Figure 5.3.3-1. Cabinet assemblies include:
3.4 Installation and wiring of 1/0 control cabinet
)> Fan assembly, which radiates heat and reduce temperature of equipments inside field control
Cabinet installation steps are as follows:
cabinet;
)> Control rack, which is used for installation and fixture of OPU and DC power supply, and (1) Fix foundation bolt on floor as per the layout of control room.
provides external connection interface for communication and power supply; {2) Connect and fix cabinet base with foundation bolt. If cabinets are of intensive installation, it is
25 26
a:~~ HOLUAS MAGS System Installation and Maintenance Manual -~~~ HOLUAS MAGS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
necessary to remove side panels between cabinets, the method is: open front/rear cabinet > Input/output signal cable of DCS system should be laid in cable channel with cover, cable
doors, take off the set screws of side panels at both sides from inner flank 'of rack post, channel and cover should be grounded soundly.
remove side panels at both sides, and connect racks of two adjacent cabinets:by using bolt
(M10). > Single piece of signal cable stJould be laid through steel cable pipe, which should be grounded
soundly. '
(3) If screw fixture is not used, it is allowed to weld cabinet base on fixture channel steel
alternatively.
> Cable shielding layer should adopt copper strip shielding or aluminum coil shielding.
(4) Cabinet body is insulated from base, therefore it is required to configure cabinet grounding
> The principle of shielding grounding is one~end grounding, there are two types of shielding
independently rather than fix cabinet on channel steel as a solution for cabinet grounding. grounding:
After delivery of 1/0 control station from factory, 24VDC/48VDC power supply inside cabinet and
> Vv'hen analog signal or impulse frequency signal is transmitted, if signal source has no
DP communication line have been laid and connected, after ·arrival at field, it is necessary to grounding, shielding cable should be grounded at the side of control room.
connect system network line, 220VAC power supply cable and field 1/0 signal cable ilito cabinet. > Vv'hen signal source itself is grounded, if thermocouple, PH meter electrode and etc are
The laid Ethernet line is connected on relevant Ethernet adapter interface. The laid Power supply grounded, shielding cable should be grounded at the side of field signal source.
cable is connected to inlet of two air switches inside 1/0 control station. )> When instrument signal cable and power cable are laid crosswise, it should be of right angle; in
Signal cable is fed into field control cabinet through the entrance hole underneath floor under field case of parallel laying, if power cable has shielding layer, the distance between the two should
control cabinet. Signal cable runs from bottom to top, and is connected to terminal of relevant
be 0?:150mm; if power cable has no shielding layer, the minimum allowable distance between
process 1/0 modules respectively, it is required that cable wiring is neat, good looking and firmly the two should be in compliance with Table 5.3.4~1 as follows:
bound, as shown in Figure 5.3.4~1. Table 5.3.4-1 Minimum parallel spacing between instrument cable and power cable
Field signal approximately falls into categories of analog signal, digital signl:ll and data
Power cable load Minimum parallel distance (mm)
communication signal.
125V, 10A 300
> Analog signal includes analog input and analog output
signal. This kind of signals should be connected by
using shielded twisted pair cable, and cross section of
I' 250\/, 50A
440V, 200A
450
600
signal cable core should be larger or equivalent to
2 6,300V, 800A 12,000
1mm .
' >
> Digital signal includes digital input and digital output
signal. Digital signal of low level should be connected
i When cable is laid inside cable trench, it is required to follow certain laying hierarchy, the hierarchy
arrangement order from bottom to top is: power cable, control cable and signal cable (shielding
cable).
by using shielded twisted paired cable, cross section of
.
..... k ...
1
"'"~
signal cable core should be larger or equivalent to >
1 mm2 ; while digital input/output signal of high level (or
"""' Pair twinning mode: power fine is twinned with power fine; signal line is twinned with signal line.
large current) can be connected by using common > In case of multi-core cable or multiple pieces of wire passing through one piece of pipe, it is
paired cable (control cable), but should be separated Figure 5.3.4-1 Signal cable routing necessary to reserve spare core wire, number of spared cores should be no less than 10-15% of
from analog signal and low level digital signal, and of field control station number of working cores.
should run through cable channel separately.
> Data communication signal cable requirements are identical with low level digital signal.
)> During design, heavy/light current can not occupy one same cable.
Requirements on routing of various cables are as follows:
27 28
-~~"
rA, Holll!Sn HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and MaintenanCe Manual -~~~ HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
Terminals 37, 38, 39 and 40 of each module correspond to output Interface of DP communication
and module 24V power supply respectively, and it is absolutely prohibited to connect signal cable to
CHAPTER 6 SYSTEM OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE these four terminals.
System startup For all signal cables, it is necessary to measure whether signal cable has force electricity first, the
method is: under the condition of perfect 110 cabinet grounding, set multimeter at alternating voltage
1.1 Preparation before system power-on
range (above 220VAC), connect one multimeter contact on cabinet body (cabinet screw), connect
Before system power-on, it is necessary to inspect whether the following conditions are available: the other with signal, for signal from force electricity equipment, it is preferred to meaSure under
circumstance of equipment power·on.
1) \flnlether signal shielding grounding line and protection grounding line entered into control
cabinet are perfectly connected; Provided that no error is found out during the previous step, inspect whether signal cable is
grounded, the method is to set multimeter atAC resistance range (short-circuit measurement range),
2) IJ\Ihether power line entered Into control cabinet and operator console are perfectlY connected; connect one murtimeter contact on cabinet body (cabinet screw), connect the other with signal. This
3) IJ\Ihether power supply units and DPU in field control station cabinet are installed firmly; measurement is very important for FM148A, FM151A, FM152A, FM161 series and FM143E
module.
4) \flnlether power line and communication cable on DPU rack are connected firmly;
Provided that no error is found out during the previous step of measurement, inspect whether there
5) \flnlether the communication cable from server, operator station, engineer statiori and DPU to is short-circuit between two wires of signal, the method is to set multimeter at AC resistance range
hub are laid completely and connected firmly; (short-circuit measurement range), connect two multimeter contacts with two ends of signal
respectively. This measurement is very important for FM148A, FM151Aand FM152A module.
6) V\lhether operator station has been Installed completely (such as video cable, moUse, keyboard,
network line, power line and etc.); Terminals 33, 34, 35 and 36 of FM161 series terminal module correspond to inquiry power supply of
module, 33 and 34 respectively stand for positivefnegative terminals of 24148VDC inquiry power
Before power-on, it is necessary to turn off all power switches inside control cabinet :and operator supply required by digital input channel 1-8; 35 and 36 respectively stand for positive/negative
console. terminals of 24/48VDC inquiry power supply required by digital input channel9-16.
If power distribution cabinet is used for power supply, all switches should be tumed off before During service of FM161 series module, all signal negative terminals are connected with negative
power-on. Before closing main power switch, measure whether power supply voltage is normal at terminal of inquiry power supply, and based on this theory it is allowed to deem all signal negative
the inlet of air switch by using multi meter first, whether polarity (neutral wire and live wi,re) is correct, terminals of single module as common terminal.
after closing master switch, tum off one switch separately, and inspect whether theichange-over
device of power distribution cabinet works normally. Only after passing inspection, can Sub-switches Provided that no error is found out during the previous measurement, it is allowed to insert 110
be closed for supplying power to equipment. module.
1.2 Power-on and operation rules of UO cabinet 1.3 Power-on and operation rules of operator station, engineer station and server
V\lhen DCS system is delivered to field, 110 module is packed separately for transpo~tion, there is Operation of the first time startup of online system or entry into online system again after power off is
only terminal module left in 110 cabinet, when UO cabinet power on, rather than inse~;t 110 module introduced as follows, the operation Is limited to engineer level or system administrator level.
first, insert module after completion of module wiring and inspection without errors.
)> After confirmation of normal power supply, close power supply switch.
Before supplying power to UO cabinet, It is necessary to measure whether power supply voltage is
normal at Inlet of air switch, whether neutral wire and live wire are correct. After closing ;power switch, > Open monitor switch.
close the switch on power supply panel, state indicator (ON) of power supply panel! displays the > Open mainframe switch.
current working state. Indicator ON indicates that 24/48VDC oUtput is normal; indi93.tor OFF or
abnormality stands for that power supply output is zero or power supply output is abilormal. After Normally speaking, DCS system dEllivered to field has been installed with operating system, and has
power supply starts to work, DPU will startup automatically too. · passed offline configuration debug, therefore after power-on, system can start automatically.
Before inserting 110 module, it is necessary to inspect signal cable as per following method:
29 30
,...-----:
kili.~.,) kili-~.,)
. . , htJHJI$n
HOLLiAS MACS System lnstalli:ltion and MaintenanCe Manual I'JII.·Milli!ISlo~ HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
For operator station, after entering WindowsXP system, click "Start Operator S1ation" of for operating system and application software, so as to avoid operation by unrelated
"MACS_OPS" in "MACS" in "Program" in MStart" menu, then it is possible to enter into :Online control personnel.
system.
Before delivery from factory, the system has passed configuration and signal test, under the
precondition that power supply and network are normal, after insertion of module, it should be
0 Notice: possible to start normal work immediately, and POWER indicator and COM Indicator on module
panel should be ON. In case state indicator is abnormal, it is necessary to check: whether module
type corresponds with configuration, whether address code on terminal module corresponds with
• Operator station can be configured to start operator station program automatically after starting configuration, If both module type and address code are correct, then try another module of the same
computer. After exit during midcourse, it is allowed to start operator station program as per the type, and find out whether there is something wrong with module.
method mentioned above. It is also possible to check the working state of module in system graph of operator station graph.
Contents of system screen normally include:
For seiVer station, after entering Windows2003Se1Ver system, click "S1art: SeiVer" of > DPU status: master operation (green), slave operation (yellow) and fault (red).
"MACS_SERVERn in "MACS" in "Program" in "start" menu, then it is possible to enter into seiVer
operation.
> System network status: normal (green) and fault (red).
> Module status: normal (green) and fault (red) .
.Q Notice: In case of abnormality of hardware status in system graph, normally it is related to line connection,
address setting and configuration setting, it is required to inquire step by step.
After module service becomes normal, it is allowed to conduct test and Inspection of signal of each
• Server will startup seiVer program automatically after starting Windows2003Ser./_er system. In channel, the general method for signal debug is introduced as follows by taking example of several
case of manual exit during midcourse, it is allowed to start seiVer program as per the method common types of signal.
mentioned above.
(1) Thermal resistance signal: thermal resistance signal is normally inspected by adopting RTD
series module, there are two types of connection method of three-wire system and two-wire
For engineer station, after entering WindowsXP system, it is possible to enter a certain;configuration system for signal from field, for two-wire connection, it is necessary to short circuit terminal b
function by selecting any menu in "MACSV_ENG" of start menu. and terminal c of signal at terminal of module. Due to the fact that two-wire system cancels the
correction of signal line resistance, therefore signal error will be increased.
If It Is necessary to shutdown operator station, engineer station or server, it is ~ecessary to
follow normal exit of WINDOWS. Signal terminal a, band c should be free from connection error.
If connection of system monitor network and system network have been completed, after Common thermal resistance components include PT100 and Cu50, setup of configuration
confirmation of power on and normal work of hub, it is ·necessary to confirm whether software will be different for different components adopted, different handling is required (signal
network working status Is normal upon the first time power-on. The method i~ to conduct amplification, component type and etc).
PING operation for the network adapters of operator station, server and 110 control unit from Three-wire system connection method in site is to connect signal terminal a on one end of
engineer station. thermal resistance, terminal b and c after shortwcircuit on the other end of thermal resistance,
2 Debug and operation maintenance therefore It is allowed to inspect whether signal is normal by using resistance range of
multi meter as per this characteristic, in which:
Arter the system Is started, operation should be conducted by special :debug and
maintenance personnel, debug and maintenance personnel. shall have accepted the basic Rab=Rt, Rac=Rt, Rbc=O (Rt is the resistance value of thermal resistance)
training of DCS system, can operate computer skillfully, and can use HOLLiAS ~ACS series
If signal terminal connection is free from error, and resistance value Is normal too, but
software. signal acquisition Is still abnormal, the cause may likely be effect of signal line
During system debug and operation period, It Is necessary to configure relevant passwords grounding.
31 32
/-
-~~!i~ HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and MaintenanCe Manual -~~!i~ HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
(2) Thermocouple signal: normally TC series module is adopted for inspection of thermocouple (5) Digital measurement signal: digital measurement normally adopts 01 series module, and is
signal, which usually has two kinds of connection methods, one method is to be connected divided into two types of 24VDC and 48VDC as per the difference of inquiry supply voltage. All
directly on module terminal by using extension wire, the temperature of lfO cabinet is the digital signals transmitted from field are inactive dry contact signal, and constitute measurement
cold-end temperature; another method is to be connected to terminal box firstly by using circuit together with inquiry power supply. Therefore whether inquiry power supply works
extension wire, then lead extension line from terminal box to lfO terminal, the temperature of normally is also very important. Inquiry power supply distribution distributes 24VDCf48VDC to
terminal box is the cold-end temperature. For the first type of connection mettiod, cold-end each digital input module. Inquiry power supply distribution features protection fuse, if fuse
temperature can be measured, measurement signal will occupy one channel of TC series blows out, the corresponding short-circuit indicator on distribution board will turn on.
module, it is also allowed to measure by using thermal resistance component, and then
The negative terminals of digital input signals are connected together, therefore, input signal
measurement signal will occupy one channel of RTD series module. For the second type of
cable can adopt the connection method of common negative terminal, i.e. negative terminal is
connection method, it is only allowed to measure the temperature of terminal box by using
common terminal. But attention should be paid to adoption of common terminal connection
thermal resistance component.
method, or short-circuit of one terminal of several signals from field, it is required to connect
Signal positivefnegative terminals should be connected correctly. one end of common terminal on negative terminal, otheJWise signal will be abnormal.
DCS system adopts software method for cold-end compensation of thermocouple signal, and {6) Digital output module: digital output module adopts DO series module, which is normally used
measurement signal is accurate provided that cold-end temperature is accurate. together with DO series relay board. Digital output signal is isolated from field through relay. As
relay coil needs power supply, therefore it is necessary to set up power supply separately, so as
Common thermocouple components include type K and type! E, setup of software configuration to supply power to relay board and some relays designed separately.
will be different for different components and different measurement scopes, diffe.rent handling
is required (signal amplification, component type and etc.). In order to protect relay contact, each output circuit on relay board is connected In serial with a
protection fuse, in case relay coil acts but instruction is not transmitted to field, one reason may
Thermocouple signal is of millivolt voltage, therefore measurement instrument Should adopt be that the protection fuse may blow out due to overcurrent.
special measurement instrument of comparably high measurement accuracy.
3 Field problems and handling of problems
In case measurement value of electric potential difference is normal but display, result is still
incorrect, the reason may likely be poor shielding of signal line, and high induced voltage. 1. Will the original trend be eliminated after MACSV server download? How to inquire trend
offline? How long can data be stored?
{3) 4-20mA current Input signal: is the most commonly used field signal, for which measurement
is conducted by adopting AI series module. Answer:
Signal positive/negative terminal should be of correct connection. a. Rather than be eliminated after server download, it is only Impossible to look up the trend
before download online, it still exists in history trend category folder, it is possible to inquire
For inactive and active transmitter signal, the connection methods of signal terminal are through offline inquiry software.
different.
b. Use "MACSV offline inquiry" software to inquire: step one, dialogue box pops up, select
Display value of signal is normally related to signal measurement range setup of configuration category of inquiry and starting time; step two, define tagnames contained in each trend
software, it is necessary to ensure that measurement range is identical with the measurement group, including analog and digital variables. After entering time interval, inquire data
range setup for transmitter itself. needed
In case measurement current value is normal but display result is incorrect, the reason may c. Historical data storage time depends on the size of disk space where historical category is
likely be signal line grounding or induced voltage. located, digital variables are of displacement storage, which normally occupy small space,
{4) Current output control signal: is used for equipments such as control actuator, frequency analog variables are of cycle storage, each point's records occupy 5 bytes every time, with
converter and etc., whether output is correct is related to setup of configuration software, such consideration of digital variable displacement records, log and alarm records, it is allowed
as control of output measurement range. to collect statistics of analog variable records per second and calculate as per occupation
of 8 bytes. Take project of 1,000 tags as an example, for intermediate point and PV, SP and
Output signal line Should be free from short circuit, grounding, especially force electricity signal, AVof PID, digital variable and analog variable account for 50% respectively, it is allowed to
otherwise channel or even module will be easily burnt. calculate analog variable of 500 tags only for hard disk space required per day, the hard
33 34
-~-c-
IQ'\.~o)J IQ'\.~o)J
,..-JI<>liiiSY>
,...lloll!J$n HOLLiAS MACS System lnstaHiation and MaintenanCe Manual HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
disk space occupied is approximately:
500 (point number)"B (byte) *24h"60m*6Ds/1000*1000=2.2M 1. Server AB unit:
2. Server AB unit: C: \DsvrDiagnose.
2. After modification of algorithm and logic (definition of global variable is added or 3. Server AB unit C: \ EventProcess.
deleted) and downloading, on operator station, there is no display of data Of the station 4. Ser.ter AB unit operating system installation disk:
or there are corrupted characters? \Documents and Settings'AII
Answer. After modification of algorithm and logic (without adding or deleting of definition of Users\Documents\DrWatson\drwtsn32.1og. ,
global variable) and downloading, on operator station, data of the station will be normal without is not available, please run: DRWTSN32 in command!
corrupted characters; in case of adding or deleting of definition of global variable and major line, log record path can be seen in interface, check
changes (new unused library file is added), it will cause sorting of communication symbol table whether there is fife drwtsn32.1og under this path)
again, after downloading, the symbol table of DPU is not identical with the syirlbol table of 5. Ser.ter AB unit ser.ter installation
server, causing abnormal communication, on operator station, there is no display :of data of the directory\HISTDATA\HDB\ directory corresponding
station or there are corrupted characters. Solution is to compile database again and download the ,day of fault\SYSLOG.
server. 6. Ser.ter AB unit server installation
directory\HISTDATA\HDB\ directory corresponding
3. How to handle abnormal online display (point value+U} of signals over range? the day of fault\ DIG 10 minutes before/after
fault***.dat. """*.dat and HistOffQuerylndexFile,
Answer: sometimes field signal may be tower than 4mA, such as 3.99mA, whir;:h is actually
preferred to be compressed.
normal signal, but the system will mark it directly as abnormal point (point value+U), it is
7. Operating system log of server AB unit: operation
expected to be displayed as 0 in field {i.e. normal display of signals over range), it is necessary
steps are: "Start"-> "Control Panel"->
to set up "dead zone" item, regarding the actual demand of field, it is set up as 5%-10%.
"Administration Tools"-> "Event Viewer"->Right
4. If It Is necessary to inquire and analyze MACSV system problems, what kind of relevant key of mouse, select application program and systE
flies should be copied from field? respectively, and select ~save As Log File" in popup
menu.
Answer: it is required to feed back information from field as per following table: 8. Engineer station: C: \CoDeSys V2.3Log\*. *
( CONMAKER, path and name saved when
CONMAKER activates
5. Common error type in event viewer of WINDOW system and solution?

a Error phenomenon: event source 'BROWSER', description is similar to 'for numerous times,
browser has failed to transmit capture backup list on \Device\NetBT_Tcpip_{o6• }. Backup
browser has stopped ... '
Solution: on control panel=) administration tools=) ser.tice=) , disable "Computer Browser"
service.
b. Error phenomenon: event source 'W32lime', description is similar to 'time providing
program NtpCiient: an error occurred when inquiring manually set equivalent machine
'time.windows.com, Ox1' at DNS. NtpCiient will retry NOS inquiry within 15 minutes. Error is:
socket operation tries a rriainframe impossible to be connected. (Ox80072751) ...
Solution: on control panel=) administration tools=) service=) , disable "Windows Time~
service.
35 36
.,~.~~
rA, "QllvS'IIz HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and MaintenanCe Manual
l:k;~ HOLLiAS MAGS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
6. How to operate the secondary confirmation function of Configuration operation Interface the time of server directly, SOE is the time combined by OPU, and the time when SOE
occurs, while or makes records once per second by using server time, this has caused
When editing increase/decrease value characteristics of interaction characteristics of graphic in the error within second, which is normal and can be explained clearly.
graphic configuration, add character string 0110 in secondary confirmation information, then
when operator is on line, different conformation information will pop up as per point value of its b. SOE and or time deviation is more than one second but less than 10 minutes, this is
group, when value changes from 0 to 1, character string before 0110 will pop up, when value normally due to wrong setup of time synchronization, soft time synchronization and
changes from 1 to 0, character string after 0110 will pop up. hard time synchronization are not unified, see the previous time synchronization setup
description. Default parameters of SOE module are not unified, it Is necessary to
7. How to set up hard time synchronization and soft time synchronization of SOE module? modify and unify manually. VI/hen hard time synchronization is available, there is time
Regarding time synchronization method of SOE module: deviation even when setup is correct, this is mainly due to the fact that SOE module is
of hard time synchronization, while server time has no time synchronization, and has
1) Setup method of FM161 D-4B~SOE (including FM161D~SOE): time deviation with FM197, it is only necessary to inspect time synchronization circuit
and time synchronization setup of server.
Hard time synchronization is not available, only soft time synchronization: is available,
during algorithm configuration, it is necessary to modify manually: for Groups_ parameter in c. During soft time synchronization, after downloading DPU, it takes more than 1 minute
algorithm MACS setup, add plus sign before GR2 (double click the blank pOsition before to wait for alignment of SOE, otherwise SOE module has no unified reset time counter,
GR2 with mouse left key), which represents soft time synchronization. causing that SOE signal time labels triggered simultaneously between different
modules are not unified.
2) Setup method of FM161E-4B~SOE featuring hard time synchronization pulse (induding
FM161E-SOE) 8. Why can't Intermediate tags be compiled into database sometimes?
During soft time synchronization, it is necessary to modify manually: for Groups parameter Answer: there are several reasons as follows:
in algorithm MACS setup, add plus sign before GR2, the method is identical with 1.
a Tag name exceeds 12 characters; simplify label naming, so that it is within 121etters;
During hard time synchronization, it is unnecessary to add plus sign, but it is:necessary to
modify SOE program page in 10 shifting manually: SOEADJUST: HSsoeTimeAdjust: = b. No setup of defined tags to enable it to enter symbol table, it is necessary to check and set
(bGps: =TRUE); representing hard time synchronization. up station algorithm, in case of no setup, set up again (it is required to enter symbol table
by default);
3) SM619 (and SM611) setup method:
c. Tag description definition has irregular, unsupported or symbol not available on standard
During hard time synchronization: for Groups parameter In algorithm MACS setup, it is PC keyboard, it is recommended to be constituted by Chinese character or English letter,
unnecessary to add plus sign before GR2, but it is necessary to modify SOE program page rather than other unoommon special symbols;
in 10 shifting manually, and modify the above variable statement as: SOEADJUST:
HSsoelimeAdjust: =(bGps: =TRUE), representing hard time synchronization. {By default, d. After modification of logic and saving on different mainframes, compilation may fail, it is
user parameter in MACS setup of SM619 is hard time synchronization) necessary to open locally the station of which logic has been modified on other mainframes,
then compile algorithm once again;
During soft time synchronization, it is necessary to modify manually: Groups:parameter in
algorithm MACS setup, add plus sign before GR2, in user parameter in MACS setup of e. Failure to oveiWI'ite existing tags, it is necessary to delete original point before compiling
SM619 (algorithm configuration), change default parameter from 1 to 0 be(ore soft time again.
synchronization. In case there is no problem mentioned above, it is allowed to delete IO.DAT file under project,
Time of DPU will be adjusted once per hour by server in a unified manner {be sure to keep after compilation, statistics and identification of all intermediate tags will be conducted once
this secret from user), OPU adjust SOE module once per minute, so as to reset time again.
counter of SOE module, and restart timing; time of SOE module is in unit of second and
millisecond, in case of SOE, SOE module transmits this time to DPU, which cOmbines time
above minute and transmit to server; following problems often exist:
a. SOE and Dl time deviation is within 1 second, this is due to the fact that 01 trend uses
37 38
Qf..~ HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
li"..i'~~~
Mllollllli¥S HOLUAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
affected.
Appendix 1: Guidance on Proflbus-DP network fault clearance (applicable to FM series module) 12. Inspect terminals No. 37 {DP+) and No. 38 {DP-) of all terminal modules, ensure that terminals No. 37
Inspect as per following conditions: and No. 38 of all terminal modules are vacant and are connected with no wire. Sometimes the negative
terminal of Dl inquiry power supply line will be connected on terminal No. 38 by mistake, but it will· not
1. Station address repetition: terminal module address setup repetition will cause abnormal communication affect Dl acquisition and is not easily detectable, at the moment the ripple of power supply line will be
of repetitive module, sometimes base welding quality may also cause address repetition, but the coupled with DP line directly, causing module offline.
possibility is very small.
13. Do not lead out DP cable from terminals No. 37 and No. 38 (for example to PLC of other manufacturers),
2. Terminal matcher FM192A-TR fault: will cause unstable communication quality. terminal matching will be impossible if T network structure is formed in this way. It is necessary to lead out
from 4-pin socket ofterminal module, and terminal resistance is available on PLC terminal.
3. Failure to set up DP repeater correctly: during regular usage, three switches of DP repeatershould be set
as ON. When conducting bifurcate network by using DP repeater, please read "DP Bus Equipment and 14. FM series bus faulty connection diagnose
Application" manual carefully.
Fault phenomena of FM series PROFIBUS~DP communication bus faulty connection diagnose
4. In case of damage of the communication interface of more than one module on bus, it may cause
abnormal communication of whole section of network. At present, better diagnose method is not available 1. Random module offline;
in theory, there is no option but to pull off modules that are not reported offline one by; one, in case 2. Short offline time duration, sometimes 1 second, sometimes several minutes;
communication of the leftover modules resume to be normal after pulling off a certain module, it can be
determined that the module faults. Then prove it in a reverse way: insert other modules back, finally insert 3. Random frequency of offline occurrence, sometimes 3~5 times per day, sometimes more than ten
the suspected module, if the communication is normal before inserting the module, and becomes bad times per day, sometimes once per several days;
after insertion, it can be proved that the module communication faults. 4. Shake terminal module, offline status will be improved;
5. Section network node configuration exceeds the actual standard of company: 24 ·modules are 5. Communication becomes more stable after removing terminal matcher;
recommended for each section. (DP standard specifies 32 physical nodes for each section, but each DPU
occupies one node, each DP repeater occupies one node on the left side and one node on the right side, 6. VVhen terminal matcher is set to •oN" position by using DP repeater of Siemens, communication
plus that the terminal module is not of t-Nisted~pair, there is certain degi'ee of performance lOss, therefore, offline status becomes more serious, and becomes better when terminal matcher is set to "OFF"
24 modules are recommended per section at present). position.
6. Poor grounding of DP repeater: power supply grounding (logic grounding) of DP repeater' is connected If fault phenomena match above conditions, then It can be basically determined as bus faulty
with cabinet through DIN rail, it Is necessary to ensure good contact between DIN rail and cabinet connection.
protection grounding, and ensure good protection grounding of cabinet. Poor grounding may even
damage DP repeater frequently. II. Failure analysis
7. With DPU as center, DP repeater should be placed on the side of bus near to DPU, rather' than far end, FM series module adopts terminal module connection in series for expansion 110 module, this kind of
otherwise signal amplification and signal reshaping function will be reduced. highly flexible method facilitates scattered connection, but increases fault points of DP communication at
the same time, characteristic impedance of communication bus is unstable.
8. Shielding layer of DP line should ensure good contact with shielding bus bar, and shielding grounding
should be of good grounding (sometimes protection grounding is connected with cabinet directly). VVhen signal is transmitted on bus, there is echo wave reflection at terminal, reflected wave is
superposed with signal, and will cause "overshoot" of leading edge of signal, in order to reduce the effect
9. VVhether terminal modules are of close contact: as terminal modules are installed vertically, and will go of this kind of "overshoot" upon system, we usually adopt the method of adding of terminal matcher to
down under gravity, it is necessary to install metal fixture under the module that is the bottommost of DIN absorb energy of signal, so as to reduce the amplitude of reflection wave, terminal matching includes two
rail, and ensure that the fixture will not slide up and down freely. types of "inactive terminal matching" and "active terminal matching", what we adopt on DP bus is active
terminal matching, of which the benefit is that bus signal level can be maintained approximately at 1.1V
10. Ensure that DP line will not be bound together with force electricity signal or signal line that .is of frequent during bus disengagement, so as to reduce the effect of interference upon communication.
inductive load open circuit (such as relay coil).
In accordance with the requirements of PROFIBUS·DP protocol, characteristic impedance of bus should
11. Do not connect AC load directly with DO module, otherwise the stability of DP communication will be
39 40
•
WI I,~'!!
J!4, Hollll$11~ HOLLiAS MACS System lnstalli:ltion and Maintenance Manual D!-:.~ HOLUAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
be approximately 110 ohms, terminal matcher is designed as per this characteristics requirement, in case Power-off fault elimination requires customer's consent, and adequate safety measures should be
of faulty connection of bus, then characteristic impedance of bus will be changed, ther;efore disable Implemented.
terminal matcher from matching function. VVhen bus faulty connection· impedance is too larQe, the added
terminal matcher will seriously mismatch, causing over match phenomenon, thus, exteri611y adding of Rather than believe your eyes and hand feeling in a hurry, it is required to make measurement,
terminal matcher will Instead cause decline of communication quality. This phenomenon wilf make people sometimes a line that seems to have been connected nicely and can not be pulled off by hand is actually
to feel that terminal matcher goes wrong, and false determination will be caused easily. of faulty connection.
There are numerous reasons causing faulty connection of bus, mainly including several aspects as IV. Fault elimination method:
follows: If possible, dismantle terminal module, and wipe oxidized contact point by using alcohol. In case of
1. Installation finnness is inadequate. serious oxidation, grind surface oxide coating by using other tools. Measure contact resistance after
drying of alcohol, if resistance is less than 2 ohms, and then continue usage. Otherwise replace terminal
2. Contact looseness is caused due to mechanical vibration. module.
3. Corruptive gas exists In environment, and contact is oxidized. If above conditions are not available in field, grind off the oxidized surface layer on contact point by
repetitive plug in/out. normally problems can be solved quicklY in this way.
Special attention should be paid to point 3, at present, most applications are under chemical application
circumstances, and attention should be paid to the fact that long-tenn oorrosion may cause oxidation of In case of oxidation of wire surface, remove the oxidized section, pull line out and connect again.
terminal module connection contact and faulty connection of bus. Sometimes a certain section of wire is disconnected, sometimes laps over together, sometimes it is of
open circuit. in case it is impossible to determine that fault tags are at two ends of this kind of wire, it is
Ill. Failure diagnosis method: necessary to replace wire. Notice: DP communication line has some characteristic requirements, and it is
1. Firstly It is necessary to identify module address where faulty connection starts, it is possible to preferred not to be replaced with other wires.
identify and find out the specific module position where fault starts through offline records of Fasten the holding screw on top/bottom of each column of terminal modules, so as to prevent it from
module and wiring arrangement plan. getting loose again after vibration.
2. Eliminate fault per column. It is necessary to stop communication during eliminati_on of fault, if Not only DP bus but also 24V power supply is subject to faulty connection. It is possible to determine
possible, apply shutdown to eliminate fault, if it is impossible to shut down completely, it is allowed whether connection is nonnal through measurement of voltage on terminals 39..40 on terminal module.
to eliminate fault by turning off module power by column, there is a certain degree of risks,
determined as per the actual situations of field.
3. Tum off power of entire column of module, measure resistance value between terininal module
DP+/DP- incoming feeder and terminal module 37/38 respectively by using 1k resistance range of
multimeter, the resistance should be less than 3 ohms normally (ensure that the multimeter used
is eligible), if resistance is larger than 3 ohms, it indicates that wiring is not reliable.
4. Measure in tum the resistance value between DP+/DP- incoming feeder and 37/38 of the next
terminal module connected in serial, or measure the resistance value between terminal 37/38 of
previous terminal module and next terminal module, so as to detennine whether connection
between two terminal modules are reliable.
5. Measure in sequence the resistance of DP connection wire, and detennine whether connection is
reliable by measuring the resistance between output terminal a·nd input tenninat.
6. By adopting measurement of vacancy level on DP communication tine and measurement of
wavefonn of DP line with oscillograph, fault point can be detennined quickly, but spe¢iai tools and
special knowledge are required for supportive analysis. Nonnally conditions are not available.
Items to be noticed:
41 42
cu
·~
r::::
cu
==...
Q)
1/)
~
~
cu
~0
en
en
0
<C ...
==
en
<C
::::i
...1
0
J:
lfti~ll-1
W. MA~ U~er Manual
Jb~.il
lla!IYSp HOLUAS ·,-...,ftware
Copyright Statement Introduction

All contents of this manual, including text, charts, symbols, markings, trademarks, product models,
Symbol icon:
software programs, page layout design and etc, are under protection of "Copyright U1.w of the
People's Republic of China", «Trademark Law of the People's Republic of China", "Pate:nt Law of Use the following identification to indicate corresponding information in the manual:
the People's Republic of China" and laws of applicable international conventions regarding
copyright, trademark right, patent right or other property ownership, and are owned or possessed
exclusively by Beijing HollySys Co., Ltd. and Hangzhou HollySysAutomation Co., Ltd. •
•
Tip:
Help the user in-depth understanding of the technical aspects of the system .
This manual is provided only for commercial users to read and query, without special au~orization
of HollySys Company, regardless of whatever reasons and purposes, it is not allowed to copy and 0 Note:
transfer contents of this manual in any forms by any electronic or mechanical methods. Otherwise Pay attention to the use of system-related behavior or safety problems.
our company will investigate legal liability in accordance with law.
•
Contents and charts of this manual have been checked and are in compliance with hardware
0 Prohibitory:
devices mentioned, but it is impossible to avoid errors, and no guarantee is made as to :complete Restrictions operation of system or pay attention to safety problems.
•
consistency. Meanwhile, contents and charts of this manual are subject to inspection, mOdification
and maintenance by HollySys Company without further notice.
Version:
Release version: V5.0
Software version: MACS V5.X.X
For staff:
Type face and logo of HOLLiAS MAGS"', HollySys®, ;f!J~Jat®, ~ ~ f•( "!:1 IIOIIV$VS The one who uses the software
are trademarks or registered trademarks of Beijing HollySys Co., Ltd. and Hangzhou ;Ho!lySys
The manual provided the following info~ation:
Automation Co., Ltd.
Software installation and instruction manual
Microsoft®, Windows® and WindowsNT® are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft
Company in United States of America and/or its affiliates in other countries. Goal of this manual:
Learn how to install and uninstall the software, know the algorithm, graph configuration, server
process and operation maintenance requirements
Other trademarks or registered trademarks referred to in this manual belong to their respective
owners.
'Pill\,«".!
J}l11a~!IS HOLUAS MACS Software Us'er Manual Dt~5~ HOlliAS MACS Software User Manual
7.3.2 Add node manually ...........................................................................................62
7 .3.3 Device property .. ..64
Table of Contents 7.3.4 Compilation, saving, close and quit of system device configuration ... ..66
HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual .................. . lll\l!l ;j<Ji0/.'Mi';. 7.4 1/0 device configuration ............... .
1 Brief Introduction of System Network Architecture .. .1 7.4.1 Add 1/0 device ................................................................................. ...... 67
1.1 Standard Network Architecture....................... . 1 7.4.2 1/0 device right-click menu ...... . .. 69
1.1.1 Server Configuration Requirement in Standard Network Architecture ................. 1 7.4.3 Compilation, saving, close and quit of 1/0 device configuration... ................... 71
1.1.2 Server Network Setting in standard Network Architecture ..................... . 8 Controller algorithm....... ... ........... .. ...... ....... ... ........ .... ...... ....... ... ........ ... ................. 72
1.2 Simplified Network Architecture........... ............ .. ........ ......................... 3 8.1 Outline introduction ...................................................................................................... 72
1.2.1 Simplified Network Architecture.. ......... ......................................................... 3 8.2 Access controller algorithm configuration ............... . . ........................ 72
1.2.2 Server Configuration Requirement in Simplified Network Architecture ................ 4 8.3 Project objects that have been generated automatically. ................................. 75
1.2.3 Server Network Setting in Simplified Network Architecture ................................ .4 8.3.1 Hardware configuration ...... . .... 75
2 HOLUAS MACS Software Installation ....................................................................................6 8.3.2 Task configuration ............................................ . ..76
2.1 Steps of Soft\.vare Installation .................. . ............... 6 8.3.3 1/0 Database definition
2.2 Contents of Software Installation ........................................................................... 1 8.3.4 Get system road of controller and runtime state of the 1/0 modules .... .78
3 Cancer Installation .............................. . .................... 18 8.4 Constants and variables
4 Software Un-installation ....................... . ..19 8.4.1 Constants .......................................... . .................................... 79
4.1 Uninstall in Control Panel... .......................... .. .... 19 8.4.2 Variables ...................................... . ..... 82
4.2 Uninstall Using Setup.exe .................... . ..... 19 8.4.3 Database points .. .. .... 86
4.3 Notes Vllhen Installation and Un-installation .. 22 8.5 POU ............. . .... 86
5 Configuration Overview ................................... . ................... 23 8.5.1 Outline introduction .. ..... 86
5.1 Outline introduction ................................. . ............................... 23 8.5.2 Types of POU ............. . ...... 87
5.2 Application system configuration ............. . ............. 24 8.5.3 Languages ............. . ......... 89
5.2.1 Initial preparation work ............................ .. ....... 25 8.6 Start the POU ................... . 116
5.2.2 Establishment of target project ................... .. ....... 25 8.6.1 Task configuration ... . 116
5.2.3 System setup configuration................ .................... . ....... 25 8.6.2 Main program ........ . 118
5.2.4 Database configuration ......................... .. ...... 25 8. 7 Library manager ....................... . 118
5.2.5 Controller algorithm configuration ...... . ..... 26 8.7.1 Outline introduction .............. . 118
5.2.6 Graph configuration .............................. . ............ 26 8.7.2 Open library manager ............................ . .... 118
5.2.7 Report configuration .......................... .. ··································'··········26 8.7.3 •Additional Library" and "Remove Library"........................................... .... 119
5.2.8 Compilation and generation ...... . ..... 26 8.8 Examples of writing POUs ....................... ........ .... ..... ........ .. .. 120
5.2.9 Engineer station download .. . ......... 26 8.8.1 Four arithmetic operation example (CFC).... ....... ....... ...... ........... .. ....... 120
5.3 General steps of configuration ................... . .. 27 8.8.2 Timer delay operation example {LD) ........................................................... 125
6 General Control Soft\.vare of Database .. . ..... 28 8.9 Build....................................................................................... .............. .......... 130
6.1 Outline introduction ............................. . ... 28 8.10 Download the controller .......... .. .......... 130
6.2 Access to database general control. .......... 28 8.1 0.1 Outline introduction ............... . ....... 130
6.3 Project ............................................... .. .......... 29 8.1 0.2 Communication parameters .. . ........ 130
6.4 Database edit. ................................. . .. 32 8.10.3 Login ........... . 132
6.4.1 Outline introduction .................. .. ....... 32 8.11 Test
6.4.2 Access database edit system . .. ............................................................... ::~::~ 9 Graph configuration ..................... . ................... 137
6.4.3 Data operation ..................................................................... . ..34 9.1 Outline introduction ... 137
7 System Setup .................................................. . ..... 56 9.2 Access graph configuration ............... . ..... 137
7.1 Outline introduction ............................. . ..... 56 9.3 Operation instruction .............................................. . ··-······················140
7.2 Access system setup configuration ....................... . ................ 56 9.3.1 Page file ................................. . .. 1~
7.3 System device configuration ........................................... .. ······'·········58 9.3.2 Edit command ........ .. ....... 1U
7.3.1 System device configuration wizard .............. .. 58 9.3.3 Draw tools .. 149
2
·~~~~
MINIIT$n
'
HOLLiAS MAGS Software user Manual ~~~s~ HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
9.3.4 Filling tootbar ............................................ . ................... 155 14 Engineering Application about Server Settings .. ........................................... 219
9.3.5 Edit tootbar..................................... . ...... 155 14.1 Modification and Settings ..... .. 219
9.3.6 Page property .............................. . ....... 157 14.1. 1 Modify History Database Path . ....... 219
9.3.7 User custom symbols ................... . ............ 159 14.1.2 Modify History Database Protective Capacity ......... . ........ 220
9.3.8 Dynamic features .............................................................. . ........ 160 14.1.3 Modify Server Node No. and Port No........ . ........ 222
9.3.9 Trigger features .................................................................. ......... 172 14.1.4 Settings of Network Variables among Domains .. . .222
9.3.1 0 "Standard Algorithm Block Symbol" in user graph library .. .. 181 14.2 Server Check lime .................................................... .. 226
9.3.11 Simulating display ............................................................ . .. 182 14.3 Backup ......................................................................... .226
10 Report Configuration ............... .......... .... .............. . ...... .... ......... .. .................... .. 14.4 Frequently Asked Questions and Answers about Server .. 227
10.1 Outline introduction .......................................................................................... 184 14.5 Cautions when Using Server .................................................................... .. ..229
10.2 Access report generation system ............................. . ........'........ 184
10.3 Operation instruction............................................... .. ..............................·........ 186
10.3.1 "Report" tool............................................................. ........ ........... 186
10.3.2 "Poinf tool................................ .... ...... ...... ........ .... ..... .. ........ 186
10.3.3 "Compile~ tool.................................................................... .. ............. 189
10.3.4 "Exit" tool ........................................................ . ... 189
11 Download Tool .......................................... . 190
11.1 Outline introduction ..................................... .. ................. 190
11.2 Access engineer download software ..................................... .. 190
11.3 Download server ......................................................................... ... 192
11.4 Download operator station ................................................................................
12 HOLUAS MACS Download of Server .............. .. 195
12.1 Generate Download Files ...................... . 195
12.2 Download of Server.............................. .. ...... .. ..195
13 HOLLiAS MACS Server Software...................................... .. c••••••• 199
13.1 start HOLLiAS MACS Server Software .................... .. ...•....... 199

13.2 HOLUAS MACS Server Process Management .. • •.• c•••.••• 200
13.2.1 start Server Process .................................... . ............. :....... 200

13.2.2 Server Process Management ........................................................................ 201
13.3 Initialization Process "MACSinit.exe" ...................................................................... 203
13.4 New Task Diagnosis Process •NewTaskDiag.exe• .. ... 204
13.5 Real Network Management Process "ReaiNet.exe" ............. .. .. 205
13.6 Post Trip Process "Posttrip.exe• ................ .. ..208
13.7 History Database Process "NewHDBServer.exe" ............... .. ................... 209
13.8 Network Variable Exchange Process "NetvarExchange.exe" ................................ 211
13.9 System Watch Process "Syswatch.exe· ................................................................. 214
13.10 Network Management Process "SNet_Svr.exe" .............................................. ;....... 214
13.11 System Network Communication Management Process "GatewayWatch.exe~ ...... 215
13.12 OtherProcesses ............................................................................................. ,....... 217
13.12.1 New Double Server Diagnose "NewDsvrDiagnose.exe" .............................. 217
13.12.2 Real-time Database Management Process "RTDBManage.exe" ..... . .... 218
13.12.3 Transmit Event Message Process "TransmitEventMsg.exe" .......... .. ..218
13.12.4 Event Process "EventProcess.exe" ......... .. ..218
13.12.5 Server standard Calculation Process "ServerstandardCacl.exe" .218
13.12.6 Node Diagnose Process "NodeDiagnose.exe" ....... . .218
13.12.7 Check lime Process "Checklime.exe" .................................. . 218
3 4
/"- ...
"""' . «'!!
JJI:uoUySJIS HOLL1As MAGS Software Us~r Manual
--~~~ 1. Monitor network (MNET) adapter setting
1 Brief Introduction of System Network For monitor network (MNEn select "TCP/IP" only, the IP addresses of two servers are configured
as 130.0.0.1, 131.0.0.1 and 130.0.0.2, 131.0.0.2, shown in figure 1.1~1:
Architecture
The system network architecture of HOLUAS MACS can be classified into standard. network
architecture and simplified network architecture. In this chapter the two network architectures and
their different server configuration and network settings will be introduced.
1.1 Standard Network Architecture
Standard network architecture includes monitor network (MNET), system network (SNEn and
control network (CNET), suitable for mutual surveillance and operation of multi·domains,: such as
large-scale and middle-scale systems, or multiple projects, or among units and commori system.
Wherein the large-scale system is the one which includes more than 3000 110 points and more
than 7 1/0 control stations; Middle-scale system is the one which includes about 2000-2800 1/0
points and 5-7 1/0 control stations.
Figure 1.1~1 Monitor networt (MNEn properties
1.1.1 Server Configuration Requirement in Standard
Q Note:
Network Architecture • All adapters which are integrated on computer's main-board, the IP address should be set to
130 network segment! (unless the specific statement)
4 network switches and 2 servers must be configured in standard network architecture. The server During device configuration, the IP addresses of the two operator stations doubled as servers
can be special server or the operator station can be doubled as server, engineer station simultaneously are set as 130.0.0.1/131.0.0.1, 130.0.0.2/131.0.0.2, not the default setting
simultaneously. 130.0.0.50/51.
1.1.2 Server Network Setting in Standard Network

2. System network (SNET) adapter setting
Architecture
In standard network architecture 4 Ethernet adapters are configured for the server, wherein 2 are select "Properties", and then click "General" option. For system network (SNEn, if the server is
used to connect monitor network (MNEn and the other 2 are used to connect system' network not doubled as engineer station, select "HSIE Protocor only without configuring address, shown in
(SNEn. The network setting is shown in table 1.1-1. figure1.1·2; If the server is doubled as engineer, select both "HSIE Protocol" and "TCP/IP" protocol,
Table 1.1-1 Server networt settin in 3-layer standard network architecture ' shown in figure1.1-3 and set the IP address as 128.0.0.X/129.0.0.X (X stands for the actuaiiP
Monitor network (MNET) System network (SNET) address).
MNETA MNETB SNETA SNETB'

Server A "TCP/IP" "TCP/IP' "HSIE Protocol", no •HSIE Protocol;, no
/OPS /ENS protocol protocol address I "TCPflP" address I "TCP,/IP"
130.0.0.1 131.0.0.1 protocol 128.0.0.X (X protocol 129.0.0.X(X
stands for actua/IP stands for actUallP
·address) address)
SeJVer B "TCP/IP' "TCP/IP" "HSIE Protocol", no "HSIE Protocol~. no
/OPS protocol protocol address address
130.0.0.2 131.0.0.2
2
-~~~ HOLLIAS MACS Software User Manual
ENS Ulto;
MI\:"ETI
··-tiI
I
I I I
I I I
r-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-·-1
I !tiNF.T/. SNET
l\INETB (131)
network architecture
1.2.2 Server Configuration Requirement in Simplified

2 network switches and 2 servers should be configured in simplified network architecture. The 2
servers aren't special servers but the operator station is doubled as server, engineer station
simultaneously.
Figure 1.1-3 System network (SNET) properties (doubled as engineer station)
1.2.3 Server Network Setting in Simplified Network
1.2 Simplified Network Architecture Architecture
Simplified network architecture includes monitor network (MNET) /system network (SNET) and
control network (CNET), wherein monitor network (MNET) and system network (SNET) are In simplified network architecture 2 Ethernet adapters are configured for the server with the names
SNETA, SNETB. The network setting is shown in table 1.2-1.
combined together. This is suitable for small-size system which doesn't need mutual surVeillance
and operation between several projects namely several domains. Small-size system iS the one u•un:: I.L• I'"'" Vt:"l llt:"U'VVII\ O>t:" .. lll Ill 0>1111 IIIIVU llt:"IVVVII\ <>IVIII<V ... IUI1:>
which includes less than 2000 110 points and no more than 5 1/0 control stations. Monitor network (MNET) /system network (SNET)
MNETNSNETA MNET 8/ SNETB
1.2.1 Simplified Network Architecture Server A lOPS "TCP/IP~ protocol 130.0.0.1 I"HSIE "TCP/IP" protocol131.0.0.1fHSIE
/ENS Protocol, no address /"TCP/IP" Protocol", no address /"TCP/IP"
Simplified network architecture is shown in figure1.2-1.
protocol binding 128.0.0.X (X stands protocol binding 128.0.0.X (X stands
for the actual IP address) for the actuaiiP address)
Server B lOPS "TCPnP" protocoi130.0.0.2/"HSIE "TCP/IP" protocol131.0.0.2fHSIE
Protocol~. no address Protocol", no address
select "Properties", and then click "General" option. Select both "HSIE Protocol" and "TCP/IP~
simultaneously, shown in figure 1.2-2 and set the IP address of the computers doubled as servers
3 4
1102 I,«'<!
. . llollv$11S HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual ar.~JJ HOLLIAS MACS Software User Manual
as 130.0.0.1/131.0.0.1, 130.0.0.21131.0.0.2: installing MACSV5.2.3 software on computers used in field.
2 HOLLiAS MACS Software Installation
2.1 Steps of Software Installation
l Insert MACSV 5.2.3 installation disk into CD driver, double click «setup.exe~ in urnstall"
folder, "Select Setup Language" dialog box pops up and two languages "English (America)"
and "Chinese (Simplified)" are provided. Here "English (Americat is selected.
2 Click "OK" button in "Select Setup Language" dialog box and enter "lnstaiiShield Wizard"
windowto • ~ · " · ·
Figure 1.2-2 MNETA properties
0, Note:
During device configuration, the IP addresses of the two operator stations doubled as servers
simultaneously are set as 130.0.0.1/131.0.0.1, 130.0.0.21131.0.0.2, not the default setting
130.0.0.50/51.
If the operator station is doubled as both server and engineer station, then the computer doubled 3 After "Checking Operating System Version", "Configuring Windows Installer", "Preparing
as engineer station should bind IP address. For example if server A is doubled as engineer station, to Install" are finished, HOLLiAS MAGS "lnstaliShield Wiard" window pops up to install
then bind IP addresses 128.0.0.501129.0.0.50 on adapter 130.0.0.1/131.0.0.1, shown 'in figure software, shown in figure2~2:
1.2-3:
Figure 1.2w3 Internet protocol properties
This specification is taken as guidelines for computer system installation and it's suitable for
5 6
-~
Click "Browse" button to select another folder for storage and the default installation directory
is <D:\ MACSV\>. It's suggested to use the default directory.
5 Click "Next" in "Choose Destination Location" interface and enter "Setup Type" interface,
Three types ~Typical", "Compacf and "Custom" are provided and user can choose different setup
type according to different requirements.
Click "Next" in "Customer Information" interface and enter "Choose Destination Location"
+ Typical: Install engineer station program (MACSV_ENG), operator station program
(MACSV_OPS) and server program (MACSV_SERVER).
interface, shown in figure 2-4: + Compact: Install operator program (MACSV_OPS).
+ Custom: Users select what to install.
7 8
a:~~ HOLUAS MACS Software uSer Manual
The optional components are as follows:
> Engineer station program (MACSV_ENG)
)> Operator station program (MACSV_OPS)
)> Server program (MACSV_SERVER)
> Communication program (OPCCiient)
When ~customM is selected, ensure that the computer playing different roles must be installed with
the corresponding components, or else it can't work normally.
6 Take "Typical" for an example, choose "Typical" in "Setup Type" interface and then
dick MNext" to enter PChoose Destination Location" interface, shown in figure 2-6:
Click •srowse" button to choose the storage directory for server software and the default directory
is <D:\ MACSV\MACSV_SERVER\>. lfs recommended to use the default directory.
7 Click "Next" in "Choose Destination Location" interface and enter "Please SeleCt Node A
or B" interface and select Node A or B according to the projects, shown in figure 2-7:
After selecting "Use GPS" or "Use FM197" click "Next" and "Select port umber" interface pops
up, shown in figure 2-9 and then make a right choice according to different projects. If "Use
software" is selected, the "Select port umber'' interface doesn't appear.
9 10
II
@!!Tip:
• Only when "Use GPS» or "Use FM197" is selected does the interface appear. Make a right
choice according to different projects.
9 Click »Next" in "Select port number" interface and enter »Review settings before copying
12 Click "OK" in window "RegS~vr32"

in figure 2~13:
IO Click "Next" in ~Review settings before copying

interface to start to install, shown in figure 2-11:
11 12
Wl>«-.J
,14 ll<tRII$n
I5YBASE"
SOL Anywhere·
©Copyright1984, 1997 by Sybase,lnc. All rights reserved.
Click "OK" to continue installation and pop~up the following window, shown in figure 2-16:
Figure 2-13 SOL software installation Interface 1

Click ~OK" to continue installation and pop-up the following window, shown in figure 2-14:
13
Copying Files...
c:\sqlany50\win32\isql.exe
---------------.
27%
1111
Figure 2-171nstallaUon progress Window
14 Continue to install and pop-up the following dialog box, shown in figure 2-18:
Figure 2-14 SOL software installation interface 2

13 14
Click "OK" in "Installation Completed" window and pop up the"RegSvr32"
figure 2-20:
2.2 Contents of Software Installation
After software installation is completed ('Typical" installation), generate shortcut menu in [Start]\
[All Programs]\ [MACS] to enter engineer station configuration, operator station operation and
server operation, shown in figure2-24, 2-25, 2-26.
16
&!:~.~ HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
3 Cancel Installation
During the software installation, if you want to

each· · • · " • " · ·- " - • ··
Wherein, engineer station path is "D: \MACSV\MACSV_ENG\~, including the -following

subdirectories:
> CodeSys: controller algorithm configuration software, configure controller algorithm and
download it to controller;
> Ctrledit control table edit software, control table edit window in projects;
> Datas: store basic document of controller algorithm;
> Dbedit: database edit software, database edit window in prOjects;
> Dbenv: general control of database software, new, edit and compile of projects;
> Des: store server algorithm files;
> Dev: device configuration software to complete hardware configuration;
> Ens: engineer station download software, download of operator station and do~nload of
server;
> FCSEditor: FCS algorithm configuration software, open controller algorithm in CodeSys;
> Graph: graph configuration software to edit flow graph;
> QueryNew: offline query software to query offline log and trends;
> Report report configuration software to complete report configuration;
> TerminaiCAD: store terminal wiring diagram CAD;
> User. store project files.
Operator station path is "0: \MACSV\MACSV_ OPS\", including the following subdirectories:
> Config: store configuration file of operator station, including parameter group, trends,
report print and so on;
> files: store project file of operator station operation;
> start store project file of operator station operation.
Server path is "0: \MACSV\MACSV_SERVER\", including the following subdirectories: Click buttonlililllililiib111l!J and exit the installation.
> files: store project file of server operation;
> HISTDATA: store historical database file;
> readback: store readback data file;
> start: store project file of server operation.
17 18
". lol!'<l
rA Ho!MYS HOLLiAS MACS Software USer Manual .~.~ HOLLIAS MACS Software User Manual
)> Modify: enter "Custom;, irliertac:e. S.eileicl" r1eiW f:lfOQram- features to add or select currently
4 Software Un-installation installed features to remo·\te.
)> Repair: reinstall all program features installed by the previous setup.
)> Remove: remove all installed features.
4.2.2 Select •Remove" option and click "Next" button and "Confirm Uninstall' window pops up,
shown in
4.1 Uninstall in Control Panel
Open control panel and click "Uninstaii/Change" button to uninstall a program, shown in figure4-1:
••
Currently lnstlllled p.rogr~ms <!illd upcllll:es: M Show u~tes ~t by:
•
..........•
"~··· h•"· ···-- ·--
4.2 Uninstall Using Setup.exe
Un-installation steps:
4.2. 1 Insert MACSV 5.2. 1 installation disk into CD driver, double click "setup.exe" in "instan• folder,
same with the first and second steps of software installation. After "P.reparing to install~ iS finished,
the'"""·' · ·
Uninstall progress
4.2.4 When remove is finished, "Maintenance Completen dialog box appears, shown in figure 4-5:
19 20
IP21.«.J
Jr4 R<~II~Ut HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
directorv manuallv.
4.3 Notes When Installation and Un-installation
When installation and un-installation pay attention to:

)- Uninstall the old version before installing new version;
> If some error tips appear during installation, exit the program and reboot the computer
and install again;
> If there are the patch programs, please refer to the related installation manual;
:> Before un-installation ensure to exit the online operation ser.tice and programs.
e Tip:
• Wfien·un.:-rnstanatlon·;s-cc;mpTefed, only delete the corresponding registration information and
executive files, however the relevant historical data, download files, togs, graphs and project
file of user configuration are still stored in the ffilevant directory. When re-install the system
directorv manuallv.
1\)Tip:
21 22
102\, I!<:!
, . . . IIOI!v$11$
HOlliAS MAGS Software Us'er Manual a:~s~ HOlliAS MAGS Software User Manual
5 Configuration Overview SOIIOPS Sl#OPS ENS CMS
ERP
SNETB
IO#FCS ll#FCS
Figure 5.1-2 MACSV simplified system standard structure drawing
Note: the system adopts multiple redundant structures (network redundancy, controller
redundancy, power supply module redundancy and 1/0 module redundancy).
DomainO Domain I MACSV system functions:
Figure 5.1-1 System structure drawing > Data collection

> Control arithmetic
Composition of MACSV system: > Device and status monitor
»- Alarm monitor
> Network )> Remote communication
> Engineer station (ENS) > Real-time data processing and display
> Operator station {OPS) > Historical data management
> Server (SERVER) > Journal log
> Field control station (FCS) )> Sequence of events (SOE)
> Emergency review
The network includes three tiers namely monitor network (MNET), system network (SNET) and > Graph display
control network {CNEn, monitor network realizes interconnection between engineer station, > Control modulation
operator station, communication station and system server, system network realizes > Report print
interconnection between field control station and system server, control network· realizes > Configuration, debugging, print, downloading and diagnose
communication between main control unit and process 1/0 unit.
5.2 Application system configuration
A large scale system can consist of multiple groups of servers, therefore system is divided into
multiple domains, and each domain consists of independent server, system network and several
field control stations, which complete relatively independent collection and control functjon. Data MACSV system provides user with a general purpose system configuration and control platform,
within domain are configured and managed independently. Monitor network and engineer station application system is generated through configuration, i.e. modular functional units provided by the
can be shared between domains. Operator station can login different domains. Data :between general purpose system are combined together according to certain logic, so as to form an
domains can be referenced mutually {i.e. inter-domain reference) through monitor netwofk. application system which can complete special requirements, such as generation of database of
23 24
__-r--
"'~>«'!!
JJ4llontsP
• '
HOlliAS MAGS Software USer Manual -~~!~ HOlliAS MACS Software User Manual
application system, control arithmetic program, historical database, monitor flow chart arid various A measure for editing data in database is provided to engineering technician. In order to enhance
kinds of production management reports. flexibility, independent configuration by multiple persons is allowed, multiple data files are merged
into one database, and functions such as data modification, search, printing and etc are available.
5.2.11nitial preparation work Note: After implementation of compilation command in general control in database, physical
points access controller algorithm project automatically from each database, intermediate
Initial preparation work refers to that before accessing system configuration, it is necessary to measuring points of controller algorithm access relevant database automatically.
determine measuring points list, control arithmetic scheme, system hardware setup (including
system scale, setup of 10 unit of each station, distribution of measuring point and :etc), and 5.2.5 Controller algorithm configuration
propose design requirements on flow chart, report, historical databaSe and etc.
5.2.2Establishment of target project After completion of database configuration, it is possible to proceed with control algorithm
configuration, controller algorithm configuration tools are used to compile controller algorithm
program and download controller.
Before formal configuration of application system, it is essential to define a project name ~egarding
the application system, after establishing the target project, data catalogue of the project is Variable definition
therefore established.
> Function block instance
5.2.3System setup configuration > Local variable in scheme page
> Global variable
Compilation of control arithmetic program

Hardware setup of application project is defined in new project. Task of system device
configuration is to complete hardware setup of network devices of system network and monitor
network; 110 device configuration is to complete 1/0 unit setup of each station in unit of field control MACSV system provides 6 types of language tools: FBD, LD, ST, SFC, IL and CFC, in which the
station. first 5 types are in compliance with internationaiiEC61131-3 Standard.
See details in Chapter 4 ~controller Algorithm" of this manual.

5.2.4Database configuration
5.2.6Graph configuration
Database configuration is to define and edit point information of system stations, and this is the
foundation to form the whole application system.
Graph configuration is used to plot technique flowcharts, including plotting of static background
There are two categories of points in MACSV system, one category is of actual; physical and adding of dynamic objects, correlation between dynamic object and database tag.
measuring points, which exist in field control station and communil:!ation station, pointS include
information such as measuring point type, physical address, signal processing, displaY method 5.2.7Report configuration
and etc; the other category is intermediate measuring point, in comparison with actual physical
measuring point, the only difference is that it has no information related to physical position, and
can be used in control algorithm configuration and graph configuration. Report configuration is used to formulate report to embody site technique data, including
formulation of table appearance and dynamic point definition.
Database configuration edit function includes two parts namely class structure edit and data
operation.
5.2.8Compilation and generation
Class structure edit
After database general control compilation, the system forms download file.
In order to embody flexibility of database configuration, database Configuration softwafe allows
configuration of database structure, including adding of custom structure (corresponding to table in
database), adding of data item (corresponding to field in database), deletion of struCture and 5.2.9Engineer station download
deletion of item operation. But no matter for whatever type of operations, no data in database
should be damaged, i.e. integrity of data should be maintained. After modifying table struCture, it is
allowed to reconstruct user interface dynamically without modification of source Program, After completion of generation of download file, relevant contents are downloaded to servers and
commonality of database configuration program has been enhanced. operator stations.
Note: This item of function is provided for application developers. Note: Controller algorithm configuration is downloaded to field control station, and is conducted in
controller algorithm configuration tools.
Data operation
25 26
/--
.a~«~
JJI: llaDTSn
.
HOlliAS MACS Software USer Manual Dtjjj HOLLIAS MACS Software User Manual
5.3 General steps of configuration 6 General Control Software of Database
Database general control is project management window. Only by establishing application system
project in database general conti-cil firstly, can other configuration works be conducted, after
completion of all configuration works, 'proceed with compilation in database general control and
generation of download file.
By opening database general control, it is possible to access database edit and control table edit
6.2 Access to database general control

Compile and Generate Controllerfiles..,
Graph Configuration and Report Configuration..,
Complete the Configuration of Runtime system..,

Fig~~~S.i-1 confiQ~ratiorlfitePdraWing· ·'""'""···"·-··
Note: Edit of subsystems can be conducted in parallel at some times, and there is- no clear
precedence order.
27 28
Users need to type in project name, project name should be within 12 characters, only including
letter and number, and name should start with letter. When being confirmed as errorless, press
"OK" button, and if adding is correct, then name of established project can be found in pull-down
list box of project:
a) Title bar
b) Menu bar
c) Tools bar
d) Compilation message window
e) Status bar
6.3 Project
In database general control config "Proiect". a pull-down menu appears:
2) Deletion of project
When it is necessary to delete a certain project, firstly select the project to be deleted, click ~Del
Figure 6.3-1 Database general controi"Project" menu

Project" in "Project", or icon !IJI in tools bar:
1) New project
Befor~J?..roceeding with configuration, firstly establish a project, click "New Project" in "Project" or
icon IIJ in tools bar, a dialog box will pop up:
If it is necessary to delete, and then click "OK", the project can be deleted, otherwise click
29 30
lfjJ.IJ'!! •.l.ll'!!
~llonw~n HOLUAS MACS Software USer Manual JJII11omw~ HOLLIAS MACS Software User Manual
"Cancel". 4) Domain group number setting:
3) Import project: Click "Domain Setting" in "Edit", then the system will pop up a dialog box:
When it is necessary to import configuration backup of project into database general control,
select option "Import Project" under menu "Project":
Figure 6.3-5 Import project dialog box
Select "Yes» to open "Browse for Folder" window:
the project, click button iJ above, group number (1-32) can be selected; click the button
number (0-7) can be selected. If it is necessary to configure again, click button
and it is done. Domain number of each group must be arranged by starting with
number 0.
Select folder of the project to be imported in window, click "OK" and import the selected project. Note: User must assign group number and domain number to projects, otherwise it is impossible
to generate all download files. "Domain» here refers to projects, and all projects can be divided into
Note: Do not place the project to be imported under "User" path of offline configuration software, 32 groups at the maximum, only domains within one group can communicate with each other.
the reason is because that the system will establish a new folder of which the name is. identical
with the selected project under installation path of offline configuration automatically during import
process, in case there is such a folder existing before import, the system will prompt: 6.4 Database edit
Database edit is divided into two parts: class structure edit and data operation. Class structure edit
is used to define structure and property of all data classes in application system, and can modify
defined structure and property too; data operation is to fill original data provided by users into
relevant class of database. Points in the system is classified according to types (such as analog
input AI, analog output AO, digital variable input Dl, digital variable output DO ... ), one type is one
Figure 6.3-7 Prompt for Impossibility to Import the project
class, structure of each class is different from each other, but each class must contain PN (i.e.
31 32
Wl\,tl'il
J!4 ••~- HOLUAS MACS Software U~er Manual
point name) property. Configuration adopts the form of tableMfilling. If original data is:stored in
EXCEL file or in text file, this software can import it into database, furthermore can export
database, save in form of text file, so as to facilitate configuration work later.
6.4.2Access database edit system
Database configuration edit system can conduct operation according to two levels: engil1eer level
and operator level. In which, authorization of engineer level is the highest, it is not only pOssible to
define and modify structure of class, but also possible to conduct data operation; whilei operator
level can only conduct data operation, instead of being capable to define and modify structure of
class.
Click "Open Database" in "Edit" in database general control screen, or click icon in tools bar, then
login window appears:
User ID: ff_____ _
Password: !___________ _
IIDI'IIII -~llf!lliill
1. Title bar
2. Menu bar
Figure 6.4-1 ~open Database" window 3. Tools bar
4. Status bar
Input relevant names at "User ID" and "Password", access system screen for the firsttime, the
default is to access at engineer level, the user name is "hollymacs", password is "ma'cs", after
user's input, the system checks user name and password, in case of three times of continuous Note: The screen is an engineer level screen, and
screen is grey and is not accessible.
fill class structure icon in operator level
input error then quit will occur, and only after confirmation of correct user name and password, can
the system be accessed:
6.4.3Data operation
I!J database configuration edit window, click "Data Modify" in "System" (or shortcut Ctrl+l), or click
~~ in tools bar, a prompt box appears:
Click "OK", a window pops up:
33 34
•
Midalg
Alg output
Alg canst tag
Bit
Byte
Dig input
Mid Dig
O•t• .-J~:j,l~
Note: Items arrangement style of database input window is displayed as per contents and order
selected by operator.
1) Select Category: List of data class, select class name first when configuring, such aS: AI.
6.4.3.1Ciass name and item name
2) Select Item: After selecting a data class, item name list of this class structure appears on the
right side, select needed item name from it, click ~OK", open data input window: Physical point
> Analog input (AI)
35 36
lalo«..J
M II<III~G~ HOLLiAS MAGS Softv./are User Manual
22) Small signal exsection (LD): 0 or 1, i.e. not to exsect small signal or exsect small signal.
23) Right bridge-arm resistance (LG}: right bridge-arm resistance of thermal resistance module.
26) Exsecting output method (MM): maintain/default value, i.e. to maintain value before exsection
or artificially set value.
27) Measuring range upper limit (MU): lower limit of project work volume measuring range,
12 characters at the maximum, while combination of letters, numbers and underline a_" is
32) Signal range {SA): onsite signal type and range.
33) Over range dead zone (SD): over electric range dead zone. If spot signal is 4-20mA and
collected signal is 3.8 rnA, if SD=0.2, then it is deemed that the data is suspectable; if SD=0.1,
then the data is invalid.
35) Whether or not to extract (SQ): not to extract or extract.
36) Dimension (UT): engineering unit·
> Analog output (AO)
Figure 6.4-6 "AI" class

3) Alarm monitor (AP): not selected, condition 0 monitor, condition 1 monitor, uncOnditional
4) Compensation point name (CC): point name of cold end compensation point of thermocouple
signal.
5) Whether or not a cold end compensation (CL): compensation, not selected, i.e. 'cold end
compensation and no compensation
8) YCL (CY): it is normally unnecessary to modify.
9) Alarm dead zone (01): insensitive zone of alarm, the default value is 0.
11) Point description (OS): 32 characters at the maximum.
12) HH limit alarm level (H1): not selected, red, yellow, white and ·green. Not selected is not to
alarm.
15) Inverse measuring range property (IS): inverse measuring range property, not selected, i.e.
take inverse measuring range or do not take inverse measuring range.
16) Exsect output initial value (IV}: if LD item selects 1, value less than IV will be exsected.
19) Line resistance A (LA): thermal resistance signal line resistance compensation. 1) Current value (AV}: initial value.
20) Line resistance B (LB): thennal resistance signal line resistance compensation. 2) Channel number (CN): device channel number, positive integer, starting from 0.
21) Line resistance C (LC): thermal resistance signal line resistance compensation. 3) Sample cycle (CP): 1 by default, integral time of 1 can be filled in, no access to historical
37 38
~
"'"~"
JJ4 IIIIRIISrs
database for 0.
HOLUAS MACS Software Us'er Manual l~!!.i! HOLLIAS MACS Software User Manual
In the table, DV and MD are current value and intermediate status marks of switch status. When
4) Device number (ON): positive integer, to be filled according to device configuration. both Din and Dln+ 1 are 0 or 1, MD is set to 1, indicating error status, DV is invalid. When Din and
5) Tag description (OS): 32 characters at the maximum. Dln..1 are 0 or 1 respectively, MD is set to 0, and current value of DV is identical with Din.
6) Measuring range lower limit {MD): lower limit of project work volume measuring ranQe.
7) Measuring range upper limit (MU): upper limit of project work volume measuring rarige. 5) Device number (ON): positive integer, to be filled according to device configuration.
B) Output format (OF): display method, 12 types of options are XXXXXX, XXXX.X, =xxE±XX, 6) Tag description (OS): 32 characters at the maximum.
AAAAAA, XXX.XX, XX.XXX, X.XXXX, ±XXXXX, ±XXX.X, ±XX.XX, ±X.XXX and ±XXE±X 7) Set 0 description (EO}: character string, meanings when the point is 0.
respectively. In which X refers to figure and A refers to ASC code character string. 8) Set 1 description (E1): character string, meanings when the point is 1.
9) Operation records (OR): not selected, record, record and alarm sounds. 9) Status complementary attribute (NT): not selected, complementing, i.e. not to complement or
10) Point name (PN): the item is of red color, and must be filled in when configuring. It Qonsists of complement.
12 characters at the maximum, white combination of letters, numbers and underline " " is 10) Operation records (OR): not selected, record, record and alarm sounds.
allowed, starting with number is not allowed, and it is case sensitive. - 11) Point name (PN): the item is of red color, and must be filfed out when configuring. It consists
11) Station number (SN): node number of field control station. of 12 characters at the maximum, while combination of letters, numbers and underline"_» is
12) Dimension (Un: engineering unit allowed, starting with number is not allowed, and it is case sensitive.
12) Break state (SA): not selected, SOE attribute, SOE point needs to be set up.
l> Digital input (DI) 13) SOE attribute (SE): not selected or SOE source, SOE point needs to be set up.
)> Digital output (DO)
Aim Level
Chnl No
On-Off SWitch
DevNo
Tag Descrip
Figure 6.4-8 "DI' class
1) Alarm attribute (AF): not selected, 0 alann and 1 alarm. .

2} Alarm level (AT): not selected, red, yellow, white and green. Not selected is not to at8rm. Figure 6.4-9 "DO" class
3) Channel number (CN): device channel number, positive integer, starting from 0. .
4) On-off switch (DO): not selected, on-off switch. I.e. is not on-off switch or is on-off switch. 1) Channel number (CN): device channel number, positive integer, starting from 0.
Successive two-route binary inputs constitute a on-off switch digital input, truth table is 2) Device number (ON): positive integer, to be filled according to device configuration.
illustrated as following table:
3) Point description (OS): 32 characters at the maximum.
01 ..1 Dl DV MD 4) Current value (DV): initial value.
0 0 0 1 5) Set 0 description (EO): character string, meanings when the point is 0.
0 1 1 0
1 0 0 0 6) Set 1 description (E1): character string, meanings when the point is 1.
1 1 1 1
,. 7)
40
Operation records (OR): not selected, record, record and alarm sounds.
""'~~
Ji}l
B)
llaJtwSn HOLUAS MACS Software USer Manual
Point name (PN): the item is of red color, and must be filled out when configuring. IJ consists
-~.~ HOLLIAS MACS Software User Manual
of 12 characters at the maximum, while combination of letters, ·numbers and unde~line «_"is
16) LL limit alarm level (l2): selection is identical with HH limit alarm revel.
> Pulse input (PI)
18) Lower limit of measuring range (MD): tower limit of project work volume.
22) Point name {PN): the item is of red color, and must be filled out when configuring. It
consists of 12 characters at the maximum, while combination of letters, numbers and
underline"_" is allowed, starting with number is not allowed, and it is case sensitive.
23) Signal range (SA): onsite signal type and range
24) Patrol inspection cycle (SI): is integral multiple of module channel data response
synchronizing cycle.
28) Variable alarm (VA): variable limit value or not selected, i.e. to proceed with variable limit
alarm or not to proceed with variable limit alarm.
> Pulse output (PO)
Figure 6.4-10 "PI" class

3) Alarm condition point name (AN): point name is digital variable point.
4) Alarm monitor condition (AP): not selected, condition 0 monitor, condition 1· monitor,
7) Convert type (CT): accumUlating type, count frequency type and pulse width frequency
type.
8) Alarm dead zone (Dl): insensitive zone of alarm, the default value is 0.
11) Coefficient/pulse (EF): corresponds to frequency type of pulse, here it stands for
frequency coefficient, i.e. physical quantity corresponding to each Hertz; corresponds to
accumulated type of pulse, here it stands for pulse equivalent, i.e. physical quantity
corresponding to each pulse.
alarm.
41 42
Alg canst tag
Tag Descrip Bit
Frequency Byte
Occupy Rate Dig input
KKSCode Mid Dig
Figure 6.4-12 ~AM" class

1) Channel number (CN): device channel number, positive integer, starting from 0. 2) Alarm lower limit (AL): lower limit for alarm
2) Sample cycle (CP): 1 by default, it is allowed to fill in integral multiple of 1, while it is not 3) Alarm monitor (AP): not selected, condition 0 monitor, condition 1 monitor, unconditional
allowed to input 0 into historical database. continuous monitor (condition is alarm monitor point status).
3) Device number (ON): positive integer, to be filled according to device configuration. 4) Current value (AV): initial value, the default is 0.
4) Tag description (OS): 32 characters at the maximum. 5) Sample cycle (CP): 1 by default, it is allowed to fill in integral multiple of 1, while it is not
5) Frequency (FQ) allowed to input 0 into historical database.
6) Occupy rate (HL) 6) Alarm dead zone (DI): insensitive zone of alarm, the default value is 0.
7) Output format (OF): display method, 12 types of options are XXXXXX, XXXX.X, XXE±XX, 7) Tag description (OS): 32 characters at the maximum.
AMAAA, XXX.XX, XX.XXX, X.XXXX, ±XXXXX, ±XXX.X, ±XX.XX, ±X.XXX and ±XXE±X 8) HH limit alarm level (H1): not selected, red, yellow, white and green. Not selected is not to
respectively. In which X refers to figure and A refers to ASC code character string. alarm.
8) Operation records (OR): not selected, record, record and alarm sounds. 9) Upper limit level (H2): selection is identical with HH limit alarm level.
9) Point name (PN): the item is of red color, and must be filled out when configuring. It consists 10) Alarm HH limit (HH): alarm HH limit.
of 12 characters at the maximum, while combination of letters, numbers and underline "_" is 11) Lower limit alarm level (L 1): selection is identical with HH limit alarm level.
allowed, starting with number is not allowed, and it is case sensitive. 12) LL limit alarm level (L2): selection is identical with HH limit alarm level.
10) Station number (SN): node number of field control station. 13) Alarm LL limit (LL): alarm LL limit.
11) Dimension (UT): engineering unit. 14) Measuring range lower limit (MD): lower limit of project work volume measuring range,
Note: After database general control compilation, physical point added or modified in database will 15) Measuring range upper limit (MU): upper limit of project work volume measuring range,
access into relevant system global variable table of controller algorithm project automatically. MD<MU, and MD>MU for inverse measuring range.
Intermediate point (algorithm point) AMAAA, XXX.XX, XX.XXX, X.XXXX, ±XXXXX, ±XXX.X, ±XX.XX, ±X.XXX and ±XXE±X
»- Analog point (AM) 17) Over physical measuring range check (OP): check or not selected. If it is within physical
of 12 characters at the maximum, while combination of letters, numbers and underline "_" is
43 44
102 1o II ':l 102 1o II ':l
J4 llollv'l:n HOLLIAS MAGS Software USer Manual JI!A ll•llhb'l HOLUAS MAGS Software User Manual
21) Standard current value (SV): transform current value of analog into decimal between 0-1. 10) SOE attribute (SE): not selected or SOE source, SOE point needs to be set up.
23) Variable alarm condition (VA): two options: variable limit value or not selected, i.e. to proceed
with variable limit alarm or not to proceed with variable limit alarm.
24) Variance ratio calculation (VL): two options: variance ratio point or not selected, i.e. to Note: In global variable of controller algorithm, data type defined by user is BOOL point, and will
participate variance ratio calculation or not to participate. be added into the type of database automatically through compilation of database general control,
but only point and tag description will be added automatically, for other items such as set a
description, users need to fill in manually by themselves.
Note: In global variable of controller algorithm, data type defined by user is REAL point, and will be
added into the type of database automatically through compilation of database general control, but
only point and tag description will be added automatically, for other items such as upper limit of Note: After successful compilation of controller algorithm project, proceed with database general
measuring range, users need to fill in manually by themselves. control compilation, intermediate point in global variable table will access relevant database
automatically, with the exception of OM and AM class, and points of some functional block type
can access database through database general control compilation, such as analog manual
l> Digital point (DM)
controller (HSALGMAN), combination servo amplification (HSCSLAVE5), circuit breaker
(HSOLCTRL5), PIO governor (HSPIO}, sequential controller (HSSCS5), sequential controller
(HSSCS5), binary output control type regulating valve (HSVALVE5).
System point
)> System name (SYSNAME)
Tag Name
Stat No
Figure 6.4-13 "DM" class

1) Alarm attribute (AF): not selected, 0 alarm and 1 alarm.
4) Tag description (OS): 32 characters at the maximum. Figure 6.4-14 "SYSNAME~ class
5) Current value (OV): initial value.
1) Tag description (OS): project name displayed on operator station screen when the system is
6) Set 0 description (EO): character string, meanings when the point is 0. running online.
2) Point name (PN): specified as 1 system1.
7) Set 1 description (E1): character string, meanings when the point is 1.
3) Station number (SN): specified as 0.
8) Operation records (OR): three options: not selected, record, record and alarm sounds.
of 12 characters at the maximum, while combination of letters, numbers and underline"_" is
45 46
~'
Wl~l!.! WI~!!.!
M••o~n HOLL;AS MAGS S~re uJer Manual . . ll<lhSIIt HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
6.4.3.2Edit command "OK", after selecting defined query item, click "OK~ button, conduct query according to query
conditions, only those points meeting query conditions are displayed in window.
In data operation window, click «Edit", open pull-down menu: "Del", select defined query name, and click "Del", then query name can be deleted.
"Cancel", click ~cancel", then query selection window can be closed.
3) Define query:
Click "Define Query" (shortcut Shift+Q)" in "Edit", or click ~~ in toolbar, define query window
pops up:
1) Print preview:
Click "Print Preview" (shortcut Ctri+Shift+P) in "Edit", or click a in tool bar, it is possible .to
preview and check printing results, to cancel print preview, click "Print Preview" again or click
in toolbar, so that leon pops up.
Ill
2) Query selection:
Click "Select Query" (shortcut Shift+C) in ~Edit", or click in l!;;,m in toolbar, query selection window
pops up:
Figure 6.4-17 "Define Query" window
"Column Name", all columns in database configuration can be selected.
~symbol": Option: = (equivalent), > (more than), < (less than), >= (more than or equivalent), <=
(less than or equivalent), <> (not equivalent) and LIKE. Query display results are displayed
according to alphabetic sequence or number value; such as query condition: select point name
>BA05PC01, then display result is the point name of which the first alphabetic sequence is larger
than B.
Option "LIKE~ is fuzzy query, i.e. in «Value" column, it is only necessary to type in partial key
character string of items to be queried, and substitute parts not written with wildcard character"%",
then it is possible to query all items (elated to key character string.
"Value": value in optional configuration, fill in according to requirement. It is necessary to use

single quote mark or double quote mark to enclose character string type of data on both sides.
"Condition": it is possible to select" AND~ or "OR", i.e. relationship between conditions.
After inputting query name and query condition, click "OK" button, save the generated query
condition as per query name and close the window.
4) The maximum value of the system:

Figure 6.4-16 "Query Select" window
47 48
/"
W\,~<1 \, ll '!I
N llot!¥$n HOLUAS MACS Software USer Manual IIORrM
Input the selected text value as the maximum system default value. It generally applieS to upper
limit of measuring range and upper limit of alarm.
5) The minimum value of the system:
Input the selected text value as the minimum system default value. It generally applieS to lower
limit of measuring range and lower limit of alarm.
6} Adding:
Click "Add• (shortcut Ctri+A) in "Edit", or click lfl in tootbar, and add a record row at the end of
table.
7) Deletion:
Select the row to be deleted, click "Del" (Shortcut Ctri+Del) in "Edit", or click [II in too_! bar, then
row selected can be deleted.
8) Insertion:
Click "Insert" (Shortcut Ctri+N) in "Edit", or click lllfl

in toolbar, it is possible to insert one row in
front of current point, but serial number of insertion point is arranged backwards in origin~! order.
9) Restore data:
Click "Restore" (Shortcut Ctri+R) in "Edit", or click !tiJ in toolbar, then all data can be displayed. Figure 6.4-18 ~verify Result" window
10) Update database:

The operation verifies validity of database data, and verifies whether there are points that are left
in database due to improper operation and are impossible to manage. In order to prevent error of
Click ~update database• (Shortcut Ctrl+U) in "Edie, or click [II in toolbar, modified·data are database compilation, and free user from verification before each time of compilation, the system
stored in database. implement "verify" operation automatically upon each time of "update database".
11) Verify: 6.4.3.3Database import and export
Click "Verify" (Shortcut Shift+V) in "Edit", or click II in tool bar, then verify result window will pop Sort EXCEL database table
up:
Firstly sort one copy of electronic spreadsheet database by using Microsoft Excel software, name
file with any name, the electronic spreadsheet database may contain several worksheets
according to measurement point of the project (one worksheet corresponds to one category of
database}: ·
49 50
ar.~.:'i HOlliAS MACS Software User Manual
LL 2 TC 51
B TC 52
ETC 53
J TC 54
K TC 55
R TC 56
S TC 57
T TC 58
CK TC 59
EA 2 TC 60
EU 2 TC 61
LB 3 TC 62
N TC 63
> Fill in whether or not to conduct cold end compensation (CL): fill in "1" if yes, not to fill in if not.
> Filling-in of alarm level (H 1, H2, L1 and L2)
Red 1
I ~! I ~ I
Edit contents of each worksheet respectively and save.
Note: Fill in figure corresponding to the category in import table.
Text file
Next save the text file to be used for import, open worksheet, delete the first row of item name or
Figure 8.4-19 "Excel" worksheet
word description in EXCEL sheet, select menu command "Save As", a dialog box appears:
Note: The first row is item description filled in to facilitate input, contents and order are completely
identical with database input window, and fill in one item of database record (point) in each row
starting from the second row.
Filling-in description of AI database item
> Filling-in of signal scope (SA)
TO 10mA
TO 20mA
T4 20mA
TO 5V
T1 5V
PT10 RTD
PT100 RTD
PT1000 RTD
CU50 RTD
CU100 RTD
BA1 RTD
BA2 RTD
G RTD
PT10 NEGATIVE
PT100 NEGATIVE
PT1000 NEGATIVE
CU50 NEGATIVE
CU100 NEGATIVE
BA1 NEGATIVE Figure 6.4-20 Save worksheet text file
BA2 NEGATIVE
G NEGATIVE > Saving position: at discretion
mv
> File name: at discretion
51 52
Mll.«'!l
MHoltrS\IS HOlliAS MACS Software USer Manual Dr.~.~
:> Save type: "Text file" (to be separated by tab character)
Figura 6.4-21 Save prompl1
Figure 6.4-24 "System" menu
l'!illltl
Select "Import Data", or click fl!!M!} button in toolbar:
Import operation
Select relevant item according to compiled electronic spreadsheet contents and order, open data
operation window:
Figure 6.4-25 "Import file name" window
Find out and select the text file saved just now, click "Open":
Do"
~<,.~,,~
Figure 6.4-26 "Import" window
Figure 6.4-23 "AI" database input window It is unnecessary to modify any setup, click "OK", contents in electronic spreadsheet is imported
into database, update database (i.e. save}.
Click "System», open pull-down menu:
53 54
-~!!'!! a:~:Js~
11!4 llo~t~SY~ HOLliAS MACS Software USer Manual HOLLIAS MACS Software User Manual
Import classes AO, Dl and D database respectively through identical method.
7 System Setup
Note: Before using import tools, make sure that style of database.input window corresponds to
items of electronic spreadsheet strictly, otherwise import will be unsuccessful, such as prompt:
System setup configuration software is used to define hardware setup of application system on
engineer station. Before configuring system setup, it is essential to establish relevant project in
database general control configuration software.
System setup configuration includes two parts namely system device configuration and 1/0 device
configuration. Task of system device configuration is to complete hardware setup of network
Figure 6.4-27 "Import" error window devices on system network and monitor network; 1/0 device configuration is to complete 1/0 unit
setup of each station in unit of field control station. Software adopts the method to access each
Export operation configuration screen from main screen, so as to complete configuration process of each part, and
the operation is simple and easy. After saving edit, relevant source files can be generated, these
Type data into window and save data displayed at present to text file, and save as *.TXT file. files will store configuration information of user, and it is not allowed to modify at discretion.
Click "Export Data" (Shortcut Ctri+S) in usystemn, or click B in toolbar, a file name" selection
window pops up, input file name at position of file name, select the folder to be saved. Cli.ck "Save"
After completing various setup information edit, it is required to proceed with compilation.
Automatic error correction function is available in compilation process, and prompt will be given
automatically after discovery of error.
button, and the operation is completed.
System device configuration
Note: In case how to fill in certain database items is unknown, it is allowed to add record directly in
database before exporting text file, and check contents of relevant items after opening text file (it is
System device configuration requires defining all devices mounted on the whole system network.
allowed to select to open EXCEL).
Basic concepts to be used for system device configuration are introduced as follows:
> Node: unit that is connected on system network and can complete independent function,
including server node (SVR node), field control station node (FCS node), operator station
node (OPS node) and etc.
> Device: hardware devices mounted on each node on system network.
110 device configuration
In MACSV system, 10 device configuration adopts the idea to mount "device" on "communication
linkn, i.e. multiple devices can be mounted on one communication link, and there are several
points of different types on each device. Basic concepts to be used for field control station are
introduced as follows:
> Communication link: refers to physical circuit of identical communication medium,

communication parameter and communication port. Such as CAN, PLC, COM, MULTICOM,
DP, FF, HART, LONWORKS, RS-485 and etc, which are all referred to as communication link.
> Communication parameter: refers to parameter and device configuration information required
to complete link communication.
> Device: refers to 110 devices that are mounted on communication link and are capable of
independent addressing, such as various types of 110 unit. Each device has corresponding
device address and device description, and different device attributes.
7.2 Access system setup configuration
Select "Start" - "All Programs" - "MACS" - "MACS_ENG" -"Device", and click, open device
configuration tools:
55 56
D_}:~s;1 HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
3. Tools bar
4. Status bar
5. Compilation message window
6. Edit window
7.3 System device configuration
System device configuration completes setup of network nodes on system network and monitor
net.vv'ork and setup of device on node in unit of node.
Node
Nodes that can be mounted to system network include: field control station node, operator station
node and service station node.
Device
Different nodes can contain devices such as: main control unit, operator host computer, central
server host computer, Ethernet card and etc.
Field control station node includes following devices:
> Main control unit

> Ethernet card
Figure 7.2-1 Access device configuration
Note: Field control station node includes 2 main control units and 6 Ethernet cards.
Operator station node include following devices:
)> Operator station host computer

> Ethernet card
Note: Operator station node includes 1 main control unit and 2 Ethernet cards.
Server station node includes following devices:
);:> Central server host computer

> Ethernet card
Note: Server node includes 1 central server host computer and 4 Ethernet cards.
7.3.1 System device configuration wizard
In device configuration operation screen, click aSystem device" in uEdit" menu, access system
device configuration, and wizard dialog box pops up, hereunder we would like to introduce how to
fill in wizard dialog box, as illustrated in 7.3-1, 37.3-2, 7.3-3, 7.3-4 and 7.3-5 respectively:
Step 1:
Figure 7.2-2 Device configuraUon window Network/network section setup, adopts default setup value. Then click "Next".
1. Title bar
2. Menu bar
57 58
Step 2:
Step4:
Server setup, adopts default setup. Then click "Next".
Input number of operator stations, the default is 1, the maximum value is 30, and station number is
from 50 to 79. Here it is assumed that 3 operator stations need to be set up, and we fill 3 in number
position. Then click "Next".
Step 3:
Input number of control stations, the default number is 1, the maximum is 40, and statioi1 number Step 5:
is from 10 to 49. Then click "Next".
Check results of setup in wizard steps above. Then click "Start'', complete adding of system
device.
59 60
/·-
Figure 7.3-7 Prompt dialog box

Automatic generation rule of device point name:
~~a~.~~~ltiJ~··:~~~···~·""~·!mtw~.H"W"::im~lm!ill~~-~iir"''lg"_!i'"'."'!'~'"I".'"~~·"'
~'
After completing wizard setup, system device configuration screen is accessed automa:tically, as
illustrated in Figure 7.3-6, the left half section of edit window displays node and device setup table
in device configuration, the right half section displays attribute or data of a certain node Or device.
7.3.2Add node manually
What we have introduced above is to add node and device automatically by using wizard, in case
certain system devices have been added and additional devices need to be added, and then we
can add node and device manually.
Firstly select "MACS device configuration" on topmost of left half section in screen of selection of
system device configuration, click right mouse button to select "Add Node", "Add Node" dialog box
will pop up, as illustrated in Figure 7.3-8.
Figure 7.3-6 System device configuration screen
Click ~ in tools bar, prompt dialog box will pop up, as illustrated in Figure 7.3-7, dick "Yes"
button, the system will pop up wizard dialog box again, and it is possible to add systein device
again.
61 62
----.
Wf~>«'iil
JJII••nll~n ll:~j HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
Note: Number of operator station nodes of "Add Node» dialog box is the total of the number of
operator station nodes already added and number of operator station nodes to be added. If
7.3.3Device property
Click mouse right button on device of the left half section of system device configuration screen,
select "Property" in popup menu, and set up device property in popup window.
Add field control station node
Select "Field control station" in "Add Node" dialog box, and add setup of field control st~tion node
number in "Add Node" dialog box, as illustrated in Figure 7 .3·9. The default is 1, after filli~g in node
number manually, click "OK" button, field control station node will be added into the left half section
in system device configuration screen.
Note: Number of field control station nodes of" Add Node" dialog box is the total of the r)umber of
field control station nodes already added and number of field control station nodes to bS: added. If
Add operator station node.
Select "Operator station" in "Add Node" dialog box, add setup of operator station node number in
"Add Node" dialog box, as illustrated in Figure 7.3·10. The default is.1, after filling in nod~ number
manually, click "OK" button, operator station node will be added into the left half section jn system
device configuration screen.
Figure 7.3-10 "Add Node• dialog box for adding operator station node
63 64
kll..~'!l
J:Ai lldllllh'll _ HOLliAS MACS Software User Manual
7.3.4Compilation, saving, close and quit of system device

configuration
Click Jl in tools bar, the system compiles the device configuration edited. The compilation
results will be displayed in Compile Information window. Information of correct compilation:
UBRf~~llilllll\lllll}'it8!ll'l!'lfll!i1\!!!fo!ll!!!lillli!illHlliHIIIHilllniiDilliiHfilllliiWIIHIJJIHHIDIDYII!IllHHIIIlliiliHillllil
0 SUceed to compile!
lffiRU!ii!II!II!I!Ilfllllllll!ffi!.illlllt1\lf!llflliiiTillllllllllllflflllllllllllilllillillllllllll!lll!l]illllllliiiUUIIIIIIIIIIll!!I!I!I!IUIIIIIIIIIfllllllllllllll
Figure 7.3-17 lnfonnaUon of ~rrect compilation
Click ~save~ in "File" menu, the system conducts compilation automatically and fills in device
description information automatically before saving system device configuration that is being
edited on disk.
Click "Close" in "File" menu, store prompt dialog box pops up, as illustrated in Figure 7.3-18, select
"Yes" to store and close system device configuration, select "No", it will not to be stored and
system device configuration will be closed.
Figure 7.3-18 Prompt dialog box before quit
The system displays device configuration operation screen after closing system device
It is unnecessary to set up IP address for system network card, but it is necessary to :set up IP configuration. It is possible to open system device configuration again or open 10 device
address for monitor network card, system default has been set up, if it is necessary to change, it is configuration.
allowed to modify manually in property window of monitor network card. Default setUp rule of
monitor network card IP address is shown in the following table:
Click "Quit" in "File" menu, the operation is similar to that of "Close", but it is to quit the whole
device configuration tools rather than clqse system device configuration.
7.41/0 device configuration
1/0 device configuration is aimed at configuration of internal device of field control station. The
configuration completes adding of link in field control station, and adding of 10 board in station.
65 66
l'al.«<!!
J!A.noll~lin HOLLiAS MAGS Software USer Manual
7.4.1Add 1/0 device
In device configuration operation screen, click "1/0 device» in "Edit" menu, access 10 device
configuration:
Figure 7.4-2 Field control station and control network
In the left half section of 10 device configuration screen, click mouse right button on DP link of a
field control station, a menu pops up as illustrated in Figure 7.4-3. Select "Add Module" or click
screen
allJ in tools bar, the ~Add 1/0 Module" window will pop up as illustrated in Figure 7.4-4. After
selecting DP link device type to be added in window, input number in "Number», click "Add", and
The left half section of 10 device configuration screen displays field control station added in system then 10 device is added successfully. Click Jl on right upper corner of "Add 1/0 Module" window,
device configuration, the right half section displays relevant attribute. Click plus sign in frOnt of field so as to close the window. 10 device configuration screen will display 10 device added and its
control station node, so as to display control network "DP~ in field control station: property, as illustrated in Figure 7.4-5. Number in bracket behind 10 device is device address of 10
device, and it is generated according to adding order by default, and can be modified manually.
Figure 7.4-3 Right-click menu
67 68
-~~s~
9FM148R fiNM<10 II NM710

9FM161 fl Nl!480 DPltl12
IJFM151R I) NM510 rulSM410
miFM162 fiNJi1520 fmSM4.11
Ill FM161_DI fl Nl!610 l!ilSM4.12
IFJii161_SOE fl Nl!611 ll!1SM4.30
Ill FM162 fl Nl!612 (ii1SM4.32
IJF11E163 fl Nl!613 lli1SM460
llJF1!163A DNM620_DI lli1SM461
IIFlU63D II NM620_SOE (IDSM470
9FM163E fJ NM621_DI lli1 SM471
llJFM171 fl Nl!621_SOE lliSM472
"Address" in property window is device address, FM series module can select address among
1-127, no repetition is allowed between module address. Program will add "Descrip" automatically
9FM172 fl Nl!622_DI rn SM4.so by default. •Auto generate parameter" is selected by default. "Outside power supply" can be
9FM186 fl Nl!622_SOE lli1 SM481 selected according to actual situation.
RNM410 II NM623_DI 11ilSM482
7.4.2.2Automatic arrangement address
EJ·"Illl Aeld
E\~;gll
After selecting 10 device, click "Auto Address" in right·click menu or11] in tools bar, prompt
dialog box pops up as illustrated in Figure 7.4-8. Click "Yes" button, the system will assign device
!.. ~ FM14BC[1) address automatically in accordance with current arrangement sequence.
!·· ~ FM151(2)
i····· ~ FM161_DI(3)
L. ~ FM171(4)
Figure 7.4-5 Device configuration screen
7.4.2110 device right-click menu
Select 10 device added and click mouse right button, right-click menu pops up:
7.4.2.1 Device property
Select "Property" in right-click menu, property window will pop up:
69 70
11'2.1, I! '!l
lf411•1l:rSIIII HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual Dt~.~ HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
7.4.2.31/0 device redundancy 8 Controller algorithm

After selecting redundant device, click "+Redundanr in right-click menu, $···~ in front
of device stands for redundant configuration. After double-clicking the device, reduildant 8.1 Outline introduction
device will be displayed under main device.
It is a complete development environment for your controller. It puts a simple approach to the
7.4.2.41/0 device deletion powerful IEC language at the disposal of the programmer. Use of the editors and debugging
functions is based upon the proven development program environments of advanced
programming languages (such as Visual C++).
After selecting 10 device, click "Delete Device" in right-click menu or
selected 10 device will be deleted.
Jill in tools b8r, the
Its main functions are:
7.4.3Compilation, saving, close and quit of 110 device > User control algorithms configuration
> Simulation test
J> Login and download the controller, test program online.
configuration
After the completion of the database configuration and device configuration, choose and compile
the project in the database configuration software window and until the compilation is successful,
Select field control station to be compiled, click.IJ in tools bar, the system will compile
field control station edited. Compilation results will be displayed in compilation message
we could carry out the configuration of controller algoi"ithms.
window. Click on "Starr "All Programs» "MAGS" "MACS_ENG" "Database", enter database configuration
Saving, close and quit operations are identical with saving, close and quit operations of software window, choose the project, click on "Compile" "Compile all" or click the il_:ibutton,
system device configuration, see details of saving, close and quit operations of system choose "Yes" in the pop up dialog box, it will compile automatically, compilation result will be
device configuration see section 3.3.4 of this chapter. displayed in the message window. Controller algorithms project{s) will be created automatically
after successful compilation. Each field control station has a controller algorithms project. Objects
that including target settings, task configuration, hardware configuration, 10 tags declaration and
main program (MACS_PRO) are already configured in the original project, what we will do is to
add the POU (Program Organization Unit) of controller algorithms.
8.2 Access controller algorithm configuration
Click on "Start" "All Programs" "MAGS" "MACS_ENG" "FCS":
71 72
./'-
-·~~$~
Select the station with "OK" and open:
Then pop up the window:
Figure 8.2-4 Open project
Tip: click "OK" in the prompted message window, this error message will no longer display when
you reopen the editor after rebuilding the project.
Select the project and press the button, pop up the window:
73 74
1. Menu bar and tool bar The PLC Configuration editor is divided up in two parts. In the left window the configuration tree is
2. Object Organizer displayed. The right part of the window is per default visible, but can get faded out via the menu
3. Work space item "Extras" "Properties".lfthe 1/0 module is selected in the configuration tree, click the plus sign
4. Message window before the module or press <enter> to display the IEC~address that system allocate to the input
and output data. If a DP master or a DP slave is selected in the configuration tree, the parameters
dialogs of the module will be available in the right part.
8.3 Project objects that have been generated
8.3.2Task configuration
automatically
8.3.1 Hardware configuration task configuration window. There has a task named ~MACSTask", main program "MACS_PRG"
will be started by the task, select the task, in the right part of the window is the task attributes that
have been set up. The specific contents see "Start the POU"
Double click "PLC Configuration" in the «Resources" register card of the object organizer, :open the
hardware configuration window:
75 76
8.3.3110 Database definition As the 16-bit binary data from the address of analog input module channel should be converted to
real data type variables for calculation and display purpose (real type value should be converted to
16-bit binary data for analog output tags), system also created the conversion POUs.
System has allocated the IEC-address to stored data for each 1/0 module. 1/0 database :definition
is to create the correspondence between the symbolic name and address. Because 110 ¢1atabase
have been already edited, 1/0 database definition is completed automatically. 1/0 ~tags are
declared in the global variables list of 10 folder.
P_H._CT iPAG)
P_H_E (PRG]
P_H_PI (PRG)
P_H_RTD (PAG)
P_H_ TC (PAG]
Figure 8.3-4 Conversion POUs
8.3.4Get system load of controller and runtime state of the

110 modules
In order to get the system load of controller and get the runtime state of each 1/0 module, system
created these POUs automatically. New variables of these PO Us are declared in corresponding
global variables list.
77 78
·~~~
TIME1 := t#Sm68s; (*limit exceeded in a lower component*)
HOLLIAS MACS Software User Manual
TIME1 := 15ms; {*T# is missing*)
TIME1 := t#4ms13d; (*Incorrect order of entries")
> DATE constants
These constants can be used to enter dates. A DATE constant is declared beginning with a "d", "D",
"DATE" or "date" followed by"#''. You can then enter any date with format Year-Month-Day.
Examples:
DATE#1996-05-06
d#1972-03-29
> TIME_OF_DAY constants
Use this type of constant to store times of the day. A TIME_OF_DAY declaration begins with "tad#'',
"TOO#", "TIME_OF_DAY#" or "time_of_day#'' followed by a time with the format:
Hour:Minute:Second. You can enter seconds as real numbers or you can enter fractions of a
second.
Examples:
TIME_OF_DAY#15:36:30.123
8.4 Constants and variables tod#OO:OO:OO
> DATE_AND_TIME constants

8.4.1 Constants
Date constants and the time of day can also be combined to form so~called DATE_AND_TIME
constants. DATE_AND_TIME constants begin with "dt#", "DT#', "DATE_AND_TIME#' or
> BOOL constants "date_and_time#''. Place a hyphen after the date followed by the time.
BOOL constants are the logical values TRUE and FALSE. Examples:
> TIME constants DATE_AND_TIME#1996-05-06-15:36:30
This is followed by the actual time declaration which can include days (identified by "d"), hours dt#1972-03-29-00:00:00
(identified by "h"), minutes (identified by "m"), seconds (identified by "s") and mill,iseconds
(identified by "ms"). Please note that the time entries must be given in this order accprding to > Number constants
length (d before h before m before s before m before ms) but you are not required to if,lclude all
time increments. Number values can appear as binary numbers, octal numbers, decimal numbers and hexadecimal
numbers. If an integer value is not a decimal number, you must write its base followed by the
Examples of correct TIME constants in a ST assignment: number sign (#) in front of the integer constant. The values for the numbers 10-15 in hexadecimal
numbers will be represented as always by the letters A-F.
TIME1 := T#14ms;
You may include the underscore character within the number.
TIME1 := T#100S12ms; (*The highest component may be allowed to exceed its limit")
Examples:
TIME1 := t#12h34m15s;
14 (decimal number)
The following would be incorrect:
79 80
-~0~
WI. I!'!!
• •!OitrSJIS HOLliAS MACS Software uSer Manual HOLUAS MAGS Software User Manual
2#1001_0011 (dual number) > Typed Literals
8#67 (octal number) Basically, in using IEC constants, the smallest possible data type will be used. If another data type
must be used, this can be achieved with the help of typed literals without the necessity of explicitly
16#A(hexadecimal number) declaring the constants. For this, the constant will be provided with a prefix which determines the
type.
These number values can be from the variable types BYTE, WORD, DWORO, SINT, USINT, INT,
UINT, DINT, UDINT, REAL or LREAL. This is written as follows: <Type>#<Literal>
Implicit conversions from "larger'' to "smaller'' variable types are not permitted. This means that a <Type> specifies the desired data type; possible entries are: BOOL, SINT, USINT, BYTE, INT,
DINT variable cannot simply be used as an INT variable. You must use the type conversion. UINT, WORD, DINT, UDINT, DWORD, REAL, LREAL. The type must be written in uppercase
letters.
> REAULREAL constants
<Literal> specifies the constant. The data entered must fit within the data type specified under
REAL and LREAL constants can be given as decimal fractions and represented exponentially. Use <Type>.
the standard American format with the decimal point to do this.
Example:
Example:
var1 :=DINT#34;
7.4 instead of 7,4
If the constant can not be converted to the target type without data loss, an error message is
1.64e+009 instead of 1,64e+009 issued:
> STRING constants Typed literals can be used wherever normal constants can be used.
A string is a sequence of characters. STRING constants are preceded and followed ·by single 8.4.2Variables
quotation marks. You may also enter blank spaces and special characters (umlauts for instance).
They will be treated just like all other characters.
The main operating target in control are data, the data value is likely to change at any time. We
In character sequences, the combination of the dollar sign ($) followed by two hexadecimal called these data variables. In other words, the variable is the identifier of data storage unit in the
numbers is interpreted as a hexadecimal representation of the eight bit character code. lri addition, computers.
the combinations of two characters that begin with the dollar sign are interpreted as shown below
when they appear in a character sequence: 8.4.2.1 Variable declaration
$$ Dollar signs
Names and data types of the variables used in control algorithm configuration must be known at
$' Single quotation mark first, so we should use the variable definition, the definition process is called variables declaration.
Variables declaration should be considered of the following aspects:
$Lor $1 Line feed
> Position
$Nor $n New line > Synlax
> Name
$P or $p Page feed > Dala type
$R or $r Line break A variable declaration has the following syntax:
$T or$tTab <Identifier> {AT<Address>}:<Type>{:=<initialization>};
Examples: The parts in the braces {} are optional.
'w1W@?' Regarding the identifier, that is the name of a variable, it should be noted that it may not contain
spaces or umlaut characters, it may not be declared .in duplicate and may not be identical to any
keyword. Underlines in identifiers are meaningful, e.g. A_BCD and AB_CD are interpreted as
'Abby and Craig '
different identifiers. Multiple consecutive underlines at the beginning of an identifier or within a
identifier are not allowed.
':-)'
81 82
""loll.'!!
r.A, ''"lhS!Is HOLLIAS MACS Software Us'er Manual Dl::~s;1 HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
All declarations of variables and data type elements can include initialization. They are brought Example of a String Declaration with 35 characters:
about by the ":=" operator. For variables of elementary types, these initializations are Constants.
The default initialization is 0 for all declarations. str:STRING(35):='This is a String';
8.4.2.2Data types > Time Data Types:
The data types TIME, TIME_OF_DAY (abb. TOO), DATE and DATE_AND_TIME (abb. DT) are
You can use standard data types and user-defined data types when programming. Each identifier handled internally like DWORD.
is assigned to a data type which dictates how much memory space will be reserved and what type
of values it stores. lime is given in milliseconds in TIME and TOO, time in TOD begins at 12:00A.M.
Standard data types: Time is given in seconds in DATE and DT beginning With January 1, 1970 at 12:00A.M.
l> BOOL: Reference to 4.4.1 "Constants"
BOOL type variables may be given the values TRUE and FALSE. 8 bits of memory spaCe will be Defined data types:
reserved.
l> ARRAR
> Integer Data Types: > Function Checkbounds
> Pointer
BYTE, WORD, DWORO, SINT, USINT, !NT, UINT, DINT, and UDINT are all integer data types > Enumeration
> Structures
Each of the different number types covers a different range of values. The following range > References
limitations apply to the integer data types: > Subrange types
T e Lower limit u rlimlt Memo s ace 8.4.2.3Structure form of variable

BYTE 0 255 8 Bit
WORD 0 65535 16 Bit
DWORD 0 4294967295 32 Bit > Simple structure variable:
SINT ·128 127 8 Bit A simple structure variable means a single structure form, and can be given a determined
US INT 0 255 8 Bit numerical value.
INT -32768 32767 16 Bit Example:
UINT 0 65535 16 Bit AM01:REAL:=50.0; (*analog variableAM01*)
DINT ·2147483648 2147483647 32 Bit DM01 :BOOL:=TRUE; (*digital variable DM01*)
UDINT 0 4294967295 32 Bit > Function Block Instance:
Each instance possesses its own identifier (the instance name), and a data structure which
As a result when larger types are converted to smaller types, information may be lost. contains its inputs, outputs, and internal variables. Instances are declared locally or globally as
variables, whereas the name of the function block is indicated as the type of an identifier.
l> REAULREAL: A Function Block Instance declaration has the following syntax:
Example:
REAL and LREAL are so-called floating-point types. They are required to represent rational PID01:HSPID:= (PT:=10, Tl:=30, SV:=100, KD:=S,TD:=, DI:=O, OutT:=100, OutB:=O, OutR:=S,
numbers. 32 bits of memory space is reserved for REAL and 64 bits for LREAL. DL:=10, MU:=100, MD:=O, PK:=O, OutM:=O, AD:=1, TM:=FALSE, RM:=1, ME:=TRUE, AE:=TRUE,
CE:=TRUE, MTE:=FALSE, ATE:=FALSE, AV:=SO, PVMU:=100, PVMD:=O, MC:=1, cycle:=1);
Valid values for REAL: 1.175494351e-38F to 3.402823466e+38F
8.4.2.4Local variable and global variable
Valid values for LREAL: 2.2250738585072014e-308 to 1.7976931348623158e+308
Variables can be declared either locally in the declaration part of a POU or in a global variable list.
l> STRING:
A STRING type variable can contain any string of characters. The size entry in the declaration
> Global Variables:
determines how much memory space should be reserved for the variable. It refers to the number
Variables that are known throughout the project can be declared as global variables. In the Object
of characters in the string and can be placed in parentheses or square brackets. If no size
Organizer, you will find objects in the resources register card in the Global Variables folder. All
specification is given, the default size of 80 characters will be used.
variables defined in these objects are recognized throughout the project. These objects are called
Global Variable List. These lists are reserved by the system, to add user defined global variables,
The string length basically is not limited, but string functions only can process strings Of 1 - 255 create a new global list. Between the keywords VAR_GLOBAL and END_VAR, declare the
characters! variables. If you have declared a large number of global variables, and you would like to structure
83 84
-~~<OJ
Jl!4 11"Mn HOLLiAS MACS Software USer Manual D~~.:! HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
your global variables list better, then you can create further variables lists. DM01:BOOL;
> Local Variables: END_VAR
All variables to be used only in this POU are declared in the declaration part of the PQU, Bet...veen 8.4.2.7Using variable
the keywords VAR and END_VAR, all of the local variables of a POU are declared. These have no
external connection, in other words, they can not be written from the outside.
Using variable include reading variable value and variable assignment.
8.4.2.5Ciass
Using a simple structure variable, write the name directly.
> VAR: local variable Example:
It is only used in the POU that declared the variable. AM01:=AM02+AM03;
> VAR_INPUT: input variable Using the input or output item of a function block instance, has the following syntax: <Instance
name>. <item name>
Between the keywords VAR_INPUT and END_VAR, all variables are declared that serve as input
variables for a POU. That means that at the call position, the variables can be given along with a Example:
call.
PID01.SP:=100;
> VAR_OUTPUT: output variable
Between the keywords VAR_OUTPUT and END_VAR, all variables are declared tha(serve as 8.4.3Database points
output variables of a POU. That means value is carried back to the POU making the can. There
they can be answered and used further.
We have defined physical 1/0 tags in database, and these tags are declared in the global variables
list of field control station project automatically and can be used in programs directly.
> VAR_IN_OUT: inpuVoutput variable
During the process of controller algorithms configuration, we would often declare other variables
Between the keywords VAR_IN_OUT and END_VAR, all variables are declared that serve as input
which are used in the programs. If the variable is only used in a POU and it would not be displayed
and output variables for a POU. on the graph, define it as local variable; if the variable is used in several POUs and it would be
displayed on the graph, then we should define it as global variable.
)> VAR_GLOBAL: global variable
After the compilation in database configuration software, REAL or BOOL type global variables
Variables that are known throughout the project would be written into AM database or DM database automatically.
8.4.2.6Retain variables 8.5POU

Retain variables are identified by the keyword RETAIN. These variables maintain their value even
after an uncontrolled shutdown of the controller as well as after a normal switch off and :On of the 8.5.1 Outline introduction
controller (corresponding to command "Online" "Reset"). When the program is run again, the
stored values will be processed further.
POU, Program Organization Unit, funclion, function block, and programs are POUs which can be
Example: supplemented by actions. Each POU consists of a declaration part and a body. The body is written
in one of the IEC programming languages which include IL, ST, SFC, FBD, LD or CFC.
VAR_GLOBAL RETAIN
The process of controller algorithms configuration is accordance with the control scheme, create a
AM01 :REAL:=50.0; series of PO Us and write the corresponding operations.
END_VAR Right click "POUs" in the "POUs" register card of the object organizer, select "Add Object" in the
context menu, pop up the dialog box:
Example:
VARRETAIN
85 88
.-~--
Will.Ho.l
. . . . .d,IY$)'1
HOLLIAS MACS Software User Manual
PAR2:1NT;
PAR3:1NT;
END_VAR
Implementation part:
LD PAR1
MULPAR2
DIVPAR3
ST Fct
Figure 8.5-1 "New POU" dialog box
> Function Block
In the dialog box which appears, the first POU has already been given the defaUlt name
"PLC_PRG•, you can change it to another name. About "Name of the new POU" please reference A function block is a POU which provides one or more values during procedure.
to the information of "the name of a variable~.
fJ.s opposed to a function, a function block provides no return value.
8.5.2Types of POU
A function block declaration begins with the keyword FUNCTION_BLOCK.
> Function Reproductions or instances (copies) of a function can be created.
A function is a POU, which yields exactly one data element (which can consist of several elements, The call of a function block is done via a function block instance.
such as fields or structures) when it is processed, and whose call in textual languages can occur
as an operator in expressions. Example in IL of function block with two input variables and two output variables:
When declaring a function, don't forget that the function must receive a type. This means, after the One output (MULERG) is the product of the two inputs, and the other (VERGA) is a comparison for
function name, you must enter a colon followed by a type. equality.
A correct function declaration can look like this example: Declaration part:
FUNCTION Fct: INT FUNCTION_BLOCK FUB
In addition, a result must be assigned to the function. That means that function name is uSed as an VAR_INPUT
output variable.
PAR1:1NT;
A function declaration begins with the keyword FUNCTION.
PAR2:1NT;
Example of a function Fct in IL, in which three input variables are declared:
END_VAR
The first both input variables get multiplicated and then divided by the third one. The function
returns the result of this operation: VAR_OUTPUT
Declaration part MULERG:INT;
FUNCTION Fct: INT VERGL:BOOL;
VAR_INPUT END_VAR
PAR1:1NT; Implementation part in IL:
87 88
WI\,~~
f.4 llnlh$n HOLu.h.s MAGS Software Us~r Manual --~~$~ HOLUAS MAGS Software User Manual
LD PAR1 LD 17
MULPAR2 ST lint (*Comment*)
STMULERG GE5
JMPC next
LD PAR1 LD idword
EQ PAR2 EQ instruct.sdword
STVERGL STN text
»- Program Next:
A program is a POU which returns several values during operation. Programs are ref::ognized »-.. "Insert" menu
globally through the project. All values are retained from the last time the program was rurl until the
next. Click on "Insert" and open pull-down menu:
Example of a program:
Figure 8.5-3 "Insert" menu in IL POU
1) "Insert" "Operator":
Figure 8.5-2 "Program" example With this command all of the operators available in the current language are displayed in a dialog
box.
8.5.3Languages If one of the operators is selected and the list is closed with OK, then the highlighted operator will
be inserted at the present cursor position. (This is managed here just as it is in the Input
Assistant).
Program can be written in one of the programming languages which include IL, ST, SFC,;FBD, LD
orCFC. '
8.5.3.11L
IL is textual language.
An instruction list (IL) consists of a series of instructions. Each instruction begins in a neW line and
contains an operator and, depending on the type of operation, one or more operands separated by
commas.
In front of an instruction there can be identification mark (label) followed by a colon (:).
A comment must be the last element in a line. Empty lines can be inserted between instrUctions.
Example:
89 90
Figure 8.S..4 Insert operator from Help Manager window
3) "Insert" "Function":
2) "Insert" "Operand":
With this command all functions will be displayed in a dialog box. You can choose whether to have
With this command all variables in a dialog box are displayed. You can select whether you would a list displaying user-defined or standard functions.
like to display a list of the global, the local, or the system variables.
lf one of the functions is selected and the dialog box is closed with OK, then the highlighted
If one of the operands is chosen, and the dialog box is closed with OK, then the highlighted function will be inserted at the current cursor position. (The management will proceed, as in the
operand will be inserted at the present cursor position. (This is managed here just as it is in the input selection.)
Input Assistant).
cnvUd(FUN)
cnvUu!FUN)
crwt_wg (FUN)
linearize (FUN)
linearzero (FUN)
sm430_R {FUN)
Figure 8.5-6 Insert function from Help Manager window

91 92
·--,,--~·rc··
. '
~~-~-
'Ni,~-,1
Mu!'n~ 1!:~~1 HOLUAS MAC$ Software User Manu_a,l
4) "Insert" "Function Block": ISiJs
[MD[
With this command all function blocks are displayed in a dialog box. You can choose w,hether to
have a list displaying user-defined or standard function blocks.
If one of the function blocks is_selected and the dialog box is closed with OK, then the highlighted
function block will be inserted at the current cursor position. (This is· managed here iust:as it is in ~
I<=
the Input Assistant).
Jump to the label
Call program or functi<
Leave POU and returr
Evaluate deferred operation
It is also possible in IL to put parentheses after an operation. The value of the parenthesis is then
considered as an operand.
For example:
LD2
MUL2
ADD3
Erg
Here is the value of Erg 7. However, if one puts parentheses:
LD2
MUL(2
> Modifiers and operators in IL

ADD3
In the IL language the following operators and modifiers can be used.
ST Erg
The resulting value for Erg is 10, the operation MUL is only then evaluated if you come to")"; as
operand for MUL 5 is then calculated.
8.5.3.2LD
The Ladder Diagram is a graphics oriented programming language which approaches the
structure of an electric circuit.
The Ladder Diagram consists of a series of networks. A network is limited on the left and right
sides by a left and right vertical current line. In the middle is a circuit diagram made up of contacts,
coils, and connecting lines.
Example:
93 94
-~~ HOLLiAS M~cS ~oftware uslr Manual
··~~.il HOLUAS MAGS Software User Manual
> Cursor Positions in the LD Editors
IN1 IN2 SCHALT1 :t:QX3.0
r·······-··---·-
~
Ill The following locations can be cursor positions, in which the function block and program accessing
Ell1 STE~ can be handled as contacts. POUs with EN inputs and other POUs connected to them are treated
11
the same way as in the Function Block Diagram. Information about editing this network part can be
11 I found in the chapter on the FBD Editor.
SCHALT2 SCHALT3 SCHALT4
1) Every text field (possible cursor positions framed in black)
%1X2.7
I
%IX;.
I
%1
I
Figure 8.5-8 Example of a network in lD
~
2)
~
Every Contact or Function Block
> LO elements
1) Contact:
Each network in LD consists on the left side of a network of contacts (contacts are repreSented by
two parallel lines: II) which from left to right show the condition "On" or "Off'. ~~:0 %QX~
These conditions correspond to the Boolean values TRUE and 'FALSE. A Boolean variable
3) Every Coil
belongs to each contact. If this variable is TRUE, then the condition is passed oh by the
connecting line from left to right, otherwise the right connection receives the value "Out".
A contact can also be negated, recognizable by the slash in the contact symbol: 111. Then the value
I -oxo.o :m.~J.O I
of the line is transmitted if the variable is FALSE.
2) Coil
~ • H
I......
4) The Connecting Line between the Contacts and the Coils.

On the right side of a network in LD there can be any number ·of so·called coils Which are
I~-·~-· L.............
represented by parentheses: ( ). They can only be in parallel. A coil transmits the val'-'e of the
connections from left to right and copies it in an appropriate Boolean variable. At the entry line the
value ON (corresponds to the Boolean variable TRUE) or the value OFF (corresponding to FALSE)
can be present. ·
--·-· -·; (X1.0~I
Contacts and coils can also be negated. If a coil is negated (recognizable by the slash in the coil
symbol: (/)), then it copies the negated value in the appropriate Boolean variable. If a Contact is
> Move elements or names in the LD-Editor
negated, then it connects through only if the appropriate Boolean value is FALSE.
An element or just the name (variable name, address, comment) of an element can be moved to a
different position within a LD POU by "drag&drop".
a
Coils can also be defined as set or reset coils. One can recognize set coil by the "S" i.n the coil
symbol: (S)) It never writes over the value TRUE in the appropriate Boolean variable. That is, if the
variable was once set at TRUE, then it remains so. · In order to do this, select the desired element (contact, coil, function block) and drag it. keeping
the mouse key pressed • away from the current position. Thereupon all possible positions within all
networks of the POU, to which the element might be moved, will be indicated by grey-filled
One can recognize a reset coil by the "R" in the coil symbol: (R). It never writes over .the value
rectangles.
FALSE in the appropriate Boolean variable: If the variable has been once set on FALS,E, then it
remains so. ·
Move the element to one of these positions and let off the mouse key: the element will be
inserted at the new position.
3) Function blocks in the Ladder Diagram
Along with contacts and coils you can also enter function blocks and programs. In the netWork they
must have an input and an output with Boolean values and can be used at the same Places as
contacts, that is on the left side of the LD network.
95 96
'T
. . \.-<!10;1
J!Ai 11e~R~ HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
Use this command in the LD editor in order to insert a contact in front of the marked location in the
aaa
~~~
~
Ins!
.... aaa
I
bb~
I
lnst
j""ibfuiil :.
network. If the marked position is a coil or the connecting line between the contacts and the coils,
then the new contact will be connected serially to the previous contact connection. The contact is
.---_ij-ID-
r------L___f- desired constant.
~-·---- ___
3) "Insert" "Parallel Contact• Symbol: IIJ Shortcut: <Ctri>+<R>

If you however move the element to the name (variable name) of another element, the n~me field
will be shaded green. If you then let off the mouse key, the previous name will be replaced by the Use this command in the LD editor to insert a contact parallel to the marked position in the network.
"dragged" one. If additionally address and comment are displayed (options), the copyinQ also will If the marked position is a coil or the connection between the contacts and the coils, then the new
apply to those. contact will be connected in parallel to the entire previous contact connection. The contact is
desired constant.
.... bbb~~
ins! tlbtl 4) "Insert" "Function Block" Shortcut: <Ctri>+<R>
Use this command in order to insert an operator, a function block, a function or a program as a
POU. For this, the connection between the contacts and the coils, or a coil, must be marked. The
new POU at first has the designation AND. If you wish, you can change this designation to another
> "Insert" menu one. For this you can also use the Input Assistant.

5) "Insert" "Coil" Symbol: 1111 Shortcut: <Ctri>+<L>
You can use this command in the LD editor to insert a coil in parallel to the previous coils. If the
marked position is a connection between the contacts and the coils, then the new coil will be
inserted as the last. If the marked position is a coil, then the new coil will be inserted directly above
it. The coil is given the text"???" as a default setting. You can click on this text and change it to the
desired variable. For this you can also use the Input Assistant.
6) "Insert" "Box with EN in LD"
Use this command to insert a function block, an operator, a function or a program with EN input
into a LD network. If you want to use your LD network as a PLC for calling up other POUs, then
you must merge a POU with an EN input. The marked position must be the connection between
the contacts and the coils or a coil. The new POU is inserted in parallel to the coils and underneath
them; it contains initially the designation "AND". If you wish, you can change this designation to
another one. For this you can also use the Input Assistant.
> "Extras" menu

Figure 8.5-9 "Insert" menu in LD POU
1) "Insert" "Network (after)" or "Insert" "Network (beforer Shortcut: <Shift>+<T>
In order to insert a new network in the FBD or the LD editor, select the "Insert'" "Network (after)" or
the "Insert" "Network (before)" command, depending on whether you want to insert:the new
network before or after the present network. The present network can be changed by clicking the
key> and a mouse click you can select from the entire area of networks, from the prese.nt one to
the one clicked.
2) "Insert" "Contact" Symbol: liB Shortcut: <Ctri>+<O> Figure 8.5-10 "Extras" menu in LD POU
97 98
-~!jj HOLLiAS MAC.S Software Uskr Manual -~ti.;l HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
lfl <Ctri>+<N>
1) "Extras" "Negate" Symbol: Shortcut:
Use this command to negate a contact, a coil, a jump or return instrUction, or an input or( output of
EN POUs at the present cursor position. Between the parentheses of the coil or betlrveen the
Var1
Var2 LJ- Result
3) Every operator, function, or function block:

straight lines of the contact, a slash will appear((/) or l/1).
2) "Extras" "SeVResee Var1 ~-------Resull

Var2L..r-
If you execute this command on a coil, then you will receive a Set Coil. Such a Coil never
overwrites the value TRUE in the respective Boolean variable. This means that once you: have set 4) Outputs, if an assignment or a jump comes afterward:
the value of this variable to TRUE, it will always remain at TRUE. A Set Coil is designate:d with an
n
"S" in the coil symbol. If you execute this command once again, then you will be given a Reset coil.
Such a coil never overwrites the value FALSE in the respective Boolean variable. This m~ans that Var1 :-Resull
once you have set the value of this variable to FALSE, it will always remain at FALSE. A ~eset Coil Var2
is designated with an "R" in the coil symbol. If you execute this command repeatedly, th.:e coil will
alternate between set, reset and nonnal coil
5) The lined cross above an assignment, a jump, or a return instruction:
8.5.3.3FBD
The Function Block Diagram is a graphically oriented programming language. It works with a list of
Var1
Var2 ~
networks whereby each network contains a structure which represents either a logical or
6) Behind the outennost object on the right of every network ("last cursor position," the same
arithmetic expression, the call of a function block, a jump, or a return· instruction.
cursor position that was used to select a network):
Example:
~J
Var1 "
Var2 •
11!>1 uur-D
7) The lined cross directly in front of an assignment:
~
A
B Var1
Figure 8.5-11 Example of a network In LD Var2
It work with a list of networks, in which every network contairis a structure that !displays, > "Insert" menu
respectively, a logical or an arithmetical expression, the calling up of a function block, a function, a
program, a jump, or a return instruction. The most important commands are found in th~ context Click on "Insert" and open pull-down menu:
menu.
> Cursor Positions in the FBD
Every text is a possible cursor position. The selected text is on a blue background and can now be
changed. ,
You can also recognize the present cursor position by a dotted rectangle. The following is a list of
all possible cursor positions with an example:
1) Every text field (possible cursor positions framed in black):
2) Every input:
Figure 8.5-12
99 100
-~~
l!ll!.«'il ' ' '
M llaltvsn HOlliAS MAGS Software UsE!r Manual HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
1) "Insert" "Network (after}~ or "Insert" "Network (beforer Shortcut: <Shift>+<T> With this command you can define outputs as Set or Reset Outputs. A grid with Set Output is
displayed with [S], and a grid with Reset Output is displayed with [R].
In order to insert a new network in the FBD or the LD editor, select the "Insert'" "Network (after)" or
the "Insert" "Network (beforer command, depending on whether you want to insert: the new An Output Set is set to TRUE, if the grid-belonging to it returns TRUE. The output now maintains
network before or after the present network. The present network can be changed by clicking the this value, even if the grid jumps back to FALSE.
key> and a mouse click you can select from the entire area of networks, from the present one to An Output Reset is set to FALSE, if the grid belonging to it returns FALSE. The output maintains its
the one clicked. value, even if the grid jumps back to FALSE.
2) ulnsert" "Box" Symbol:-- Shortcut: <Ctrl>+ With multiple executions of the command, the output will alternate between set, reset, and normal
output.
With this command, operators, functions, function blocks and programs can be inserted. First of all,
it is always inserted an uAND" operator. This can be converted by Selection and Overwtite of the 3) "Extras" "Zoom" Shortcut: <Ait>+<Enter>
type text rAND") into every other operator, into every function, into every function block and every
program. You can select the desired POU by using Input Assistant {<F2>). With this command a selected POU is loaded into its editor. The command is available in the
context menu {<F2>} or in the 'Extras' menu, if the cursor is positioned on the name of a POU in a
text editor or if the POU box is selected in a graphic editor.
3) "Insert" "Input" Symbol: [II Shortcut: <Ctri>+
If you are dealing with a POU from a library, then the library manager is called up, and the
This command inserts an operator input With many operators, thei number of inputs r'nay vary. corresponding POU is displayed.
{For example, ADD can have 2 or more inputs.) In order to extend such an operator by ian input,
you need to select the input in front of which you wish to insert an .additional input; or You must 8.5.3.4SFC
select the operator itself, if a lowest input is to be inserted. The inserted input is allocateQ with the
text"???". This text must be clicked and changed into the desired constant or variable.
The Sequential Function Chart {SFC) is a graphically oriented language which makes it possible to
4) "Insert" "Assign" Symbol: II Shortcut <Ctrl>+<A> describe the chronological order of different actions within a program. For this the actions are
assigned to step elements and the sequence of processing is controlled by transition elements.
This command inserts an assignment. For an inserted assignment, a selection can be made Example:
accompanying the entered text"???", and the assignment can be replaced by the variable that is
to be assigned.
In order to insert an additional assignment to an existing assignment, use the "Insert", "Output"
command.
TRUE
> "Extras" menu
Click on "Extras" and open pullwdown menu:
1) "Extras" "Negate" Symbol: Ill Shortcut: <Ctri>+<N>

TRUE
With this command you can negate the inputs, outputs, jumps, or RETURN instructions. The
symbol for the negation is a small circle at a connection. I nit
Figure 8.5-14 Example of a network In SFC
2) "Extras" "SeUReset" Symbol: 1111 > SFC elements

101 102
a~~ HOLUAS MACS Software Us~r Manual -~~.;! HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
1) Step: > Select element
A POU written in a Sequential Function Chart consists of a series of steps which are cpnnected A marked block is a bunch of SFC elements that are enclosed in a dotted rectangle.
with each other through directed connections (transitions).
You can select an element (a step, a transition, or a jump) by pointing the mouse on this element
There are two types of steps. and pressing the left mouse button, or you can use the arrow keys. In order to mark a group of
several elements, press <Shift> for a block already marked, and select the element in the tower
The simplified type consists of an action and a flag which shows if the step is active. If thei action of left or right comer of the group. The resulting selection is the smallest cohesive group of elements
a step is implemented, then a small triangle appears in upper right comer of the step. that includes both of these elements.
An IEC step consists of a flag and one or more assigned actions or boolean variables. The Please regard, that a step can only be deleted together with the preceding or the succeeding
associated actions appear to the right of the step. transition!
2} Action: > "Insert" menu
An action can contain a series of instruction in IL or in ST, a lot of networks in FBD or;in LD, or Click on "Insert" and open pull-down menu:
again in SFC.
With the simplified steps an action is always connected to a step. In order to edit an action, click
twice with the mouse on the step to which the action belongs. Or select the step and Select the
menu command "Extras" "Zoom Actionffransition~. In addition, one input or output actiori per step
is possible.
Actions of IEC steps hang in the Object Organizer directly under their SFC-POU and are loaded
with a double click or by pressing <Enter> in their editor. New actions can be created with "Project"
"Add Action". You can assign nine actions to one lEC step at max.
3) Transition I Transition condition
Between the steps there are so-called transitions.
A transition condition must have the value TRUE or FALSE. Thus it can consist of either a boolean
variable, a boolean address or a boolean constant. It can also contain a series of inStructions Figure 8.5-15 "Insert" menu In SFC POU
having a boolean result, either in ST syntax (e.g. (i<= 100) AND b) or in any language deSired (see
"Extras" "Zoom Action/Transition"). But a transition may not contain programs, function blocks or
assignments! 1) "Insert" "Step Transition (before)" Symbol: Shortcut: fill <Ctri>+<T>
4) Entry or exit action This command inserts a step in the SFC editor followed by a transition in front of the marked block.
Additional to a step action you can add an entry action and an exit action to a step. An entry action
is executed only once, right after the step has become active. An exit action is executed only once 2) "Insert" "Step Transition (afterr Symbol: Ill Shortcut: <Ctri>+<E>
before the step is deactivated. ·
This command inserts a step in the SFC editor followed by a transition after the first transition in
A step with entry action is indicated by an "E" in the lower left comer, the exit action by :an "X" in the marked block
the tower right corner.
The entry and exit action can be implemented in any language. In order to edit an entiy or exit
3) "Insert" "Alternative Branch (right)" Symbol: Ill[ Shortcut: <Ctri>+<A>
action, double click in the corresponding comer in the step with the mouse.
This command inserts an alternative branch in the SFC editor as a right branch of the marked
Example of a step with entry and exit action made up of one transition.
~ 4) "Insert" "Alternative Branch (leftY Symbol: llJ

~ This command inserts an alternative branch in the SFC editor as the left branch of the marked
103 104
.,,.-
.~...·~""
Jl!4 HabSJ;I
HOLUAS MACS Software user Manual
5) "Insert" "Parallel Branch (rightY Symbol: II[ Shortcut <Ctrl>+<L>

This command inserts a parallel branch in the SFC editor as the right branch of the marked block.
For this the marked block must both begin and end with a step. The. new branch is then)made up
of one step. To allow jumps to the parallel branches that have been created, theseimust be
provided with a jump label. ·
6) "Insert" "Parallel Branch (leftY Symbol: Ill

This command inserts a parallel branch in the SFC editor as the left branch of the mark~d block.
For this the marked block must both begin and end with a step. The new branch is then 'made up Figure 8.5-16 "Extras~ menu in SFC POU
of one step. To allow jumps to the parallel branches that have been created, these:must be
provided with a jump label. 1) "Extras" "Paste Parallel Branch (right)"
This command pastes the contents of the clipboard as a right parallel branch of the marked block.
7) "Insert" "Jump" Symbol: 1111 Shortcut: <Ctrl>+ For this the marked block must both begin and end with a step. The contents of the clipboard must,
likewise, be an SFC block that both begins and ends with a step.
This command inserts a jump in the SFC editor at the end of the branch, to which the marked
block belongs. For this the branch must be an alternative branch. 2) "Extras" "Add label to parallel branch"
The inserted text string 'Step' in the inserted jump can then be selected and replaced bY the step In order to provide a newly inserted parallel branch with a jump label, the transition occurring
name or the jump label of a parallel branch to be jumped to. before the parallel branching must be marked and the command 'Add label to parallel branch' must
be executed. At that point, the parallel branch will be given a standard name consisting of
8) "Insert" "Transition-Jump" Symbol: l!IIJI ,Parallel" and an appended serial number, which can be edited according to the rules for identifier
names. In the following example, "Parallel" was replaced by "Par_1_2" and the jump to the
transition "End" was steered to this jump label.
This command inserts a transition in the SFC editor, followed by a jump at the end of the: selected
branch. For this the branch must be a parallel branch.
The inserted text string 'Step' in the inserted jump can then be seleCted and replaced bY the step
name or the jump label of a parallel branch to be jumped to
9) "Insert" "Add Entry-Action" Start

Par_ 1_2
With this command you can add an entry action to a step. An entry-action is only executed once, lt#2s Parallel2
right after the step has become active. The entry-action can be imple'mented in a language of your
choice.
A step with an entry-action is designated by an "E" in the bottom left corner.

En de
10) "Insert" "Add Exit-Action"
With this command you can add an exit-action to a step. An exit-action is only executed once, Par_1_2
before the step is deactivated. The exit-action can be implemented in a language of yourichoice.
3) "Extras" "Paste after"
A step with an exit-action is designated by an "X" in the lower right comer.
This command pastes the SFC block on the clipboard after the first step or the first transition of the
»- "Extras" menu marked block. (Normal copying pastes it in front of the marked block.) This will now be executed, if
the resulting SFC structure is correct, according to the language norms.
4) "Extras" "Zoom Action/Transition" Shortcut: <Ait>+<Enter>
The action of the first step of the marked block or the transition body of the first transition of the
105 106
/
Wfhl!'il
JJI. lloW!in
. .. • . . l
HOLLiAS MAC$ Software User Manual ar.~.~ HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
market block is loaded into the editor in the respective language, in which it has been writJ:en. If the Below you find a table of the ST operators in the order of their binding strength:
action or the transition body is empty, then the language must be selected, in which it ras been
written. , Operation Symbol Binding strength
Put in rentheses ex ression Strongest bindin
Regard that the transition condition which is written within the editar·window will take pr$cedence (pc Function~~ame
Function call
over a condition which might be written directly at the transition mark: Example: If here i>~OO, then arameter list
the transition condition will be FALSE, although TRUE has been entered at the mark! Exponentiation EXPT
Negate -
Buildin of com lements
Multi 1 .
NOT
I
Divide
Modulo MOD
Add +
Subtract -
Com are < > <-,>-
E ual to -
<>
Not ual to
5) "Extras" "Clear Actionrrransition" Boolean AND AND
BooleanXOR XOR
With this command you can delete the actions of the first step of the marked block or of the - -- -- ... ..
transitions body of the first transition.
There are the following instructions in ST, arranged in a table together with example:
If, during a step, you implement either only the action, the entry~action, or the exit~action) then the
same will be deleted by the command. OtheiWise a dialog box appears, and you can select which Instruction type Exa'TIR!e
action or actions are to be deleted. Assignment A:-B· CV :- CV + 1; C:-SIN &
Calling a function block and CMD_TMR(IN := %1X5, PT := 300);
If the cursor is located in the action of an IEC step, then only this association will be del~ted. If an use of the FB output A:=CMD TMR.Q
IEC step with an associated action is selected, then this association will be deleted. Duri~g an IEC RETURN RETURN
step with several actions, a selection dialog box will appear. O:-B"'B;
IF D<O.O THEN
C:=A;
8.5.3.5ST IF
ELSIF D=O.O THEN
C:=B;
ELSE
The Structured Text consists of a series of instructions which, as determined in high level C:=D;
languages, ("IF ... THEN ... ELSE") or in loops {WHILE ... DO) can be executed. END IF;
CASE INT1 OF
Example: 1: BOOL 1 :=TRUE;
2: BOOL2 :=TRUE;
CASE ELSE
IF value< 7 THEN
BOOL 1 := FALSE;
BOOL2 := FALSE;
WHILE value< 8 DO END CASE·
J:-101;
Value:=value + 1; FOR 1:=1 TO 100 BY 2 DO
IF ARR[I] = 70 THEN
END_WHILE; FOR J:=l;
EXIT;
END_IF;
END_IF;
END FOR
J:-1;
> Valuation of expressions WHILE J<= 100ANDARR[JJ <> 70 DO
WHILE J:=J+2;
The evaluation of expression takes place by means of processinQ the operators accbrding to END WHILE·
certain binding rules. The operator with the strongest binding is processed first, then the; operator J:-~1;
with the next strongest binding, etc., until all operators have been processed. REPEAT
REPEAT J:=J+2;
Operators with equal binding strength are processed from left to right. UNTILJ= 101 ORARR[J] = 70
END REPEAT:
EXIT EXIT;
107 108
Wli,~~
,.. u..nvs.,. HOLLiAS MAGS Software User Manual -~~$~ HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
I Empty instruction I I
L@fl2l- ~
8.5.3.6CFC
The continuous function chart bases on the Function Block Diagram language. However it does
not operate with networks, but rather with freely placeable elements. This allows feedback, for ~ ~a cotnfiWiJ?I
example.
~
Example:
. •-14-1
E FALSE
3) Inputs for the elements box, input, .output, jump and return
Figure 8.5-17 Example of a network in CFC

FJvarOut I ~ ~
No snap grid is used for the continuous function chart editor so the elements can be placed
anywhere. Elements of the sequential processing list include boxes, input, output, jump, label,
return and comments. The inputs and outputs of these elements cari be connected by dragging a
connection with the mouse. The connecting line will be drawn automatically. The shortest possible 4) Outputs for the elements box and input
connection line is drawn taking into account existing connections. The connecting lines are
automatically adjusted when the elements are moved. If the case arises where a connecting line
cannot be drawn simply because of lack of space, a red fine will be shown between the input and
the associated output instead. This line will be converted into a connecting line just as soon as I Varin H
space is available.
One advantage of the continuous function chart as opposed to the usual function block diagram > Selecting elements in CFC
editor FBD is the fact that feedback paths can be inserted directly.
One clicks on the trunk of the element to select it.
> Cursor positions in the CFC
To mark more elements one presses the <Shift> key and clicks in the elements required, one after
Each text is a possible cursor position. The selected text is shaded in blue and can be modified. the other, or one drags the mouse with the left hand mouse key depressed over the elements to be
marked.
In all other cases the current cursor position is shown by a rectangle made up of points. The
following is a list of all possible cursor positions with examples: The command 'Extras' 'Select all' marks all elements at once.
1) Trunks of the elements box, input, output, jump, label, return and comments. > Moving elements in CFC
One or more selected elements can be moved with the arrow keys as one is pressing on the
~ -ivarOut!l <Shift> key. Another possibility is to move elements using a depressed left mouse key. These
elements are placed by releasing the left mouse key in as far as they do not cover other elements
or exceed the foreseen size of the editor. The marked element jumps back to its initial position in
such cases and a warning tone sounds.
~ Icount :rJ ~ !This is a comment II
> Connections
2) Text fields for the elements box, input, output, jump, label, retum and comments as well as
text fields for connection marker 1) Creating connections
An input of an element can be precisely connected to the output of another element. An output of
an element can be connected to the inputs of a number of other elements.
There are a number of possibilities to connect the input of an element E2 with the output of an
element E1.
109 110
l:t~~ HOLUAS MAC8-Sottware U~er Manual
'
liT:] liT]
c:::§}- -rru
Place the mouse on the output of element E1, click with the left mouse key, hold the left n;JOUse key
down and drag the mouse cursor onto the input of element E2 and let the left mouse _key go. A
connection is made from the output of element E1 to the mouse cursor during this; dragging
operation with the mouse. ·
Place the mouse on the input of element E2, click with the left mouse key, hold the left niouse key
down and drag the mouse cursor onto the output of element E1 and let the left mouse key go.
Move one of the elements E1 or E2 and place it in such a way by letting go of the left niouse key
that the output of element E2 and the input of element E1 touch.
Figure 8.5-18 "Insert" menu in CFC POU
Where element E2 is a block with a free input, a connection can also be made by dragging the
mouse from an output from E1 to the trunk of E2. A connection with the free input at the highest
position on E2 will be created when the mouse key is released. In the case where bloc~ E2 does 1) "Insert" "Box" Symbol: 1111 Shortcut <Ctri>+
not have a free input but is an operator which can have an input added to it, a new input will be
automatically generated. This command can be used to paste in operators, functions, function blocks and programs First of
all, it is always inserted an "AND" operator. This can be converted by Selection and Overwrite of
The output and input of a block can be connected together (feedback path) by using thiS method. the text into every other operator, into every function, into every function block and every program.
To establish a connection between two pins, click with the left mouse button on one pin; hold the The input assistance serves to select the desired block from the list of supported blocks. If the new
button down and thus drag the connection to the desired pin, where you then release the: button. If block has another minimum number of inputs, these will be attached. If the new block has a
during the dragging of the connection extends outside working area of the editor, scrolling occurs smaller highest number of inputs, the last inputs will be deleted.
automatically. For simple data types, type testing is carried out during the connection. If the types
of the two pins are not compatible, the cursor changes to .Forbidden". For complex data:types, no
testing takes place. 2) "Insert" «Input" Symbol:-~~ Shortcut: <Ctrl> + <E>
2) Changing connections This command is used to insert an input. The text offered "???" can be selected and replaced by a
variable or constant. The input assistance can also be used here.
A connection between the output of an element E1 and the input of an element E2 can·easily be
changed into a connection between the output of element E1 and the input of element E3. The
mouse is clicked on the input of E2, the left mouse key is kept depressed, and the mouse cursor is
3) "Insert" "Outpur Symbol: IJ Shortcut <Ctri>+<A>
moved to the input of E3 and then released. This command is used to insert an output. The text offered "???" can be selected and replaced by
a variable. The input assistance can also be used here. The value which is associated with the
3) Deleting connections input of the output is allocated to this variable.
There are a number of possibilities for removing the connection between the output of ar1 element
E1 and the input of an element E2. 4) "Insert" "Jump" Symbol: Ill shortcut <Ctri>+<J>
Select the output of element E1 and press the <Delete> key or execute the command 'Edit' This command is used to insert a jump. The text offered "???" can be selected and replaced by the
'Delete'. Several connections will be removed at the same if the output of E1 is connected to more jump label to which the program should jump.
than one of inputs.
The jump label is inserted using the command 'Insert 'Label'.
Select the input of element E2 and press the <Delete> key or execute the command 'Edit' 'Delete'.
Select the input of E2 with the mouse, hold the left mouse key depressed and drag the connection
5) "Insert" "Label" Symbol: Ill Sho~cut <Ctri>+<L>
from the input to E2 away. The connection is removed when the left mouse key is released in a
free area of the screen. This command is used to insert a label. The text offered"???" can be selected and replaced by the
jump label. In Online mode a RETURN label for marking the end of POU is automatically inserted.
> "Insert" menu
The jump is inserted using the command 'Insert 'Jump'.
6) "Insert" "Retum" Symbol: II Shortcut <Ctrl> + <R>
111 112
/7'--
IIQ\,~'.! i
--~~:
' . '
Jl!4 -''"IIIISJ:I HOLLiAS MAGS Software uSer Manual HOLLiAS MAGS Software User Manual
This command is used to insert a RETURN command. Note that in Online mode a jump :rabel with sequenced according to a topological sequencing system. This will be clarified by an example.
the name RETURN is automatically inserted in the first column and after the last element in the
editor; in stepping, it is automatically jumped to before execution leaves the POU.
7) "lnserf' "Commenr Symbol: Jl: Shortcut <Ctrl> + <K> d

This command is used to insert a comment.
You obtain a new line within the comment with <Ctrl> + <EnteP.
> "Extras" menu

=Et
~
~ ~
Click on "Extras~ and open pull·down menu: ~ ~

The elements with numbers 1, 2 and 3 are selected. If the command 'Order topologically' is
selected the elements are first taken out of the sequential processing list. Var3, the jump and the
AND-operator are then inserted again one after the other. Var3 is placed before the label and
receives the number 2. The jump is then ordered and receives the number 4 at first but this then
becomes 5 after the AND is inserted. The new order of execution which arises is:
d
a ~
~
• ..----oon
~
§ ~
Figure 8.5-19 "Extras" "Order"
When a newly generated block is introduced it will be placed by default in front of its topological
1) "Extras" "Order" "Show Order" successor in the sequential processing list.
. . .
This command switches the display of the order of execution on and off. The default setting is to 3) "Extras~ ~order~ "Order everything according to data flow"
show it (recognized by a tick ( ) in front of the menu point). '
This command affects all elements. The order of execution is determined by the data flow of the
The relevant order of execution number appears in the upper right hand corner for the !elements elements and not by their position.
block, outpu~ jump, return and label. ·
The diagram below shows elements which have been ordered topographically:
2) "Extras" "Order" "Order topologically"
Sequence before the ordering according to data flow
Elements are ordered in a topological sequence when the execution takes place from left to right
and from above to below, that is the number increases from left to right and from above' to below
for topologically arranged elements. The connections are not relevant, only the locatiPn of the
elements is important. ·
All selected elements are topologically arranged when the command 'Extras' 'Order' 'Order
topologically' is executed. All elements in the selection are taken out of the sequential pi'ocessing
list by this process. The elements are then entered into the remaining sequential processing list
individually from bottom right through to upper left. Each marked element is entere~ into the
sequential processing list before its topological successor, i.e. it is inserted before the ele!nent that
in a topological sequencing would be executed after it, when all elements in the ecjitor were
113 114
·,
lloll {. I! -.l
Nu•lh"Sn a-:~3~ HOLLiAS MAGS Software User Manual
the values at its inputs (1 and 2) are known. Block SUB can only then be processed since the
result from ADD must be known first, etc.
Feedback paths are inserted last.
The advantage of the data flow sequencing is that an output box which is connected to the output
of a block comes immediately after it in the data flow sequencing system which by topological
ADD ordering would not always be the case. The topological ordering can deliver another result in some
cases than ordering by data flow, a point which one can recognize from the above example.
Var3'
8.6 Start the POU

MUL ADD
Any POU should be started and then begin calculating. There are two ways to start the POU, task
~ I configuration and the main program calls the sub programs.
3,
8.6.1 Task configuration
You can control the processing of your project using the task management.
~f A Task is a time unit in the processing of an IEC program. It is defined by a name, a priority and by
a type determining which condition will trigger the start of the task. This condition can be defined
The following arrangement exists after selecting the command: by a time (cyclic, freewheeling) or by an internal or external event which will trigger the task, e.g.
the rising edge of a global project variable or an interrupt event of the controller.
Sequence after the ordering according to data flow
Task configuration window. In the left part of the window the tasks are represented in a
configuration tree. There has a task named "MACSTask~, main program "MACS_PRG" will be
started by the task. Select the task, in the right part of the window a task attributes dialog will be
displayed which belongs to the currently marked entry in the configuration tree. We may use the
default settings of the system:
I ~r3
ADD
'---~Var2'
When this command is selected the first thing to happen is that the elements are!. ordered
topographically. A new sequential processing list is then created. Based on the known Values of
the inputs, the computer calculates which of the as yet not numbered elements can be p,rocessed
next. In the above "network" the block AND, for example, could be processed immediately since
115 116
lilil bl{'!\1
JJI .llohSIIi HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
specify the main program "MACS_PRG~--be started by the task, and the other programs be started
by the main program.
8.6.2Main program
The MACS_PRG is a special predefined POU. Each project must contain this special program. It
is used to call all the programs to be started.
El-@;JIO
1
[ -"" P E H [PRG[
11"'--
i ~-·[jjJ P_H_CT [PRGI
i i-·I!;B P_H_E [PRG)
! l-[jjJ P_H_Pl (PRG)
: Hm p H Rro (PRG]
I '-·[jjJ P=H=TC [PRG)
$-·Wfil SysDev
lil-~
L. l!l
Figure 8.6·2 MACS_PRG
Figure 8.6-1 Task configuration 8.7 Library manager

1) Name: a name for the task, with this name the task is represented in the configur8tion tree;
the name can be edited there after a mouse click on the entry or after pressing thei<Space>
key when the entry is selected.
8. 7.1 Outline introduction
2) Priority: a number between 0 and 31; 0 is the highest priority, 31 is the lowers.
3) Type
Which types of calculation to be done or which controls to be realized in the project, we can
achieve them by ways of using the corresponding functions or the function blocks that the software
> Cycle: the task will be processed cyclic according to the time definition given in; the field provided us. The functions and the function blocks had been classified according to its function,
«interval" (see below) stored in the special libraries. If you add the library in the library manager of the project, all the
> Freewheeling: the task will be processed as soon as the program is started and at the end of functions and function blocks in the library can be used in any program. We also can see the
one run will be automatically restarted in a continuous loop. There is no cycle time defined. variable definition of the functions and function blocks in the library manger.
> Triggered by event: the task will be started as soon as the variable, which is defiried in the
event field, occurs. It depends on the target, which events will be supported and offei"ed in the
The library manager shows all librari~s that are connected with the current project.
selection list.
> Triggered by external event
8.7.20pen library manager
4) Properties:
> Interval (for type "cyclic•): the period of time, after the task should be restarted. If yqu enter a The library manager is opened with the "Window" "Library Manager" command. You also can
number, then you can choose the desired unit in the selection box behind the ¢dit field: double click "Library Manager" in the "Resources• register card of the object organizer:
milliseconds (ms) or microseconds (ps). Enter the value in TIME format, e.g. T#250tns.
Tip: for a project, we may configure several tasks. However, we recommend only define :one task,
117 118
HSsoe
HSSysUb
Iecsfc
Net\larUdpjib
RS
Figure 8.7-2Additional Library
SET:BOOL ~ Ql:BOOLI
IRESET1 :BOOL "J." Select the name and click "Open", the library is now listed in the library manager and you can use
objects in the library. If the library is already in the manager, then it will pop up the dialog box:
Figure 8.7-1 Library manager
The window of the library manager is divided into three or four areas .
libraries attached to the project are listed in the upper left area. In the area below that, depending
on which register card has been selected, there is a listing of the POUs, Data types, Visualizations
or Global variables of the library selected in the upper area. Folders are opened · ··
double clicking the line or pressing <Enter>. There is a plus sign in front of closed . With the ~Edir "Delete" command or right click the upper left area of the library and choose
minus sign in front of opened folders. If a POU is selected by clicking the mouse or seleCting with "Delete" command you can remove a library from a project and from the library manager.
the arrow keys then the declaration of the POU will appear in the upper right area of tre library
manager, and in the lower right is the graphic display in the form of a black box with i~puts and
outputs. 8.8 Examples of writing POUs
8.7.3"Additional Library" and "Remove Library"
8.8.1 Four arithmetic operation example (CFC)
Click on "Additional Library" in the "Insert~ pull-down menu or right click the upper left area of the
library manager and choose "Additional Library" command: 8.8.1.1 Description
The operations are: A01=AM01><AM02, AM03=AM04+A01. AM01, AM02, AM03 and AM04 are
AM tags, declare AM tags in global variables list and declare A01 as local variable.
field enter "CFC".
119 120
defined Programs
i!J···WlliO
$. ·Uiil SysDev
!±J..·I!ID Sys!nfo
!·····~ MACS_PRG IPRGJ
l..... l!il POU01[PRG)
"POU01 » will be appended.
8.8.1.3Write the body part with CFC language
1) Insert multiplication operator.
Right click on POU01 body part, select "Box" command in context menu, an "AND" operator is
Open work space of MACS_PRG, move the cursor over a new line of the body of POU, press inserted where you click the mouse left button:
"F2" key, in Help Manager window select user defined program "POU01", then click "0~:
d
Figure 8.8-4 insert "BOX"
Select "AND", overwrite with text "MUL" or press "F2" key, in Help Manager window select FBD
Operator "MUL", click "OK":
121 122
According to the requirement enter the fields, click "OK" when finished.
Tip: The dialog box for a variable declaration you also get by the command "Edit" "Declare
2) Insert "Input" and "Output" variable". If the cursor is resting on a variable name, the auto declare window can be opened with
<Shift> <F2> with the current variable-related setting displayed.
Right click on POU01 body part, select "Input" command in context menu, move it on to a
appropriate location, select "Outpur command in context menu, move it on to a appropriate Use the same method to declare AM02 in global variables list.
location. ·
Select output and enter "A01 ", enter the fields as follows:
-cc,
i]_;'
The text offered "???" can be selected and replaced by the variable or the constant. TYpe in the
first input variable "AM01 ", click outside, a dialog box will appear:
3) Insert addition operator.
Similar with (1 ), choose "ADD" operator
123 124
~----
tff{.lj.;J
J4Noi:I'ISIIS HOlliAS MAGS Software USer Manual
4) Insert "lnpur and "Outpur
Similar with (2), declare AM03, AM04 in global variables list.
--~·;:~;;;;o-. ~ ~i;,q;;j,;Lit:O;;, ::~"'-''-'""'- •..,,..n;;,
Figure 8.8-12 POU02
8.8.2.3Write the body with LD Language
1) li1sert "Contact"
AM03 ~r, Right click on POU02 body part, select "Contact" command in context menu, the contact is preset
with the text~???":
Figure 8.8-11 Completion of POU01
8.8.2Timer delay operation example (LD)
8.8.2.1 Description
The operations are: when value of BOOL type variable K01 changes from FALSE to TRUE after 5
seconds, value of K02 will change from FALSE to TRUE and maintain 3 seconds, afterithat, K02
reset to FALSE. .,.,~~'~j;)i;[D;: :<;:!lF:' ,., •. ;,.·::;•,;~-;<;i,;J:li:;·. ,,;i.i; '"!''"''~~~' ~~- ;;;~~\,!-",'--

Click on"???" and change it to the variable K01, enter the fields in auto declaration dialog box:
Press right mouse button in the "POUs" register card object Organizer, click "Add Object"
command in context menu. POU name field enter "POU02", type field enter ~Program", )anguage
field enter "CFC". POU02 is created:
125 126
~«'II ... \,1/;!
HoMIIS .14 _Ro,lvbt HOlliAS MACS Software User Manual
Click on "???" on top of the function block and change it to the function block instance name
TON01, enter the fields in auto declaration dialog box:
2) Insert "Function Block"
Right click on the network, select "Function Block" command in context menu, help ma:nager will
then be opened, in the left column choose "Standard Function Blocks", select "TON"
"Standard. lib" in the right column, confirm the choice with "OK".
Click on"???" on lower left input ofTON01 and change it to a time constant "T#5S":
Bistable Function Blocks
Similar with above, choose "TP" block and declare as local variable, enter input with "T#3S":
127 128
.-
----- K02
L.. •. . - ] (
-,;,,;;;;©diffii)i±' ;ii!W<'·--
Figure 8.8-21 Completion of adding function block
3) Insert "Coil"
8.9 Build
Right click on the output part, select "Coil" command in context menu, the coil is given text The project is compiled using "Project" "Build". The compilation process is basically incremental,
"???" as a default setting: that is only changed POUs are recompiled. During compilation a message window is opened
which shows the progress of the compilation process, any errors and warnings which may occur
during compilation as well as information on the used POU indices and memory space (number
and percentage). Errors and warnings are marked with numbers. Using F1 you get more
information about the currently selected error.
With "Project" "Rebuild all", unlike the incremental compilation, the project is completely
recompiled. A non-incremental compilation can also be obtained if the command "Project" "Clear
all" is first executed.
8.10 Download the controller

K01I TON01
~TONi TP i c---·-···,
1#58~. ~ T#3S~~. ~
~
TP01
1.•• _ •• ····-·J
???
(
Once the project has been set up and tested, it can be loaded down to the hardware and tested as
well. Download the controller is to load the files from the engineer station into the main controller
unit. According to the modified portions of the project, it is divided into "online change" and "load
all".
Click on "???" and change it to K02, declare it in global variable list:
All POUs that will be loaded into the controller on the next download are marked with a blue arrow
in the Object Organizer after compilation.
8.1 0.2 Communication parameters
Communication parameters for the connection between the engineer station and the main
controller unit should be configured before download the controller.
Click "Online" "Communication .Parameters•, you are offered a special dialog for setting
communication parameters when the communication between the local PC and the run-time
129 130
kill,«~
J!Aiu~Rvl!i"" HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
system is running over a gateway server in your system:
Each controller project may set four communication channels. Their addresses are 128.0.0.n,
129.0.0.n, and 126.0.0. (126+n), 129.0.0. (12B+n).
Press "New ... " button, the dialog comes up:
8.10.3 Login
Click on "Login" in the "Online" pull~down menu, this command combines the programming system
with the controller (or starts the simulation program) and changes into the online mode.
If the current project has not been compiled since opening or since the last modification, then it is
compiled now. If errors occur during compilation, then it does not change into online mode.
The download-information is saved automatically at each download and, dependent on the target
system, potentially also at each offline creation of a boot project to a file, which is named <Project
name> <target identifier> .ri and which is put to the project directory. This file gets reloaded each
time the project is reopened and at login it is used to check the code of which POUs has been
changed. *.ri file is used during online change to compare the current program with the one most
recently loaded onto the controller, according to the changes, system will open the "load all" dialog
or the "online change" dialog.
Figure 8.10-2 New channel dialog
> Load all:
> aName": you can edit the channel name at this point. For example, enter "128.10"
);> "Device": the device drivers available on the gateway computer are listed in the table under
Device. Keep default "Tcp/IP".
Close the dialog with OK, select new channels, on initial setup, the standard "localhost" ·is offered
as the computer name (address) in the right part of the dialog, double click on it, replace
"localhost" with actuaiiP address. (e.g. 128.0.0.10)
Figure 8.10-4 Load all
Click "Yes" will execute "download all", it will cause the main control unit reset and re-initialization
of the variables. If any one of the following happened, the dialog box will be opened:
1) The project has not ever been downloaded to the controller before
131 132
-~~
Jl!4i u~!hs~
. . :
HOLUAS MACS Software USer Manual
2) Execute "Projecf "Clean an•, all the information from the last download and frori1 the last
compilation is deleted.
3) After modifications in "PLC_Configuration".
4) After modifications in "Task configuration".
5) After modifications in "Target Settings".
6) The program in the main control unit is lost.
> Online change:
Figure 8.10-5 Online change
By answering "Yes" you confirm that, on log-in, the modification portions of the project :are to be
- -
loaded onto the controller, online change does not cause a re-initialization of the Variables.
Changes may include: ·
Figure 8.11-1 Online mode window
1) Modifications of PO Us
2) Modifications of variable declarations. 1) Test "POU01"
8.11 Test Double click on AM01 in program or in global variables list, pop up the dialog for writing of
variables, enter 30 in "New Value" field:
Once all errors have been removed, activate the simulation, log into the simulation contfoller and
"load" your project in the "controller". Now you are in online mode. The online commands become
available only after logging in.
Click "Online" "Login", this command combines the programming system with the FCS!(or starts
the simulation program) and changes into the online mode. Click "Online" "Logout", the cOnnection
to the controller is broken, or the simulation mode program is ended and is shifted to the offline
mode. ·
Figure 8.11-2 WriteAM01
Simulation mode
Change values of AM02, AM04 to 20, 50:
If simulation mode is chosen, then a check(-./) will appear in front of the menu item.
Tip: During the simulation the created program is not processed in the actual controller, but rather
in the calculator on which the software is running. All online functions are available. TMat allows
you to test the logical correctness of your program without FCS hardware.
In 4.8 "Examples of writing POU" we talk about how to write algorithms in POUs, now we begin to
test these two POUs in simulation mode. After login and running, open the workspades of the
POUs and the corresponding global variables lists:
133 134
~~ ,~--
AM01=10 30
AM02-1 0 20
AM04=0 50
A01=100
Click "Online" "Write Values", realize the timer function.
Click "Online" "Write Values", get the new result Click "Online" "Logouf to exit online.
Tip: open database configuration software and compile. After that, AM01, AM02, AM03 and AM04
are added into AM database, K01, K02 are added into OM database.
AM01=30
AM02=20
AM04=50
A01=600
2) Test "POU02"
Double click on K01 in program or in global variables list:
Figure 8.11·7 OM database
13S 136
_.---;-:-
! . . i
kll \,.
M If'<!
u..lly$n HOLliAS MACS Software U~er Manual
9 Graph configuration
Graph configuration is used to generate graph page of application system. Through gr~ph page,
operator can get clear view of field operation status at a glance, so as to monitor and control field
operation conveniently.
Industrial control system flow procedure graph includes static graph and dynamic gra'ph. Static
graph represents static information of flow procedure screen, and they do not rave any
relationship with database. Dynamic graph is graph unit that change in accordance with change of
real time value of database point, change contents can be color, size, shape and etc. ·
Graph configuration software provides user with multiple types of editing tools, including graph
generation, filling, compose, discompose, rotate, stretch, cut, copy, Paste and etc, it is Possible to
change and process graphs flexibly.
Graph configuration software provides multiple types of dynamic features, including color change
features, text, blink, show/hide, move horizontally, filling, scale, rotate, curve, X~Y graplj and etc;
the graph configuration software also provides multiple types of trigQering features, su~ as push
window, switch base graph, add/decrease value, online change database point value an? etc.
Each graph page corresponds to one file.
Note: In this chapter, unless otherwise indicted, graph size is in unit of 0.1 pixels.
9.2 Access graph configuration
Select "Start" - "All Programs" ~ "MACS" ~ "MACS_ENG" - "Graph", and click, thein project
information window pops up:
Select the project to be opened, click "Select" button, and then graph configuration interface can
be accessed.
137 138
_...--:"·
-~~ HOLLIAS MACS Software User Manual

9.3.1 Page file
Select"File", open pull-down menu:
1. Menu bar: Lists names of pull-down menus, user can select command in
command is of grey color, and it indicates that the menu command is invalid currently.
2. System toolbar: icon buttons corresponding to some menu command. It can be d
Drawing toolbar: provides basic graph to be used for drawing. It can be dragged.
3.
4. Filling toolbar: provides various types of graph border line and various modes of 1) New: A new page file can be created by using this command. Click the command, or icon nJl
It can be dragged. in system tools, a blank window ap~.~rs, it is provided to user to edit new graph page.
5. Edit toolbar; provides various types of operation for graph edit. It can be dragged. 2) Open: click the command or icon Jiiill in system tools, a window will pop up:
6. Color box: select foreground color and background color. The display method is .~g~}. in
which "1" is foreground color (border color) and "2" is background color (filling color). Click a
color block by using left mouse button, its color can be set as foreground color "1 T; click by
using right button, then it can be set as background color "2" .. The system lists 36 types of
color blocks. If it is necessary to customize color, double click any color block, a dialOg box for
editing color will pop up in the screen. It can be dragged. !
7. Graph library: include system graph library and user graph library. The system gra'ph library
stores system graph symbol objects, user graph library stores graph symbol objects defined
by user, graph symbol can be dragged to any position of the page by using mouse. '
8. Status information bar: explains and describe each item of orders. When mouse is ,moved to
pull-down menu, toolbar or an item of system tools, relevant operation informatiOn will be
displayed.
9. Working area: graph page required by edit.
10. Cursor position bar: displays cursor position of current cursor in working area.
11. Graph specification bar: displays graph dimension of graph page drawn in current working
area.
3) Close: Page file that is open currently can be closed by using this command, in case the
system prompts user to "Save changes to'"'"""?", select "Yes" if it is necessary to save, select
140
~
--~~~
Mfl<-l!'\1
M tronylln HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
"No" if not, and select "Cancel" to cancel the time of operation.
4) Save, Save All and Save As: Graph file can be saved by using these commands. When saving
new page file, save file window can pop up by clicking any command.
Step 1: select system device status diagram template "devmodel.hsg" as illustrated in Figure9.3~5.
Then click "Next".
Figure 9.3-3 "Save as" window
Type in file name to be saved or saved as in "File Name", click "Save" and it is done.
After completing modification of existing page file, file can be saved on disk directly by clicking
"Save" command or clicking A button of system toolbar, original file contents will be ~edified. If
"Save As" command is clicked, system will pop up save file window, after typing in new:·file name
and clicking "Save", the modified page can be saved as another file, contents of original file remain
unchanged. Multiple pages of already open graph file can be saved by using save all commands,
by clicking "Save An• or clicking button II in system toolbar, all open page files can be: saved on
disk.
5) Import (File): select the command:
Figure 9.3-·4 "Import (File)" command Figure 9.3-6 Import device configuration 2
;:.. Standard Shapes: Standard graph can be drawn conveniently by using this commarid. Step 2: select 10 device status diagram template in accordance with field control station setup
diagram as illustrated in Figure 9.3-6. Then click "Next".
Click "Standard Shapes", one group of standard shape graphs that are overlaid together appears
on screen, select all objects, drag them to middle position of screen, and then spre8d graphs
overlaid together, a group of standard graphs can be acquired: triangle, quadrilateral, Pentagon,
hexagon, heptagon, octagon, enneagon, decagon and pentacle.
;:.. Device Config: Transform the file generated by device configuration into graph file.
Click "Device Con fig", the system pops up wizard dialog box of import device configuration:
141 142
Step 3: device status diagram template list of field control stations, as illustrated in Figure, 9.3-7. By Step 5: display results of each step of selection, as illustrated in Figure 9.3-9. Then click "Start".
selecting "Choose all", device status diagram of all field control stations will be generatep. Double The system will automatically generate system device status diagram, 10 device status diagram
click at template list position behind each station number, and template of device status diagram of and 10 station operation version display diagram.
each station can be selected again in pop-up pull-down bar. Then click "Nexe.
After the system generates graph automatically, click "Open" in "File" menu, graph file generated
automatically can be seen in popup "Open" dialog box, as illustrated in Figure 9.3-10. Select and
open any files, device status diagram can be viewed offline, as illustrated in Figure 9.3-11, 9.3-12
and 9.3-13. After completing configuration, download and operation, device status graph can be
displayed and viewed online.
143 144
Note: When generating device status diagram again, it is necessary to close open device status
diagram first, then import modified device configuration content again in graph edit tools.
Otherwise device status diagram can not be updated.
145 146
)lfj
Nn~n~rs
"«;! ·. '
HOLLiAS MACS Software USer Manual
9.3.2Edit command
Edit is conducted regarding object selected in working area, select "Edif, open pull-dowh menu:
6) Accurate Paste: this command is only valid after completing "Cut" or ~copy" operation, click
this command:
1) Undo: When user is unsatisfied with current operation, it can· be cancelled by cliCking this
command or icon Jl in system tools. It is possible to cancel several past operations. After
saving on disk, cancellation operation does not function. :
2) Redo: Canceled operation can be recovered by clicking this command or icon R \n system
tools.
3) Cut: Select object, click this command, or icon 1111 in system tools, object is !stored in
clipboard, original object selected disappears.
4) Copy: Select object, click this command, or icon Jll
in system tools, object is copies into
clipboard, original object selected still exits.
5) Paste: this command is only valid after completing "Cut" or "Copy" operation, :click this
command or icon IIJ in system tools:
Fill in accurate coordinate position, it is identical with "Paste~ dialog box after confirmation,
contents in clipboard can be pasted to coordinate position selected in current screen after
selecting "OK".
7) Compose: Compose several separate graph objects as one graph object.

8) Decompose: Decompose a composed object into separate graph objects.
9) Change Order: When two graph objects overlay with each other, front/back order of two
objects can be changed by using this command. Firstly select the graph object intended to be
placed at the back, then select the graph object intended to be placed in the front, click this
command.
10) Reverse Around Line X: Reverse the selected object around line X.
11) Reverse Around Line Y: Reverse the selected object around line Y.
12) Select All: Select all objects on graph page.
13) Function Define: Functional key F1-F16 on special purpose keyboard can be defined by using
this command. Click this command:
147 148
1'11\,!f;l
. . lf<>TtvS!IS Dt~G~ HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
2) Arc: Click "Arc~ command, or icon IIin drawing tool bar, select needed border mode in
mark), press left mouse button and drag to target position before releasing, and it is done. 90°
arc can be drawn by pressing Shift Key simultaneously.
3) Polyline: Click "Polyline" command, or icon ml in drawing toolbar, select needed border
mode in filling toolbar, select color in color box, move mouse to working area, the cursor is in
the shape of"+", click left mouse button to identify starting position (in accordance with center
of+ mark), press left mouse button and drag to target position of the first line before releasing,
then drag to target position of the second line before clicking left button, repeat the above
operation until the last border, finally click right button, then it is done.
Note: For closed polygon drawn by using this command, filling mode is invalid.
4) Text: click "Text" command, or icon .1m in drawing tool bar, move mouse to working area, the
cursor is in the shape of"+~, drag mouse along diagonal line, create a text box, then type in
text;
Click text area by using mouse, so that eight small black dots appear surrounding text area (the
central round point is revolving center), click right mouse button, a menu pops up:
9.3.3Draw tools
Click "Draw", open pull-down menu:
Figure 9.3-19 "Texr object right-click menu
> Click ~Font" command, font, font style, size, color, effect and etc can be selected:
1) Line: Click "Line" command or icon II) in drawing toolbar, select needed border mode in
filling toolbar, select color in color box, move mouse to working area, the cursor; is in the
shape of"+", click left mouse button to identify starting position (in accordance with '*nter of+
mark), press left mouse button and drag to target position before releasing, and it is_ done.
Horizontal, vertical and 45° skew line can be drawn by pressing Shift Key simultaneously
when drawing.
150
/
-\,~'ll .
J!A 11<~11~1lltl HOLL1AS MACS Software User Manual
whole picture by default, "background color'' command is only valid after setting up as "Opaque",
then background color of character can be set up at discretion.
5) Chord: Click "Chord" command, or icon .1111 in drawing toolbar, select border mode and filling
area, the cursor is in the shape of"+", click left mouse button to identify starting position of
chord, release left button and drag mouse until formation of satisfied arc, then click left button
again and it is done.
6} Rectangle: Click "Rectangle" command or icon J!ll in drawing toolbar, select border mode
and filling mode in filling toolbar, select border color and filling color in color box; move mouse
to working area, the cursor is in the shape of "+", click left mouse button to identify starting
position of rectangle, press left mouse button and drag to target position before releasing,
then drawing of rectangle can be completed. Square can be drawn by pressing Shift Key
simultaneously.
7) Pie: Click "Pie" command, or icon .lB in drawing toolbar, select border mode and filling mode
in filling toolbar, select border color and filling color in color box; move mouse to working area,
the cursor is in the shape of"+", click left mouse button to identify starting position of pie graph,
> Click "Modify Text" command, text in the working area can be modified. press left button and drag mouse until formation of satisfied pie graph, then click left button
> Click "Property" command, brim properties, closed area properties and background mode can again.
be defined.
8) Ellipse: Click "Ellipse" command or icon BJ in drawing toolbar, select border mode and filling
area, the cursor is in the shape of"+", click left mouse button to identify starting position of
ellipse, press left mouse button and drag mouse until formation of satisfied ellipse, rectangle
can be formed by clicking left mouse button. Regular circle can be drawn by pressing Shift
Key simultaneously.
9) Polygon: Click "Polygon" command, or icon M in drawing toolbar, select border mode and
filling mode in filling toolbar, select border color and filling color in color box; move mouse to
working area, the cursor is in the shape of"+", click left mouse button to identify starting
position of polygon, release left mouse button and drag to target point of the first line before
clicking left button again, then drawing of the first border of polygon is completed. Repeat the
above operation until the last border, click right button, then polygon needed is completed.
10) Round Rectangle: Click "Round Rectangle" command or icon .II
in drawing toolbar, select
border mode and filling mode in filling toolbar, select border color and filling color in color box;
move mouse to working area, the cursor is in the shape of "+", click left mouse button to
identify starting position of rectangle, press left mouse button and drag it to target position,
then round rectangle can be completed. Regular round rectangle can be drawn by pressing
Shift Key simultaneously.
Being different from rectangle, round rectangle has one additional black square in the middle as
~
illustrated in the figure"~" in comparison with rectangle, place cursor on the square, radian
of four comers of rectangle can be changed by moving this square.
11) Image: Click "Image" command or icon 1!1 in drawing toolbar, move mouse to working area,
the cursor is in the shape of "+", click left mouse button to identify starting position of image,
press left mouse button to identify size of image frame, after releasing left button, the screen
will automatically pop up:
Both "Brim" and "Closed Area" are aimed at background area.
After "back mapping mode" is set up as "Lucid", background color of text box is the color of the
151 152
Figure 9.3--22 Open "Image~ window
User can select file name of graph needed in this window, and the graph can be inserted into
current screen by clicking open button.
12) Button: Click "Button" command or icon ~~ in drawing toolbar, move mouse to working area,
the cursor is in the shape of"+", click left mouse button to identify starting position Of button,
press left mouse button and drag mouse to identify size of button, after releasing left button,
button can be drawn:
)> Bitmap: when it is not selected, background color is valid, lucid color and bitmap are invalid, a
Click right mouse button on the button:
certain color can be selected as button background, once it is selected, background color is
invalid, lucid color and bitmap are valid, click the bitmap at the time, the following window will
pop up:
Figure 9.3--23 "Button" object right-click menu
Button external shape can be modified by selecting "Button Shape" command:
> Font: Set up font of text displayed on button.

> Shadow Width: Set up three-dimensional effect of button.
> Original: Set up initial effect of button.
> Def Text Region: Set up position of text displayed on button flexibly.
)> Def Dyn Feature: See details in dynamic features "Button".
> Self Define: Click this command, set up button status to be used in dynamic features:
153 154
~
Around Line Y: Reverse the selected object around line Y.
ffiliil[
~CW Rotate 90 degrees: Rotate selected object clockwise by 90 degrees around axis passing
its rotation center.
fllcompose Objects: Compose several separate graph objects as one graph object.
lmmoecompose Objects: Decompose a composed object into separate graph objects.
!lbhange order of two objects: When two graph objects overlay with each other, fronVback order
of two graphs can be changed by using this command.
~iii!Jl
lilll:ill!.Change Order Previous: Change order of previous graph object.
!Rchange Order Next: Change order of next graph object.
Bselect All Objects: Select all objects on graph paQe.

Drawing toolbar:
li'l~l
~lign Left: Align multiple objects selected left by making reference to a certain object.
llilii'illlllllllllllllllllllil!-n~Wi!lmiii!!III'Nl
,mni!E!mmllllimi!lllifli!U!IliM~Hilll!'U!lll!im!llUK!U£j~~
~ Button is used for selecting graph object

iJ!lLign Right Align multiple objects selected right by making reference to a certain object
Iilli
lliD1illAHgn Top: Align multiple objects selected top by making reference to a certain object.
9.3.4Filling toolbar
!l~Jkign Bottom: By clicking this icon, multiple objects selected can be aligned bottom by making
reference to a certain object
llertical Center: Align multiple graph objects selected along central axis of vertical direction of a
certain object.
f!~~
illTii!IllHorizontal Center: Align multiple graph objects selected along central axis of horizontal
direction of a certain object.
9.3.5Edit tool bar

Lace Across: Arrange multiple graph objects selected crosswise in equivalent space with two
objects on left/right as starting/ending points.
Illspace Down: Arrange multiple graph objects selected lengthwise in equivalent space with two
objects on top/bottom as starting/ending points.
;]r,:.fjfl
~Reverse Around Line X: Reverse the selected object around line X.
&space Width: Make space width of multiple graph objects selected equivalent
155 156
llo'JI~~'!! . . i
Jlt llaJM1111 HOLUAS MACS Software USer Manual
flspace Height: Make space height of multiple graph objects seleCted equivalent.
-
IBsame Size: Make size of multiple graph objects selected equivalent.
~No Rotate: Resume graph to original position after rotating to any angle.
W"'_·"
~Center Rotate: Resume changed rotating center to original position.
9.3.6Page property
Size of effective working area can be set up by using this command.
Click ~Property•, open pull·down menu:
3) Set Background:
> Graph Background: Click the command:
1) Set Grid Block:
Figure 9.3·28 "Grid" window Figure 9.3-31 "Graph Background"
Size of effective working area can be set up by using this command. Select file name of background graph, after clicking "Open", background of working area can be
set as this graph.
2) Set Size:
> Pure Color Background: Click this command, screen color board window pops up, as
illustrated in Figure 9.3-32, a type of color can be selected from color board. By pressing
~Define Custom Color (D) »" button, define custom color window appears, as illustrated in
Figure 9.3-33, firstly select an initial color in light spectrum, then move arrow on the right until
getting satisfied color, click "Add to Custom Colors (Ar, the color appears in "Custom Colors
(C)", click "OK" button, background is set up as this color (or input new value in EJS/L and
R!G/U boxes).
157 158
/----.
After clicking, there appears:
Fill custom symbol name in graph name window, OK.
)> Add new symbol into user custom symbol library
Click right button in user graph library, select "New Directory":
Figure 9.3-36 New directory
Select default directory name, custom symbol library name can be edited and modified.
9.3.7User custom symbols
Graph symbol (usually a group of objects, of which dynamic features and trigger features can be
defined too) can be formulated in accordance with project demand. · Select self·made symbol on graph page by using left mouse button, press "Ctrl" key on keyboard
at the same time, move symbol to new symbol library.
)> Define symbol name
Click right button on graph symbol, select "Name":

9.3.8Dynamic features
Dynamic object corresponds to database point defined. When setting up dynamic features and
trigger features property window of graph object, there are several general purpose items, which
are described as followings:
160
/--~
,----
-~!!.;! HOLUAS MACS Software USer M ... u ...

Item name Filllng·ln contents
Ta Name of database int.
Field name (item name) recorded in database. Usually current value of database point
is filled In, for example, fill in AV for analog point, fill in DV for digital variabl9 point. Fill
in DS for description of database point. Please see details as per category name of
Item data and content of item name.
Domain The domain where the point is.
By using dynamic features, user can monitor point value of database online.
Select objects of which dynamic features should be set up, click right button, select !'Dynamic
Features" command, window setup dynamic features can be pushed out:
9.3.8.1 Color change
After color change feature of object is defined, real time value of database point corresP_onding to
the object wilt change color when change condition of setup is met. Dialog box of colOr change
feature:
Select •Has Color Change Feature", window contents become valid.
Color 1-color 5: each color option has its definition dialog box, therefore user can define color
change feature of five different colors for object simultaneously. Priority order of color change is
from color 1 to color 5.

> Domain: The domain where the point is.
> Mask: It is possible to judge whether several bits of a 4-byte (32bit) value is 0 or 1 through the
to judge whether the last bit but one of a 32bit value is 1.
> Color: Pull-down list provides 16 different colors, from which user can select one as specified
color for color change.
> Total change condition: After completing color change feature definition of a color, click "Add",
defined color change features appear in the window in form of list.
> Add: After setting up a condition, the condition can be added into "Total change condition"
window by pressing "Add" button, and other conditions can be added by the same method.
)> Modify: Select a certain condition in "Total change condition" window, setup condition can be
modified by pressing "Modify• button.
)> Del: Select a certain condition in "Total change condition" window, setup condition can be
deleted by pressing "Del" button.
Note: "Total change condition" is a group of logic arithmetic combination. Each condition
161 162
-~.~'!l
~ ••~n~ HOLUAS MACS Software Us'er Manual -~~j HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
arithmetic result stands for Boolean value of true/false, conditions form a total result through variable is uo•' display contents defined in space behind "0".
~ANOn, aOR" arithmetic,
)> Database: Display contents of text object according to format for database configuration.
)> Hex: Display text contents according to format of hexadecimal system.
)> Relative Time: Value of the database point is a time interval.
9.3.8.2Text )> Absolute Time: If the object corresponds to time point, then any time format can be selected
from pull-down menu.
Text feature is only valid for text objec~ and after text feature of object is defined, v81ue of its
corresponding database point can be displayed on screen as per graph configuration, da:tabase or 9.3.8.3Biink
time format. Dialog box of text feature:
After flash features of object is defined, when real time value of the database point corresponding
to the object meets flash condition, the graph blinks. Dialog box of flash feature:
Select ~Has Text Feature", window contents become valid.
> Tag: Name of database point. Select "Has flash feature", window contents become valid.
> Item: Field name of database record
> Show Time: Can show system time, it should be used in collaboration with relative time format
or absolute time format.
> Left: Align text object content left.
> Right: Align text object content right.
> Mask: It is possible to judge whether several bits of a 4-byte (32bit) value is 0 or 1 through the
> Middle: Text contents are aligned in the middle.
> Graph Config: After input format in text box of •Analog Formar and "Digital Formar, display
> Total condition: After completing definition of a flash feature, click "Add", the defined flashing
contents of text object according to this format when displaying.
> Analog Format: Use format of"XXXX.XX" to represent number of bits in front oflbehirid analog condition appears in the window in form of list.
decimal point.
> Digital: When digital variable is "1", display contents defined in space behind "1"; when digital
163 164
""~>«'!l
JJI11ollrSn HOlliAS MAGS Software uder Manual
9.3.8.4Show/hide
After show/hide features of object are defined, when value of the database point corresPonding to
the object meets total show condition, the graph shows up, otherwise the graph does not show up.
Dialog box of show/hide feature:
Select "Can Horizontally Move", content of horizontal move becomes valid.
> Select "Can Vertically Move", content of vertical move becomes valid.
> Default Value: Is 0~ 100 if not selected; is database point configuration range if selected.
Select "Is Show/Hide", window contents become valid. > On: Set up the minimum value of corresponding database point value when move feature
> Tag: Name of database point. by default.
> Item: Field name of database record. > Up: Set up the maximum value of corresponding database point value when move feature
> Domain: The domain where the point is. occurs, after selecting Default Value, modification is impossible, it is set to upper limit of range
> Mask: It is possible to judge whether several bits of a 4-byte (32bit) value is 0 or 1 th'rough the by default.
mask off code. For example, to be «And" with a mask off code of value 2 (0010), it iS possible > Horizontal Move Distance: The horizontal distance from the position where object starts to
to judge whether the second bit of a 32bit value is 1. move to the position where object stops moving.
> Conditions Summary: After completing show feature definition, click "Add", defined show > Vertical Move Distance: The vertical distance from the position where object starts to move to
condition appears in the window in form of list. the position where object stops moving.
9.3.8.5Move the object meets value between display lower limit and display upper limit, filling is conducted
After move feature of object is defined, when real time value of database point corresponding to
the object meet value between show tower limit and show upper limit, move according to setup
conditions. Dialog box of move feature:
165 166
-~~s~ HOLLiAS MAC$ Software Ust:lr Manual -~~.~ HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
the object meets the value .• between -aTSPtay tower limit and display upper limit, zoom-in or
9.3.8.6Filling zoom-out is conducted according to setup condition. Dialog box of scale feature:
After fitting feature of object is defined, when real time value of database point corresponding to
the object meets value between display lower limit and display upper limit, filling is cOnducted
Figure 9.3-45 "Scale"
Select "Has Zoom Feature", window contents become valid.
Select "Has Filling Feature", window contents become valid. )> Tag: Name of database point.
)> Tag: Name of database point. > Domain: The domain where the point is.
)> Item: Field name of database record. > Center Spot: The center spot of graph object scale.
)> Domain: The domain where the point is. )> Min. Zoom Ratio: Zoom ratio corresponding to lower limit of display.
> Direction: Set up direction of filling. )> Max. Zoom Ratio: Zoom ratio corresponding to upper limit of display.
> Color: Set up color of fitting )> X Scale: Graph changes size in horizontal direction.
)> Default Value of Range: Is 0-100 if not selected; is database point configuration range if > Y Scale: Graph changes size in vertical direction.
selected. )> Default Scale: Is 0-100 if not selected; is database point configuration range if selected.
> Display lower limit: set up the minimum value of corresponding database point value when )> Dn: set up the minimum value of corresponding database point value when scale feature
filling feature occurs, after selecting Default Value, modification is impossible, it is seit to lower occurs, after selecting Default Value, modification is impossible, it is set to lower limit of range
limit of range by default. by default.
> Display upper limit: Set up the maximum value of correspondin·g database point value when )> Up: set up the maximum value of corresponding database point value when scale feature
filling feature occurs, after selecting Default Value, modification is impossible, it is set to upper occurs, after selecting Default Value, modification is impossible, it is set to upper limit of range
limit of range by default. by default.
9.3.8.7Scale
After scale feature of object is defined, when real time value of database point correspi:mding to
167 168
-~!l.'!l
~ HCI'*t$JII
HOLliAS MACS ~oJ;,ware Us~r Manual -~~'!l
JJI _Hou~llra. HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
9.3.8.8Rotate > Smallest Angle: DisPlay angle corresponding to lower limit.
> Biggest Angle: Display angle corresponding to upper limit.
After rotate feature of object is defined, when value of database point corresponding to 9.3.8.9Curve
meets the value betw"een display lower limit and display upper limit, rotate is conducted accordina
to setup condition. Dialog box of rotate feature:
After curve feature of object is defined, the object traces and displays real time value of database
in form of curve. Dialog box of curve feature:
> Tag: Name of database point

> Domain: The domain where the point is. Select "Has Curve Feature", window contents become valid.
> Default Value: Is 0-100 if not selected; is database point configuration range if selected.
> Dn: set up the minimum value of corresponding database point value when rota~e feature > Tag: Name of database point.
occurs, after selecting Default Value, modification is impossible, it is set to lower limit of range > Item: Field name of database record.
by default. ' > Domain: The domain where the point is.
> Up: set up the maximum value of corresponding database point value when rotate feature > Y Display Range: Database point value range corresponding to full scale of curve window.
occurs, after selecting Default Value, modification is impossible, it is set to upper limi~ of range > Coordinates: User can select any one type from 8 types of coordinates as curve display
by default. method.
> Center Spot: Center spot of graph object rotate. > BK Color: Display color of curve window.
> Rotate Center: Define rotate center of graph object by using mouse. > Scroll TraCe: VVhen final point of time axis is traced and displayed, curve continues tracing
> Auto Rotate: After object is set to auto rotate, auto rotate condition and auto rotate speed are after scrolling time axis for a distance in reverse direction. Scrolling distance can be 1/4, 1/2
changed to valid. ' and 3/4 of window or the entire window.
> Auto Condition: Condition of occurrence of auto rotate, auto rotate will occur when set up > BK Grid: Display grid pattern of curve window.
conditions are met, it does not rotate according to change of database point value. > Refresh Interval: Pixel number corresponding to each refresh interval.
> Rotate Speed: Rotate speed when reaching auto rotate. > Grid Interval (XN): Pixel number between adjacent grids in X line or Y line direction.
169 170
•l.«<i!
~li<Olldvs HOLLiAs MACS Software Us~r Manual ~~~~~ HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
> Line Color: Color of grid line. 9.3.9Trigger features
9.3.8.10 X-Y graph
By using trigger features, user can modify point valUe of database online, besides Tip display,
authorization check can selected during online operation for other trigger features, i.e. operation
can be conducted only after valid user name is inputted when being online.
Select the object for which trigger features are to be set up, dick right button, select "Trigger
Features", window setup trigger characteristics can be pushed:
9.3.9.1Push window
Window can be pushed online, such as PID adjustment window, push window dialog box:
Figure 9.3-48 "X·Y Graph"
Select "Has X-Y Graph Feature", window contents become valid.
> Tag: Name of database point of X or Y line.

> Value Range: Value range of database point.
> Tag Display: Two methods of~.~ and "x• can be selected
> Link points or not Two methods of "Single point" and "Form 1 line• can be selected
> Newest Tag Color: The newest point color can be selected.
> Other Tag Color: Historical point color can be selected.
> Time Interval: Display interval of two value point.
> Note: X-Y curve is only valid for rectangle, and when a rectangle has this feattire, other
dynamic features are all invalid. ·
172
After filling-in and determination, user names are listed in authority window. When operating online,
use this user name to log in, relevant operation can be conducted only after conformity of system
check.
Note: Window is different from base graph, base graph can occupy the whole screen when being
online, and can not move; window is normally smaller, and can move freely on base graph.
9.3.9.2Switch picture
Trigger switch picture dialog box:
Select "Can Push Window", window contents become valid.
> Push Wnd While Base Graph Opened: After opening base graph, user can push window
without clicking with mouse.
> XV: The specific position of push window displayed in working area. In which, "peils" is the
basic unit for constituting graph.
> Window Type: Window types include common window, PID window, manual operator (open
loop), manual operator (close loop), sequence control, regulating valve and etc, demanded
type can be selected from pull-down list frame.
> Window Name: The item matches with selected window type, if window type is "PID"window",
the item corresponds to name of HSPID type point in database edit.
> If window type is "common window", it is necessary to fill in graph name including sUffix, such
as: XXX.HSG
> Domain: If it is database point, input the domain where the point is.
> Conditions: Determine condition before pushing window, push window only when cOndition is
met.
> Check Authority: Select authority check, click" Add", dialog box pops up:
173 174
D.~~~
Figure 9.3-52 "Switch Picture"

Select "Increase/Decrease Value", window contents become valid.
Select "Has the feature of switching", window contents become valid.
:> Tag: Name of database point.
Picture Name: fill in name of trigger switch picture, such as XXX.HSG :> Item: Field name of database record.
:> Domain: The domain where the point is.
:> Increase: Increment or decrement of each time,
9.3.9.3Add value :> For analog, input "2" if it is intended to increase by 2; input "-2" if it is intended to decrease by
2.
The function is used for automatic increment or decrement defined for database value of the point
:> For digital variable, if only "1" can be inputted, it means that the digital variable is "0" initially,
becomes "1" after implementation of the operation, and becomes "0" after implementation of
that has defined the feature when being online. Increase/decrease value dialog box:
the operation again. For example: used to realize button featuring self-locking function.
:> Check Limit Valid when "Permit" is selected, upper/lower limits can be restricted. For example,
used to realize output amplitude limit of valve opening degree.
)> Re-confirm: Click the object, push confirmation dialog box, and implement Increase/Decrease
Value only after confirmation, input contents of confirmation dialog box here.
Note: For digital variable, "character string 0110 character string" can be added into the second
time confirmation information, then when operator is online, different confirmation information will
pop up according to its point value, when value changes from 0 to 1, character string in front of
175 176
-~1!<\!
fA H<>Mlrll HOLLIAS MACS Software Us'er Manual
0110 pops up, when value changes from 1 to 0, character string behind 0110 pops up.
9.3.9.40nline change DB point value
Click object online, a simple dialog box will pop up, database point value can be modified. Online
change DB tag value dialog box:
Select ~can Refresh": window contents become valid.
> Time Tag: Display time point of trigger refresh.
9.3.9.6Tip display
The function is to display description content automatically, when being online, place mouse on
object featuring tip display function, a window describing selected object can pop up automatically.
9.3.9.5Refresh one time Descriptive text can be set up separately, and can be displayed according to relevant items of
database configuration. lip display dialog box:
The function can refresh parameter value on current screen when being on line, so as to display
one group of new value. Trigger refresh one time dialog box:
177 178
D~~.~
Figure 9.3-56 "Trigger Tip Display

Select "Has feature of setting" item, window contents become valid.
Select «Has THE feature of showing", window contents become valid.
)> Tag: Name of database point.
)> Show fixed string: type in character string of tip display in window;
> Show value or name of tags: "Show fixed string" can no longer· be set up after sel~ing this
item.
9.3.9.7Set bit
This function can set digital variable to 0, and set to 1 after one arithmetic cycle. DialOg box of
trigger set bit:
179 180
- ~-->,
<'
Wl~«'!l
J!A llams~t~
- ' i
HOLUAS MACS Software Us\:!r Manual ~~:'! HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
9.3.10 "Standard Algorithm Block Symbol" in user 9raph 9.3.11 Simulating display
library
The command can simulate online mode when being offline, display dynamic feature and trigger
feature of graph and text. Click ~View", pull-down menu pops up, select "Simulating", or click .a1
El--~ User Graph Lib button in system toolbar:
9-"1: standard Algorthm Block Symbol
i-···11 Analoot~ Measure Tag
i···-llill
Analog Measure Tag +UT
j... -~~~ Digital MMsure Ta~;J
!-····IiiHSALGMAN(Ciosed Loop)
1···-i\1 HSALGMAN{Open Loop)
j"-il HSCSLAVES
i·····il HSOLCTRL5
i-··-ii!l HSSCS5
L._lilil HSYAVLES
Figure 9.3-58 "Standard Algorithm Block System··
"Standard Algorithm Block Symbol• is symbol provided by the system by default to siniplify user
configuration, it already has classic dynamic feature and triggering features. User drag~ it to flow
chart, selects symbol, clicks right button and selects "Dynamic Shortcut Define":
Access simulating online operation screen, click "OK" in login dialog box and it is done (engineer
level user of the system by default).
Define window pops up:
Move mouse to lower left direction of screen, offline simulating input window will move rightwards:
Fill in substitutive point name (should be point name already defined in database) in cell
>mHiffilil
behind~
181 182
•1,«-,J
J!A..nou<~Sn Dt~~ HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
10 Report Configuration
Report is classified as fixed time report and real time report:
> Fixed time report data record and statistics of production process are printed at a fixed time,
print is trigged through online configuration.
> Real time report: report of a certain time or historical report is printed at random, and is trigged
manually.
10.2 Access report generation system
Select •Start"- ~All Programs"- "MACS" - "MACS_ENG"- "Report", click:
Fill in an analog tag name in database behind xAnalog Tag Name", thEm move sliding inde!x pointer
below from 0 to 100%, enabling value of the analog to vary from project zero scale to pi"oject full
scale, if no specific point name is filled in, then all analog value in database can vary froin project
zero scale to project full scale.
Fill in a digital tag name in database behind "Digital Tag", then click "Set 0" and "Set~· button
below, the digital variable can be set to 0 or 1, if no specific point is filled in, then au digital
variables in database can be set to 0 or 1.
"Select DB" window appears on scree~:
183 184
llfll<.lhl
rA:t~olfVSn HOLLIAS MAC$ Software user Manual --~£s~ HOLLIAS MAC$ Software User Manual
Sele~- :~iilil,..._ l 11. Worksheet label
12. Worksheet label scroll button
NEWPRO
13. Worksheet scroll bar
14. Work table edit area
15. Worksheet control menu bar
16. Status bar
Note: Please complete configuration of database before accessing report edit. Please install
Open0ffice2.2 software on computer before using report configuration software.

Figure 10.2-2 Select DB window
Control menu bar:
Double click demanded project name by using left mouse button, acCess report edit screen, where
there is a control menu bar in right upper section:
10.3.1 "Report" tool
Click uReport" button:
1) New Report: A new report file can be created by using this command.
2) Open Report: Open saved report file.
3) Print Test: Print effect can be simulated in advance by using this command.
4) Save Report: Save report file. Please save report file in report folder of current project.
10.3.2 "Point" tool

Definition of dynamic point is the key for formulation of report, only after user defines dynamic
point, can report read data from database and display. Before adding dynamic point, normally
appearance style of report and static form should be formulated first.
Figure 10.2~3 Report edit screen
1. Title bar
2. Menu bar
Figure 10.3-2 "Poiof' menu
3. Commonly used tools bar
4. Format tools bar
1) History Point:
5. Edit bar
6. Area of active cell
7. Select all button Click ~History Point»:
8. Active cell
9. Cell row number
10. Cell column number
185 186
l ~l!.i
,IN!IIY$1ri;
> Point name: Database point name.

Figure 10.3-3 "Histol)' Point" > Item: Item name of the data point, it can not be void.
> Format: Select relevant data display format according to different data points.
Write: Click this button to insert dynamic point edited currently into selected cell, meanwhile
> Point name: Point name of database.
)>
definition format of the dynamic pOint can be disPlayed in the cell.
> Time forward: The time interval from the time when report is printed to the first point
demanded to be printed.
)> lime interval: The time interval between two adjacent history points. 3) Time Point:
> Direction: Arrangement direction of historical data printed out, two types of vertical or
horizontal direction can be selected through pull-down arrow at right side of display box. Click "Time Point":
> Num: Point number required to be printed.
)- Format: Select relevant data display format according to different history library pointi i.e. print
format, five types namely default, integer, switch, floating point and scientific countirlg can be
selected. When selecting different format types, display format information will change
accordingly, user can further determine display format.
)- Col Row: Determine cell position for inserting dynamic point, it is possible to select through
button at the left side of column/row display box.
)- Write: dick this button to insert dynamic point edited currently into selected cell, m:eanwhile
)- Verify: Validity of database of dynamic point name edited currently can be verified bY clicking
this button
2) Real-time Point:
Click "Real-time Point":
> Time For: Identical with history point.

)- lime Interval: Identical with history point.
)- Display format: Select print format of time type data point, relevant English or Chinese format
provided in pull-down list box of date and time.
)- Write: Click the button, insert dynamic point of current edit into selected cell, meanwhile
)- Display direction: Identical with history point.
> Number: Identical with history point
> Col Row: Identical with history point.
187 188
~.
-~-
~ ••anor.:;,. HOLUAS MAGS Software User . Manual 1:~: HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
4) Modify Point: If setup dynamic point information needs to be modified, it is necessary; to select
the dynamic point cell first, and then click "Modify Poinf command, the dynamic pojnt dialog 11 Download Tool
box will pop up, and then modification can be conducted.
10.3.3 "Compile" tool 11.1 Outline introduction

The command compiles the current worksheet, and can check correctness of dynar)'lic point Download includes three parts namely download of controller, download of server and download
description, and data validity of point name or item name, if compilation is successfu[, prompt of operator station. Download of controlter is completed in controller algorithm configuration
window pops up as follows: , software (see specific operation in Chapter 4, hereunder unnecessary details will not be given),
download of server and download of operator station are to be completed in engineer online
download software, hereunder we introduce engineer online download software in details.
Note: Before downloading, firstly ensure that project has been compiled in database general
control.
Figure 10.3-6 Re~ 11.2 Access engineer download software

OtheiWise, error prompt information will pop up, requiring correction of data and compilation again
until success of compilation Select "Start"- "All Programs"- "MACS"- "MACS_ENG"- "Download", and click:
10.3.4 "Exit" tool
Click "Exit" button, then close report and exit report configuration.
Select project dialog box pops up:
189 190
/
lo«'!l
lloftV'SI<S
Figure 11.2-2 Select project dialog box
After clicking project, click OK, logon window pops up:
11.3 Download server
Select one unit of server in "DownLoad" window, such as a master:
Logon with system default engineer user (user name: hollymacs, password: maCs), open
download window:
191 192
Current IP address of selected server is displayed at right side, check IP address and relevant field Art download files are selected by default in window below, click "Download" button, then graph
control station list, and all download files are selected by default in window belOw, click and report contents in download file can be downloaded into start catalogue of operator station.
"Download" button to download the download file to server.
Note: In order to enable download to take effect, choose to select "Restart Server after d()wnload"
before download.
11.4 Download operator station
Select "Operator" in "Download" window, then select operator station (all operator stations in
default field are selected) to be downloaded in the operator station list at the right side:
193 194
Wl,fi~
r.A ll<tllll$n MACS SOftware Configuratio~ Manual
12 HOLLiAS MACS Download of Server
When HOLLiAS MAGS server software is installed, only after download the configuration finished
on engineer station to server and each station can run each station software and server :software.
12.1 Generate Download Files
First generate download files before download. Click "Start"~ «All Programs"- "MAGS"-
"MACS_ENG"- "Database" to open database general control and click "Compile"- "ComPile All" to
compile the project. After compilation generate download files automatically. Figure 12.2-1"Select Project" dialog box
12.2 Download of Server
Start to download after the project is compiled completely. Download includes three pa~ namely
download of controller, download of server and download of operator station. Here we introduce
download of server in details and see specific manuals for the download of other stationS.
0 Note:
• The sequence of download is: first download of controller, second download of server in order
to ensure the symbol list consistent, at last download of operator station.
Figure 12.2-2 "Logon" dialog box
0 Nom:
Click "Start"- "All Programs~- "MACS"- "MACS_ENG~- "Download" and the "Select ProJect" • I he name and passport to logon the eng1neer station to download needs to be set 1n engineer
dialog box appears, shown in figure 12.2-1. After clicking project, click "OK", "logon" window pops offline configuration software in advance.
up, shown in figure 12.2-2. Fill in the right name and password in the dialog box.
Click "OK" to logon and "NewENSManage" window pops up, shown in figure12.2-3.
195 196
then download the original master server (as a result of the switch, now ifs the slave server) .
• If ~Notice all Ops" selected, when downloading at the lower right comer of the operator
station's screen a window pops up which displays the server downloading. OtheJWise, without
notice.
• If "Restart Server after download" selected, server will restart after download automatically.
Only after restart the server after download can the downloaded contents take effect.
• For the first download select all the field control stations, and afteJWards select the field
control stations to be updated.
• When some variables change in one field control station or "Clean all" is done in controller
algorithm configuration software, it's necessary to download server and select this FCS. And
before restarting the server after download and switching it to master, remember not to
operate this station equipment.
Click "Download" button to download. Downloading in yellow, download fail in red, and download
Figure 12.2-3 "NewENSManage" window OK in green, shown in figure12.2-5.
Select" A master" in "Download" catalog in "NewENSManage" window, select "Notice all

Ops", "Restart Server after download" and control station number to be updated in "OPS/Server
List" catalog, select the files to be downloaded in "File List" catalog, shown in figure12.2-oil.
Figure 12.2-5 "Download Option" dialog box
Figure 12.2-4 "NewENSManage" window after server selected
0 Note:
• Download server A, server B respectively and download each server through one IPjaddress.
197 198
-~.-.~~
li:~~
. .
JI!AI llan!ISrs MAGS Software Configuratiori Manual HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
13 HOLLiAS MACS Server Software 13.2 HOLLiAS MACS Server Process Management
13.2.1 Start Server Process

In this chapter the function of each process during HOLUAS MAGS server software operating is
introduced. After the server is downloaded from engineer station, and when starting server the "Process
Management" window pops up, shown in figure 13.2-1. All the started server processes are
0 Prohibitory:
displayed in "Process Management" interface and taskbar. When all the processes are started up,
• The check~-m-Odif}i·anaiiXIfOteach server process must be done under theiiUffiOiiZ8.tion and the processes in "Process Management" interface and taskbar will hide.
instruction of Hollysys technical staff. It's prohibited to change, exit each server proCess and
13.1 Start HOLLiAS MACS Server Software
After the HOLLiAS MAGS server software is installed, it will start automatically when restarting the
computer. If the server is not downloaded from engineer station, the ~Process Management"
window pops up, shown in figure13.1-1. Restart after download is needed.
Figure 13.2-1"Process Management" interface
0 Note:
• When all the processes are started up, the processes in "Process Management" interface and
taskbar will hide. To check or change, click the "Process Management" menu on the right side
of taskbar.
Figure 13.1-1 the server without downloading process management interface

Clicking "Stop and Quif to quit the server process. By restarting the computer, log-off or
clicking ~Starr- "All Programs"- "MACS"- "MACS_SERVER"- "Start Server", server process
can be started again.
199 200
-~---
kll,~'!l . . kll,ll'!l
_p)q ~~~~~osu MACS SOftware Configuration Manual ,... llollJM HOLLiAS MACS Software User Manual
13.2.2 Server Process Management Select "Server Settings" in the context menu and "Server Settings" dialog box pops up, shown
in figure13.2-3. In the dialog box, "Server A or 8~, "GPS port", "History database path' and "Post
trip path" can be modified. Click "OK" to save the modification.
Click the right mouse key on the •liJ. icon on the right side of the taskbar, and in the pop-up
context menu , server settings, show/hide can be done.
0 Note:
• Only after logon correctly can the items in the context menu be lighten
then you can manage the server.
a) Logon
Select "User Logon» in the right menu and "User Logon" dialog box pops up, shown in
figure13.2-2. Fill in "Username" and "Password" and then click "OK" button and logon
successfully.
Figure 13.2-3 "Server Settings" dialog box

c) Server Show
Select "Server Show" in the c.ontext menu and all the started processes will display in the
taskbar, shown in figure13.2-4.
~~~illllrll~I!Elll!iill!l!EI!*Imlli@!liiJiJ!IIIlJIIIB1iiiJiilllllllill~!a~ir~~~~i!l!i0011111W
Figure 13.2-4 Taskbar
All the processes in "Process Management" interface are as follows:
Figure 13.2-2 "User Logon" dialog box > NewTaskDiag.exe: new task diagnosis process, monitor all the HOLUAS MAGS processes,
if a certain process exits, log-off and restart server
0 Note: > MACSinit.exe: initialization process, displaying the information such as project name, domain
• I he name and passport to logon needs to be set m eng1neer offhne contiguraMn softWare in No., server node No. and so on
> NewDsvrDiagnose.exe: double server diagnose process, manage the master/stave status of
advance. They are the same with that in engineer station download. the two servers, when the master server fails switch the stave server to master server
> SNet_Svr.exe: network management process, manage system network data
> ReaiNet.exe: real network management process, manage data communication among
b) Server Settings different parts is management network, such as communication between operator station and
server, communication among servers in different domains.
> GatewayWatch.exe: system network communication management process, manage
GMonitor program which is used to communicate with DPU, restart GMonitor if abnormal
201 202
~,,
Will.~'!!
~ 1falkm MAGS Software Conflguratiotl Manual
> RTOBManage.exe: real-time database management process, update real-time data of each
10 point
> TransmitEventMsg.exe: transmit event message process, responsible for transmitting
message among different functions of server
> EventProcess.exe: event processing process, deal with log
> Posttrip.exe: post trip process, deal with the contents related with post trip
> NewHDBServer.exe: history database process, archive from real-time data to historical
record
> ServerStandardCacl.exe: server standard calculation process, operate server 'algorithm
configuration
> NodeDiagnose.exe: node diagnose process, status diagnose cif upper equipment
> CheckTime.exe: check time process, system check time, inCluding software ch~ck time,
hardware check time, check time among domains and so on
)> Syswatch.exe: system watch process, not useful now Figure 13.3-1"1nitializalion Task" window
)> NetvarExchange .exe: network variable exchange process, deal with the commuriication of
network variables among domains Q Note:
0 Note: • ~Initialization Task~ window displays the real-time project information and server state and
• The main function of all the server process windows is to check the status for engineering can't be changed manually.
staff and developers, except for the modification of history database path and Protective
l"'!:ln!:ll"'iht
13.4 New Task Diagnosis Process

Click "~~.. in the taskbar and in the "Process Management" interface, clibk "Hide"
to minimize the window while click "Stop and Quit" to quit server process.
"NewTaskDiag.exe"
d) Server Hide When "Process Managemene is in "Server Show" mode, click "NewTaskDiag" in the taskbar
Select ~server Hide" in the context menu and all the processes in the "Process Management" and "NewTaskDiag" window pops up, shown in figure 13.4-1. The diagnosis information is
interface and taskbar will hide. Click "Server Show" to show all the processes in the taskbar. displayed in the window. "NewTaskDiag" monitors all the HOLUAS MAGS processes, if a certain
process exits, switch the server, log-off and restart the server.
e) User Logout
Select "User Logour in the context menu and the menu will be grayed and no operation ~n be
done. Click "User Logon" in the context menu and fill in the "Name" and "Password" in th!3: "User
Logon" dialog box to re-logon.
13.3 Initialization Process "MACSinit.exe"
When "Process Management" is in "Server Show" mode, click ~Initialization Task" in the taskbar
and "Initialization Task" window pops up, shown in figure13.3-1. From this window the prOject
information and server node information can be known.
Figure 13.4-1 "NewTaskDlag" window
203 204
Figure 13.5-1"Rea1Net3.3" window
Click "MNET (Domain) Transmitting Information" in "Rea1Net3.3" window, and "MNET (Domain)
Transmitting Information" window pops up, shown in figure13.5-2. This window shows the MNET
(domain) network state between servers in different domains.
Click ~Refresh" again, system will not refresh task information and the "Refresh" becomes
"Un-refresh". Click "Un-refresh" again and it becomes "Refresh", then system will start to'refresh
task information. Click "Clear" to clear diagnosis information.
13.5 Real Network Management Process

"ReaiNet.exe"
When "Process Managemenf' is in "Server Show" mode, click "RealNet3.3" in the taskba"r and the
"Rea1Net3.3" window pops up, shown in figure13.5-1. Network management process is
responsible for monitoring the data communication of different parts of network, such as the data
communication between operator station and server, the data commUnication between servers in
different domains and so on.
Figure 13.5-2 "MNET (Domain) Transmitting Information" window
205 206
~-c-•
kHdl'!l • i
JJii nonvsn MACS Software Configuration Manual
Click "MNET Transmitting Information" in--~-Rea1Net3.3" window, and MMNET Transmitting!
Information" window pops up, shown in figure 13.5~3. This window shows the MNET netWork state
between operator station and server.
Normal
Malfunction
Malfunction
Malfunction
station-53 Malfunction
station~5JI Malfunction
station-GO Invalid Invalid
Invalid Invalid
Invalid Invalid
Invalid Invalid
Figure 13.5-3 "MNET Transmitting lnfonnation" window
Click ~Diagnose Network" in «Rea1Net3.3" window and "Information" window pops up, shOwn in
figure13.5-4. This window shows the network state for each station ii1 the domain and user Figure 13.5-4 "Information" window
information built in operator online running software.
13.6 Post Trip Process "Posttrip.exe"
When ~Process Management" is in "Server Show" mode, click "Post Trip" in the taskbar and the
"Post Trip" window pops up, shown in figure13.6-1. Post trip process is used to deal with incidents
related to post trip.
207 208
~'
Figure 13.6-1"Post Trip" window
Click "Clear Info" in "Post Trip" window to clear all the recorded information. Click "Hide" in "Post
Trip" window to minimize the window.
13.7 History Database Process "NewHDBServer,exe"

Figure 13.7-1 "History Database 2.1V" window
When "Process Management" is in "Server Show" mode, click "History Database 2.1\1" iii the
The default protective purview is 2048M, and one can fill in the blank after "Protective capacity" to
taskbar and the "History Database 2.1V" window pops up, shown in figure13.7-1. The hi*ory
set protective purview. Click "Confirm Modification" to set a new "Current protective purview" value.
database process is responsible for the archiving from real-time data to historical record.:
If the available physical memory is less than the current protective purview, the system will
automatically delete the oldest history database file to gain space, shown in figure13. 7-2.
209 210
Figure 13.8-1 "NetvarExchange~ window
1. function of network variables among domains
Transmit all the network variables in one domain or station to another domain or several domains.
2. control station algorithm configuration of network variables among domains
Control station algorithm configuration of network variables among domains is the same with that
in one domain.
Figure 13.7-2"History Database 2.1V' window without enough space 3. server configuration file of network variables among domains
13.8 Network Variable Exchange Process In server installation path, click ConfigNetvar.exe, shown in figure13.8-2, and add network variable
in this window.
"NetvarExchange.exe"
When "Process Management" is in "Server Show" mode, dick "NetvarExchange" in the taskbar
and the "NetvarExchange" window pops up, shown in figure13.8-1. Network variable exchange
process is used to deal with the communication between network variables among doma_ins.
211 212
... ~ll'!!
-~ll:IS" HOLUAS MAGS Software User Manual
13.9 System Watch Process "Syswatch.exe"
System watch process "Syswatch.exen is un~useful now, so disable usyswatch.exe" when using
HOLLiAS MACS server software. Otherwise, the errors may occur, such as communication error
between HOLLiAS MACS server and operator station, displaying offiine state of operator station
and server.
13.10 Network Management Process

"SNet_Svr.exe"
After server process is started, an icon ~~~will appear in the launch bar oftaskbar. Click the icon
and "System network drive component" dialog box pops up, shown in figure13.10-1. The process
corresponds to SNet_Svr.exe, and is used for network management. Click "10 station
long-distance supervision and controln to switch the displayed contents, and it's shown in
figure13.1 0-2.
When the network variable is configured, restart the configured server or click "Reread s~tion no.
and domain no: in "NetvarExchange" window in all the configured servers, shown in figUre 4.8-3.
Figure 13.10-1 System network drive component-System Net
21S 214
MiiCS•rGOiowov DiognoOifco
J.l\0)
i'l:J.Iii:J!J
"iii!IJI"t:
~ ~~~
0
!jjttPJflbl.:
~~ij~~~U: o bl'1••
:1!1 O.llllll~l.:500mo
lt:O
liirJlltltl!lli9:1.: 3000 mo
::!!«all:~:~;a'RJr.= , ::!!ft'lfl'!'li'!:R'I.: 0 byloo
i:$;11/A::
::!! I:f'f:JI!I&: 12Siil l!!tfl:f'f:~llollof: A¥1
m• •
:rn<:k&: llli.lflt:D'
• •,
i!!4K<lt:
~IIII.!UI!II:
11'\lJJ,!I.;J::
0
Oloyloo
o
0
"i"!l'
it! Q ;
it Ql'. :
Qbytoo
0
44
'::!!lli"l'JIIIIl:k§: Mulooll(l] Mootoofl] o J SloveA]O j Sta~oO[OJ
-~illti:f'f:IUollf: M1olor
Figure 13.10-2 System network drive component~ 10 station long-distance supervision and
13.11 System Network Communication

Management Process "GatewayWatch.exe"
Click "Enter Debug Mode" in the context menu to enter debug mode. Then click "Show Debug
After server process is started, an icon !I~ will appear in the launch bar of taskbar. Click the Info~ in the context menu and "Status Table" window pops up, shown in figure13.11~3. Click "Text
right mouse key and the context menu is shown in figure13.11-1. System network communication Mode" and the "GatewayWatch" window pops up, shown in figure13.11~4.
management process is used to manage the GMonitor process which communicates with the
controller and restart GMonitor if abnormal.
Figure 13.11-1 Right menu
Click "Show Monitors"- "Monitor 10" in the context menu, and "Monitor" window pops up;to
monitor No. 10 station, shown in figure13.11~2.
Figure 13.11~3 "Status Table" Window
215 216
--~~sj HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
13.12.2 Real-time Database Management Process
"RTDBManage.exe"
Real·time database management process updates the real time data for each point.
In «status Table" window click each B icon after controller and controller status window pops 13.12.3 Transmit Event Message Process
up, shown in figure13.11·5.
"TransmitEventMsg.exe"
Transmit event message process is used to transmit message between different functions of
server.
13.12.4 Event Process "EventProcess.exe"
Event process is used to deal with the log and so on.
13.12.5 Server Standard Calculation Process

"ServerStandardCacl.exe"
After view the information, click "Leave Debug Mode" in the context menu to exit debug mode.
Server standard calculation process is used to operate server algorithm configuration.
0 Note:
13.12.6 Node Diagnose Process "NodeDiagnose.exe"
• Only in m8Stef-S6rit6r Can symbol list communication status of eaCh 10 station be: watched
through "gateway watch".
Node diagnose process is responsible for the diagnosis of upper equipmenfs status.
13.12 Other Processes 13.12.7 Check Time Process "CheckTime.exe"
Check time process is responsible for system check time, including software check time, hardware
13.12.1 New Double Server Diagnose check time and check time among domains.
"NewDsvrDiagnose.exe"
New double server diagnose process is used to manage the master/slave status of the tWo
servers and when the master server fails the slave server become master server.
217 218
--~~
"ftl,~oil ./ !
M HftllUS.S MACS Software Configuratlorl Manual HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
14 Engineering Application about Sarver becomes slave server.
Settings According to the same method modify the current slave server A
b) Modify Datafilepath.ini directly
The engineering application about server settings will be introduced in this chapter. Th~ main slave server. If A is master server then B is slave server;
contents include: the modification and settings; the files to be copied from the field which are
First modify slave server B, copy the HOB file in the original history database storage
useful for analyzing system problems; frequently asked questions and answers about s~rver; path/HISTDATA to the target path;
cautions when using server.
Open C: \VVINDOWS (or C: \WINNT) in slave server B, click the right mouse key on
Datafilepath.ini and open it as notepad file. Modify [HDB_PATH] and [POSTTRIP_PATH] directly.
0 Prohibitory: Save and exit.
• The check, modify and exit of each server process must be doneunaer-the-aUfhO-rrz:aHOil"iiOd Exit server B and restart server program, then after starting up check whether the storage path of
instruction of Hollysys technical staff. It's prohibited to change, exit each server pro;cess and the started history database service is the path after modification. The online trend (about 10
related settinos arbitrarily. however the other online trend will not be influenced.
14.1 Modification and Settings becomes slave server.
In the below the contents which can be modified and set in projects will be introduced. database in server B;
According to the same method modify the current slave server A

14.1.1 Modify History Database Path
D Note:
There are two ways to modify the history database storage path, the details as follows: • According to the two methods modify server A and server B separately. First modify the
history database storage path in slave server, then switch server and at last modify the history
a) Modify through "Server SettingsM in "Process Management" database storage path in current slave server.
Determine the servers' operation status and determine which one is master server and which is • The original history database storage path is selected during software installation and the
slave server. If A is master server then B is slave server; · installation system will automatically create a related file. After modification through "Server
First modify slave server B, copy the HOB file in the original history database' storage Settings" the system will automatically create a new folder for history database storage. If the
path/HISTDATA to the target path; history database path is modified through Datafilepath.ini directly one has to manually create
a folder for history database storage.
Click the right mouse key on "Process Management" in taskbar of slave server B, logon and then
click "Server Settings". In the MServer Settings" dialog box modify "History database path1
and "Post trip pathM and then click MOK".
14.1.2 Modify History Database Protective Capacity
minutes) during the time from copying the history database file to restarting the server will be lost, The default protective purview is 204BM and if the available physical memory is less than the
however the other online trend will not be influenced. current protective purview, the system will automatically delete the oldest history database file to
gain space. In "History Database 2.1V" window one can fill in the blank after "Protective capacity"
219 220
--~--:-_
Wil.~':!
JJ4 11an11s.,.
'
MACS Software Configuration Manual bf!!j~ HOLLIAS MACS Software User Manual
to set protective purview. Click "Confirm Modification~ to set a new "Current protective purview" 14.1.3 Modify Server Node No. and Port No.
value, shown in figure14.1-1.
There are two ways to modify the server node No. and port No., the details as follows:
Modify through "Server Settings" in "Process Management"
Click the right mouse key on "Process Managemenr in the taskbar of the server, logon and
select "Server Settings". In "Server Settings" dialog box modify "Server A or 8" and "GPS port''
and click "OK".
2 Modify Macs.ini directly
stop and quit HOLLiAS MACS server program.
Open server installation path "D: \MACSV\MACSV_SERVER", click the right mouse key on
Macs.ini and open it as notepad file.
Modify "NodeiD" below [Server], "Nodel0=1" means that the server is Awhile "NodeiD=129"
means that the server is B.
Modify "PortNo" below [CHECKTIME], "PortNo=O" means that no GPS signal is connected,
"PortNo=1" means that the GPS signal is connected to port 1 while "PortNo=2" means that the
GPS signal is connected to port 2.
Save and exit the file.
Log-off and restart, and then modification completed.
0, Note:
• Do the above operation for server A and 8 respectively.
• The original server node No. and port No. are selected during the software installation and
they can be modified here.
Figure 14.1-1 "Hislory Da!abase 2.1V' window
0 Note:
Do the above operation for server A and B respectively.
14.1.4 Settings of Network Variables among Domains
• If the available physical memory is less than the current protective purview, the system will
automatically delete the oldest histOry database file to gain space. Therefore it's necessary to First configure the network variables among domains. In the server installation path "D:
\MACSV\MACSV_SERVER", double click "ConfigNetvar.exe" and "ConfigNetvar" window pops up,
transfer the recorded history database file to other disk regularly. One can check the history shown in figure 14.1-2:
database through offline query software.
• After re-downloading of server the former recorded history database file has not been cleared
and one can check the former history database through offline query software.
221 222
-~l!sl HOLUAS MACS Software User Manual
Fill in the blanks in "Configuration" catalog in "ConfigNetvar" window and dick "Add" to add new
configuration. Then the new added configuration will be shown in information area of
"ConfigNetvar" window.
Example 1: transmit network variable in No. 10 station in domain 0 to domain 1 and domain 3, the
configuration is as follows:
Configure in the server installation path both in server A and server 8 in domain 1:
)- Station no.: 10
)- Number of transmitting domains: 2
)- Domain no.: 1 3
The configuration is shown in figure14.1~3.
Figure 14.1~2 "ConfigNetvar" window
1) Show configuration:
Click "Show" in "Configuration" catalog and the current configuration information will be shown in
the information area.
Read configuration:
10 1 Domain No. that NetVar arrived:
cnnflguratlon[The first 2 digits express hte station number and the total number of
"s"- ~"' --~ hte st8tlon number and the total numbe:r of dJ cnnflguratlon Is empty!
I ..__ , .
already been emptled!l
2) Reconfigure
Click "Reconfigure" in "ConfigNetvar" window and infonnation "It has already been emp,ied" will Figure 14.1-3'ConfigNetvar" window
be shown in the infonnation area.
Example 2: transmit network variable in No. 12 station in domain 1 to domain 0, the configuration
Read configuration: is as follows:
10 1 Domain No. that NetVar arrived:
Show configuration[The first 2 digits express hte station number and the total numbe:r of d. Configure in the server installation pat~ both in serve~ A and server 8 in domain 0:
Now the configuration Is empty! - ·
10 1 Domain No. that NetVar arrived: > Station no.: 12
lt~n emptied!! > Number of transmitting domains: 1
> Domain no.: a
3) Add
223 224
/-~

. 13
No.: 12 1 Domain No. that NetVar
14.2 Server Check Time

Several methods for HOLUAS MACS server check time: without FM197, server internal clock is
4) Delete adopted.
Fill in the station no. to be deleted in the blank after "station no." in "ConfigNetvar" windoW and Without GPS and FM197 (GPS lime Synchronization Hub}, server internal clock is adopted. If
click "Delete Station" to delete the station. Then the configuration information about this s~tion will "Use GPS" is not selected in "Select Check Time type" window during server software installation,
be deleted. don't modify the contents of CAS2000serverExe.ini in the directory C: \WINDOWS (or C: \WINNT).
Can be modified manually:
After the configuration of "ConfigNetvar.exe• is completed, one can restart the configurediserver or
click "Reread station no. and domain no." in "NetvarExchange" windOw in all the configured File MACS.ini:
servers, shown in figure 14.1~5. [CHECKTIME]
PortNo=O
"Use GPS" or "Use FM197" is selected during server software installation, while "Use GPS" is
selected the right port No. should be selected, don't modify the contents of CAS2000serverExe.ini
in the directory C: \WINDOWS (or C: \WIN NT) CAS2000serverExe.ini. It can be modified
manually:
File MACS.ini:
[CHECKTIME]
PortNo=1
14.3 Backup
The files to be copied from the field which are useful for analyzing system problems:
225 226
~ ~
'NI.Il'!i
. . Ualtfbs
i
MACS Software Configuralioil Manual DrJJs;l HOLLIAS MACS Software User Manual
Server A and server B: server installation path \macs\"'.log. • Q 3: After HOLLiAS MACS servers are started, an error "double server socket
error'' occurs in the two servers, what is the reason?
Server A and server B: C: \DSvrDiagnose.
Backup error, communication is not established: 1, check whether the settings of servers A and B
Server A and server B: C: \ EventProcess. are right. 2, Check whether the network protocol installed correctly, and check whether the
Server A and server B: operating system installation disk: \Documents and Settings\(\11 network setting is right if it's simplified network.
Users\Documents\DrWatson\drwtsn32.1og. (If the file doesn't exist, click "Start" 7- "All
Programs~ -~Run" and enter"DRWTSN32", then you can seethe log path to check • Q 4: Can the historical trend path of HOLLiAS MACS server be changed? How?
whether there is the file drwtsn32.1og)
Historical trend path can be set during server software installation.
Server A and server 8: server installation path\HISTDATA\HD8\directory of the day when
default happened \SYSLOG.
There are two ways to modify: modify through "Server Settings" in "Process Managemenf window;
Server A and server 8: server installation path \HISTDATA\HD8\ directory of the daY, when modify file Oatafifepath.ini in server path C: \WINDOWS (or C: \WIN NT) directly; Save and restart.
default happened\ DIG"'"*.dat and """"'.dat for 10 minutes before and after the fa~lt.
Log in server A and server 8: "Start"- ~control Panel"- "Administrative Tools"- "Event • Q 5: The special keyboard of operator station doubled as server can't be used
Viewer" ~ ~Export Usf in context menu, save as TXT file. normally, the light is ON but the switch to any right is not valid, only right 0 is available,
sometimes restart the computer will be OK.
8 Note: "Use GPS" is selected during initial software installation and a serial port is occupied. Solution:
• In addition, backup the engineer station 10 log: MACSV_ENG\COd9SYs\*.log (Codesys open file MACS.ini in server installation path and change PortNo= 0, restart server program.
"Project"- "Option"- "log"- "Directory" when active log) .
• Q 7: Communication error between HOLLiAS MACS server and operator station,
both operator station and server are offline.
Solution: disable the system watch process "Syswatch.exe".

14.4 Frequently Asked Questions and Answers
Method:
about Server
Stop and quit HOLLiAS MAGS server program.
Open C: \WINDOWS (or C: \WINNT) and click the right mouse key on
• Q 1: How to realize the diagnose function of server? CAS20000ServerExe.ini and open it as notepad.
> Server self~diagnose: when the load of the master server reaches 100% for coritinuous
Change [Process_17] to [Process_16J, change [Process_16] to [Process_17], change
10 seconds, the server will automatically send a command to switch. ·
ProcessNum=17 to ProcessNum=16, save and exit.
> Operator station diagnose: No. 50 operator station monitors server B, No. 51 ORerator
station monitors server A, when more than 30 seconds the acquired data is not refreshed,
the operator station which is responsible for monitoring the master server will send a Log off and restart server.
command to switch. ·
8 Note:
8 Note: • Do the above operation for server A and 8 respectively.
Operator station diagnose function is only Siiltecnor Siil1Piified ·network.
• Q 8: Error: from 'BROWSER', the description is 'browser service can't get backup
• Q 2: When the DPU module is not connected, the server constantly switc~es. list from \Device\NetBT_Tcpip_{••• }. The backup browser has stopped .•. '
In SP2 version operator stations OP50, OP51 monitor server communication and if the Solution: «Control Panel"- uAdministrative Tools"- "Services"- disable "Computer Browser"
communication between server and DPU interrupts for 1OS then it will send a command to switch. service.
227 228
~-----
-~~~
J>l ""llVS"' MAGS Software Configuration Manual
• Q 9: Error: from 'W32Time', the description is 'NtpCiient: an error happens when
DNS query 'time.windows.com, Ox1'. NtpCiientwill re~try NOS qUery in 15 minutes. The
error is: socket operation is attempting an unreachable hosl (Ox80072751) ...
Solution: ·control Panel"- "Administrative Tools"- "Services"~ disable «Windows lime" service.
• Q 10: After adding users online, switch the server, all added users do not exist?
In all the versions, add users on servers A and B separately, namely, add users when A is master
server, switch server, and add users again when 8 is master server.
0 Note:
• If an empty user is added due to mistakes and the user will be unable to modify, delete and it's
valid.
14.5 Cautions when Using Server
• After server software is installed successfully, industrial Ethernet protocol will

automatically name the four network connections in "Network and Connections" as
"SNETA", "SNETB", "MNETA", "MNETB".Ifthere are only two adapter cards, the former
two names will be adopted. Industrial Ethernet protocol distinguishes the "A network" and
"B network" by the names "SNETA" and "SNETB". If the two cards' names are wrong or the
corresponding network segment wrong, the server and lower network will not
communicate normally.
• During configuring the IP address of server adapter card, you may not configure
the IP address of system network and only configure the IP address of management
network. If we only run the server software, we may not select TCPIIP protocol for the two
cards of system network.
• If you re~lnstall the server software the names of adapter cards may be a mess
which may cause the communication error between DPU and server. After each
re-installation remember to check whether the card's name is correct and whether it
corresponds with the correct network segment.
• For server transmitting information, network A and network B send information
alternately, once each cycle. If only a single network is working, it will send information
once two cycles.
• System manage process "SysManage.exe" can't be closed, otherwise it Can't be
downloaded.
• When server starts up, if communication points can't be found in DPU a prompt
will be displayed and generate a file in path 0:\MACSV\MACSV_SERVER\Macs\.
• If the cycle is 500ms, the communication points of each 10 station are no more
than 5000 points and the total points doesn't exceed 75000 points (if the cycle is 250ms, the
limit of total points is 35000}. The number of total points is available in server online
installation path\macs\WATCH.Iog.
229
PLN (Persero) Pusat /...
~[_4\£7ENJINIRING
PLNDoc.No.
-~ '·
HOLLIAS MACS SYSTEM
OPERATION MANUAL
Rev. Dated Descri tion Pre 'd Chk'd Rev'd A 'd
0 Issue for Review
1 Issue for a
2

CONSORTIUM
(
Consultant :

CONSULTANT ELECTRIC & CEMENT
TECHNIC CO., LTD HDSr
Si ature Dated Project : Stage:

Checked 2x10MW
Reviewed Ja a ura Rev.
HOLLiAS MACS System
Installation and Maintenance Manual
·'
HOLUAS MAGS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
COPYRIGHT STATEMENT
All contents of this Manual, including wordage, charts, symbols, marks, trademarks, product models,
software programs, layout design and etc., are under protection of "Copyright Law of the People's
Republic of China", "Trademark Law of the People's Republic of China", "Patent Law of the People's
Republic of China" and laws of applicable international conventions on copyright, trademark right,
patent right or other property ownerships, and are exclusively owned or held by Beijing HollySys Co.,
Ltd. and Hangzhou HollySys Automation Co., Ltd.
This Manual is only provided for commercial users to read and inquire, without special authorization by
HollySys, no matter for whatever reasons and purposes, it is prohibited to duplicate and communicate
contents of this Manual in any forms by any electronic or mechanical method. Otherwise our company
will ascertain legal responsibility according to law.
Efforts have been made to verifY that contents and charts in this Manual are in compliance with
hardware equipments, but errors may exist, and it is impossible to ensure complete consistency.
I. Meanwhile, contents and charts are subject to regular inspection, modification and maintenance by
HollySys without further notice.
Wordage and logo of HOLUAS MACSrM, HollySys® - 1 t ,. ,..:l
and i'Pf~llt® are trademark or registered trademark ..... ·~ 1' ~
of Beijing HollySys Co., Ltd. and Hangzhou HollySys
Automation Co., Ltd.
Microsoft®, Windows® and WindowsNT® are trademark or registered trademark of Microsoft branches
in U.S. and/or other countries.
All other trademarks or registered trademarks referred to in this Manual belong to their respective
owners.
HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
FOREWORD
Symbols and icons
For the purpose of this Manual, following marks are used for clarification of relevant information:
• • T.
. !p:.
• Used to help users to get in-depth understanding of technical issues of the system.
0 Notice:
• Used to clarify relevant general practice or safety issues to be noticed for usage of system.
0 Prohibition:
• Used to clarify relevant restricted behavior or safety issues to be noticed for usage of system.
Description of editions:
"HOLLiAS MACS System Manual" V5.0 edition was published in February 2009, and the edition
corresponds to MACS V5.X.X software.
User objects:
This Manual is mainly aimed at engineers and technicians engaged in engineering project design,
sales, installation, debug and maintenance.
This Manual provides following information:
Power supply and grounding of system
Transportation, storage and acceptance inspection of system
· · ·· ···· Installation ofsystem ·
Operation and maintenance of system
Purpose of this Manual
This Manual is used to help users to understand and grasp relevant knowledge of structure,
transportation, storage, installation and maintenance of HOLLiAS MACSsystem. lt_can beusedas
criterion for correct installation and usage of HOLLiAS MACS system.
II
HOLLiAS MAGS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
CONTENTS
CHAPTER 1 SYSTEM OUTLINE INTRODUCTION ...................................................................... 1

1 Outline introduction ..................................................................................................................... 1
1.1 System network .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.1 Monitor network .......................................................................................................................... 1
1.1.2 System network connection ....................................................................................................... 2
CHAPTER 2 FIELD CONTROL STATION AND SUBSIDIARY EQUIPMENTS ............................ 4

1 DPU ............................................................................................................................................ 4
2 1/0 unit ........................................................................................................................................ 4
3 Power supply module ................................................................................................................. 4
CHAPTER 3 SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUNDING ..................................................... 5

1 System power supply ................................................................................................................. 5
1.1 Requirements on power supply .................................................................................................. 5
1.2 AC power input of DCS system .................................................................................................. 5
\ 1.3 DCS system power supply ......................................................................................................... 6
1.3.1 Power supply of operator station (engineer station) and server................................................. 6
1.3.2 Power supply of field control station ........................................................................................... 6
2 System grounding ....................................................................................................................... 6
2.1 Grounding classification ............................................................................................................. 7
2.1.1 DCS grounding classification ..................................................................................................... 7
2.1.2 Classification of grounding related to DCS ................................................................................. 7
2.1.3 Classification of grounding pole ..........................................:...................................................... 8
2.2 Brief stipulations on grounding system design ........................................................................... 8
2.2.1 Grounding body installation ........................................................................................................ 8
2.2.2 Material requirements on grounding body and ground grid trunk line ...................................... 10
2.2.3 Requirements on grounding connection line ............................................................................ 10
2.3 Grounding requirements ........................................................................................................... 10
2.3.1 General grounding principle ......................................................................................................11
2.3.2 Connection of "three groundings" inside cabinet... ................................................................... 12
2.3.3 Grounding method of DCS equipment of scattered arrangement.. .......................................... 13
2.3.4 Requirements on common grounding pole (grid) ..................................................................... 13
····· -~········--································· ..
CHAPTER 4 TRANSPORTATION, STORAGE AND ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION .................. 14

1 Product transportation .............................................................................................................. 14
2 Storage environment ..................................................................;............................................. 14
3 Unpacking and acceptance inspection of products .................................................................. 15
CHAPTER 5 INSTALLATION OFDCS SYSTEM ......................................................................;.16

1 Requirements on control room ................................................................................................. 16
1.1 Working environment ................................................................................................................ 16
1.2 Requirements on floor and load bearing .................................................................................. 16
2 Installation of operator station .................................................................................................. 17
2.1 Installation dimension of operator console ............................................................................... 17
2.2 Operator desk layout ................................................................................................................ 19
2.3 Operator console installation and wire connection ................................................................... 19
2.4 Mainframe cabinet type operator station installation ................................................................ 20
3 Installation of cabinet.. .............................................................................................................. 20
3.1 Dimension of cabinet ................................................................................................................ 20
3.2 Installation layout of cabinet ..................................................................................................... 22
3.3 1/0 control cabinet structure ..................................................................................................... 25
3.4 1/0 Installation and wire connection of control cabinet.. ........................................................... 26
CHAPTER 6 SYSTEM OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE ....................................................... 29

1 System starting ......................................................................................................................... 29
1.1 Preparation before system power-on ....................................................................................... 29
1.2 Power-on and operation rules of 1/0 cabinet............................................................................ 29
Ill
1.3 Power-on and operation rules on operator station, engineer station and server ..................... 30
2 Debug and operation maintenance .......................................................................................... 31
3 Field problems and handling of problems ......................................................................•......... 34
IV
CHAPTER 1 SYSTEM OUTLINE INTRODUCTION

1 Outline introduction
Through numerous years of DCS system R&D (Research and Development) and industrial
automation project implementation, on the basis of systematic summary of comments and
recommendations of users of various industries, adequate investigation of the latest development
tendency of aspects such as computer technology, network technology, application software
technology, signal processing technology and etc., HollySys has launched 4th generation DCS
( system HOLliAS MAGS system based on the state-of-the-art technology and adoption of mature
advanced control algorithm.
HOLLiAS MAGS system is a product based on field control layer of HOLLiAS series products of
HollySys Company. The system is a set of comprehensive information system featuring
omnipotence, all-around and integration, and is widely adopted in flow control of industrial
enterprises. It is designed in compliance with relevant standards and norms, and adopts advanced
field bus technology, it can not only use safe and reliable FM/SM series hardware module for
acquisition of field data, but also be conveniently connected with various kinds of field bus
equipments or modules such as remote 1/0, CAN, Profibus and etc.; real-time high-efficiency
reliable redundant manipulator can complete functions such as 1/0 signal processing, PID iuning,
logic control, sequence control, network communication processing and etc. quickly and accurately;
the upper layer monitor system based on Ethernet provides human-machine interface that is
dynamic, abundant, visualized and convenient for manipulation; configuration programming and
debug software that feature easy learning and powerful functions realize configuration of all
functions of whole system; powerful data storage and processing capability can record all important
historical data and provide production data analysis report.
1.1 System network
. - ... •..••..... .•.........•. . ...................•..
1.1.1 Monitor network
Monitor network (MNET) is constituted by 1OOMbps redundancy fast Ethernet, is used for
connection between system server and engineer station, operator station and communication
station, and completes data download of engineer station and real-time data communication
between system server and operator station/communication station. Topological structure is of star
topology, communication medium adopts twisted-pair or optical fiber, its maximum transmission
distance is related to medium adopted: the maximum distance for each section of optical fiber is
2km; the maximum distance for each section of twisted-pair is 100m, and two stages of cascade
connection are allowed most.
1.1.1.1 System network
System network (SNET) is constituted by 1OOMbps redundancy industrial Ethernet, is used for
connection between system server and nodes such as field control station and etc., and completes
data download of field control station and real-time data communication between system server and
field control station. Topological structure is of star topology, is in compliance with IEEE802.3 and
IEEE802.3u standard, is based on TCP/IP and real-time industrial Ethernet protocol, and features
communication rate 10/1 OOMbps self-adaptation, communication medium adopts category 5
unshielded twisted-pair or optical fiber featuring RJ45 connector, its maximum transmission
distance is related to medium adopted: the maximum distance for each section of optical fiber is
2km; the maximum distance is 1OOm !or each section of twisted-pair, and two stages of cascade
connection are allowed most.
1.1.1.2 Control network
Control network (CNET} is an internal network of field control station, it realizes interconnection and
information transmission between each 1/0 module inside control cabinet and DPU (Distributed
Processing Unit}, adopts ProfiBus-DP field bus for connection with 110 modules and intelligent
equipment, completes process or field communication tasks in a real-time, quick and high efficient
manner, and is in compliance with the maximum communication rate 500Kbps of international
standard IEC61158 (national standard: JB/T10308.3-2001/European standard EN50170}. Its basic
characteristics are as follows:
Topological structure is of bus type, and active bus terminators are available on both sides of bus;
Maximum number of nodes is 126, in which each subsection can be connected with 22 nodes most,
all sections can be connected through relay;
Transmission rate is 9.6Kbps-12Mbps, and is related to distance of each section. In case distance
is within 1OOm, transmission rate can reach 12Mbps. All equipments in one same system shall
adopt one same rate;
Communication medium adopts ProfiBus-DP communication cable or optical fiber.
1.1.2 System network connection
1.1.2.1 .Connecti.on. of m9nitor network
In operator station, engineer station, system server and communication station, normally there are
two 1OOM Ethernet cards used for completing the function of network communication monitor,
Ethernet cards are set with different IP addresses, the two Ethernet cards are connected with
network switch of respective network sections by Ethernet cable, then connection of monitor
network is completed.
1.1.2.2 Connection of system network
System server is configured with two additional 1OOM Ethernet cards for completing system
network communication function, which are used for communication with DPU. Engineer station is
also configured with two 1OOM Ethernet cards for connection with system network, so as to
complete the debugging and download of control program in DPU. DCS system DPU provides dual
redundancy Ethernet interface.
2
1.1.2.3 Connection of control network
I Control network interface of DPU
DPU of system field control station features built-in Profibus-DP master interface. DPU provides
DP connection port to outside through backplane of DPU rack.
2 Control network interface of 1/0 module
The intelligent 1/0 unit of FM series hardware system consists of 1/0 module installed on rail
and corresponding terminal module. 1/0 module is combined with terminal module and is
connected with field signal cable through terminal module for acquisition, processing and
'.' driving of field data and realization of digitalization of field data; 110 module communicates with
DPU through ProfiBus-DP field bus .build in terminal module.
The intelligent 110 unit of SM series hardware system consists of 110 module installed on DPU
rack /extension rack and corresponding terminal module. 110 module is connected with
corresponding terminal module through prefabricated cable (DB25) for acquisition, processing
and driving of field data and realization of digitalization of field data; each 110 unit
communicates with DPU through ProfiBus-DP field bus.
3 Brief introduction of control network connection
Connection of DP communication port of DPU with 110 module constitutes the control network
of system.
For the sake of convenient plug in/out and maintenance of DPU, instead of using DPU as
terminal connection point of DP network, it is necessary to select two 110 modules as terminal
connection points of DP network, and install active terminal module on four-hole connecting
terminal of the unit. DPU, DP repeater and terminal matching unit constitute communication
node of control network. Control network adopts ProfiBus-DP communication cable or optical
.................... fiber.. ln.case.the.DP communication speedJs.cpnfigtJredJl?c t;QQK, prg\ficle<l th§tno_Qf'r!lpeater
is added, the longest distance of shielded twisted pair is 200 meters. In case opticaffibe)r
transmission is adopted, it is necessary to add DP bus photo-electricity transceiver on both
sides of optical fiber, the length of driving multi mode fiber is no more than 1,000 meters.
3
CHAPTER2 FIELD CONTROL STATION AND SUBSIDIARY EQUIPMENTS

Field control station mainly consists of DPU, 10 unit, power supply module and other equipments, and is
mainly used for realization of system control functions such as operation status monitor of field equipments,
data acquisition and processing, automatic closed loop control, electric equipment switch control and etc.
1 DPU (Distributed Processing Unit)
The DPU is the core of field control station in HOLLiAS MAGS system, it adopts dual-computer
redundant configuration, and features internal hardware redundant change-over circuit and failure
self-diagnose circuit, it is not only a platform implementing various control strategies, but also a pivot
between system network and control network. DPU is used for implementing dispatch and calculation of
various real-time tasks (such as algorithm, 1/0 management and etc.). Built-in micro-kernel real-time
multi-task operating system provides quick scan cycle and open structure, and integrates network
communication, data processing, continuous control, dis.crete control, sequence control, batch process
and etc., forming advanced control system that features stability, reliability and low consumption.
2 1/0 unit
1/0 unit provides a signal interface between factory area operation and 1/0 unit to HOLLiAS MAGS
system. Generally speaking, all 1/0 unit modules feature following characteristics: built-in Profibus-DP
slave interface; 24VDG reversal protection, current overload protection, signal channel overvoltage
protection; hardware watchdog; support of hot swap; real-time state display.
3 Power supply module
The system power supply module of HOLLiAS MAGS system is an AG/DG change-over equipment, and
it adopts change-over power supply technology to realize the change-overfrom 220VAG to 24VDG
and/or 48VDG, and provides power supply to field equipments such as DPU, 1/0 module and etc. System
-powersupply·modulecannotonlybeusedindependently,·butalsobeconfiguredredundantly,lnorderto··
enhance system reliability, power supply module adopts parallel redundancy design, which features
redundancy configuration of two units of power supply module and parallel operation, so as to reduce the
malfunction caused due to power supply, under 1+1 mode, it is possible to realize interference-free
change-over and online replacement of power supply; during parallel operation of power supply module,
power supply module adopts parallel connection/current balance design, in which malfunction or stop of
output of any power supply module will not affect the power output of the system, other power supply
modules share load again, so that interference-free change-over and online replacement of power supply
are realized.
4
CHAPTER3 SYSTEM POWER SUPPLY AND GROUNDING

1 System power supply
1.1 Requirements on power supply
HOLLiAS MAGS system realizes real-time monitor of field signal, recording and real-time control of
field, and requires that operation power supply must ensure continuous uninterrupted power supply.
The basic requirements of system upon operational power supply are as follows:
\_ Voltage: single phase 220VAG + 10%- 220VAG-15%;

Frequency: 50HZ ± 2HZ;
Waveform distortion rate: less than 3%.
1.2 AC power input of DCS system
HOLUAS MAGS system is equipped with power distribution cabinet, dual-channel power supply
provided in field enters power distribution cabinet (one channel is from UPS, while another channel
comes from factory security section), and are provided respectively to equipments such as operation
station, field control station and etc. after distribution.
For operator station, power distribution cabinet supplies power through special ATSE (Automatic
Transfer Switch Equipment); for server, due to its importantance in system operation, therefore UPS
and auxiliary power system provide power to redundant servers.
For 1/0 control station, UPS power and auxiliary power should be transmitted to redundant power
supply modules, and are supplied to DPU or 1/0 module through redundant power output of
24VDG/48VDG, relay cabinet, ETS cabinet and etc. may· supply power to relay by using power
-supply;itspowersupply·theory·is·identical·with-1/0·control-cabineto-····-~·---·-·--·---·--·-·~-·--·· ··-··-·--····--·
In case field system is not equipped with power distribution cabinet or dual-channel power supply is
not available in field, then in order to ensure safe and stable operation of DGS system, it is
necessary to provide at least one channel of UPS power.
• Tip:
• In order to ensure normal operation of DGS system, DGS system power supply should be led out
separately from power supply section, with the exception of power supply to DGS system, it is not
allowed to supply power to other high load equipments. especially it is not allowed to supply
power to large inductive load, such as automatic door, actuator, motor and etc.
5
The most ideal DCS system power supply mode is: 220VAC or 380VAC from auxiliary power section
one is transmitted to power distribution cabinet through special UPS of DCS system, and 220VAC
led separately from auxiliary power section two is transmitted to power distribution cabinet. Major
part of power supply outputted from transfer switch equipment of power distribution cabinet should
be UPS power, the reason is that 220VAC power quality after inversion is good, and is beneficial for
stable operation of operation station and etc.
1.3 DCS system power supply
1.3.1 Power supply of operator station (engineer station) and server
Upon delivery from factory, DCS system special·operator console is normally configured with power
supply terminal block and air switch, 220VAC power led out from power distribution cabinet is
directly connected in air switch inlet. Grounding wire of power supply terminal block and grounding
wire of common terminal block should be connected to screw (such as set screw of partition board)
of operator console cabinet.
Mainframe cabinet installation is adopted, and power distribution cabinet shall provide one channel
of power supply for each unit of mainframe computer separately, power supply is normally switched
over through wiring terminal. Grounding wire of power connection terminal block and grounding wire
of common terminal block should be connected to screw (such as set screw of partition board) of
operator console cabinet.
Server of DCS system is normally installed inside server cabinet, UPS and auxiliary power provide
power to redundant servers, and power supply is normally switched over through wiring terminal.
Grounding wire of power connection terminal block and grounding wire of power distribution cabinet
should be connected to screw (such as set screw of partition board) of operator console cabinet.
1.3.2 Power supply of field control station
Field control cabinets (1/0 control station, relay cabinet, ETS cabinet and etc.) require dual-channel
power supply: UPS power and auxiliary power safety section· power supply;· · · · ·· · ··· ··· · .............. - ··1
For 1/0 control station, connect dual-channel power supply respectively to two air-switch inlets on
upper left corner of the back of cabinet, dual-channel incoming feeder of each air switch
corresponds to left (N) and right (L) respectively. Protection grounding of AC power supply delivered
together with power supply should be connected on protection grounding screw of cabinet.
For relay cabinet, ETS cabinet and etc., it is necessary to connect dual-channel power supply on
relevant position as per design drawing of cabinet.
2 System grounding
In case of problems of signal entered DSC system, power supply source or DCS system equipments, ·
effective grounding system can conduct overload current to ground quickly, so as to avoid electric
shock injury of personnel and damage of equipment. Grounding system can also provide shield for
1/0 signal, eliminate electronic noise interference, prevent electrification of equipment shell or static
electricity accumulation, and avoid electric shock injury of personnel and damage of equipment.
6.
• . Tip:
• Correct grounding is the key for successful operation of digital control system, in case of failure
to form good grounding habit or shortcut during grounding installation, serious problem of the
whole system and imponderable loss may be caused.
2.1 Grounding classification

2.1.1 DCS grounding classification
Under normal circumstances, DCS control system needs three types of grounding: system
grounding, protection grounding and shielding grounding.
l> Protection grounding: is a protection measure adopted to prevent electrostatic charge
accumulation on equipment shell and avoid injury of human body. All operator cabinets, field
control station cabinets, printers, terminal cabinets and etc. of HOLLiAS MAGS system should
feature protection grounding.
l> System grounding: i.e. system power supply grounding, it provides reliable and accurate
reference point for DCS electronic system.
l> Shielding grounding: it can shield electromagnetic interference received during signal
transmission, so as to enhance signal quality. Shielding grounding is required for 1/0 signal in
DCS system.
2.1.2 Classification of grounding related to DCS
l> ISG, i.e. intrinsic safety grounding, is the ISG of intrinsic safety instrument and Zener safety
···· ·barrier;ifisnormallyreqliirecrthafzeropotenfialofinfiinsicsatefYinsfrumeiifancrsatefY~barner
should be identical with ground potential of geographical environment and technique
equipments connected with intrinsic safety instrument, so as to ensure that field signal circuit is
free from extreme electric charge accumulation, and spark energy generated during
malfunction is inadequate to become explosion fire source. In practice, usually field equipment
shell areconnectedwith system grounding (signal grounding) and ISG, so as to ensure reliable
work of safety barrier, under this circumstances, power supply grounding (+24V negative
terminal} supplying power. at DCS side to Zener safety barrier floats. Connect into common
grounding pole.
l> Lightning protection grounding: conduct lightning energy into grounding of earth. Within the
scope of electric ground grid coverage, there is normally more than .one lightning protection
grounding. The lightning protection grounding can be connected with common grounding pole
through equipotential connector. Due to the fact that the energy conducted by lightning arrester
into earth is huge during lightning strike, rapid rise of electric potential of partial ground grid will
be formed, therefore grounding point of DCS shall be over 15 meters away from lightning
7
conduction down lead point.
2.1.3 Classification of grounding pole
~ Electric ground grid: take thermal power plant as an example, electric ground grid is band steel
of cross section above 150 mm2 buried underground in whole plant area, at certain spacing,
grounding ·pole should be configured for connection with ground grid; underground pipes of the
whole plant and building framework are connected with ground grid in electric engineering,
forming comprehensive g'rounding body covering the whole plant objectively, i.e. electric
grounding, its distribution resistance to ground is normally less than 1 ohm. In power plant, all
lightning protection equipments, technique equipments, pipelines, electric appliance grounding
and transformer neutral point connected with ground are connected with electric grounding,
forming a unified reference electric potential that is deemed as reference point. Electric
grounding covers the whole plant area, and in theory the whole plant area is an equipotential
body.
~ Special grounding pole (grid): is normally located in the· scope of industrial plant area,
numerous pieces of grounding pole are connected with each other and constitute special
grounding pole (grid); and is independent from electric grounding (potential difference from
electric grounding may exist).
2.2 Brief stipulations on grounding system design
Stipulations of instrument grounding system design on grounding method, ground grid trunk line and
grounding connection line are introduced briefly as follows. If it is necessary to find further
information, please refer to relevant industrial standard.
2.2.1 Grounding body installation
Installation of individual grounding body is shown in Figure 3.2.2-1:
8
Groun d.mg su b-trunkr1n e
I ( ) ) Common connection boa
600
500
~.400 / Ground surface
1/ / / _,L of-- Steel cover board

oo oo
I· 0 rounding master trunk line
\ oo oo
600 [ '----,
oo oo
0 0
Pile top
oo oo
oo Reinforced concrete
0 oo
grouhding well
0
L2500 <!>57 X <1>3.5 _

zinc plating pipe -
urounding bodytip
grounding body
Figure 3.2.2-1 Typical individual grounding body installation

Grounding master trunk line: the system gathers all grounding sub-trunk lines through common
connection board, and grounding master trunk line is led out from common connection, and is
connected to grounding body. Common connection board shall be fabricated by using copper board,
and shall be configured inside grounding connection box and shall be insulated from box.
· Grounding body: is·good·conductonoailed underground,·currenttransmitted from grounding master···· · · ···· ·· ·· !
trunk line is conducted into ground through grounding body. Copper brazing is adopted between
grounding body and grounding master trunk line, and corrosion proof treatment is required after
welding.
Intrinsic safety grounding must be configured with independent grounding body.
Ground grid trunk line can be utilized to connect multiple grounding bodies into network.
When overlap welding is adopted for ground grid trunk line and grounding body, its overlap length
must be 2 times of flat steel width or 6 times of round steel diameter. Figure 3.2.2-2 is the typical
installation of multiple grounding bodies.
9
HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
Ground surface
5oo~soo
1-----=rn
More than 50 -~ n 25X4
Flat steel ground grid
trunk line
L50X50X 5 2500
Angle steeI
grounding body
v -
I I
'
5000 5000
Figure 3.2.2-2 Typical installation of multiple grounding bodies

2.2.2 Material requirements on grounding body and ground grid trunk line
Specification of steel material used for grounding body and ground grid trunk line can be selected as
Table 3.2.2-1, in case grounding resistance fails to meet requirements, it is allowed to select copper
material. If grounding body and ground grid trunk line are installed in location where corrosion is
very strong, it is necessary to adopt corrosion proof measures such as hot galvanizing, hot tinning
and etc. or enlargement of cross section appropriately in accordance with corrosion property.
Table 3.2.2-1 Typical installation of multiple grounding bodies
Name Flat steel Round steel Equilateral angle steel Steel pipe
Specification 40x4Qx4 <!>45x¢>3.5
(mm) <1>14-<1>20
L_~~~~--------L________L___ _ 50x5Qx5 __ _ _ _ L__2~~~~
<!>57x<!>3.5
2.2.3 Requirements on grounding connection line

Protection grounding and shielding grounding of HOLLiAS MACS system shall be connected to
plant area· special· electric ground grid or grounding body by using copper core insulation wire or
cable. Grounding wire should adopt insulation copper core wire, of which the cross section is no Jess
2
than 2.5mm , and grounding bus should adopt multi-strand insulation copper core wire, of which the
cross section is no Jess than 16mm2 .
2.3 Grounding requirements
All shells of operator cabinet, field control station cabinet, printer, terminal cabinet and etc. should be
connected with protection grounding, so as to prevent human electric shock accident. Protection
grounding should be connected to plant area electric ground grid or grounding of building where
10
equipment is located (in thermal power plant, building grounding and electric ground grid are
connected with each other), and the grounding resistance should be less than 40.
System grounding should normally be connected to plant area electric ground grid, so as to ensure
equipotentiality between 1/0 of MAGS system and field signal device and control device (in thermal
power plant, all technique equipments, technique pipelines and auxiliary model devices and control
devices have been connected to electric ground grid), and the grounding resistance should be less
than 40. ·
2.3.1 General grounding principle
}> The whole system is divided as "system grounding", "protection grounding" and "shielding
( · grounding", which can not be mixed inside cabinet.
"Three groundings" are collected into one point grounding in cabinet, and grounding resistance
should be less than 40. In case Zener safety barrier is available in field, it is essential to ensure
that protection grounding resistance is less than 10, in case it is impossible to ensure this, it is
necessary to make another grounding pole as intrinsic safety grounding, and ensure that
grounding resistance is less than 10.
}> One system shall have only one-point grounding, and shall share grounding with electric
ground grid.
}> Lightning protection grounding is connected with master trunk line of electric ground grid
through lightning arrester/shock wave suppressor.
}> In order to ensure good contact between stranded wire and threaded terminal, it is necessary to
configure copper spade shape lug.
Upon delivery of cabinet from factory, system grounding and shielding grounding have been
connected with protection grounding. The three groundings are separated from each other
.i.l1si.de....G<l.bine!,;3ndhaY<omsPective u.silges.•...buLar!:'.connected. . togeth.e.r ..on . . cabinet, ...e.ach. of
which is deemed as a small system .
• Tip:
-~
• The precondition for connecting three groundings is that there is no potential difference or
current between them, no interference will be introduced, then it is allowed to connect them
together. Under normal circumstances, there is no potential difference between shielding
grounding, system grounding and protection grounding inside cabinet, and there is no
interference if there is no circuit or current. In order to ensure that they form an equipotential
body, it is necessary to connect them together. Under abnormal circumstances, as the three
groundings are connected together, ensuring that system is an equipotential body, danger is
released through protection grounding, and human body is free from potential hazard, it is
necessary to select cross section and length of protection grounding cable for guarantee.
11
2.3.2 Connection of "three groundings" inside cabinet

2.3.2.1 Grounding device of system configuration
:.. Operator console, printer console, server cabinet: protection grounding screw is configured.
:.. Relay cabinet and power distribution cabinet: protection grounding screw is configured.
:.. 10 cabinet: shielding grounding bus bar, protection grounding screw and system grounding bus
bar (connected with protection grounding, float as far as possible in case of inquiry power
supply) are configured.
(
:.. Instrument cabinet and manual operator console: shielding grounding bus bar and protection
grounding screw are configured.
:.. Safety barrier cabinet: shielding grounding bus bar, intrinsic safety grounding bus bar and
protection grounding screw are configured.
2.3.2.2 Connection of "protection grounding"
Protection grounding copper billet of field control cabinet is connected with field control cabinet,
protection groundings of field control cabinets can be connected in serial through copper conductive
cable (above<!> 6), and be connected with common grounding pole at the final point.
2.3.2.3 Connection of "system grounding"
Upon delivery of cabinet from factory, system grounding in cabinet 1s connected to protection
grounding inside cabinet, and then is connected to ground grid through protection grounding. In
case of poor field system grounding, it is allowed to adopt floating grounding method. In case of
definite existence of unshielded signal, regarding unshielded input signal of field grounding, it is
. ne.ce.ssaryJoadd...signal ...is.olator.ora.doptisoJatLorLiyP.!lofinPutmociu.le, inc/3~ei?ol§ti()nfl1C>.dYie . is ...
not available, then rather than connect +24V negative terminal to a ground, it is allowed to suspend
the system ground of cabinet of the signal in air (dismantle the connection line between system bus
bar and protection grounding).
2.3.2.4 Connection of "shielding grounding"
"Shielding groundings" are collected into master bus bar through branch bus bars inside cabinet, are
connected to protection grounding at one point, and are connected to field ground grid through
protection grounding inside cabinet. Shielding layer of field signal entered single cabinet is required
to be connected at" one side to shielding grounding bus bar inside cabinet. Shielding layer of
communication cable (including DP cable) is also required to be connected with shielding grounding
bus bar. Upon delivery of cabinet from factory, system grounding inside cabinet has been connected
to protection grounding.
12
2.3.3 Grounding method of DCS equipment of distributed arrangement
Connection between HOLLiAS MACS system equipments of distributed arrangement is normally of
network (communication) wire, for example: field control stations are distributed to field, operators
are in different control rooms, stations are connected by using multimode fiber, or category 5 twisted
pair or DP shielded twisted pair.
~ Stations connected with optical fiber: grounding method and requirement of stations are
identical with DCS equipments of concentrated arrangement, and is connected to electric
grounding in adjacency.
~ Stations connected by using category 5 twisted pair or DP shielded twisted pair:
Method 1: protection grounding of control room is firstly connected with common connection
board, which is connected with common grounding pole through master grounding trunk line.
Observing from the direction of common grounding, the whole ground grid is a star-type
structure.
Method 2: stations on both sides have their own common grounding poles, which need no
metal connection, and the grounding method of stations is identical with DCS equipment of
concentrated arrangement. Category 5 twisted pair or DP shielded twisted pair must be laid
through galvanized steel pipe or metal bridge, which must be grounded reliably.
2.3.4 Requirements on common grounding pole (grid)
~ In case distributed resistance to ground of plant area electric ground grid >;40, it is allowed to
deem plant area electric ground grid as common grounding pole (grid) of DCS system.
~ In case resistance to ground of plant area electric ground grid is comparatively large or is in a
state of disorder, it is necessary to configure grounding system independently, i.e. common I
grounding pole (grid) of DCS system.
!
···· · · ~-· ·Tliedisfributea· resislancetOgrOund or commol1 gfoufiail1g pJie··wr;ar witt1ourintrinsicsafety · · I
grounding is less than 40; less than 10 in case intrinsic safety grounding is available. Line
impedance of master grounding trunk line is less than 0.1 0. I
There is no connection point of lightning protection grounding or connection point of welding
grounding within 15m in adjacency of common grounding pole, no connection point of over
30KW high/low voltage power consuming equipment shell within 5m. In case the condition can I
!
not be met, lightning protection grounding is connected with master trunk line of common
grounding pole through lightning arrester/shock wave suppressor.
13
t'2~f·l "!;)
r4 """"'"" HOLUAS MAGS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
CHAPTER 4 TRANSPORTATION, STORAGE AND ACCEPTANCE INSPECTION

·Consisting of engineer station, operator station, system server, field control station, high-level calculating
station, administrative net gateway, communication control station, network and etc., HOLLiAS MAGS system
is a .computer system used to realize functions including large/medium-sized distribution control and
large-scale data acquisition and supervision. Each 110 unit and DPU inside field control station is connected
through control network for communication, field control stations, servers, operator stations, engineer stations
and etc. are connected through system network and control network, constituting the whole control system.
In order to ensure nonmal operation of HOLLiAS MAGS system, after delivery of the system from factory,
correct packing/transportation, appropriate storage environment, workmg anviroo1ment and correct/reliable
field installation are very important. In which, field installation includes several parts as follows: installation of
cabinet, installation of system grounding and system power supply, connection oi system network, laying of
signal cable, connection of signal line and etc. Hereunder introduction is made for each part respectively.
1 Product transportation
Product transportation should be implemented in strict accordance with the following stipulations:
l' It is required to adopt good protection measures during transportation, packing box should be
free from rain, snow or liquid substances and mechanical damage. During long distance
transportation, loading in open ship cabin and vehicle carriage is prohibited; during
transshipment, storage in outdoor warehouse is prohibii:ed.
l' Box containing engineer station and operator station should be in compliance with grade I
stipulations of GB9813 on vibration, collision and impact adaptability; box containing 110 station
should be in compliance with grade II stipulations of GB9813 on vibration, collision and impact
adaptability.
·l' During handling of cabinet box, violent shock, collision and falling are strictlyprohibited, and it is
necessary to pay attention to "upwards" mark on cabinet box, upside down of cabinet is strictly
prohibited.
\. l' Weight of product:
-9- The gross weight of 1/0 station and equipments installed inside should be 270Kg-350Kg
per cabinet.
-9- The gross weight of operator console and equipments installed inside should be
260KgN290Kg per unit.
2 Storage environment
After products arrive at field, in case installation conditions are not available for the time being, it is
necessary to store products in warehouse without unpacking, and it is strictly prohibited to store
equipments outdoor. Requirements on storage environment are as follows:
14
HOLLiAS MAGS System !nstellation and Maintenance Manual
Temperature: 0-+40"C; Relative humidity: 40%-80%, non-condensing.
It is prohibited to store inflammable, explosive or corruptive gas or article in warehouse.
Warehouse should be free from violent mechanical shock, impact and strong magnetic field.
Ground clearance of packing box and wood box cushion should be no less than 1OOmm,
distance from wall, heat source, cold source, window or air ventilation opening should be at
least 500mm.
Storage period should be no more than six months.
3 Unpacking inspection of products
Upon unpacking of products, the two parties of manufacturer and user shall inspect equipment
appearance, check whether there are damage or other problems during transportetion or storage
period, and inspect equipments as per packing list, and check whether quantity and type are in
compliance with the packing list.
15
CHAPTERS INSTALLATION OF DCS SYSTEM

For the purpose of this document, "cabinet" refers to 110 control cabinet, relay cabinet, power
distribution cabinet, operator console and etc. contained in DCS equipments.
1 Requirements on control room
DCS system cabinet is normally installed in control room, and field signal is connected to 1/0 control
stetion through signal cable. In order to ensure normal operation of system, conditions of control
room are important.
( 1.1 Working environment
Environmental temperature: O'C-40'C;
Relative humidity: 40%-90%;
Atmospheric pressure: 86KPa-1 06Kpa.
Control room should be free from violent mechanical shock and strong magnetic field.
After completing installation and wiring o·f control cabinet and operator console, it is necessary to
conduct dust-proof and seal treatment of cable opening. In case it is difficult to improve dust-proof
effect, it is necessary to conduct dust elimination regularly inside operation mainframe and control
station, the effect of electric dust-blowing pump is comparatively good.
In order to meet working environment conditions, it is necessary to maintein cleanliness in control
room, and pay attention to dust-proof, windows/doors of control room should be of good sealing, it is
recommended to instell air conditioner in control room.
1.2 Requirements on floor and load bearing
Channel steel should be fixed and installed on floor of control room, and field control cabinet and
operator console should be instelled on channel steel, therefore, floor of control room should have
=
D D
Figure 5.1.2-1 Schematic diagram of control room cable routing
16
adequate strength to support the weight of cabinet
Cabinet is connected with base through insulation screw, and therefore cabinet is insulated from
base. l
In order to ensure safety of operator and avoid signal interference, it is necessary to lay signal line
and power line connected to operator station and field control station in cable trench or lay them by
adopting cable tray, rather than to lay them directly on floor.
)> If floor in control room adopts general anti-static raised fioor used in computer room, the height
of raised floor should normally be 30mm-50mrn. Signal line and power line should be laid in
hollow layer underneath floor, and floor cable duct should be adopted as far as possible. Figure
( 5.1.2-1 is the schematic diagram of control room cable routing.
l> If control room is of terrazzo floor, it is necessary to build cable trench underground, and fix
cabinet above cable trench through foundation bolt hole of cabinet.
2 Installation of operator station
There are two types of installation method of DCS system operator stat;on. One method is operator
console type installation, and another method is mainfr2me cab;net type installation.
2.1 Installation dimension of operator console
Mainframe, large screen monitor, printer, standard keyboard, track ball and operator special
keyboard of operator station can be placed on the operator console. One operator console
corresponds to one operator station.
Supportive devices of operator console include printer console, of which the overall dimension is
completely identical with operator console. The difference between operator console and printer
console is that special keyboard opening is not available on printer console, but two paper-feeding
holes are added on printer console .
.......................................................................
See exterior shape and installation dimension of operator console and printer console as Figure
5.2.1-1 and Table 5.2.1-1 respectively.
Figure 5.2.1-1 Exterior shape of operator console and printer console
17
Table 5.2.1-1 Exterior dimension of operator console and printer console
Exterior dimension
Width spacing of foundation
Model Name (mm)
bolt (mm)
Width Height I Depth
FP911 Operator console 700 800 ~100 500
FP912 Printer console /operator 700 800 -- 1,100 500
console
FP913 OQ_erator console 800 800 1 ,iOO 600
FP914 Printer console /operator 800 800 1,100 600
console
(
See the final installation effect of operator console as Figure 5.2.1-2.
Figure 5.2.1-2 Field installation '''xarc.pic of e-peratoc console

If user uses other operator consoles rather than adopF> opcta+cx "'''·'sole of HOLUAS MAGS, then it
is required to reserve position for special l<c,y!~Od'ci anci tra· "" tJal! on operator console, and punch a
cable hole on the left side of operator console '3ece e:<tecior • • ne: ·• ·on of special keyboard as Figure
5.2.1-3.
18
,_
_ ...:•. .:· - =-·-~-~ _,.,_"!i!_•____________:._H-"0"-L=l=.i"-A!OS'-"Ivl"-'AC,~_:,'))~"_l?!''-'i•:st§.i!a'tion and Maintenance Manual
35
Figure 5.2.1-3 Exterior dimension of special keyboard

Another installation method of operator station is operator station mainframe cabinet, and with
adoption of this method it is possible to meet requirernents of neat and unified control room layout
better. The method is to place mainframe of operator station in mainframe cabinet, and place
equipments such as monitor, printer, keyboard and etc. on operBtcr console, equipments such a~
monitor, printer, keyboard, mouse/trace baii and 8tco. a:e connected with mainframe through
extension line. Each mainframe cabinet can contain maximurn 6 units of mainframe box. Exterior
dimension of operator station mainframe cabinet is wmpletely identical with field control station
cabinet.
2.2 Operator console layout
Operator console is the location where the operator works, duri:·.g :'>rrangement of operator console,
in order to facilitate the placement of OiJ81'atur ;;eat, and ""'erve personnel passage space, the
distance between operator console and neig:-:bofing ~>b]e·~~ts e>~ v;::.·\\ should be more than 1,000mm.
Another important factor is that orientation of mY.ilor shoc<.c\ i.>e 1·easonable, and indoor light ray
adaptation should be appropriate, so as to ensure
·· ~· ·- · ·clear display·screen;freefromreflection and .,tc,
2.3 Operator console installation and wiring
Installation steps of operator console are as folli:>w3:
1) Install and fix foundation bolt on control ..oorn
floor as per installation dimension; Cab!ne1 base
2) Connect and fasten operator Siation cabtnet Floor

base and foundation bolt, as shown in Figure
5.2.3-1;
3) It is allowed to weld base directly on fixture
channel steel rather than adopt foundaticn
bolt installation; Concrete
Figu< ., ':.2 3-1 Installation of foundation bolt

19
l'id ~t·l""'
__JII'JII_fdl_n_._"""_•s_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
H_:O_L_L_iA_S_:_N_lA_C_:_S_System i_r:_s_tallation and Maintenance Manual
4) Upon delivery from factory, operator console is normally configured with air switch and power
supply terminal block, and power supply cable is connecte.:J on inlet of air switch in operator
console;
5) Place monitor on appropriate position in the center of operator console surface;
6) Place mainframe of operator station on partition board of operator console cabinet;
7) Place printer on printer console ; ·
8) Place standard keyboard, trace ball and special keyboard on operator console;
9) Insert signal line of monitor on VGA disrlay inte:-fac~ r.A (1<::~\nfrarne;
10) Connect printer with operation station mainframe by using printer signal cable;
11) Insert standard keyboard into keyboard interface of mainframe;
12) Connect special keyboard on interface (USB) of mainframe;
13) Connect mouse on interface of mainfran.e;
14) Connect laid Ethernet line on corresponding t:thernet adapter interface;
15) Connect laid grounding on set screw of cabinet, such as set screw of partition board;
16) Insert power cable of operation station mainframe, monitor, printer or other equipments (such
as hub) on power supply terminal block.
2.4 Mainframe cabinet type operator station inswHatkm

If operator station adopts mainframe cabinet, it is necessary to place peripheral equipments such as
monitor, printer, keyboard and etc on operator t:\X!Soie. Then con~\ect the connection line between
mainframe, monitor, printer. keYtJQ~rcj, -''•()use _.and ___ <etc_. The_ ion[) est distance of direcUindirect
connection line between mainframe, monitor, prir\ter 2rld kE;yb;~a·r2 is:~ ·~· ·
Mainframe and monitor: 10 meters at its maximum, it is necesss:uy to add long line video driver in
case of exceeding of this distance;
Mainframe and printer: 10 meters at its maximc•m;
Mainframe and special keyboard: 60 meters at 'ts m<~xiMum;
Mainframe and standard keyboard: 10 metet·s,
Mainframe and mouse/trace ball: 60 metei's if :;enal p/· co:•r:ncti ·n is adopted.
3 Installation of cabinet
3.1 Dimension of cabinet
Cabinet includes 110 mainframe cabinet, 1/0 elltenston cabinet, relay cabinet, power distribution
20
~_
__1_1-'-..:..r_._J..
_l . ._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _.:_H:.:Oo::L::.:L::.:iA'-"'-S·MAGS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
cabinet, server cabinet and etc. In which, with the exception of the difference of server cabinet
dimension, exterior shape and installation dimension of other cabinets are completely identical. An
introduction is made as follows by taking 1/0 mainframe cabinet as an example.
1/0 mainframe cabinet is of framework structure, and front/rear doors and left/right side panels can
be dismantled. Cabinet is designed with ventilation hole and dust-cover under front/rear door,
cabinet is equipped with ventilation unit on the top, document bag is installed inside front door, and
four hoisting rings are installed on top of cabinet. Rubber insulation is between cabinet base and
cabinet body. Two grounded screw holes (ME) are ce>nfigumd '-"·,der cabinet body, 4 M15 foundation
bolt holes are configured on base. Field signal line enters cabinet from the bottom of cabinet.
• • Tip:
• Multiple cabinets can be installed intensively, in case of intensive installation, for the sake of
convenient connection and fixture between cabinets, it is necessary to remove side panels
between cabinets.
See exterior dimension of 1/0 mainframe cabinet as Figure 5.3.1-1.
Side door
setscmw
I .
:-.!!!J:._·-~
1
Cabinet frontal face cabinet lateral lac(•
Figure 5.3.1-1 Exterior dimension and ino;tallation oimens;on of !10 contrc! cabinet
The depth of server cabinet is larger than t1>e t of !10 cab;net, and 'ts installation exterior shape and
installation dimension as Figure 5.3 .1-2:
21
__r_.,_~_;}_.___________
__D __;Hc:..::O.=L:::L:::.iA-'-S=-'-"i,..::IA-'-C=S-=S::..'Yc::stem Installation and Maintenance Manual
Cabinet frontal face
Figure 5.3.1-2 Exterior dirr:ension and instaliation dimension of server cabinet

3.2 Installation and layout o:• cabinet
Cabinet can be install"d ind•opendently or i.l!E:nsively. Intensive installation is namely
combination installation of mUltiple cabinets, it i•· necessary to remove side penal from both
sides of middle cabinet, reserve only oui<H' sid•'> pane!s M two sides of cabinets, and connect
"·-- · racks of two adjacent cabinets by usingbolt(l\i\1 0) use<Hor fixing.side panel. .......... __ .. .
In order to ensure good wmtilatic·n of system, facilitate opening/closing of cabinet door and work of
operator, during installation of ca':linet, the distance· from roof shouid be no less than 500mm, i.e. the
height of roof from ground surfa<:e should be no :ess than 2,l00mrn, the distance between lateral
flank of cabinet and wall or object should be no lee's than 1.000mm, the distance between front/rear
side of cabinet and wall or ob;3ct should be n:; less than 1,500mm, if cabinets are arranged
longitudinally, the distancE, betwe9n two rows ~~ o binecs should lle no less than 2,500mm.
Length of space required !'or intensive hstEJ.:irnio."': (!f m units ·.A :.::3bi:1t.r~s in paraHei is at least:
L:!:1000x2+799xm+cabinel side panel thiclmessx2
Width of space required fer instanation of n rD~IVS c:' C8bin.st ~s .~;t lee,:::;t:
w.!:1500x2+650xn+2500x ( n-1)
22
HOL.LiAS Mi'.CS Svstem instaliation and Maintenance Manual
----··----------....>'..------------
Figure 5.3.2-1 is schematic diagram of intensive installation of cabinets
"--------·-·---- ----.-·-------/'
lnteni\e inslfilation of muits
of Olbiret in parallel
'/
v;
j/·
1-4-l-----------------·------·____,;··
;/
i
l/.:zz±u:u:zzzzzzzz--zzz:z..?:ZZZZ:.ZZZZZ2•:ZT7777Z2Z2"'=<nc:;c;zzzzu:.u:zzzzzz:zz:zz:zz:zzzz 1
-.~:
Figure 5.3.2-1 Schematic diagram of intensive installation of cabinet;

If cabinet is of independent installaik:m, the distance of foundation bolts be·tween two cabinets
should plus the thickness of baf:le plat~ o~ NfJ sidas Drod tbe di.stz•tce between two cabinets, 40mm
should be added at least, as shown in Figure 5.3.2-2.
For cabinet installed independently, the opening dimension of <:hannel steel between two
cabinets
23
HOLLiAS MACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual .
r~1:=~::;;:;5£=4j)==~:=:~""1['1-::c_____ =·
-·--- ·1---·---·- --·----·-1- ·--+·-·--·-·---·- ---- .

'I
_j
~I~,.,_·L_~-. ;_:-:.: =~: :.= = = =- =:=:.: l~ =::::..__,_
1-----------...;..-" i :-'=--Note: for independent i~~tallaticin~ ~
~~ the distance between two adjacent
~Base distance bases should be at least Smm (the
th;ckness of two s1de doors};
Figure 5.3.2-2 Independent J1stallation dimension of cabinet

Length of space required for independent insiallation of m units of cabinets in parallel is at least:
L:l:1000 x 2+799 xm+distance between bases>(m-i)+ thickness of cabinet side panel><2
Width of space required for installation of n rows Gf C-3_binr::ts is et least:
VP-1500x 2+650xn+2500 x(n-i)
Figure 5.3.2-3 is schematic diagram of independent installation of cabinet.
24
_ _:1:. 1-=-·~-"-'~:. •.g:. • _._ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _HOLUAS l\t1ACSSystem Installation and Maintenance Manual
AI
~1000
!rdependent installation of munits cf cabinet in parallel
Base distance;,Thickness of cabinet sire wall panel X2
nfQI.M) of
cronets
"'fil
~I
iI
r~,
!t's:;rr:--·""'"";(t)
____________
l""'IJ(I{I X2<·iliS Xm+£1<1Se distance X(m-1)+Thickness of cabinet
.J
I
............................................... ~;~~~~~~~:::=~==::..'~'ire~.~·~~~.J.~n:··~=x:,~:..··:..:_:..:_:..:_:..:_==::.:.==~·································································..···············•
Figure 5.3.2-3 Schematic diagram of independent installation of cabinet

3.3 1/0 control cabinet structure
110 control station consists of two parts of cabinet shell and assemblies installed in cabinet, as
shown in Figure 5.3.3-1. Cabinet assemblies include:
l> Fan assembly, which radiates heat and reduce temperature of equipments inside field control
cabinet;
l> Control rack, which is used for installation and fixture of DPU and DC power supply, and
provides external connection interface for wrnmunication and power supply;
25
_.::.D:...=_:_"Il_""_~___________,H~O:::L::L~iA~Sc_M~ACS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
110 assembly, which provides signal interface, and completes input/output signal switch. Three
rows of rails can be installed on front/back sides of cabinet respectively, totaling 66 installation
positions at its maximum, 33 installation positions on front and rear sides respectively (terminal
matcher occupies two installation positions, DP repeater occupies one installation position,
thermocouple compensation module also occupies one installation position if any).
Front face of cabinet~~..,......-- Fan unit Back side of cabinet

- l «:
Air switch
!;;
i\...·--·--------·
~ij:-=: .;;;;;;-=:;;;;.;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;;!;!
j
,_ ____ --------- ·---------
Fi:;ure 5.3.3~ 1 Sch1 matic diagram of l/0 cormoi s·.aiion
3.4 Installation and wiring of 1/0 ecmtnl C1illinet
Cabinet installation steps are as foEc.--Js:
(1) Fix foundation bolt on floor as per the layout of control roorn.
(2) Connect and tix cabinet base ·.vith foundation bolt. If cabinet" are of i:~tensive tnstallation, it is
26
--'J'-1--'--W_._,fj._."J_.___________. HOLUA~; MAGS System lns!alla1f_on and Maintenance Manual
necessary to remove side pane!s between cabinets, the method is: open fnontlrear cabinet
doors, take off the set screws of side panels at both side'' from inner !tank of rack post,
remove side panels at both sides, and connect racks of two adjacent cabinets by using bolt
(M10).
(3) If screw fixture is not used, it is allowed to weld cabine• base on fixture channel steel
alternatively.
(4) Cabinet body is insulated fror'1 ba~e t'lerefore it is requireo to configure cabinet grounding
independently rather than fix cabinet on channel steel as a solution fu cabinet grounding.
After delivery of 110 control station from factory, 24VDC/48VDC ,··ower sunply inside cabinet and
DP communication line have been !aid and connected, after a:Tival at iield, it is necessary to
connect system network line, 2201/AC power supply cable and field 1/0 signal cable into cabinet.
The laid Ethernet line is connected on relevant Ethernet adaotH· interface The laid power supply
cable is connected to inlet of two ai,- switches inside i/0 control sto'lion.
Signal cable is fed into field control cabinet t~rough the entrance :·,ole undemeath ftoor under field
control cabinet. Signal cable ru~s rrorn bottorn to top, anc is cc··mected to terminal of relevant
process 1/0 modules respectively, i! is required that cable wirir:g is neat, good looking and firmly
bound, as shown in Figure 5.3A-1.
Field signal approximately falls :nlo ~alegories of analog cciJnal, a'gital signal and data
communication signal.
l ,-l
;.. Analog signal inciudes analog input and analo:-;; output
signal. This kind of signals should be connected by ~~ I' ~~
using shielded twisted pal: ca:;-.c, 3W~ cmss section of
signal cable core should be !c::~ger 'Jr equi\.'HI·ant to
:-~1
2
1mm •
ol
., ~ i
J;. Digital signal includes digiial input imd digital ouifiut
signal. Digital signal of low !evei shoutd be :.::.onnect(.;d " I
"i ____ _:
by using shielded twisted paired cable, cross section of Enter !rom

bollo_m of
signal cable core should be larger or equivalent to t
2
1mm ; while digttal input/output signal of high level (or 1 i
cab•net
large current) can be connected by using common

paired cable (control cable), bu: s11ouid be separated I' g:~>re 5.3.41 Signal cable routing
from analog signal and low level digi'cai signal, ana of lieid control station
should run through cable channel separately.
)- Data communication signal cable requir&ments are identical w'th iow le·,;el digital signc1l.
);. During design, heavy/light current csn not occupy one same cable.
Requirements on routing of var\m.!~~ '.>Jbte.;; or~;;; as fc\\ows·.
27
Dt.!1~
_ _c_:__ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _H:_:::O:_:L:::L:::_:iA.S MACS System lnsta!iation and Maintenance Manual
)> lnpuUoutput signal cable of DCS system should be laid in cable channel with cover, cable
channel and cover should be grounded soundly,
)> Single piece of signal cable should be laid through steel cab!e pipe, which should be grounded
soundly.
)> Cable shielding layer should adopt copoer strip shielding or 8/uminum coli shielding.
)> The principle of shielding grounding is one-end grounding. there are two types of shielding
grounding:
)> When analog signal or impulse frequency signal is transrnitted, if signal source has no
( grounding, shielding cable sheuid be grounded at the side of control room.
\,
)> When signal source itself is !JiCiundecl, if ther~·nocoup!E::, ?H rneier electrode and etc are
grounded, shielding cable should be grounded at the side of field signal source.
)> When instrument- signal cable ar1d power cabiL:: are i&1d crussw1se, it should be of right angle; in
case of parallel laying, if power cabie has shieldinq layer, the distance between the two should
be ~150mm; if power cable has no sh·ie\dlrlg !aye'!, thE; m\r:,r:·~J:n allowable distance between
the two should be in compliance with Table 5.3.4-1 as fellows:
Table 5.3.4-1 Minimum paral~8! ;:;p.?-cir:g betw·een instrume:n~ cable a~d oower cable
Power cable !oa(i ~--- Mi;;-;;:;~~; paral:e: oistanca (mm)

1----------:--,...,-c--·-·--------+-----··-- -·-----''---'----1
125~ 10A ' 300
f--------"-----------·----+--------···----------1
l - - - - - - - - - 2 5__o,_v....,._s_o_A________ .........._.,_..~..·-·------..--····· .......... 45o_..· · · - - - - - - - - l
440V, 200A I 600
r - - - - - - - - - · - - - · - - - · - -...._, _____,____ ···-·..- · - - - - · - - - - - - - - - - - l
' - - - - - .- L_ _________ ..... ·-· 12,~~~-------..1
--s:::·:.:3..:.oo..:.v..:.·..:.s:.:o..:.o.:..f!o..:., ___ ... ----····· ___
·· ·········-······)>··· When caoleislaidinsidecable \,'.;;;:;r,;·:c iii. ,i,iii.ilia::r taTOila\~ celf2,'ii iayirigilie;aichy,tfiehierarchy
••• ··-·~ ...... I
!
arrangement order from bottom to <op is: powe: cable, conirol cable and signai cable (shielding
cable).
:> Pair twinning mode: power line is twlnned ·r.iith power line: sig!'ta! line is twinned with signal line.
_.J>_ In case of_ multi-core cable_ or multiple pieces of wire passln~J through one piece of pipe, it is
necessary to reserve spare core w!re, numhr~i" o"f span-:.,d core~. ;.;hnirld be 1:~· !ess than 10-15% of
number of working cores.
28
___H,_,.OI LiAS MAGS System Installation and Maintenance Manual
CHAPTERS SYSTEM OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE

1 System startup
1.1 Preparation before system power"<m
Before system power-on, it is necessary to inspect whether the following conditions are available:
1) Whether signal shielding grounding line and protection gmur,ding line entered into control
cabinet are perfectly connected;
3) Whether power supply units and DPU in field control station cabinet are installed firmly;
4) Whether power line and co~1c-~nication cable on DPU rack are connected firmly;
5) Whether the communication cable from .serv:~r, op-erator .5'lc-:\Jor1, engine~:lr station and DPU to
hub are laid completely and conn<ec!ed firmly;
6) Whether operator ';tation has b9en installed completely (such as video cable, mouse, keyboard,
network line, power line and etc.);
Before power-on, it is necessary to turn oif all power switches inside control cabinet and operator
console.
If power distribution cabinet is useu im power supply, all switches should oe turned off before
power-on. Before closing main povve-r swHch, me-8'3-urP. wh9t~:;;r power supr~y voltage is normal at
the inlet of air switch by using mult!meter firsl, whether polarity (neutral wire and live wire) is correct,
after closing master switch, turn cff one £witcfl ::;epa:·Bte!y, and (t"'l.spect whether the change-over
device of power distribution cabinHt v1f0rks norrna!iy. C·n!y af-ter pass:cg inspect~on, can sub-switches
··~··· ~. be closed for supplyingpoweHo equipment: -
1.2 Power-on and operation rules oJ 1/0 cabinet

When DCS system is delivered to field, 1/0 module is packed separately for transportation, there is
only terminal rrwduie lett ;n J/0 cabir:el, wrle:t UO caoinet povvcr o::, rathe1· than insert 1/0 module
first, insert module after completion cf rnc(:;\1:e \'V~r~;iQ anri i~i2.Pf~cthn \\'!thout ~;rrors.
Before supplying power to 110 cabinet, it is ~ecRssary tc 'l1eaoure wh;ether pnwer supply voltage is
normal at inlet of air switch, Wh8ther r:eutra! wir~ r;.r.;d !iv3 vdre are C0!Tect. After dosing power switch,
close the switch on power supply paneL f'tate indicator !ON) of power supply panel displays the
current working state. Indicator ON indicates that 2''/43\/DC ;:,utput is :1umal; indicator OFF or
abnormality stands for tha' power suppiy •.:>"':.:-ut is zero or power supply output is abnormal. After
power supply starts to work, DPU will startup automatically too.
Before inserting JiO module, it ls :"!,;c~c2saary -~v lnspec~ 3lgna: c.::.bi& ;;.,s par fol!ow:t:g mathod:
29
-~jj.g
__.__
. *_""_'_"_"'____________H...:'.c:O_:_L:.:.L:c_iAS MACS System Installation and !J!ainienance Manual
Terminals 37, 38, 39 and 40 of each module eorrespond to output interface of DP communication
and module 24V power supply respectiveiy, and it is absolutely prohibited to connect signal cable to
these four terminals.
For all signal cables, it is necess&ry to measureo whether signal catl!e has force electricity first, the
method is: under the condition of petiect !10 cabinet grounding, set multimeter at alternating voltage
range (above 220VAC), connect one multimeter contact on cabinet body (cabinet screw), connect
the other with signal, for signal from force electricity equipment, it is preferred to measure under
circumstance of equipment power··CI1.
Provided that no error is found out durlr•hl the pr..:;viow~ stG{: L'lts;:>ect vrhether signal cable is
grounded, the method is to set n'1L:Itirneter ~::t [~,c r·es;stance ra;1ge {.short-circuit measurement range),
eonnect one multirneter contact on cabinet body (cabinet screw), connect the other with signaL This
measurement is very important for FM148/\, FM151A. FM152A, FM16i series and FM143E
module.
Provided that no error is found oui during u~.E.: r:·revious step of o•r,:..'<a:;creme(H, JJSpect whether there
is short-circuit between two w·ires o·f signEd, ·~he rneihod !s i.e sei multirrH~ter 2t AC resistance range
(short-circuit measurement range), connect "i:wo muWrneter co:'"!illds wh:h iwo ends of signal
respectively. This measurement is vmy important for FM148A F!V!15·JA and FM152A module.
Terminals 33, 34, 35 and 36 of FM'! ;3·; .seii3S ·~Gnr:inat rnoGt.de _;•JfTbspDnd tC~ ;r:qulry power supply of
module, 33 and 34· respectively stand f6t" pos!tive.'negati'·./0 rorrnir,a[s of 2,1f48VDC inquiry power
supply required by digital input cnannel '( ..f_:;; 3£i and 36 respectively sta:1d for positive/negative
terminals of 24i48VDC inquiry power supply required by d!giia! tnput channel 9-16.
During service of FM161 series !T1odule, ali .::;:gnHl negative -~e:rniil~.l!S ::.~re ctJnnected with negative
terminal of inquiry power supp!J", au:: basad on this ·:heory i·~ ~~· aiicVvcd tc deem all signal negative
terminals of singie rn:::dule as c:c:-::mon ierr.··:;r;aL
Provided that no et-rur is found OLE durlng :ha prc\.·:Gus rnee.2ure.:·:.;:.mt, it is allowed to insert 1/0
····module:
1.3 Power-on and oper~ticn rules of cperE.t·:~r smf~:m~ enginec;-· :;lnHon and -r::e:·ver
Operation of the first time startup ot onlinE.~ systern or entry ~n'lo onilne system again after power off is
introduced as follows, the operation is limitqd to er:gire-9"!' 'eve! ~v- ::ystem adt:i!nistrator level.
-~ After confirmation of norrnal power suppty, ciose power suppiy switch.
l> Open monitor switch.
~ Open mainframe swltGh.
Normally spear<ing. DCS sys1em ctol\v~:rr:~ tn J_\~ld ~:::. s b~r:--: ;n:otf:'!IP;r\ \Nith ')r:ers-tif"lg system, and has
passed offline configuration debug, therefore after powec-on, systern can start automatically.
30
.\.1-1~
___
N-"---"-"'-'""'-•-------------'-H=OLL.iAS M~_G_S_Svstem__il1~tali_aliQf1._:oB::.n:::d:...M=a"'in_::t:::ec::n:::a:::n:::c:::e_,M=a"'n"u"a'-l_
For operator station, after entering WindowsXP system, click "Start Operator Station" of
"MAGS_OPS" in "MAGS" in "Program" in "Sta•t" menu, then it1s possible to enter into online control
system.
Q Notice:
• Operator station can be confiQVr6a tG st.ati. cpemtor ~!.tat!cn ;;1onram autornatically after starting
computer. After exit during midcours.H, it is a!lowed to start operator sti?ltion program as per the
method mentioned above.
------------·-------
For server station, after entering Windows2003Server system, click "Start Server" of
"MAGS_SERVER" in "MAGS" in "Program" in "Start" menu. then it is possible to enter into server
operation.
,Q Notice:
• Server will startup server program autvrnaticzl!y· after start!r;g \~/lndows2003SeNer system. In
case of manual exit durin[J, mfdcourH1, it\:-} 8!~0\!v'ed to f.tart server pro!;1n~m as per the method
mentioned al;ove.
For engineer statlon, after entering 'v\iindows)(f..i sys.tem, it .s pos:;lbie to enter o certain configuration
function by selecting any menu in "MACSV__ENG"' o' :otart menu.
If it fs necessary to shutdown cparator s!atlnn) ei'igineer stat:cn cr server, !tIS necessary to-- - -- ~~- -·-··- ·--j.
follow normal exit of WINDOWS.. 1
( If connection of system roonitor rwtwodt 2t~'H~ ~Jrstem .1etwof'l-i. have been co-mpleted, after
' confirmation of power on and roonm•l work of hub, it is n.;cessary to confirm whether
network working status is nm·mal upon the firs! time poweNm. The method is to conduct
PING operation for the network adap•ters "''operator station, server and !!0 control unit from
engineer station.
2 Debug and operation maintenance
After the system is started, operation should be conducted by special debug and
maintenance personnel, debug aml maintenance personnel shall have accepted the basic
training of DCS 5ystern, can upc.Hate cvmpuiB: s~·W'fuil)t', 2m:~ (..0!1 use ~iDLLiAS MACS series
software.
31
for operating system and applicatior~ sof!wzre;, so ~1s to avoid operation by unrelated
personnel.
Before delivery from factory, the system has passed configuration and signal test, under the
precondition that power suppiy and network are normal, after insertion of module, it should be
possible to start normal work immediately, and POWER indicator and COM indicator on module
panel should be ON. In case state indicator is abnormal, it is necessary to check: whether module
type corresponds with configuration, whether address code on terminal module corresponds with
configuration. If both module type ami add:·es:~ codn Bi·t-~ cot'ed, :-hf~!': ~~'Y ;::-.not~iEr (nodule of the same
type, and find out whether there is something wrong with module
It is also possible to check the WOi"king stats :A rnodtde in system graph of operator station graph.
Contents of system screen normally include:
~ DPU status: master operation {greer~), 3(ave operation tvcttov.;) and fau!t (red).
l' System network status: normal (greenr and f2uit (red).
)- Module status: norma~ (green) and fauit {red 1
In case of abnonnaHty of hardware staiu.s. i,-! ~~y£.;km (Jr·.~pt ., norma!lv it is related to line cOnnection,
address setting and configuratio;1 setting, it is requ~red to inquire step tJy steq
After module service becomes no:mEt!, it i:; allowed to conduct test and inspection of signal of each
channel, the general method for signal debug is introduced as foliows by takmg example of several
common types of sigcoai.
(1) Thermal fesistance sigm;d: ther:iiHi rH2;;lsJane-~ signal ;s r;crrn2!iy inspected by adopting RTD
series module, there are '!tNO types c-:: ,:-'onnec~ion mHthoc.:· c:" 'three-\vii·~.:: system and two~wire
system for signa( from fiefd, f'c.t twcrv·:,;:·:: cunne::-'\ion, ii i-5., nec..:::2.3c:~·y co 2~·!ort circuit terminal b
and terminal c ~{signa! u~ ~GtTnin,~\ cf n·,cc~u!,.:_:_ D~Js to th~, fS:ct t~1nt twe:-~vin:.· sys:em cancels the
.. ·~ ..~tE~9.~.9~:..5?L.?J9.;~9.L !. !~~.~J~~i-~:t~x: _;:_~} ..~.f:!.§_!_:?L?.r.~~---~ i_g_L~_? _! __g_ ~:,:.·.:J_!.~.\\·:_!f.~. t~': i r:ere a;; eel .
Signal terrnlna! a, band c. ::;h::.u!d be ·f:·ee frorn connection Hrror.
Common then11a! resistance components inctude PTiDO unC: Cu50, setup of configuration
software will be different for different components adopted, different handling is required (signal
amplification, t.:o:nponGnl J.y·;,e and e-lc·;.
Three-wire system 1.-::nnr!eetiC'"' r,..,etr..:jn l_; <:;i!~· ':3 to c-orne{···' !~!nn2! ff:'P''1;llf'l~ a en one end of
thermal reslst~lr"1Ce, tenninc.ol h ~-:Pf~ r:- :;lfi:e'" ::;hcrt~rircuit C\:< +he :_:iher end of tflerlT'.al resistance,
therefore it is al!mved to :ns[~Gr:'.l •.r.k:_e.~h~_;~-· ::'-~~:-.r•c:.\1 ~~ '!r-:r::;:;( bv ur~i:--1'~: ;-esistance range of
multimeter as per this characteristic, in whici-L
Rab=Rt, Rac=Rt, Rbc=O (Rt is the msistancr:;·, 'Jalue of H:.:-mrs.! resistance)
If signa! tennina[ connectinn is free frc-rm erl''<:)!, 3nd ies:.~.tm1e.e vn!w;, is normal too, but
signal <H~qaisitiov, \s stm abr~:J·r-:-nal) thl3 ~:::miSe rnar m~ef:/ bP. E:~ffect of signal line
grounding.
32
--~H,OLUAS tv1AC~._§y_~~en] in§~§Jiat~2_0. and Maintenance Manual
(2) Thermocouple signal: normally TC series module is adopted for inspection of thermocouple
signal, which usually has two ktnds cf connec~ion rnethoch:., m·:e method is to be connected
directly on module termine! by using sYtension wire, thF: ter-nperature of 1/0 cabinet is the
cold~end temperature; anothe:·· :nethcl! is to be connected to termin•;:.l box firstly by using
extension wire, then lead extension Ens from terminal box to 1/0 terminal, the temperature of
terminal box is the co!d··end temt)eratul·s. For the f!rst type of connection method, cold-end
temperature can be measur-ecj, measuremt::n~·: s\gna1 Will c:::;cupy one channel of TC series
module, it is also allowed to measure by using thermal l'asistance component, and then
measurement signal will occupy one r.::-~arme! c)f HT:) serie~;. m'Yiu!e. ~-or the second type of
connection msth::d, it is on!y ultowed to ~-rE-c.s;Jr'~ the t.s..--n_::::s:·c~ture .:-;.f terrr,inai box by using
thermal resistance cor::poner:~.
(
Signal positive/negative termina!s shouic.: be connected (~or-recl!y.
DCS syste:--n aaupts sofrwura r:·:cthod '?or cvld-·enC: GCJrnpsns:Htion of thennocoup!e signal, and
measurernent s\gna! ls sccu: ate prov~ded th&.t cdd-enu lE.rnf;EEGture is accurate.
Common thermoc.oup!e components i'!clude r.ype !<and ~Vpe E . setup of s-oful\1are configuration
will be different for different components e11d ·jiffe>ent mee8;..1re-!1~ent scooes. diff.r-;rent handling
is requir8d ~s!gna! arnplificatioc. C()fni.'Oner>t T':J[)B :~nc1 etc~.!.
ThermocoupiB stgnal \S of mil!ivo~t vo;td~E. ·zhex8fors i"fJ&&su\·&!Tlent tnslrument should adopt

special rnensurerner:t instrum>:::n'~ of corri)3rab;y higl·' rr:e;:;,~~U!t~t~k:ni a:::CLFacy.
In case meas:ur~-=ment value of f'lHctroc r-r~tr:~n1i:J1 diff!:'"!'t::r,c.-e :~~ m::n~a! h;A di-splav result is still
incorrect. the reason may likely bH pocr -:r.tekHn~ 0f :~--i~r.a: !tn:::, and high 1!10uced voltage.
(3) 4-20mA current input siga1ai: is. 1"!-~8 <!lost co!'nrno!l!y used 11eliJ si[~~nal fo:· '-Nhfch measurement
is ·conducted by 3doptfng AI s8ries rnodt)!P..
·For····-ii18CtfV.B" ·a·nd ···a·Ct"iV·e··· if~i(·-;s·ln·tl:i."Bi:····:s·r~]'i~8f·~·'lh-e·····co;)r;·ec·;lk;·~·l···· ~:nBthOdB OT . . s·tg·niii ··--fe"i~·rnh18i are

different
Display vaius 0~~ signal ~s n1:;rrna:;y rf~!&tf,ci ·~c. s;::jt~o:::l !\':Gt.lSLirt:Lid~·lt ranga :.:;:cwp of configuration
software, it is necessary to ;:;i·;sur:~ ti1:.:.~~ ::·lef.ls.lre;nen: : ::u !9E"- 1S \O&r:tic.:..i ·,':iith rhe measurement
range setup for tranS:mitter iLo:;e!f.
In case rneasurement current v2iue. ;s nurnmi bL t dispb:/ :·•.;-;:-~u\:: is incorrect. tt1e reason may
likely be slGn~!l !ine groundirtp \)' ind~;:~ed volt.J~1~.
(4) Current o-utput contn.1-~ Siif.FlG.l: L:-. :..:~;.~;-:1 for -~:-:·,:__:\pr(!:';f:ls ::<:d .:r~ GC•!~.i:'::l ~ctuatcr, frequency
converter and etc., whether :s ~;r:! ..:~:~~ ·s :·e1atc-d \.·, ·:.:i' ~onf!gu:at~on software, such
as control of output measuren ·1ent ran~;e.
Output sigPa.\ !~nrs snculd be f•E7"~ fmrn :'::hu;i ;~k-:-:-..:;+_ gTn ..:r:-di;;:_·;_ -afn:·(~r;i2f!';, fen::"e electricity signal,
otherwise channel or even n~odule wH! be easily burnt.
33
(5) Digital measurement. signa~: dtgita! rnec:su.-ement notT':lal!y adopts D1 series module, and is
divided into two types of 24VDC and 43\/DC as per the difference of inquiry supply voltage. All
digital signals transmitted from field are inactive df)l contact signal, and constitute measurement
circuit together with inquiry power supply. Tnerefore whether inquiry power supply works
normally 1s a!so very important lnquiry f)OWer supply dlstrituton distributes 24VDC/48VDC to
each digital input module. Inquiry pmver su\Jpiy distriOullon fecitures protection fuse, if fuse
blows out, the corresponding short-Circuit indicator on distribuiion board will turn on.
The negative terminals Df d!gi::.1l inp:.i1 ':">lft'"18l~\ are CtJI"lrt!"::d~:d t:l9etht:=:r n"'.:; 1·efcre, input signal
cable can adopt the connection method of comrnon negative ~erminal; i.e. negative terminal is
common termtnaL But atteni"ion snouki be paic io adopt!On of common terminal connection
method, or short-circuit of one term in<.-~! t~·"<: seve:·.:'H signc!::; irotri fieid, it i~. requh"ed to connect
one end of common terminal on nep,at~ve t.'8tTninaL othenN!se signai will be abnormal.
(6) Digital output rnodule: digi'::a~ output r:1odt.de adopts C:··::· ~:'.e!·i'J~; rnodu[e, ~rvti!-~h is normally used
together with DO series relay b~;ard D:g:;al ou!rut signul i~; !~:;u.•:::-.::d fmrn Fl8id through relay. As
relay coH needs pm.Nf:!r suppiy, lhsrefoi·s· :·.:is necessary "i!.J set <..!p po·vvat supply separately, so as
to supply power to relay board and some relays deslqned seo.gratelv.
In order ~o pr,;;[ect rt~l:;,y con!sr~l, each o:.nr>ui ~;tt·.:-.u!t on n::1ay bcsrd ls eont1ected in serial with a
protection ·fuSEJ, 1:·1 cssH ~e1ay· coil SJcrs t:'J1 ir~structic:n . ~:.; nc~· t~·fH"'<sm~·~tE:d tG l'leld, one reason may
be that the. p;-otection :=uf;e rn<:.iy b~nw .:;u~ :iJ~~ 10 \)\J~..:;rc ·~·;_-~. ,-·.t.
3 Field problems and handling of problems

1. Will the or!g:inn~ trer.d: he e!!rrdnt.ted ?.r,'.'?:'' M:l.f:S\1 ~~r.J~':·r d::-~:~·q!oad'J ~-krw to !nquire trend
offline? How br;~1 c.ap data bf:! :'!tt~tH'e;:~?
Answer:
a. Rather trt.::;n be eliminat::;.J nti.(~f ~~E';i\~s:;:· downioao, iY l·; m·~fy i!r1pos~"lDIG to look up the trend
before downioaci online,. it snli e;;is!:; ;n ni:~ru)r~f. rrencu:~t1aqo;y.foi0t";r., il. 1,-..~ pos.s!ble.to.inquire
through offline inquiry sofLW8xe. ·
b. Use "MACSV oifline inqLiry'' suffware to inquire: steD one, dialogue box pops up, select
catego!~/
of ihquii)· ::md startinr~ ~irne: .st2e ---:,_,~,_:;:,, rief!ne y,::r;ner:•es c::nt::1ined in each trend
group. mdu0in{1 ana!op ~v-1d df':fP.<~: variat:iles. t·\her sntering time interval, inquire data
needed
c. Historical data storaqe thne depends on the 3izc ot Gl':.k S(JaGe vvhere historical category is
located, dtgit~~: varjabies .~n: ,~,.;- fJisp!r.::ct:~l·,,~orrt ~3tota~H.', ·;~·i"1i.:J·1 P<mr:<=d~-· c(xupy srnaii space,
anatog vmia:)!e.s ;3re of G~'cie stc,r.s~·.;e. sac:·; ~\·~Hnl.·s \"E~-:::;.:-'"\)~; r;c~;upy 5 i:Jy··~es e-....·ery time, with
cons1c!eration o'f dl-gi·tai 'l.··;:.;·iab:8 aispiacm-ner;t rer.orcis, fog and alarm records, it is allowed
to collect qtatistics of analog vc:r!c.hle recorc!s per second and calculate as per occupation
of 8 b\'tes. Take project d ~ ,000 ·;D~~~ 2:~ a~' ,;,_,:arr~p!::~ ~or hre.r:ne:;::.;...H3 uc-int and PV, SP and
AV n;:· ?:l), dlqita.i v3ri.abL;,; <-Jr".cl t.1flClk··.;: ·.-oi·:c::c+; ~-c.':-Ol.';·i:- tc · :<,~ ;·~, n:::::~r~-s-:.;~:~,·ely. i.: ts BilGwed to
calculate anE.doy 'Jariab;a cf !)C;L; ~'~g:3 only for haru d~s~: space rec;u1reci per day, the hard
34
__.:_:_~_,«_,.,._~_•____._________________________h_QJ::!~i:~f__~i;::~~~-? ~~}'~i..~!:f:~J.~~-?~01~£:1_~?_t~·--~~-n~}!}?:!~\:~enance Manual
disk sp=3ce occupied is approxir.~.•att.!ly:
500 (point number)*8 (byte) ·~24h*60rn*60si 1000*-1D00--<2.2M
2. After modificatkm nf algor~thn1 2no ~e:-gir: ~deftnit!nn of g!obai variable is added or

deleted) and dc.n.~vn~oad~ng, 1.}rj ope;n~tt'r stc.!'l:ic-~·,:, thert; ::~ no disp~a}/ cd data of the station
or there are corrupted characters?
Answer: After modification of argoritrnn and Ionic (without adding or da!eting of definition of
global var-iable) and down!o.?.d~nq_ 0~~ '3:·~~-~~or·., d:.:-·1::;t -:--:- ~l:·:.:- :;;tctic:..(: ._.._;~\!be normcd without
corrupted cba:ar~t.em; ~" ca~;e <)f ~1ddin;1 or deleting of liefinHiOfi :)f g!oba! variable and major
changes (new unused library me is added). it will cause sorting of communication symbol table
(. again, after downioaalng, tne symbo! table -:1f ur:·U iS (h·:·c icient:(~al with the symbol table of
server,. causing abnorrr1al ccmrr<unicat!oi~., on operatm· statin:...;, there is no d!splay of dat.a of the
station or tnere are r.:ornJpted charact~3fS. Sdutiuq !S to cc.rrH)iL~ oatatlase C:!qain and download
server.
3. How to handle abnormal onHne d~sp~tl!i (point va!ue+U) of sijgnais over range? ·
Answer: 38~~·.&Urn6s :=:ski si~;:--:ai n.~:j. :-_·r:· i.:;;g); :<..,:. n :~t:·:.\ :.:·uch 2.::.. :J . :J:~:i··;·..\, whid-: is 2.ctually
norma! ~:.lQn~~.r, b\;~ t!··c sys~::,·c. v-.:P ~~-:.·:·!, it .J;,·:;;:.;rl~i as .:.!bnc.:-r;i3l pc-L·:t (point value+U), it is
expected tc be disptayed as 0 in fi~Jid (!s. no!"Tna! dis~Jiay· ( . 'f .:.;i(;;r-.s!s ov-2r rar:ge), lt is necessary
to set up ·'dead .z:J:w'' item, (£:-gc:m:.Lr~g :tL~ '-~·,:tLi:::d lii..~;c.ond :.:..-:· l';t.:::·J, ;: l::. s:::.t .~pas 5°;;}-·!0%.
4. If it is. ru-:c.:.ssary to 1nquin-: C;r.Li ar1El;~.t:n: f~li\C-~.~\.1 s-vs~~.::r."'. prnt}\En-~s, '-'<sl~Bt kind of relevant
files shottki be copied fro:11 fle\d?
( . !~eyu!ted iv be
11 out
·······--·--··-----!
=~--·-~----C·-----··---·'··-----·--·····-·······--··-·········--·-·-----·················-----·---·---'
35
2. Ser.;er AB unit: C: \DsvrDiagnose.
3. Se~ve~- AB unit: C.\ EventProcess.
4 Se~·\iE::r PJ3 unit· .::)pemting systern installation disk:
\Dc>e;~_:mer!l·:, ~::.md Seitlr,~y:\AH
iJ:":;.::~·s\Docurnen;_~;\iJriNatsonVinvtsn32.1og. (If this file
i.s ned <:hifdabif-.i. pi<::::-Jse. run: DFZ'vVTSI"J32 in ''·",mm,mrll
line, b-id :·ecor~ ~)<:rLh c::n be sea:-1 in interface, check
whe~i~e~· there is fi!e drwtsn32.!og under this path)
\
~.~i:T~c:.o(/ i~l;·;·\Dt~T,£~\HCJb\ d~~;~c~ory corresponding
ma dr.1y ;:,·ffa~..Ht\C:;\'S:"CG.
:i
1 ~)-;-· .,--.,-,. - - --. · -~.-:r·"<::i· :i~:;talistk~r;
ciirectGr>·\H~ST'J:\T/\\HC:B\ directory corresponding
··:hf; >t~ 1 i c,f ''::;' }~i'· -~•f.C1;-i rr;;iiu'CnB before/after
-~1ui"t. '·" Cff{f· --n .c!;.;i,· E.i)d .'-l·::~tO;;~Cli,.;~:;y/nriGxF.il.:;,
,x(:f~::: ;·~ ,::cl ~o L·::- ::,.-_,i"··: pr::·::~~.e-d.
7. OpeTating ~:;stem !G9 cf server AB unit: operation
:.:.teps w:: "~:tt~;:-t' .. ·""' "::'>·:·ltn) '~nnel"--->
"h.(_::·,-•···.:::;t::·n-:.:· ~- . ;c- ~.: ., "r_~_,rs~':i \/iew8r"---->Right
:f;_;~: -:/ rn· v_;o. s~:.\c:::·· ·.-::;·-~-•iice,t!c.P ~rogram and sy'sl:enll
'"''''·'C' ',"'''· ~~n~:' ::::.~!!!::'. "S8\';·, h,.-:;. Log File" in popup
'COr ,\[".,~/~.!<Cf\, ; .. 3:~-, ;:·r:d :.s.~ ~·:- r;,';,\.'8::S VJ!>:~r,
-~;_0~~-~~-~,'<c:::: ~~~::~·L:~::_.;_i:JU: _____,________,

5.
a. Error phenomenon: <-went sJurce "BRO\J\I.St:i~, ciescnotion ~s sirndai" to 'tor numerous times,
( browser has failed to transrnit capture naci<:.U0 1ist on \U8"!ice\hletBT _·!cpip _{" "., }. Backup
' browser· ~1as stopped ... '
Solution: on control paneh:; ftdmirdstroi ,_,-; i,.:ds;,,~ .se~-,_,;.:::tF~i . cJi ..;;~:l.;t<:: "C-orn~,uier Bmwser"
service.
b. Error pheoo(nenon: evem source 'i/v'-52"'::-~1:::', :~~ ~:ftTi1~.:>! io 'i:irne providing

6f';~:c,
progr::~:r~ !\!tpC!~sn·:· a~ ~nor ·:'CCLi'!'f .. 1 ''.!-""(·:~ ;~;--,· ·-u
1:;;::11:_· -:-.:-'·equivalent machine
,·r:::,
'time.w!ndows.corn, Oxi' at :)NS. NtpC\is~-~t -.id! ~'":::' ~r:.~ f·.tD~~ ;r!q~ i:-y 'ffF'h!:; 15 minutes. Error is:
socket ope(ation tries a rr~ainfrarne irn;:v.:-s.~=iik· rc. ~)_,.., ,·~.:;rnecled. (Cl;<BCI072751 )...
So!ut!or~: ::-,r: conl.!"'l:)! pane!::::; adrninisttatic~-l t::;ois.::.~· sd:vtu.;=:) , disaole "Windows Time"
service.
36
6. How to operate the secondary eonf§rmatkli\ functk>n of ~::onfiguwtion <:}peration interface
Wherl editing increase/decreasr; vaiue chaxa(.terist~c::.~ of i!:teractior. d:araderist!cs of graphic in
graphic configuration, add chan·~cter string C,"i1n \n secc)nc1F.~ty (~c11firmation information, then
when operator is on line, dh<t'erer~i r.::onforrnstiG!"': infor!·~·~iBtlx, v-/ii oop u~; as per point value of its
group, when value changes fmm D to 4, cha;&cle; s~~·!n~ bef.:.;r::-~ t}i i 0 \/if! pop up, when value
changes from ·1 to 0, character ~:;trlng after 0~ i 0 ·,1\f:B pc·p U{j
Regardir.~; t(tne synchron!zgtio!l metroct r_:,f SO E. mod; dr--::

1) Setup method of FM16'\l._}-4.8-SOE (ir".~\\Jdin-:1 i":"!1J!'1f'!f~).S0Fi:
Hard twnc synchronization Is not ava:ilabk~ ~nl:-; ~c.h u/Y,e svnchron;zation ls available,
dur~ng algonthm configurd.lion, tL ls ne(;t-:sso~y ·r:o \nodi·l'y rr10!:-uall·y. for (~-lWUf.JS parameter in
algorithm !vlACS setup, add plus S1gn i.JE.:Io:-c G~<::! (..J,_:.t...d.Jie click £he b;e.nk position before
GR2 with rnouse left ke~<~, whicf'1 r·~;prm;erlt..:-; :·DJt (i!YIC ~~·-, n<."..:fFoniza:~ion.
2) Se:tup method of Ftvl1GiE~4d--SOC iea!'u.'
FM161E-SOE)
During soft t!me sy:lchrGnizatior,, l·r_ '.s ;'1Sr':•3':~~::cn--/ t:J ;··r:()dif·\,· ;1·~anuaHy- for· Groups parameter
in algorithm MACS seiup, add pius sign be·fore •.::n~2.. tnt: 111ethod is ioentical with i.
Durlnq ~\erd t~rns ::.~;rc/1r,:·-~;!.~~atimi, it :t.; ;;:·;,·:ry~:,:;::;.s;-~:":.' i/) ;;,_:1.-~ ~\~1_,;::, b:.~t it h1 necessary to
modif:/ 30E pmgrarn png~~ !r- ".:) ~~-;t'.iY~::·.i!y: ~~Cf.~.-~~-.·~.!U:?"T": ~-~~.:;~;o.::.Timel\djust: =
(bGps: -~TRUE); ret~~·.-::,)se-r,tir•.,;\ hare: :::ne ·~:.Jr;c;:·,:·yli/.8ti>::r·;_
Durinq :;a.-rJ ~lr1e syndw::-ni2.2i:ion· ~~Y C:i"'IJ!JCl.'~ ·.\".:-I'B.l'"';"n3tf:'- in ;~igcritr.n~, MAC.S setup, it is
..
~ .... unnecessaryJo.. add..plus-..Slf!C...b!::'tQre. . G8_2.,.J)JJ.L.l!..J.~.J.:. ~-~,;.u. ~':5.9LLi0. . 1JJ.:~YJ.fv ?.Q.f;.J1EQ.9E?_~_ . P;3_9e
!n JC) shif~ir:~ msnue:tl)1, cmc.i modif:l v-·;.;;, ~~be"·:-· v.:-,.-L:,u,:· s·~~~tE::n<::r,-; as: :SOE.A.DJU-St:---
HSsoeTirne/>. djust: -::~(bGps: ~:.--TRU1.":), ,-,;-,p:~:;serttin,·;)· hard ,~··r;s· -'~'fncr;.ronization. (By default,
l:S8r pa:-srns·:~;r \:·~ <'-rl!\C~:~ ·_:;en~p ,'):: S~t:S 1:~: ·:_:-, i·.c.:d. :·i~·n.: :~·;il'...\-:·;;:·,;:·:<~!ion~·
Dtiring soft time syllc:hron!z:?-.~ion ~t i-? necF:s<.~s~~~ ~'J !T 1 (Yt~ry :nanuaUy: Groups parameter in
algoritnm MAGS setup, CH"jd plus sign before Gf<2., ;n user pararnc~ter in MACS setup of
synchror-iz3tion.
Tirn.,:; 6 D 0 U ,,.._,-m b"; ad] .~~:te;:~ ;:-;:~o-; :'.ln'· ~-~:·yy· 1y.,r ::.~:·:~, ;;:'.' ·- :::. ·_!",··:\::::J --:~J ·nt.::r lbe~ sure 'lo keep
thie ~;ec:m f<on> ...:i:!e·), !'A-~·.J adj·Jst .~iC.:f. (·:~::.::.....:ic ;;:·,:.~:. ·~'.::· ~nir: . .iic, .sc- ,::;:: tz.) n::set time
cou:-.tcr c.f s:~ii·:: t-.1odu\c·. :me~ .-.~.s!cr<. UT•;n.-~·; LilT:<.'. <r.- :>::.::. ;!~G(id'~' .:; in :..1nl-~ of second and
r.·i:iiis;::.:.:...::-,J, i:: L..:Js~~ . ::~--::;~~("·, :_:,oE· r.Kh.h .. l~; !,";;.·\~~·;,;-,~-. :-;;~> ... : ~ ·;·, __., \-lihici·r ,_:cwnbines time
abovt rninute and transmit ;_o ~ecv'ei: i'v;,c-·i~·ing i._Jn·,,,·JF~>:"o"o~::. ;-.,(to;·\ sx;~)\
37
the time of seNer direcl!y, SOE is the h.1T1e ccmbine·"-~ by DPU, ar-::..1 the time when SOE
occurs, while. 01 makes records once per .secc.ncl IJ'l using :~:erv&r trne, this has caused
the error within second, which is normal and can be expiained dearly.
b. SOE and D! t!:ne· devlation ts mon:> th8t: on€-, s::.)r.:or1d but \ess thr;n 10 minutes, this is
norr~w!!y due to wrong se'~q'· .::;f ·~·h.,- soft ·i;~·,·:e :,ynchroniza.tion and
hard timf: synchronizaticn ore qc:t u:·>if:HcL :::;nr-: th('"' ')!'H\··'ous t:mc~ ~;y'nchronization setup
df.H;·::xi;:n1o:;. C)efc--.u!t pf:HT;f1'1t;;teis ,·y:· ~:;.:.~\E ·I":~·<·· a,<n n'::.~ u~-d·,k;C:. ~t is nece-ssary to
modify and unify mat·:~nH~.. \:\i:·r:::·.··~ !J~;·d Lir' .,::~ ::: ::-iir.n -:; ,,\,;j~(ab!.::, the1 e is time
deviation even when setup is cv;Teci, ri1is is mai1"'ily due to the fact that .SOE module is
of hard time synchronization, ·vv!.ile server tirne has nc. tJrne sync:nroni:zation, and has
time deviatlon vvith l:..·iV!iSi', it is on~y ne.ce;;sarv to :n::.ipE:GL tim~.:; ·~ynchronization circuit
\ and tirne synchronization setup of serv:er
c. Dunng sort ti111e synchrorw~ation, aftoc do·~vnk:~c-din';.l o;:'u. 1t. takes n1ore than i minute
~o1Hait for ailgnrnerE or SOt:, otm':cwi;::e SOt:: module has no un~f!<.sd reset time counter,
caustnp that SOE siqnal t!rne ia)y..;i~ tngqen:;d snYJU!t~neousiv between different
modules are not un1fled
a. Tag name exC;eeds ·12 r~harscters; stmp\il'y labei naming, so that it is within 12 letters;
up static·r, El~9o;·iti-dY!_, in l~e:~e ui' '"lC.> :::enT, ::;f/ L'<";; ::·:~_.Ja>-i ·:~·· \~. ,-e.:lUi(ed f~~, enter syrnb0i table
by dt!:·~~j~}·.
c. Tag descr!ptlon definition has irref;uia:- unsuppoli.Ev.f or syrnbo! r.m avaiiab!e on standard
PC Keybuco·d, it ts (ec;ur:·Hn ..:-;tdeo to i_;.;.:; C!J~·:s"titv::(::\• (.'>' Cl·:ir;~s,~ ct·:(:·radHr cr English letter,
xather. th.:-:m..othet...u.ncomr::.!Ol:\...sp.e.:::laL:::~a.:r~bo.ls.~
d. After 'r:r.d:f~o::~t:'!tiot 1 cl lork: S<nr} E~f.\\1!·-~·J :... ~ ·.nferer:~ ~Y,s!r:fr.err-es, C:·:'1!\I0;1at!on may fall, it is
necess8:ry tc' op9:1 ~ccalh; \he ·;;tz·~ir>n cf ·AT'':d\ ~o~;:c \-·,:J:> be~-~-: :-n:xli':k.: (~ r..:n othH mainframes,
ther: ::::i~ivr;~h;..:·· '-~:,r:: ·.f. ::· :~:·?. : · ·
e. Failure t:.~ ·::.VfJrwrite exist<ng tzg~:: !!" is ;:cc::sS£if"•i \') delele c ·gina! o;~in·;: bek1m compiling
again.
In case t~1•.3:c-::- !s =-~c' prCJ~:lern rne.·1tic):~.~;t' :jbc··.J::.\ :: :.~. :·:~,:·o_xc·" c .• , :Fe :o c;_!l~-~- fil8 lindm project,
after compilation. statistics and ident!h..·.r:nlon u·· ;:::.!! iliterr:··~e.ck:n:e tags ·.Nil~ be c:Oi'iducted once
again.
38
Inspect as per following conditions:
1. Station address repetition: terminal module address. setur. repetition will cause abnormal communication
of repetitive module, sometimes base welding quality may also cause addr•3SS repetition, but the
possibility is very smalL
2. Terminal matcher FM192A-TR Jauit: wi!! cause ur;staf::.;ie c.c;··nm,__:nic:::;"~iOP quality.
3. Failure to set up DP repeater correctly: during regular usage, three .switches of DP repeater should be set
as ON. When condUU1ng bifwcalE.: netwO!"K by u:;!1~9 Uf..: repect.::r \·:1~~-c::;~.. d r-r;;;._;,d '':_}:-- f.::u:.; F.:qutprrh:::nt and
Application" manuai carefully.
4. In case of damage Df the con•munication lnl'en'sce ::1' rnore ~1-ian Ot\;:: 1T'odute or; !:~us. it may cause
abnormal communication of whole se~~tir::n c;f n<-:·1Ncr\{. A.\· ptr:>sen~, '>stk~r !.ilagnosi? rnethod !s no~ 3'/allable
in theory, there is no Option but to pu!! off !THJc!ules that are nol 1·-:;ported ofnine ::me by one, in case
communication of the leftover modules tesu;,.-~f. tc' t)::::- nc•rrt::ii ahEF . :);:~ a c~-;dair: rrodule, it can be
determined that the :nc~(~Li~s fault.:>. Th.s~-l p:ovG ii_ i;--, ~~ :--<-.>A:::·:;.e wa·( !:J~:>srt dhc:.!· mocju!ns back, finally insert
the suspected morJJle. if the comrnunicstion '1s norrna! bs-tore insetiin~1 the morJuie. and becomes bad
after insertion, it car: hn f~~·ov~c.i 1ha~ ;:i'in :·nodd·'3 t.')•·.·-r-;i,.;-''r,.c:tion lftl:>l:~.
5. Section network ;·:cde cenfiguration exceeds the actual Ej·~and;:.mJ of company: 24 rnodules are
recommended for each section. (DP stand2rd specifies 32 physical n8des for each sectlon, but each DPU
occupies one node, eac{1 OF' nspeater nccup;,ss on6 J;odc on thfo iEii't r-iJe and on~;-; noc1e on tne right side,
piUS that the terrnin2i niOtiU~e iS not or l.v,liStBJ-pa:r jj·~61'H !3 Certa;•·~ iJB~!(dG ,:it qtn'C;i"rl.li3T!CL~ lOSS, tnerefore,
24 modules are recvr;·:mr~ndea per sec:t!on a1 pre:;,·::nt).
6. Poor grounding of DF .-a~Gatei·. pc\\.el· ~:upply ;;ruvkh:''{) ::_;tJ~,w~ -~~<:.~:·::Ji:.fii ;:_:-~ fY=-j !·-::q&a!er is connected
with cabinet through !JU'-l i~: is ccx'!tnct bat\vct:~·: ~)IN ral~ anG r.::abinet
p·rofeCHo·n···grO'l'J'ridh:;g·:····::;;i:!·c·~--- . ;:.-ns:.r:·~-, gc·oc rr',.s.'.'y····· 'e'"v'e'''n'······························· 1
damage DP repeater frecuentiy.
7. With DPU as center, DP repeater should bB otac:::-c on the side n! Lu;; :--Je::H· to DPU, L:nhar t!lar far end,
otherwise signal amplifk.:atk.~n <.iTtti signa;- res;:1apir . q fu~~.-..:-::-),-: wiH i~K~ :·edh>>:i
8. Shielding layer of DFJ !ir:e ~heuld en:sw~"'~ good ,::~.:ntscr ·,,v!th .sf·.idkiin~! :;u:.; b,·Jr.. .:Jnd shielding grounding
should be of good ground!!19 (son!etirne:; ;Jw\.be:tic,r, 9t,:J>_~.ldi:'l9 i.-s CiY'tt'_(:,::·,;.d vJii'h .:::.;.:dJi<lei .:.lirect!yj.
9. Whether terminal r·r•r:Cufe:~~ :~re nt r:-!o:;~; cc·ntH:::;: :ts r::::::-r-::·1:::! r:c(~U(0': ·'.r-e i~~s'::''kJ:: ·\:ertienHy, and \~ill go
down under gravitv !1- is r:eo::-s.s-e~.' rc- h'"~':=.:il ~"~"'P!1:::r ~;'<~L'i(--:' 1:•~dr~r ·~':-· '''\'.i~-h-k"! tr:st ,::~ thf~ hotL1!'nmos:t of DIN
rail, and ensure that the Lxtu:·a >tJili not siide up Bnd dovm t'n:.-B!y.
10. Ensure that DP l!ne will not be b0LI!~d ~0getlicr wi·t~; fc-r::!t: c:::ler::trif.it\'
inductive load ooen ckcuit (sucJt ~1:::· re!a~/ ~:oW':.
39
affected.
12. Inspect terminals No. 37 (DP-+-) and No. ~j8 (DF' ---) c:-·f an terrnina: iT:ndu!es, ensure that terminals No. 37
and No. 38 of all term!na~ modules are vacant ;;r.d ar-e cf·;nectf:d 1Nith nG wire. -':-:ornetimes the negative
:terminal of Dl inqulri r:o\Ner surJpiv line wi!l !Je connect::;d on terminal f\lo. ~~13 trv mistake, but it will not
·affect Dl acquisition and is not easily oetectab!~:. ~Y! r.nP. rnorlH-:r-r t\·~.s :·,ppie rA po\.:Jer supply line will be
·coupled with DP ~ine airectiy·, causing rnoclu\E\ off\inG.
13. Do not lead out DP cable from tern1ina!~- ~"~n. ~L- a~ri i"Jn. :_·;s (for ':f.>:i?·':·!~Ji~~ tc· F'I..C l)f rAher m2n.ufadurers),
terminal matching wW be irnpossiiJ!e if·; n._~;ll,.~iuri~ sl.rucLd& ;s formed ln Uiis •,,:,ay. H ;s. 1:ecessary io iead out
from 4-pin socket o~tern-:!na! module, .s~nd ierrn\r;;~·il r-e:3is:.:.;.;r:::~;e i~; ":'N<~i:2.bL:- ;:·,:-~ f·'LC ter~-r1i~1al.
14. FM series bus faulty cc.nr:edion ciiclgfiL•se
1. Random modUle offline:

2. Short offline time duration, smnetimes i sec.clrKl, sor-nr-_:times s:--::\<t;rs1 rrimAes;
3. Random freQL<r?ncy o~ nfni;·\~: .:;c.:unen,'.'.:, -~:;~:· t·'~:-_-'-:::·'..:. :·;-<) ::f·,:.~.~-, ;Jt:).-
times per day, ~.(':r~·-e:h--:·.::::s .·y·c(:. pc·· -~-~"'A~r.:l·.
4. Shake terrnil1f:d :Ttodul,~, cffFr..:: ~>t:J~:-~~~ wtli ~e; ;nyJ:-;:y,,~:.J:
6. When termbai rr,;:.·:Ght-~r is set 'tc "01-r pof,rt;c)n t.y using JP repeater uf ~;1ernens, C;o:nmunication
offline status becomes rnore serious, ancj becomes ~)etter when terminal matcher is set to "OFF"
position.
If- fault phenomena match Ctbove cond!'(ions, -~hen d. can be in:tsi~~-aHy- de~.ennfned C:~S bus faulty
connection.
II. Failure analysis
FM series moouie Bd::.:~fb iE:H"!"f:i(:<:i! uH_~ck:ie t:L"~n!·..;::cik:n II! ~~er!L::. --'<~r ~:)~(:':~nsior. :1c rr:r.;c:.~!e, -~his !<ind of
highly flexible mett1o.-:1 ra::i!its·t2~: scntter-0j c.or:r>·'/~tl~.1r: ~;ur i 1 ·1cr·~.:·-~w·:~ f(Wi~ r:oir.tr:: :·J ~)P cor·:-;:-'iUfl;cation at
the same time, cborac:ter-kstic irqped8nce of cornn~:.,.;:--,i'.::at!o:! bu<? is unstahls.
When signal is transrnitted on bus, tr;ere is ~~-:::;·m v:<3.·ve n:di.s:;~:<J:'; _.,_., . . t:=~'"miN~i. n:rn:;ctec:- '·JI.-'ave is
superposed with s!:~!r18L ;;nd wr: r::?.use '·::r-:::-.··:hc-u'· ·:·J ~~-~;;-::ii:J·~J (:L·~~e ')' f, ;:t:\:-! i:r: f-,.~ducrc.: n·:s effect
of this kind of "c,/E-Tshocl" upol·; s:~slen', \Sb s.tL.:r-t tho ;_..,--;::~::-<t·d c·~ acdii~Q ;;f tenY:lnal matcher to
absorb energy of siqna!, ~~o as to reduce the smol;tu.je c·-f reflectien ''\-'HVS·, terrnir~&! n'atching incfudes two
types of "inactive terrninai rnatching'' and '·acnve te.f!'iJina: matcnir<[{. wh.~;t iJ.!H a/.h)pt on DP bus is active
terminal matchin~l of w1~ch ~he ):-.-,;;r~ofi·: ;~:-. thr-i: t)i_ ~~ ·;-'c~n·;:i! !~?ue~ ~~~tn i~-~~ !''.:;'intain-"::-d ~pproximate!v at 1.1V
during bus disengagement, so as w reciuce the s-h:::;c;- o! inten'ere~·-;~:e ur~~or: cc:rrHriu:·;l:.:aricn.
In accordance wiih til~; \12(~Jirur:s:r~s cf f)F;:C?Fi~';\_: ..:>DF p:·ot~Jc-::;1, chen~~~::~;;::·i:;.ttc [r:--Di3dance of bus should
40
be approximately ·110 onms, tennina! ,!Ylmcner is designed ::15 per this cnaraderlstics requirement, in case
of faulty connection of bus, then characteristic ir·npedanr:::2 c1f b!.:·~ \.dH l:e d:a:1ged, therefore disable
terniinal matcher from matching function. \Nhen \Ju~; faulty conn·.:~c-tion irr,:>::da~1ce js teo lsrge, the added
terminal matcher vvin seriously mismatch, causii!!J oveor rnatch pl::~r:c:;··r~or:.::-:r:, thus, .ex.ter!orly adding of
terminal matcher wi!i instead cause dt:ci!ne of cr;:11rnunirat~sn qual:t~/· Th!s rher~orne.:\on will make people
to feel that termina: rT;atcher· goes ·wrong, and f,~!se d~HePT:inati~}t., ;_niH b1~ .~.aused <38Si\).·.
There are numerous reasons cs~sing .,:aul~y c:.._;r;nBC!;o~·; ··A bc.\S.

follows:
1. lnstallatior1 firrnn.ss:..~ :s iT!.:.t·.:ie::,JLate.
2. Contact looseness !s caused due to nwr:~::~,.~~(';·~~ vH;rat!on
(
Special attentton s!KL:ld ::~r:~ p;:::,;d ;·u qn:,-~~ :3 . .:l·. ;:.,re-;E;I-:, r:<;::t· n 1:.i:.~h·,·:;·:in~:.3 t:"'e ~_,.. ,de:· shemicat application
circumstances, and attention should be fJC)\d tC~ :.~1e f~=tct ~i-:;:::-,t !ong-tsrrr, enrrosio:• :·'n;)y cause oxidation of
terminal module cu:nectton conl.ad ar:d f~Jull)/ Ci ;·•:1:-:::~.t:Ot"! .-:/ t.-L:t-,_
Ill. Failure diagnosis method:

1. Firstly lt !s ;lecessary tu kler:ilfy modulS' c_,:;c: ·.:.,s:) vJ:'lG!i: :~~;Aty C01'li'iBC"don ~;t;:r~~' :t :$ r;ossible to
identify nn;j find out tht~ specific ;r~c.:.L.!-:3 t/:.sithn '·A'ht::-(: f.::.J:: ;.;ta:·-J.t,, thr-:)ugh o\'f\i:":e records of
module an.:! \i-!~;~ng ;;i·T~n:;Et'!'!::-:-·~1 pl3t·.
2. Elimina~e 'h!~!t csr· (:()~Uil'!n. It \s n.:;c-r::~;.;P:\j t:: stc-;: CCJ~;,-'li,!r';icat!op (!Ur~n;: F.:!i01in.:3tion of fault, if
possible, acp!y shu!(!0'/\'0_ tc etimin.3te ;.:BL~It. if it is i:noos~ihiR tD shut ::bwn c·-orr.p!ete.!y, !tis a !lowed
to· elim:n&i·r; f·?.-.:1! .:J.Y t~...r···· ..i.·'q r:·!'"" :·:·:~::;,~u.te p-:::.;,:;;_ · ::y C!":·i;_·(~"r. ~'·~.::··::- 1:·:: ~1 >::·:.:,:,!:: ,·.::,Jgree 0'1: risks,
determined as per the actua! siiuatio;..;::::, ·:Yi 'iiekl.
3. Turn off puwe! cf 0ntjr9 c.J;u·~·)r, vf rnoduie, rn&a.stxe r·c:s~s~~ancs J3!Ue bet\<veen termfna! module
································································ · · -· 'DP+/DP;;:. inc::rrrlng---fe-edc:· . .n:·K1't?.rrni;~s}-:-;,G·:.::,.:.:\:"'3:?-i":~::->r£::)p(~'::t~f::iy-·,·:y-e$i·r-t(~J--. :·+:. ;---:;sistc\'\Ce--:enge-of
multimeter, th3 re3istancs ;;j·,.._:,..tiJ bb k~s:l :i'-2,:.:\·~ .J ·:.'1'\l::S \IC·.T:·.:.d)}' (~: l~._.:re :r!;.:i 7.flE: .:nuiLtTi6~dl used
is eligible), !f !'r..::~~::-t;;n.:::E: !~. ~<-J.i';_;';':.'t 1.:·\ar' ~~ ~<-.:-:~::;. i': i1cf~;8t!;::~: ti~at ''"!i',t"!Q :s r;ot mtiab~c.
( 4. Measu:e i'' ~-2!T Y!lf! re:~lf>tanc::': \'r..t~<~:=; :::-:::'~:.fe":."\ ':·.~~!-:.l-l[lP. ;~1:.-.)~'... 'r·,~~ f~_,e:3G: ::~:-.··j '2.7;'33 o'f ~1-.P.- r~ext
terminai r.;ctju/f.c connc;ded ;n s9:-i£t~, o:- n:e:;J_~;·._:;·e th<:: re::..::; ··y-:,:;e ';::.JJe. ;,v. ~h-,·~:·-"':~; tw!Yiina.f ;:?/-38 of
previous !.r;tr:~i!~o:~i -:·(';o<J:)E .~r,,.~ -:1.2.=;.1 ~.s:·.1 ... :;,:; :;c-:h:iEo .:c.; ,:::3 L~: Jerur:·J·! __-:,; i~·;£~:lt3r coniJection
between two tsrr~linai rr..Jc.LJ!e-::. a;c .-~~:;ar.;:,e
5. Measure;.-, s0qUG!:Cb rhc ;.::.:.;i:;.-~;_~f!!. X: 0~ :JF" r:,c:~:;,~,_~:~ior, \f·k-3, ~!l'f(! i>=--~~:;:·n:;·:e \.Vl":ecnecce-r;nection is
reliablE. by n·~s.<J~;t.:: i;·;y ~~~6 r,:·.')i.st~n,:;e:.: 2.:~-,t~v·;.,:_:.·;·~ :J:.·~p·_.i! l~.,:!Li; ,s; :.:l.: -.,:; ,,·,p~:· ~~.: ';';~,; !&,_
6. By adop~lr:~ me8'3!..t,.er;;~r~ r:f ··J~c:;::~nr.\-' :·e·· 1Pl em f)f:!' !';IY::r,::'..'i: 0 Gii'i~vl !i'~;;: ::~r·d p-.easurernent of
waveform of DP iine with osciBograph, ·;·:'3u!t point CDii b·:; de:cerrr.ined qL.dcJdy, i:lut special tools and
specia! kncvri,;::;~l:; .Jr:;, .-~-<1 dra~~ ~~}f ~:.;,v.~ ,:: '''.. :.:. ,-:w;/:\'t::··; :·k-: , c ,:i .. ·~' :.,_::: ,-,,=.'~ ::;;v:Jb;.Ue_
Items to be notice:!:
41
Power..off fauit eHrninatlon tequffes custom<ar.>S. e-or~s-en~. ar;J a~·.i£1o.;ucrte sai:H"i':f' ,.;;·casures should be
implemented.
Rather than believe your eyes and haru::j fee!ing in a hurry, it is required to make measurement,
';sometimes a line thai see!llS to i·;ave beet·~ cor,r,et.A..::o ni~._;e;y and ,:_:or~ r:ot oe puhed off (JY hand is actually
; of faulty connection.
IV. Fault elimination method:
If possible, dismanHe terrr:inol :nodule, ;;;t,::'
serious oxidatior., ~1r\nd ~'·:rfa:;;:;:, oxide r:n·.:~ti::.n '.~":?~q') ":·th~:· ~tX:;'·~ (\li':.'r:-s .:r~: ~·r;,-,t;:;.·ct 1 -::';s-istq~\:~·H after
drying of alcohol, If :esistance is tess than .?. ch~Tis <:::nd then cc::n'cinu:::: uE:.age. Otherv.;ise rep;ace terminal
module.
If above conditions mf. ;-rc;- a\-E:q2f.;!e !:·: -:ie!cl, q:·inci ::·tT r.>::: n::idi.zr::·:·J ~::urfr~ce 1
.~;y::;l_- :x~ corrtr-!d p(J!nt by
repetitive plug !n/out, nonY~anv probl·er:·13 can ~)c. ,;);::.~-.~\?,J qu;c!dy ~n th;s vJa~...
In case of oxtdatlon of wire surface. rerrtCfVE: t'-le oxidized pu!! line ~~1ut ~~nd connect again.
Sometimes a certain section of wire i3 disconrH?:ctec'-, sornet!rn.ss taps over tog{;;\:he:·, sornetimes it is of
open circuit, ir! ca~;,:; ~t i[· ~:Tpo~ni\-:\;:_' t:.· c\~:. ::c. ·Jn>·~::· .. ·,' ·.-_!·d·· .:::-.:· -·,,,_, ,./1~~- :r; ··t. ::, /<.'t~(j ai v. . !rc;, it is
necessary to rep!a~~·:· ·,.,.i:·~:. :·.lc/;u~~ DF ·.XJ!''T::·~·_>;::c::~jr:q (ir.'") :- 3~; :_~'.·:--· .r.: --:--hcL :;:..:[;,---;.~ti:: :~:~;·:.l:·t!'T>lts, ::~~d it is
preferred not tc be replscsd ~vi~h Jihel· ':·:dCF::::;.
Fasten the hold1i'1;;; screw on top/hoFom of eB:-;!r column of te~.-mfn21 modules. ·:~o n-s to prev.9nt it from
getting loose age::,·: (:;~t~y,· Hib:"a~;,-y.
Not only DP bus but also 24\J power suppiy ~s 'D {su1:;r c;·_,n;lectinn. :t (;-:; po.ssibie to determine
whether connec~ic.:· is n8rrna: th:Gugh !T~t:-asu;,';!rr..:;:,~ ci \/:Jli.2.ye .~-;~ j;_,rry:hais :,:;9--~c:~J .')i..l tcrrntnui rnociu!e.
42
11
.. PLN (Persero) Pusat
~IN/RING
f'l'dJIJ
PLN Doc.No. j
HOISTING CRANE
OPERATION MANUAL
0 Issue for Review
•
ll' CONSORTIUM
~
Consultant :
KETIRA ENGINEERING
CONSULTANT
HANDAN SHIDONG
ELECTRIC & CEMENT
/~
TECHNIC CO., LTD IIIJ!O s r

Checked 2xlOMW
-. -. -. ·.
-_i
\
\
,j '
~-
!,
'.
'
·. -. '· -.
-, :{jjf[1lfffl? ....... ;...................................................................................... 1
=' ;fiji :!& ................................................................................................. ;1
- , I 11: ffii: :J'll[ •••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••••• 2
[g ' ¥J ~ffftiE .......... ····· ............................................................................... 2
1.1fi::H.lii ~ ¥J ........................................................................................... 2
2.lt$J~p ;J,$ ................................................................................... 2
3 .;1E1f;tfL#;J ··························································································· 2
4. ~t.ec i!it1i- ··························································································· 2

1i. ' "11: ~ .......••........•.•......•.••...........•.........••..•.......•..•.•........•..•................. 6
;\, tit $ ...................................................................................... ~ ......... 12
-t;' 15Effl ~t tp ............................................................................................ 12
J\., ~ti9Ji!i~l±lr il-~iiE ........................................................................ 14

'\ · n, ~m• ................................................................................................ 15

Om Electrical

Încărcat de

Informații document

Drepturi de autor

Formate disponibile

Partajați acest document

Partajați sau inserați document

Opțiuni de partajare

Vi se pare util acest document?

Este necorespunzător acest conținut?

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

Om Electrical

Încărcat de

Drepturi de autor:

Formate disponibile

.

I PLN (Persero) Pusat

leg MODERN BOUSTEAD MAXITHERM

KETIRA ENGINEERING HANDAN SHIDONG /~

Signature Dated Project: Stage:

MODERN BOUSTEAD MAXITHERM

KETIRA ENGINEERING HANDAN SIDDONG

2. Global Satellite Synchroclok.

3. Hollias MACS Software.

5. Hollias MACS Crane.

MODERN BOUSTEAD MAXITHERM

KETIRA ENGINEERING HANDAN SIDDONG

Signature Dated Project: Stage:

Document NO: BlO-Pll-004214

Drawing: Lijun Pan 2010-05-18

Verification: Yunxia, Zhu 2010-05-18

The Document Provides:

HOLLYSYS CO., LTD all rights

NO. Edition Rev. Information Drawed Date Verification Authorization

HOLLYSYS CO. , LTD all rights reserved I

1 BHE1004164W-KC01-001 Drawing List 1 A

2 BHE1004164W-KC01-002 Design Description 1 A

3 BHE1004164W-KC01-003 Equipment table 1 A

4 BHE1004164W-KC01-004 Layout for Power Distribution Cabinet 2 A

5 BHE1004164W-KC01-005 Layout for the second door 1 A

6 BHE1004164W-KC01-006 Inside Wiring diagram 1 A

7 BHE1004164W-KC01-007 Power distribution drawing 1 A

8 BHE1004164W-KC01-008 Marking table of Circuit Breaker 1 A

9 BHE1004164W-KC01-009 KM1 Schematic Diagram 1 A

)iHangZhou Hollysys Automation CO .. LTD INDONESIA~P,0A DCS System _j Detail Desgi

The Main Auxiliary Equipment And Materials

NO. NAME S ecification And Model Quantity Unit Remarks 5

88 LABEL, PV1: UPS POWER

==.::::::=== ~~ 7 module SM934 1

: ••••••••• 0 •••••••• •••

~-~ ~e ' _" lonOge

1 HD1,HD2 Indicator Lamn AD16-22D/r31 2

I bHangZhouHollysysAulomationCO., LTD INDONESIA~PU1\DCS System JDetail Desgin

l:IHangZhou Hollysys Automation CO., LTD Detail Desgin

" L-""'" -~ KB 1 AUXILIARY POWER Cimi< Bco•kec

KC~ KC~ KC~ K, KC~ KC~ KC,

I JfHangZhou HollysysAutomation CO., LTD INDONESIA~ DCS System !net

AUXILIARY POWER HD2

c;;::o "',-_,~ ;~;"

Project Name !-P~ f',4pc,.{tjj({j I ProjectNo./ it/-Z...fool.f(tyw IProductName+Version .MAC.SV S.2,~fSfl W

o The Project Compiles Compiling without error. D?!Oualified 0Unqualified

o The length of tag name no more than 12 char'acters.

o Unused channel for the spare 1/0s (With detailed description)

o Each 1/ 0 Station's tag quantity no more than. 5000.

o The 1/ 0 Station load trends is available. ! [Q6ualified 0Unqualified

o Module position in system status graphic of H,MI comply with the

D Each I/OS14 SOE Modules:

DDPU o The configuration of the physical points in Codesys and HMI

~ 2 ji'[ *' 4 ji'[ v--_)

o MACSV System must has the main.hsg file. [YfQualified 0Unqualified

DOther items ~Qualified 0Unqualified

7, The QC department check the Item D in ex-works test. I

'2-- Gl..ec-k-( r<..e.ci,_e_ck ~ 4 ' • U -~

r- M W'';)r Lv=-- ..rr..._re- ~ ~~

MODERN BOUSTEAD MAXITHERM

KETIRA ENGINEERING HANDAN SHIDONG

Si nature Dated Project : Stage:

Compiler: Yue Haodong

Changsha Huaneng Automatic Control Group